JP7736040B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a displacement means and a relative movement means that is configured to be able to move relative to the displacement means (Patent Document 1) .

JP 2016-116782 A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of optimizing the movement of the relative movement means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can optimize the movement of relative movement means .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising a gaming board, displacement means configured to be displaceable , relative movement means configured to be capable of relative movement with respect to the displacement means, drive means configured to be able to generate a drive force, and support means, wherein a first portion of the relative movement means is engaged with the displacement means, a predetermined portion of a second portion of the relative movement means is supported by the support means , the support means is fixed in position relative to the gaming board, and the relative movement means rotates around the predetermined portion when displacing the displacement means, The gaming machine is configured such that the displacement means can be displaced through a first section and a second section , and when the displacement means is displaced through the first section, the direction of a straight line connecting a first position and a second position, to which a specific section different from the predetermined section of the second part is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position , to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific section is displaced, is different from the direction of a straight line connecting a fourth position and a first ... The device is configured to be able to configure a first state in which the displacement means is positioned in the first section and the specific section is positioned at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is positioned in the second section and the specific section is positioned at the fourth position, at least by the driving force, and is configured to be able to change from the first state to the second state as a game situation, at least a predetermined situation and a specific situation different from the predetermined situation, and is provided with a predetermined presentation surface that can configure at least a predetermined pattern that can be seen in the predetermined situation where the driving force is generated and a specific pattern that can be seen in the specific situation where the driving force is not generated as much as in the predetermined situation, and is configured to be able to make a player aware that a predetermined value can be given to the player in a situation where the predetermined presentation surface is in the predetermined pattern, and is configured to be able to make a player aware that a specific value different from the predetermined value can be given to the player in a situation where the predetermined presentation surface is in the specific pattern .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the movement of the relative movement means can be made suitable .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collecting gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collecting gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device. An oblique view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning type for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the time-dependent changes in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each type of jackpot. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in the performance standby state. FIG. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member caused by rotational displacement of a rotating member; 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle with rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 10A and 10B are front views of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 10A to 10C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 10A and 10B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 10A and 10B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 10A and 10B are front views of an outer rotating member and an intermediate arm member. 10A and 10B are front views of an outer rotating member and an intermediate arm member. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in time series. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. 10A to 10D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 10A to 10D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 10A to 10D are front perspective views of the inner member of the dispensing device. FIG. 2 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member, and the lower member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. 10A and 10B are side views of the slide displacement member and the ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 2 is a front view of a first operating unit. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of a first operating unit. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 10A and 10B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. 10A and 10B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first decorative rotation member and a second decorative rotation member. 10A and 10B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, rectangular box portion, and protruding decorative portion. 10A and 10B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, rectangular box portion, and protruding decorative portion. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the guide slots, rectangular box portion, and protruding decorative portion. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 10 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. FIG. 10 is a front view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. FIG. 10 is a front view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 2B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of the metal rod and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 10 is a front schematic view of a third operating unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 1A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 10 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device of the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. 10A and 10B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the variable rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, showing the downstream configuration of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along the CXIa-CXIa line in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along the CXIb-CXIb line in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. 17 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device of the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a dispensing device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 19 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide slots and the rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide slots and the rotating member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device provided in the area below the front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. 10A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen in the first control example, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of the actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a reach is achieved during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the execution of a normal pattern change during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the special variation effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted during the special variation effect executed while the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device has been acquired in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example has not been acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example; (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example; (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example; and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (the normal fluctuation period); (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (the normal fluctuation period); (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the first special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special pattern change is executed during the "Super Chance Mode" displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the presentation when a variation pattern in which a reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during special jackpot play in the first control example. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a jackpot game in the first control example. 10A and 10B are timing charts showing the flow of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for special chart 1 jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for special chart 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for special rate and time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the continuous warning execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation effect selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the time-saving state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing the schematic contents of the variable probability state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot termination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a flowchart showing the special diagram 1 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on the pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main pattern image layer in the second control example is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer is set to on. (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the secondary pattern pre-stored in the character memory area in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the variable main pattern in the second control example. A timing chart schematically showing the flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern, sub-pattern) in the second control example. (a) is a timing chart that schematically shows the flow of the fluctuation pattern used in the presentation example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart that schematically shows the flow of the normal presentation in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart that schematically shows the flow of the reach line preview presentation in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart that schematically shows the flow of the preview presentation in the second control example in which the direction of fluctuation of the sub-pattern is different from normal. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a second rear image change command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in a modified example of the second control example and the display screen, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure near the specific winning port of the variable winning device on the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the specific winning port in the third control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that enters a specific winning port in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. This is a flowchart showing the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a V round process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the update process during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the two tables for the special chart 2 jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation effect selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the special state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot termination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a fall-related process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A figure showing an example of a display presentation in the second control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figures 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Figure 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Furthermore, the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1 will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the lower side as the lower (bottom) side, the right side as the right (right) side, and the left side as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, Figure 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-to-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 2), which has numerous nails and winning slots 63, 64, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15. The side where the hinges 19 are installed serves as the opening and closing axis, allowing the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 to be opened and closed toward the front. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specific operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which juts out toward the front and is roughly box-shaped with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is sloped downward to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, to change the stage of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or to change the content of the super reach presentation.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting devices such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their illumination by lighting up or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during gameplay. The periphery of the window 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps, such as jackpot lamps. When a jackpot is hit or a reach is reached, the built-in LEDs light up or flash, causing each illumination unit 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is just one step away from a jackpot. Additionally, the upper left corner of the front frame 14, as viewed from the front (see Figure 1), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. To create a more dazzling effect, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the component configuration common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on its left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is thus shot toward the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of ball-guiding nails (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning slot 63, a first winning slot 64, a second winning slot 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made from a light-transmitting resin material, allowing the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from its front side. The general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may also be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield the various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side outside the center frame 86, making them invisible to the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be explained below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13. An inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate and shaped like an arc, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area in front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (the area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a certain amount of force hits the return rubber 69, reducing its momentum and bouncing back toward the center.

First symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with multiple LEDs and a 7-segment display, which serve as light-emitting means, are located in the lower left corner of the play area when viewed from the front (lower left corner of Figure 2). The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information in response to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and primarily display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning slot 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball has entered the second winning slot 140, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether the mode is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, and also use a 7-segment display to display the number of rounds during a jackpot or an error. The multiple LEDs are configured so that each LED emits a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated using a small number of LEDs by combining different light colors.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 or the second prize slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The jackpot types that can be determined here include a 15R probability jackpot, a 4R probability jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not by displaying the stopped symbols after the variation has ended, but also display a symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R probability jackpot" is a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds, and a "4R probability jackpot" is a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 4 rounds. Furthermore, a "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum of 4 rounds, and enters a time-saving state for a specified number of variations (e.g., 100 variations).

The term "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after a jackpot, i.e., during a probability fluctuation (probability change). In other words, it refers to a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (probability change) includes a game state in which the jackpot probability increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), the probability of a hit for the second symbol described below increases, and the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, i.e., a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than during a probability change. The "time-saving state" within the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of a hit for the second symbol increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 140. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in normal mode, it is in a gaming state that is neither in a special mode nor in a time-saving mode (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that a gaming ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 (described later) during the first round of a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuations. Note that if it is not determined that a gaming ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the probability of winning the second symbol or during the time-saving mode, not only does the probability of winning increase, but the time for which the electric device 140a (electric device) attached to the second winning slot 140 is open is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 140a is in the open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win into the second winning slot 140 than when the electric device 140a is in the closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability of winning or during the time-saving mode, it is easier for the ball to win into the second winning slot 140, and the number of jackpot draws can be increased.

In addition, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, rather than changing the opening time of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric device 140a opens per hit may be increased compared to normal mode. Also, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, but at least one of the opening time of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 and the number of times the electric device 140a opens per hit may be changed. Also, during a probability variation or time-saving mode, the opening time of the electric device 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 or the number of times the electric device 140a opens per hit may not be changed, but only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal mode.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning slots 63, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area. The variable display device unit 80 is equipped with a third pattern display device 81, which is comprised of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a changing third pattern in synchronization with the changing display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) that is comprised of an LED that displays a changing second pattern in response to a ball passing through the through gate 67. A center frame 86 is also provided in the variable display device unit 80, surrounding the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 (described later), and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. In other words, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display, for example, 9 inches in size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 4), thereby displaying, for example, three symbol rows: top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is made up of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, allowing the third symbols to be variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. While the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), the third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment displays decorative images in accordance with the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may also be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the winning lottery is a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol has been displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning slot 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and display is set to be shorter during a special rate or time-limited play than during normal play. As a result, the second symbol changes and displays for a shorter period of time during special rate and time-limited play, allowing for more winning draws than normal play. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving players more opportunities for the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 to be open. Therefore, during special rate and time-limited play, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 140.

Note that if conditions are created that make it easier for a ball to enter the second winning slot 140 during a probability variation or time-limited play by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens per win, or by other methods during a probability variation or time-limited play, the time it takes for the second symbol to change and display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change and display is set shorter during a probability variation or time-limited play than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens per win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball fired onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a drawing for a winning second symbol is held. After the drawing, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the drawing results in a winning result, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display, and if the drawing results in a losing result, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.

Balls can be held for a maximum of four passes through the through gate 67, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, the maximum number of held balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the second symbol fluctuation display may be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the second symbol display device, as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a portion of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol reserve lamp may be lit by a portion of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for a ball passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). Furthermore, the number of installed through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be, for example, one. Furthermore, the installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol reserve lamp may not be illuminated.

A first winning slot 64, into which a ball can enter, is located below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning slot 64, a first winning slot switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When this first winning slot switch turns on, a jackpot drawing is conducted by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and a display corresponding to the drawing result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

Meanwhile, below the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning opening 140 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When this second winning opening switch turns on, a jackpot drawing is conducted by the main control device 110 (see Figure 4), and a display corresponding to the drawing result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Furthermore, each of the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140 is also a winning slot from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 140. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 may be different; for example, three prize balls may be paid out when a ball enters the first winning slot 64, and five prize balls may be paid out when a ball enters the second winning slot 140.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win through the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed in a variable display in response to the ball passing through the through gate 67, and a "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win through the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the probability variation and time-limited play, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a enters the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time-limited play, the time that the electric device 140a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the probability variation and time-limited play, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the state is low probability or high probability. However, the probability of a 15R probability jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the same electric device as the second winning slot 140, and is always in a state where a ball can enter.

As a result, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot 140 is often closed, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning slot 64, which has no electric device, by firing the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (a so-called "left shot"), thereby increasing the chances of winning the jackpot by winning at the first winning slot 64.

On the other hand, during the probability bonus or time-saving mode, passing the ball through the through gate 67 tends to open the electric device 140a attached to the second winning slot 140, making it easier to win at the second winning slot 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot 140, resulting in a 15R probability bonus jackpot.

In addition, because the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a symmetrical game board 13 configuration, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" or for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit." Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is fired between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is fired.

A variable winning device 65 (see Figure 2) is disposed below the first winning opening 64, with a specific winning opening 65a located approximately in its center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery resulting from a winning entry into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is illuminated to display the jackpot stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The game state then transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a closes after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an added gaming value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-described configuration. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area. When the LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. While the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a triggers the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to open for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, creating a special game state. Furthermore, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one; one or more (e.g., three) may be provided. Furthermore, the placement location is not limited to the lower right or lower left of the first winning opening 64, but may also be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, an attachment space K1 is provided for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with outlets 71. Balls that flow down the game area but do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, or 140 are guided through the outlets 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of outlets 71 are arranged on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

The game board 13 is fitted with numerous nails to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and is also equipped with various components (game parts) such as windmills (not shown).

As shown in Figure 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with an MPU (a single-chip microcomputer) that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and other necessary components.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using the specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The main control unit 110 uses the MPU 201 to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second symbol display device.

In addition, to instruct sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via the data transmission/reception circuit, but these commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area that stores the contents of MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses for control programs executed by MPU 201, and a work area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. Furthermore, RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from power supply unit 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during startup processing (not shown) when power is turned on. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing method.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and solenoids 209, including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a to the front side around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, which include a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, as well as a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply unit 115.The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 211, as well as a work area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lights on and off from the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, such as variable effects (variable display) and preview effects, performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. The other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The sound and lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern commands, stop type commands, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode using commands (display variation pattern commands, display stop type commands, etc.). The sound and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame buttons 22, and when the player operates the frame buttons 22, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the presentation content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a back image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the back image refers to the image displayed behind the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the commands sent from the sound and lamp control device 113.

The voice and lamp control device 113 also receives commands (display commands) from the display control device 114 that indicate the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display commands received from the display control device 114, the voice and lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern variable presentation and other aspects of the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the audio lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display content of the third pattern display device 81. The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby coordinating the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 equipped with a RAM erase switch 122 (see Figure 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as needed to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control unit 110 to clear backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see Figure 3) is pressed. When the main control unit 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control unit 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. Figure 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and Figures 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. Figure 6(a) shows the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed to restrict the flow of balls into the specific winning opening 65a, while Figure 6(b) shows the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, in which the opening/closing plate 65b is open to allow the flow of balls into the specific winning opening 65a. Note that Figure 2 will be referenced as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 5 and 6.

The variable winning device 65 is configured so that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see Figure 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b slopes downward toward the back side so that it can receive balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b and guide them to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow downward. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the areas to the left and right of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening/closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design element 141 (see Figure 2) that covers the front of the electric accessory 140a is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) towards the rear side). This reduces the extent to which a ball bouncing near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b will collide with the front design element 141 and lose momentum. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design element 141 may be located either front or rear. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is positioned at the front and lower side, ensuring a larger space on the opening/closing plate 65b side. Furthermore, by shaping the front design element 141 so that its width narrows toward the bottom at the left and right ends, it becomes easier to ensure space between the front design element 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided almost without exception to the specific winning opening 65a. In front of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow downward surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at an upper and lower position that can guide balls into the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that balls rolling outward to the left and right by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. Guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 to reduce the flow resistance of balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and its front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that shifts rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, allowing the ball to be guided with little resistance to the inclined flow-down surface 163a1. Therefore, if the opening/closing plate 65b begins to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned to the left or right of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is obstructed can be reduced.

In other words, the possibility of malfunctions such as poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being pushed backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, thereby unintentionally opening the opening/closing plate 65b, can be reduced.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) into the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening/closing plate 65b, so regardless of the left or right position of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, almost all balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are positioned to the left or right outside, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are designed to prevent the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a from stagnating, thereby maintaining the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In addition, instead of changing the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests when in the open state is formed flat (see Figure 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then is guided left and right by the shape of the receiving member 163 and into the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in a parallel motion, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped like the lower surface 163a, which has a lateral slope and creates a lateral flow of the rolling balls, the likelihood of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b is reduced, preventing unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivoting tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, improving the reproducibility of the opening/closing plate 65b's position. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the position of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by bearing the load at the time of abutment over the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

Furthermore, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the underside of the abutment surface 163a3. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed in a surface shape that is approximately parallel to the opposing opening/closing plate 65b with a small gap between them. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the downward flow of the ball is positioned in front of the abutment surface 163a3, and is designed so that the ball does not collide with the abutment surface 163a3. However, for example, if the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that abuts against the abutment surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 may be configured to abut against the opening/closing plate 65b even when the abutment surface portion 163a3 is in its normal shape. In this case, since the abutment surface portion 163a3 abuts against the opening/closing plate 65b even when its shape is normal, there is the disadvantage that loads may easily accumulate. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the abutment surface portion 163a3 receives when it abuts against the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the shape of the front design member 141 described above can be used to push game balls into the opening/closing plate 65b as they are being received.

In other words, if a ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 while being received (for example, while it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by its curved shape and flow down into the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent balls that have missed the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility into the third flow path component 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, balls do not land on the opening/closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed is limited to the outside left and right of the electric device 140a.

Accordingly, with the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the placement of balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outside of the electric device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric device 140a at positions on the left and right inside of the left and right ends of the electric device 140a.

Next, we will explain the configuration downstream of the specific winning opening 65a (the side where balls flow after passing through the specific winning opening 65a). Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, and variable winning device 65.

As shown in Figure 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at a rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see Figure 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-like portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-like portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing balls to the ball discharge channel is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 comprises a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and multiple third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and left from a position behind the first winning opening 64, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and right from a position behind the second winning opening 140. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Thus, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer sides by the collecting gutter 150. This allows space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to install the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, which will be described later.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. Note that Figures 9 and 10 only show the lower half of the base plate 60, omitting the illustration of other parts, and omitting the illustration of other components attached to the base plate 60, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 attached to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fastening of the variable winning device 65, collecting gutter 150, and sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through-hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through-hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The sorting device 300 has insertion holes 311 fastened to the variable winning device 65 at the top, and insertion holes 331 fastened to the collecting trough 150 at the left and right. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and collecting trough 150, which are fixed directly to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning opening 65a, and the sorting device 300 forms a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be provided below.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 comprises a fixed member 161 fixed to the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163 and fastened to the receiving member 163, and acting as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163 and fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made from a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 has a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on its outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin-walled portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame, and a through-hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through-hole of the base plate 60.

On the inside of the boundary portion 161a, there is formed a specific winning opening 65a, and a pair of left and right extension support plates 161b, each roughly T-shaped and equipped with a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated portion.

Extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of sorting device 300, which will be described later. Protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of extended support plate 161b, protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of extended support plate 161b, and protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of boundary portion 161a all function as parts that support sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which protrudes symmetrically from the inside of the boundary 161a below the center of the specific winning opening 65a, functions to abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guide the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws that are threaded into the front design member 162 are located on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h with female threads for inserting fastening screws that are threaded into the receiving member 163 are located on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for receiving the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position between the left and right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is located at the connection (see Figure 9) between the through hole formed in the base plate 60 for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a.

The front design element 162 is made from a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls can flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design element 162 and the front side of the fixed element 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 162a, which are arranged in positions that align with the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads formed so that fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g can be threaded in, and a plurality of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend toward the rear side and cover the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c prevent balls flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened member 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened member 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, the path along which the balls flow can be restricted. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that extend near the left and right edges of specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward outward to the left and right, balls that land on extensions 162b can be prevented from flowing toward specific winning opening 65a. That is, a ball that landed on extension 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of extension 162b, and then flows down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two portions on the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downward inward to the left and right, the flow path of the balls that flow on extension portion 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls that flow on extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are placed compared to the number of balls (increasing the ball placement density), and to ensure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

Note that the front design element 162 shown in Figure 11 is plain and has good visibility on the back side, but it does not have to be plain. For example, the front side of the front design element 162 could be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves could be carved into the front design element 162 with a geometric pattern, and when light is shone into the grooves, the geometric pattern would emerge and be visible. Furthermore, the front design element 162 could be plain or decorated as described above, and then configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in the shape of a horizontally elongated frame (or box) with an open front side, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, abutment surface portion 163a3, auxiliary abutment surface 163a4, a lower surface portion 163a that forms a flow-down surface inside the frame, a ball passage hole 163b arranged as a through-hole through which balls that have flowed down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c that are positioned to match the fastening portions 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws that are fastened to the fastening portions 161h are inserted from the rear side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left-right center and that have female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are threaded, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e that have female threads into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are threaded.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a lateral inclined surface that slopes downward outward from the lateral center, with the vertex at the lateral center. It is equipped with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step below the lateral outer ends of the lateral inclined surfaces. This allows balls flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of a ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intervening member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a with a light-refractive surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws that are threaded into the fastening portions 163d of the receiving member 163, a light-emitting substrate 164c positioned above the insertion holes 164b and on which LEDs are mounted, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a and having female threads that can receive fastening screws that are threaded into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws that are threaded into the fastening portions 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is positioned so that the surface on which the LEDs are mounted faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state is located directly above the specific winning opening 65a (see Figure 6) when viewed from the front, and directly below the second winning opening 140. Because of this positioning, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily falls within the field of vision of a player who is gazing diagonally downward and rearward at the location where the ball will land in the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, by controlling the LED on the light-emitting board 164c to light up when a ball has entered the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a, the player can easily determine whether or not a ball has entered the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a.

With the above-described configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed together than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened together. Furthermore, since the position of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161, the receiving member 163, and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 includes a lower case portion 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open top and multiple openings for wiring and heat dissipation, and multiple insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws thread into the fastening portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted. An electromagnetic solenoid 165c is housed in the lower case portion 165b. A sliding portion 165d engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger. A rotating portion 165e is rotatably supported on the lower case portion 165b with its rotating tip extending beyond the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides. An upper cover portion 165g is fastened to the lower case portion 165b with fastening screws inserted through multiple insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c, which protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b, fits into and engages with this recess. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d, which forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 comprises an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that fastening screws threaded into the fastened portions 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough; a middle member 330 fastened to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and having a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that fastening screws threaded into the female threaded portions of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough; a substrate 350 housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and having a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side; and the middle member 330. It comprises a state switching device 360 housed in a position between the upper member 310 and configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied; a sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 that slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states; and a lower member 380 disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between it and the middle member 330, and having an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can pass a fastening screw that is threaded into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that forms a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

Balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and then the interior of the lower member 380. Balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and the way they flow down not only provides a visual effect that is pleasing to the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to gaming profits, such as changing the profits that players can earn.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are primarily due to the positioning of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when a ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the positioning of the slide displacement member 370 affects which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally be drawn to the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), and so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus of gaze.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin member made of a light-transmitting resin material and is U-shaped when viewed from above. The upper member 310 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to receive the balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 attached as markers, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube portions 315 formed with through holes through which fastening screws threaded into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening portion 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screws inserted into the middle member 330 can be threaded, and the upper member 310 includes a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side. The upper member 310 is provided with a pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317 arranged side by side and longitudinally elongated in the front-rear direction, protruding downward from the underside of the upper member 310; a pair of inner left and right protrusions 318 arranged between the pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317, protruding downward from the underside of the upper member 310; a pair of outer left and right protrusions 319 arranged on the outer left and right sides of the pair of longitudinally elongated protrusions 317, protruding downward from the underside of the upper member 310; and an accommodating recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

Opening 312 is a passage-like section (tunnel-like section) that receives balls that have passed through ball passage hole 163b of variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it has been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12) in an inclined position. This allows the upper front edge of opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the balls to penetrate inside the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the balls that have passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a component that attracts the player's attention by shining a brilliant light on it from the light-emitting means 351 on the substrate 350, as will be described in more detail below.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the balls take below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is sloped downward as it approaches the front, while the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and located on the left and right inner sides, is sloped downward as it approaches the left and right inner sides. The left and right distance between the second upper surface portions 314b is configured to be longer toward the front, ensuring a clear field of view for the player viewing the balls through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the top surface to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. This makes it easier to prevent the screw head from being visible to the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to fit into the fastening portion 332d, which has a female thread formed on the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail below.

The fastening screw that is threaded into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the threaded portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, even though the fastening portion 316 is positioned on the front side, the screw head is less noticeable to players viewing it from diagonally above. This ensures that the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed together, while preventing the fastening screw from spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that, since there are already two insertion tube portions 315 on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw heads are facing downward and are not very noticeable, omitting them if unnecessary improves the appearance of the sorting device 300. However, the placement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be placed on the left side, or in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down while minimizing any deterioration in the appearance of the sorting device 300; details will be provided below.

The undersides of each pair of long front-rear protrusions 317, inner left-right protrusions 318, and outer left-right protrusions 319 are curved surfaces that descend downward as they move away from the same reference point. These curved surfaces have different shapes for the long front-rear protrusions 317, inner left-right protrusions 318, and outer left-right protrusions 319, and these differences in shape are intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The central member 330 comprises the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (roughly box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (roughly box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 recessed in front of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls connected to the front ends of the first flow path components 334, and a pair of third flow path components 336 recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335.

The central member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated and penetrates the lower base behind the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for balls; a partition plate 338 that is elongated in the front-to-rear direction and separates the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right sections; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude as elongated rectangular protrusions from the underside of the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Unlike the front portion, which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame portion 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is instead configured to mainly support the circuit board 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame portion 332 includes an arrangement through-hole 332a formed vertically at the front end of the center left and right portion and configured to accommodate the sliding displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed as a long through-hole left and right at the lower base and guiding the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, multiple fastened portions 332c having female threads formed so that fastening screws inserted into the lower member 380 can be threaded into them, and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having a female thread at its upper tip that can thread a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310.

The front frame portion 333 has a light-diffusing coating applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a roughly square frame shape when viewed from above, and has insertion holes 333a formed as countersunk holes through which fastening screws can be inserted into the fastening portions 316 of the upper member 310.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each components that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles, etc., as will be described in more detail below.

The open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see Figure 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are separated by a partition plate 338 and are configured as a pair of left and right holes, and are large enough to allow balls to be discharged in at least two ways. In other words, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 located below the discharge holes 337, so the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through-holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370, as will be described in detail below. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted with the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail below.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape, with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for alignment at the bottom end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the inner member 330 to determine left-right positioning, the elongated lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330 to determine front-to-rear positioning, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upward, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of this arrangement, along with the intention behind the arrangement of the light-emitting means 351, will be discussed later.

The state switching device 360 is housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the central member 330 and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted into the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates as the sliding portion 362 slides.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front and rear of the lower surface and has an oval cross section that is elongated in the left-right direction.

The disc portion 361a is configured to support the slide portion 362 from above due to the formation direction of the recessed portion 362a, preventing the slide portion 362 from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom of the inner member 330 without having to adhere the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the posture of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube portion 363a formed in a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the connecting portion of the L-shape and having a through-hole large enough to accommodate the fastened portion 332d of the inner member 330; an upper cylindrical portion 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape and inserted into the through-hole of the protruding portion 362b; and a lower cylindrical portion 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape and inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. Displacement of this rotating portion 363 occurs due to changes in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger slides and displaces, displacing the slide portion 362 in the left-right direction. This displaces the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted into the through-hole of the protruding portion 362b, which in turn displaces the lower cylindrical portion 363c, resulting in displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to slide in the front-to-rear direction between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 at a position between the top and bottom of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. It comprises a thin plate portion 371 that is supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, a pair of upper protrusions 376 that protrude upward from the thin plate portion 371 on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 that is recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion that protrudes upward in the left-to-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and is capable of receiving the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right support holes 371a formed through it in the rear half portion; a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left-right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing between the upper protrusions 376; a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward along the edge of the recessed portion 372; multiple upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions along the left and right edges of the rear half portion; and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end portion and inserted into the elongated guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are designed to slide against the middle member 330 or lower member 380 arranged above and below, and are protrusions designed to reduce the contact area with the middle member 330 and lower member 380 compared to flat contact. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, preventing the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view and is positioned so that it passes through the placement through-hole 332a and extends above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width of the gaps on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thicknesses of the partition plate portion 338 of the inner member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusions 376 are positioned in the left-right inner gaps so as to sandwich the partition plate 338, and are configured so that misalignment in the left-right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate 338. This allows for good guidance of the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-to-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole extending in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to move in the front-to-rear direction.

The protrusion in which the recess 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332, allowing the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 to be easily inserted into the recess 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a is designed to include the entire area within which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, will be placed.

The lower member 380 includes the aforementioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed as a long, thin plate on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382, which allows multiple (four in this embodiment) detection sensors SE1 to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the rest of the frame is closed.

Similar to the through holes formed in the sensor holding frame 389 in the vertical direction, the plate-shaped portion 382 has through holes formed at positions that align with the through holes of the detection sensors SE1. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-to-rear direction at the midpoint between the two inner left and right detection sensors SE1, a pair of protrusions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a support hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 at a position rearward of the protrusion 383. the inner member 330; a pair of guide protrusions 384 protruding in positions that allow the guide protrusions 384 to be inserted therethrough; a pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as long protrusions in the front-to-rear direction at positions both to the left and right of the guide protrusions 384; a long guide slot 386 extending in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above; a curved surface 387 formed on the front side with a curved surface that protrudes rearward; and an insertion hole 388 formed therethrough that allows the insertion of a fastening screw that is threaded into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a width slightly shorter than the width of the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so that the recessed portion 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward-backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the inner member 330. In other words, by fitting the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, the left and right position of the inner member 330 relative to the lower member 380 can be appropriately determined. At the same time, by abutting the back surface of the front frame portion of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at their front ends) with the front surface of the alignment protrusions 339, the front and rear position of the inner member 330 relative to the lower member 380 can be appropriately determined.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path component 336, which is part of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is part of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long in both the left and right directions and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is positioned inside the supported hole 371a.

This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383, thereby improving the durability of the protruding portion 383 compared to, for example, a configuration in which the forward displacement end point is determined at the position where the sliding displacement member 370 collides with the protruding portion 383. As a result, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 even if it is damaged, but rather functions to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is typically designed to have a strength sufficient to allow it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without damage, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed with the expectation that it will be used in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the sliding displacement member 370 will collide after damage to the guide protrusion 384. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), with the strength of the protrusion 383 being sufficient to withstand the remaining period. In this case, the flexibility in selecting the resin material and shape used for the lower member 380 can be improved.

The guide ribs 385 are positioned with a gap width slightly longer than the left-to-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, allowing the thin plate portion 371 to be positioned in the gap. Displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left-to-right inner side of the guide ribs 385. This allows for forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 with minimal left-to-right positional deviation.

The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a width large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370 to pass through. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-to-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the flow of balls below the central member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the flow of balls that enter the outlet 71, but details will be provided later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This prevents the fastening screw from being too visible. The insertion hole 388 is positioned to the left and right of the area where the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged, and on the rear side. This reduces the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will obstruct the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is guided in the front-to-rear direction by multiple parts, namely, the guide ridge 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373, the guide elongated hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, and the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among multiple positions, preventing the load from being applied locally and preventing damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding parts that guide the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by multiple members, at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, at least the pair of upper protrusions 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 are guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the protruding portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are not properly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, it is preferable to minimize misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, which form a continuous part of the ball flow path. However, the sliding displacement member 370 has good displacement, ensuring minimal misalignment.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 relative to the middle member 330 becomes excessive, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is incorrect, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification, indicating that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be incorrect.

This prevents the player from continuing to play while the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are in an improper relative position, thereby reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, we will explain the details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300. Here, we will mainly explain the configuration related to the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration that enters the ball flow path.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

Note that in Figures 15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the sliding displacement member 370 is shown in a state where it is positioned in the front position. First, the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described in detail.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see Figure 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls along the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided into the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided into the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path forming portion 334, the subsequent second flow path forming portion 335, and the subsequent third flow path forming portion 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms a 90-degree angle when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow downward toward the front in the longitudinal direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow downward in a left-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the balls flowing downward through the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the balls to flow downward toward the back in the longitudinal direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation based on the flow direction of the balls flowing downward through the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angle bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the ball's flow velocity increases as it moves downstream. Specifically, while the balls flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerate toward the front, the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-back component, thereby achieving a flow pattern in which the effects of acceleration in the first flow path component 334 are reduced. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the balls flow backward, in the opposite direction to the acceleration in the first flow path component 334, thereby achieving a flow pattern in which the effects of acceleration in the front-to-back direction are reduced.

As a result, unlike a flow pattern where the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which helps to keep the player's attention on the ball and makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

In addition, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent balls from clogging or backflow. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls 180 degrees from a flow toward the front to a flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the angle at which the flow direction of the balls is switched is large, and in particular the velocity direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to allow the balls to flow smoothly, which can easily cause balls to become stuck, clogged, or backflow, resulting in problems.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, allowing the ball to flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid ball retention, clogging, and backflow.

The following describes the flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334-336. At the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the symmetrical protrusion 161f described above is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the balls by bending their flow direction.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portion 338. Furthermore, the rear ends of the opposing left and right ends of the symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see Figure 17).

This prevents the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backward when it collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, side wall portions 334a are curved at the front left and right ends of the central member 330 and are formed as portions that guide the flow of the balls by bending the direction in which they flow.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming portion 334, a curved protrusion 334b protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming portion 334 and has a curved surface shape that descends toward the front side (see Figure 16). This curved protrusion 334b is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the balls by bending the direction in which the balls flow.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming portion 334, and as it flows down, it abuts against the side wall portion 334a, which changes its flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming portion 335, and as it flows down, it abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f, which changes its flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming portion 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed with a shape that allows it to engage with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and be aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, allowing the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 to be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each flow path component 334-336 will be explained below. Regarding the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. In other words, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which has a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square with the same center as the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. In this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

For a commonly used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance between the flow path and the sphere is 1 mm in total on both sides, allowing the sphere to flow down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from misaligning as it flows down.

Of the portions that form the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b that forms the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is located inside (toward the front) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Based on actual measurements taken from a top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), which is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain why the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the largest inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, this configuration allows the ball to be displaced quickly to the front, switching from a state in which the ball's visibility is reduced as it moves to the rear side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 and is partially hidden by the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1, to a state in which the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations in which the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, slowing down the speed at which the ball flows down eliminates the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and third flow path component 336, which have high visibility in this way, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction along the third flow path component 336 is smaller than when the ball flows down left and right along the second flow path component 335. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, because the lengths and inclination angles are the same, the time required for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for a ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are the same. However, because the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and attention is drawn to the ball. In other areas, the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, the player's gaze naturally tends to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the player's burden of focusing their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

Furthermore, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an open section 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), thereby preventing the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing balls, and no shaped portions are formed above or below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on both the top and bottom, with space secured above and below it (see Figure 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on both the top and bottom, it is less likely that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, improving visibility.

Furthermore, the third flow path forming portion 336 is configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path forming portion 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from diagonally above and in front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed as overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls that enter the field of view when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be greater.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning opening 65a and instead enters the outlet 71, the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will come into view and draw attention to it.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which balls are directed toward the specific winning opening 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails attached to the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning openings 63, 64, and 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, visibility has been improved in positions closer to the front, but in this embodiment, visibility in positions closer to the back is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to create a light diffusion effect. In Figure 17, the sawtooth-like portion is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed along almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When light diffusion occurs, light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining. This creates a brilliantly lit surface, but the light also blocks the view, reducing visibility behind it. According to this embodiment, visibility is reduced when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350. Conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility is improved, at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be visible as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332 (see Figure 17).

Further examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include the light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface of a plate-like portion extending from the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, which covers the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion of the middle member 330 forward of the rear frame portion 332.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, light-diffusing surfaces are formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the vortex, and upper surface of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each flow path component 334-336, thereby achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front, a ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player viewing the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration portion 336 from an obliquely upward direction tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame portion 389 and fallen, their line of sight will pass through the light diffusion surface 340, and because light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, it will be difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described below, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which further improves the ability to focus attention on the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light-emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black dot. In this way, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to change the visibility of the ball. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black dot, it is possible to create a state in which the black dot is hidden by the ball, or a state in which the black dot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed near each of the flow path components 334-336, but are consistently formed on the side surfaces that do not come into contact with the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by each of the flow path components 334-336.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the spheres, allowing the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 to be maintained for a long period of time, thereby maintaining their light diffusion effect.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334-336.

In addition, the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to achieve both the effect of diffusing light and the effect of decelerating the ball upon collision with it.

Due to the difficulty of processing, the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted from the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316, and without any countermeasures, visibility may remain high. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screws are designed to reduce visibility.

In other words, the fastening screws that are threaded into the fastened portions 316 are made of metal and are non-transparent, which can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light-diffusing surface 333b. When light is shone on the front frame portion 333, the light-diffusing surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light-diffusing surface 333b is not formed, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, thereby reducing the visibility of the far side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front, including areas where the light-diffusing surface 333b is not formed.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336. In addition to providing a brilliant glow, its purpose is to conceal the board 350 and state switching device 360, which are located on the back side. In particular, because the state switching device 360 is located on the back side of the board 350 (see Figure 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that supports it from below on the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 in the center, with the sliding displacement member 370 positioned in that gap (see Figure 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that its lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see Figure 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see Figure 16). Near the center position, this thick portion is absent, creating a gap in which the sliding displacement member 370 can be positioned (see Figure 18).

As shown in Figure 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 extends inside the accommodating recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is positioned opposite the light diffusion surface 164f formed on the interposition member 164 from the front to the rear.

As a result, when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light-diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can be made to shine brilliantly, and the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light-emitting means 351 located on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light-diffusing surface 164f. Since the light-diffusing surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape modeled after a prism that is formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 is perceived as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it appears as if light is being emitted from both above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right sides of the receiving member 163. However, even if it were positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 would obstruct the field of view and make it difficult to see clearly. Therefore, as long as it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the spheres flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, with reference to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain how the flow path of a ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is switched, and its significance. In explaining Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will also be referenced as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the sliding displacement member 370 is shown positioned in a rear position.

Here, we will explain the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, with a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is located on the inside left and right, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is located on the outside left and right.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening/closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is detected by the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the jackpot game ends.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a special probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may also function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing balls from passing through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, balls passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 are guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member and into the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave side facing the flow path, allowing the flowing ball to flow smoothly toward the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the sliding displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. If it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected as having passed through the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and only passes through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are available: a special jackpot and a regular jackpot. To achieve this, in this embodiment, different operating patterns are provided for the sliding displacement member 370 for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a special jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the special jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, it is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the special jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easier for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

As such, the placement of the sliding displacement member 370 is directly linked to the profits that the player can obtain, and so naturally the player's attention is drawn to its placement. However, there have been quite a few instances of fraudulent attempts to fraudulently change the placement of the sliding displacement member 370, and measures to combat this are considered important.

The position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when current is not applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see Figure 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the positioning of the slide displacement member 370.

Anyone committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370, pushing the slide displacement member 370 further in, thereby fraudulently creating a condition in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned lower than the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18). Therefore, when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the wire ends up being pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. As described above, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to be released outward to the left and right. Therefore, even if a thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being improperly displaced to the rearward position.

In addition, the path the metal wire takes to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not straight but spirals, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the metal thin wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the state switching device 360. In other words, in the past, in response to the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically modifying the mechanism that transmits the driving force (displacement regulation), which limited the configuration of the state switching device 360. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required of the state switching device 360, thereby increasing the design freedom of the state switching device 360.

Furthermore, when a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the ball's flow down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal rate detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid errant balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common for the configuration to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls were allowed to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable component is provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are allowed to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the configuration allows balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the probability change state after a jackpot game will be ensured. Based on this concept, this embodiment eliminates the need for a movable part that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, thereby reducing material costs and product costs. Furthermore, the elimination of a movable part has the positive effect of eliminating the need for maintenance associated with malfunctions or breakdowns of the movable part, and extending the service life of the pachinko machine beyond the lifespan of the movable part.

Meanwhile, as a separate innovation from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, and 319 have been devised to ensure that the balls are guided to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., protrusions 317, 318, and 319) is used to achieve a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This is explained below.

First, we will explain the design of the flow path shape. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal in the short direction toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) (see Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, thereby reducing the bouncing of the balls (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when they flow from the second flow path component 335 into the third flow path component 336.

This tilt in the short direction allows the positioning of balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. As a result, balls flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of a ball accidentally passing through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the shorter side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by each flow path component 334-336 have a left-right path formed only by the second flow path component 335, and since the inclination direction is toward the center (toward the partition plate portion 338), the left-right velocity occurs inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, we will explain the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, and 319. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to a ball that has flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336. Although the left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, and 319, they are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370. Therefore, they come into complete contact with balls that slide along the partition plate 338 and pass the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336.

The protruding tip surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see Figure 15), and the rear ends of the protrusions are formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right more than the front ends of the protrusions, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see Figure 17). Therefore, when a ball passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318, it receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of outward and downward components, and flows downward.

However, because the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward; rather, they merely function as a momentum imparting element. Furthermore, because the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the sliding displacement member 370, the aforementioned momentum imparted occurs regardless of the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after contacting the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained separately for different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls along the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, because it is formed as a curved surface for switching the direction of ball flow, the radius of curvature of this curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends, when viewed from above, at a position rearward of the center of the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 17). On the other hand, the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends, when viewed from the left and right, at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front surface 376a at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 (see Figure 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by coming into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow downward in that direction, allowing the ball to flow smoothly downward.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball as it flows outward to the left and right, suppressing ball bouncing and allowing the ball to flow smoothly downward. Because the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is to suppress ball bouncing rather than to change the direction the ball flows downward, their shape is significantly different from that of front-to-rear long protrusion 317, and their protruding ends are formed as curved surfaces with a large radius of curvature that extend from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are arranged closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see Figure 19). Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be located rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, preventing the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backward when multiple balls are flowing down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long protrusion portion 317, causing the ball to come into contact with the long protrusion portion 317 and flow.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 is such that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of its thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, making it easy to apply a load to the contacting ball with a suppressed left-to-right component. Because the protruding tip of the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see Figure 20), this load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow diagonally downward and forward.

As a result, balls that do not travel far enough to the right due to the momentum provided by the left and right inner protrusions 318 are subjected to a downward, forward load from the front and rear long protrusions 317, and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusion 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back toward the front (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back toward the front, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path forming portion 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position and the ball flows toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. This use will be described later.

The sliding displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the sliding displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the sliding displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied to the ball in a direction (forward) that causes it to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

To prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the sliding displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the sliding displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the sliding displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball flowing back.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by positioning the left and right inner protrusions 318 so that they collide with all balls, it is possible to guide balls that reach the rear end of the third flow path component 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it less likely that balls will flow backward.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball. Therefore, even if the movement is performed when a ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, it is unlikely that a load will be generated that pushes the ball back toward the front. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is thought that it will not make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When a ball rolls along the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the top surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (before it starts to flow outward to the left or right), the opening operation of the sliding displacement member 370 applies a load to the ball in a direction that suppresses the rotation (causing it to roll backward), thereby stopping the ball's rotation, halting its flow and making it easier for it to start falling freely.

As a result, if the slide displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to more easily avoid the ball being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is possible to more easily guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, which is equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 appears from the player's perspective. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play in any position they like, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see Figure 1). For example, a player can play by keeping their head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) from a horizontal or downward tilt of approximately 5 degrees from horizontal (see Figure 22), or by bringing their head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 from a downward tilt of approximately 30 degrees from horizontal (see Figure 23). Generally, the former provides a wider field of view but makes it difficult to notice fine details, while the latter narrows the field of view but makes it easier to notice fine details within that field of view.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly based on a comparison with Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In Figure 21, the light-emitting means 351 are shown in imaginary lines. Note that the light-emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see Figure 13), but only the left half is shown for ease of understanding. The function of the light-emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light-emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower part 353.

First, the upper light-emitting means 351 emits light toward the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, so when light is emitted from the light-emitting means 351, the area around the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This increases the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path component 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted from the front side of the upper light-emitting means 351 (see Figure 18). This prevents the light from the light-emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the area around the sealing member 313 to be illuminated in a concentrated manner.

Although there are no limitations on the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, controlling the light to illuminate the sealing member 313 can draw attention to the sealing member 313, naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. In other words, by controlling the light emitting means 351 so that when the ball enters the special rate detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special rate detection sensor SE11 emits light, and when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, it is possible to notify the player of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light-emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see Figure 18), and the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see Figure 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each section.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light-emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light-emitting means 351, but is formed over a range that extends vertically (it is visible as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light-emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in Figure 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, in Figure 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 located at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the ball flow pattern at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, from this view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction.

In addition, the placement through-hole 332a of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so the state switching device 360 (see Figure 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so that it is difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. If multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back may be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, if multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, those spheres are placed in the same position in Figure 22. Therefore, the spheres on the front side hide the spheres on the back side.

Furthermore, when a ball flows toward normal detection sensor SE12, it flows outward to the left and right from the rear end of third flow path component 336. After it leaves third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light-diffusing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333. Therefore, it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball as it leaves third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if a ball (a ball slightly deviating left and right from third flow path component 336) flows from the downstream end position of second flow path component 335 (position of sphere P1) to the upstream end position of third flow path component 336 (position of sphere P2), that ball will obscure the ball as it leaves the rear end of third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, determining whether the ball has flowed toward the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be done by visually checking whether the ball's flow direction has switched to the left or right outward at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, by focusing on the inside and right edge of the third flow path component 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, the connection between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side of the line of sight is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge of the third flow path component 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the position of the ball flowing upstream, it may be difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed toward the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, when viewed from the line of sight in Figure 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path configuration 335 are clearly separated in terms of vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid the spheres on the upstream side being obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible when viewed in that direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, once the ball passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it first flows diagonally downward to the right, regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then switches between a flow path heading toward the special rate detection sensor SE11 and a flow path heading toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or when the ball's flow direction switches to the right.

Another possible switching mode is when the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path switches between flowing straight down and to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position will be at least behind the center line of the third flow path component 336.

In contrast, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, as in this embodiment, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370; see Figure 18). As a result, part of the ball is hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, and the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of a ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has taken. This further increases the player's ability to focus on balls flowing near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, regardless of the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, rather than requiring the player to play in a one-sided manner, the player can adjust and select their preferred viewing method, allowing for a wider range of gameplay styles, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved in various ways, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, it is possible to create a state in which the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is removed, making it easier to see the third flow path forming portion 336.

Regarding the viewing direction in Figures 22 and 23, we will explain visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are located on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the thickness of the members reduces the amount of light that passes through, thereby blocking the view.

Because the area of view obstructed by the front design element 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed from the direction shown in Figure 23 compared to the direction shown in Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat, as described above, and are configured to minimize light refraction (see Figure 12). This prevents the visibility of the sorting device 300 from being impaired.

Even in areas where flatness is not possible for functional reasons, the design is designed to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support sections 161c-161e used to position and engage the sorting device 300 are positioned outside the line of sight of the player looking at the flow path components 334-336 (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right lower sides) so as not to obstruct the player's line of sight facing diagonally downward.

Furthermore, for example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the ball and is thin, with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see Figure 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path components 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning opening 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and continue down toward the outlet 71. The impact on visibility caused by balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening/closing plate 65b is open. When the opening/closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening/closing plate 65b land on the opening/closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning opening 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 deviate to the left or right of the opening/closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension portions 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 reducing the visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

On the other hand, balls flowing down the inner rail 61, like balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, and thus, like balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze not only to the outlet 71 but also to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are located in the same left-right position (left-right center position), by moving the player's gaze up and down, the gaze is guided to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether balls shot towards the play area are likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a efficiently (leading to fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between extension portions 162b and 162c (leading to frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing down balls have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as it flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as it flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are normally considered wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by using the configuration described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can serve to guide the player's gaze toward the third flow path component 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are disposed above the center of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is disposed below the center of the specific winning opening 65a. This prevents balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336, as the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a prevent balls from flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b. This prevents a situation in which visibility around the third flow path component 336 and its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path components 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this also avoids the problem of increasing the required installation space. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the distance between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path component 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Furthermore, because the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see Figure 18), when the player's line of sight is frequently directed diagonally downward and rearward, as shown in Figure 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded in the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the long, horizontally elongated specific winning opening 65a and passes through the ball passage holes 163b of the detection sensors SE1 located at both ends of the opening passes through the symmetrical flow path components 334-336, and is collected below the center of the horizontal direction of the specific winning opening 65a. This shortens the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows horizontally down the horizontal width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be designed so that its horizontal length decreases toward the bottom, making it easier to position it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71. Instead of a structure that causes balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 via the third flow path component 336. This makes it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening located on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 from the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened when designing a gaming area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to certain standards, thereby improving the design freedom of the gaming area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, allowing the variable winning device 65 to be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operating pattern of the movable devices (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, let's assume that a ball that has passed through opening 312 flows down through first flow path component 334, second flow path component 335, and third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for a ball to pass through each of flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that it passes through each of flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball will not reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball will not approach the position of the sliding displacement member 370 and will not pass through either the special win detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. This means that the operating pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the winning position by mistake.

As a result, for example, it is no longer necessary to have a control that briefly releases the opening/closing plate at the start of round play R to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, a control that involves unnatural operation of the opening/closing plate, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V probability change attacker. This makes the operation of the opening/closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port more natural, providing players with an environment in which they can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type probability attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the machine immediately after the V-type probability attacker is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry. However, in the variable winning device 65 of this invention, as will be described later, a ball that enters the machine immediately after the attacker is opened can actually have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent balls from entering the machine immediately after the attacker is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the flow path inner wall (smooth, uneven, etc.), etc.

Referring to Figure 24, the contents of ROM 202 (see Figure 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described. Figure 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in the main control unit 110, Figure 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type for special symbols, and Figure 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second win random number counter C4 and the win for normal symbols.

As shown in Figure 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches one of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see Figure 24(b)) is a data table that stores judgment values for determining the type of jackpot, and the judgment value of the first win type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the lottery for the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 1 (a lottery based on the ball entering the first winning slot 64), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in Figure 24(b)).

If jackpot A1 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 19" is associated with the jackpot A2 (see 202b2 in Figure 24(b)).

If jackpot A2 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed using the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace using operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "20 to 39" is associated with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24(b)).

If a jackpot B1 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed using the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace using operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the jackpot B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24(b)).

If jackpot B2 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed using the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace using operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 79" is associated with the jackpot C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24(b)).

If a jackpot C1 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operation pattern X (details will be described later).

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with the jackpot C2 (see 202b6 in Figure 24(b)).

If jackpot C2 is achieved, four rounds of jackpot play are executed using the third operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace using operation pattern Y (details will be described later).

As mentioned above, if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for special symbol 1 (a lottery based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game will be selected in either case. Therefore, compared to a jackpot awarded in the lottery for special symbol 2, which will be described later, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in Figure 24(b)).

If jackpot A is achieved, 15 rounds of jackpot play are executed using the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace using operating pattern X (details will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 2 (a lottery based on a ball entering second winning slot 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play will be selected in either case. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 2, a larger number of prize balls can be paid out compared to if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special pattern 1, which can increase the player's motivation to play in order to win the lottery for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning slot 140).

In addition, because the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 is fixed at operation pattern X, there is little chance that the player will suffer a major disadvantage even if the visibility of the sliding displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern which has the disadvantage of slightly reducing the visibility of the sliding displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning slot 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of shortening the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the likelihood that the jackpot game involving the drawing of special pattern 2 will be prolonged, resulting in a jackpot game that is satisfying for the player (with good time efficiency in the payout of prize balls).

However, the setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced using operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small percentage (for example, around 20%).

This increases the player's attention to the sliding displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually observe the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370, which can make the player feel happy or sad depending on the timing of the displacement movement, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when a normal symbol wins is lengthened (1 second x 2 times). This makes it easier to get a ball into the second winning slot 140, making it easier to draw special symbol 2. Therefore, once a special symbol probability change state is achieved, a special symbol jackpot is more likely to occur, and if a jackpot occurs, the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to result in jackpot A (a jackpot with a good profit balance), is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly anticipating a transition to the special symbol probability change state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see Figure 24(c)) is a data table that stores the winning judgment values for normal symbols. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are specified as the judgment values for winning normal symbols (see 202c1 in Figure 24(c)). Furthermore, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are specified as the judgment values for winning normal symbols (see 202c2 in Figure 24(c)). In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained when the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67, and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol has won. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment values of the variation type counter that determines the display mode of the variation pattern are specified for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

If the MPU 201 (see Figure 4) determines a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process, it begins controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special symbol change display (symbol change presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that Figure 24 will be referenced as appropriate in the explanation of Figure 25.

In this control example, only the first round has different drive modes depending on the type of jackpot; from the second round onwards, the drive mode is the same. Therefore, we will explain the drive mode for the first round for each type of jackpot.

In the event of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see Figure 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation presentation) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means begins measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from its closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to perform this 0.2-second opening operation at 1.0-second intervals, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously released, but shorter than the period required for the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of round play R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, thereby ending the first round of round play R.

The 0.2 second opening time in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter either the left or right side of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to prevent multiple balls from entering either the left or right side of the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will arrive on each side of the specific winning opening 65a, and that all balls will enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time.

In the event of a jackpot A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the control of the opening/closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

As a result, a ball that enters the specific winning slot 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, only one ball is placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. This allows the player to easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the event of a jackpot A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) to operate the slide displacement member 370 based on operation pattern Y. The control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the control of the opening/closing plate 65b. In this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As mentioned above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the sliding displacement member 370.

As a result, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, only one ball is placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. This allows the player to easily see the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336, and a time longer than the time required for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced once the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning slot 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path component 336, regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see Figure 22). This prevents the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention it draws to the balls flowing down the flow path components 334-336 as balls that will enter the special chance detection sensor SE11 or normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the sliding displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced before the ball reaches the third flow path component 336, so there is little chance that the ball will block the player's line of sight, and the player can visually confirm the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is positioned close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is positioned further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's eyes are likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing the player's attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to more easily prevent the player from seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center left and right, so if balls enter the specific winning port 65a on one side, you can focus on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering, and see the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 without being obstructed by the balls flowing down (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball is passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the event of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see Figure 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation presentation) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means begins measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from its closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to perform this 1.0 second opening operation at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously released, but shorter than the period required for the specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of round play R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, thereby ending the first round of round play R.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter either the left or right side of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the balls are released at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so even if the intervals at which the balls flow down remain the same as when they were released, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to 1.0 seconds, it is possible to prevent the next ball from entering each flow path component 334-336 before two balls have passed through each flow path component 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, a ball that passes through each flow path component 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, a ball that passes through each flow path component 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more) balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be positioned in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, potentially reducing the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the ability of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to focus on the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the event of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see Figure 11) to operate the opening/closing plate 65b based on the third operation pattern. When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation presentation) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening/closing plate 65b closed until a timer means (not shown) has elapsed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds), and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from its closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b operates for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of round play R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, thereby ending the first round of round play R.

In this control example, the opening/closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, which can result in multiple balls entering the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side. However, because the opening distance of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, it is possible for the next ball to enter each flow path component 334-336 before two balls have passed through them. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the third operation pattern is more likely to result in a situation in which the visibility of a ball located downstream of each flow path component 334-336 is reduced by a ball located upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or jackpot a, a ball that passes through each flow path component 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, a ball that passes through each flow path component 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode keeps the opening/closing plate 65b open regardless of whether the ball passes through the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. However, because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting stuck can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether one ball is placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether two balls are placed in each. When one ball is placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be positioned in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, potentially reducing the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the ability of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to focus on the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operating pattern, there are no restrictions on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning port 65a during the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the placement of balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disordered. As a result, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out earlier. In other words, it is easier to meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment)) earlier, preventing the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot with special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning slot 65a, it is guaranteed to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of detection sensor SE1 is allowed to decrease, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while the visibility of detection sensor SE1 is allowed to decrease, priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the second round of round play R begins after the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, just as at the start of the first round, the timer begins measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state, opening the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is always maintained in the front position, so that balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a are ejected after passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of round play R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, thereby ending the second round of round play R.

From then on, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated, with the first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening/closing plate 65b moves between the closed and open states, opening and closing the specific winning opening 65a.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the jackpot game ends as that time passes.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are described as being performed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be performed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, eighth round, twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operation patterns) of the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby varying the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each flow path component 334-336 and the third flow path component 336. This can motivate players who pay attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path component 336 to devise ways to launch the ball.

For example, reduced visibility of detection sensor SE1 can occur when multiple balls are placed in each flow path configuration section 334-336 at the same time. Therefore, the reduced visibility of detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the case of a jackpot type using the second or third activation pattern). Furthermore, in the first activation pattern, balls are restricted from entering the specific winning slot 65a, so reduced visibility of detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the launch mode.

On the other hand, increasing the interval between ball launches will extend the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, which could result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R, between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370, a short period of time (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of round play R, allowing a ball to enter the specific winning port 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the time the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of round play R in the case of operation pattern Y), thereby preventing the displacement action of the sliding displacement member 370 from being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which could result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R, between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 and slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, allowing balls to enter through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned firing pattern that widens the interval between balls or that increases the time until the ball is fired when the ball lands on the left side, and firing the ball in any firing pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning opening 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, because balls are constantly being fired toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming drawn out.

Note that the purpose of shooting balls to the left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths as desired.

This prevents balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling to the left or right of the specific winning opening 65a, even when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long, as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball entry paths are limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the peg arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the peg arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, we will explain the structure of the operating unit 500, which is fastened to the back side of the gaming board 13. The operating unit 500 is a unit that is fastened to the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) of the gaming board 13 from the back side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that Figure 27 does not show the LCD display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and instead shows the rear side as visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referenced as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with a bottom wall 511 and an outer wall 512 extending from the outer edge of the bottom wall 511, the front side of which is open. The rear case 510 has a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, with a rectangular opening 511a formed in the center of the bottom wall 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., large enough to divide the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to it), and includes a support plate 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 when assembled (see Figure 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front and is shaped to fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and multiple insertion holes 513b that are drilled to allow the insertion of fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and operation unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and operation unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or, taking into account workability during assembly, the protrusion may have a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is rectangular, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular accordingly.

The operation unit 500 is located on the rear side of the game board 13 and houses various light-emitting devices and operation units. Specifically, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 located on the inside right side of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 located on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 located on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. The inside left side of the rear case 510 houses a substrate having light-emitting devices such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 that covers the substrate from the front, is made of a light-transmitting material, and has a light-diffusing finish applied throughout.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of this operating unit 500 will be explained.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in Figure 30, the second operating unit 700 is shown in a state where the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 shown in Figure 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. From this inside, the third pattern display device 81 located on the back side can be clearly seen. However, outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is easily obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600-800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

Note that the frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in Figure 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its function is the same. Furthermore, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved and protrudes downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it does not curve downward all the way to the outer frame of the center frame 86. Rather, a circular, transparent decorative thin plate protrudes from the inner frame side of the center frame 86 to cover the front of the third operating unit 800. Therefore, its function of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is also the same as that shown in Figure 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state of Figure 31 and the state of Figure 32 occurs through a combination of linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, if this is performed when the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction. Therefore, this is performed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision with the decorative members 870, 880), and is in a state in which it is allowing the decorative members 870, 880 to displace in the virtual circle 800F (see Figure 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state where it is displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state where the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state of Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state where the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state of Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see Figure 31), there is a possibility of a collision if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so that it can be executed on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is also in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so that it can be executed on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is also in the standby state. This makes it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This therefore improves the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible for the front and rear positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so that it can be executed on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and by positioning the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state (see Figure 33) when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state, it is possible to prevent the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. This therefore improves the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600-800 (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, by configuring the second operating unit 700 to be visible in multiple states, including a state in which it is protruding closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800, the functionality of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 moves to the right of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape, which has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in the performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating element 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is positioned diagonally toward the player (with the front surface tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L, based on arrow F-B). This improves the visibility of the first presentation surface 661a from the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating element 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, at an angle through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented with the second presentation surface 661b facing directly forward, thereby improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b from the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its placement, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its placement in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, the design is not limited to flat position changes parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but also includes angle changes intended to reflect the player's line of sight. In other words, the closer the display is positioned to the center of the center frame 86, the more likely the player's line of sight is to be in the front-to-back direction, making it easier to face directly, so having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F) improves visibility. On the other hand, the closer the display is positioned to the center frame 86, the more likely the player's line of sight is to be at an angle, so making the display surface at an angle to face directly with that line of sight improves visibility.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and when the first operating unit 600 is in the standby state for performance (see Figure 28) and the intermediate performance state (see Figure 34), it is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510, hiding it from view by the player.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in front and behind when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, it is possible to create a display effect that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

More specifically, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right edge RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right edge RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right edge RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the same font as the number displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number indicating the result of the lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the front of the plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored in the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right edge aligned with the right edge of the area RE1, and the front of the plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

Note that the presentation style of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type; multiple presentation styles can be created by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

Furthermore, by arranging a small LCD device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the LCD device can be changed in multiple ways, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right edge RE1 of the area.

Furthermore, the object associated with the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b may be associated with decorations (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b may be associated with decorations (first covering portion 875 decoration, second covering portion 885 decoration) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600. The first operating unit 600 is configured to undergo a complex displacement pattern in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture. In addition, the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 displaces relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 comprises a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported on the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported on the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing each other on the front and rear sides of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between them.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the fixing portion 614, and a guide slot 616 formed as a slot for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that combines straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 comprises a main body 621 formed in the shape of an elongated plate, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted onto the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as an elongated hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the other end (upper end) of the main body 621 in a drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in the shape of gear teeth along a portion of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. One arm of the torsion spring SP1 abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621, and the other arm abuts against a protrusion on the front cover member 612, generating a biasing force in the direction of raising the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

When supporting the cylindrical portion 622, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is threaded into the female thread formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This ensures that the rotating member 620 is supported on the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission elongated hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through-hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed; details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft that protrudes to the rear side through a through-hole 613a in the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 and meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 and meshing with the transmission gear 633.

With the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c inserted through the transmission gear 633 and transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are threaded into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. This ensures that the transmission gear 633 and transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported on the front cover member 612 so that they cannot fall off.

The front cover member 612 has an arc-shaped hole 613d formed through it along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the cylindrical portion 634a, which protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634, is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member equipped with a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the aforementioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends radially outward from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a in a plate-like shape.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted through the elongated transmission hole 623 of the rotating member 620. The widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the elongated transmission hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This reduces the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the elongated transmission hole 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler-type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to determine the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading changes in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 comprises an elongated main body 641, a tubular portion 642 with a cylindrical cross section that protrudes from the back side of the main body 641 and is capable of inserting into the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 that protrudes parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 that is journaled on the tubular portion 643 and is capable of meshing with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620, a bottomed tubular portion 645 that is formed in a large-diameter cylindrical shape with a perforated bottom located closer to the back side than the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 that extends toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 through meshing as the rotating member 620 rotates.

With the cylindrical portions 642, 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are threaded into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical portions 642, 643. This ensures that the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported on the main body 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed cylindrical portion 645 has its rear side positioned close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is equipped with an opening 645a formed on the periphery at the front side of the bottom so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the cylindrical center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotational member 660, and details will be described later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 comprises a main body member 651 forming an orthogonal rotation axis; a front rotating member 652 journaled between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645; an illumination board 653 fixed to the rear side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and having LEDs or other light-emitting means arranged on the front side; a rear rotating member 654 coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side; a wire receiving member 655 fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space for wiring; a front decorative portion 656 positioned on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and fastened by a fastening screw inserted into the main body member 651 from the rear side; and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 journaled and fitted externally to the cylindrical portion formed by the wire receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a extending cylindrically from the rear side. This cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter of the tip, and has a notch 651c cut out to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane passing through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to ensure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the central hole of the front rotating member 652, the central hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the elongated guide hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at its tip.

In other words, the cylindrical support portion 651a, front rotating member 652, rear rotating member 654, bottomed cylindrical portion 645, collar C1, and dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on axis O1 extending in the front-to-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the elongated guide hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference. When assembled, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the interior of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 and is guided into the interior of the second decorative rotation member 660, where its terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side opposite the semi-cylindrical portion 655a and positioned opposite the main body member 651), is guided to the rear of the protruding decorative portion 652b, and its terminals are connected to a connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and these gear teeth 654a are formed so that they can mesh with the intermediate gear 644. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed along only a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, to provide a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative portion 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative portion 652b, allowing the illumination board 653 to emit light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653, causing the protruding decorative portion 652b to light up or flash.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wire receiving member 655, and is provided with gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotation member 652, rear rotation member 654, and axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 are interlocked, and details of their operation will be described later. Furthermore, the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along part of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, to provide an arrangement sufficient for the operation described below.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decorative board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, described below, rotates, the illumination board 662 also undergoes rotational displacement. This means that the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a may become twisted or disorganized when guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the wiring retaining plate 663, which has through holes for temporarily securing the wiring, functions to prevent the wiring from twisting or becoming disorganized.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, twisting of the electrical wiring is unavoidable. However, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 does not occur over one rotation, but rather reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, which prevents excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring from being twisted or broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, thanks to the wiring retaining plate 663 which functions as a retainer. The second decorative rotation member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657, preventing the second decorative rotation member 660 from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and with its optical axis facing the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and with its optical axis facing the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and with its optical axis facing the width direction.

In this way, the light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c, but because the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is turned on when the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED can illuminate the second performance surface 661b.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that can illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during light-emitting performances.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made from a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative letters and figures formed on it so that they are visible to the player. It is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that projects light diagonally to the front left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the right of the third pattern display device 81, so the player's line of sight toward the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be projected onto the side where the player's eyes are most likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has its lower and right edges raised toward the rear, forming a front-to-rear gap between its upper and left edges and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the pivoting member 620 passes when tilting.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that to make the shape easier to understand, the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to follow (e.g., be parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the elongated transmission hole 623. This reduces the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a begins to slide along the elongated transmission hole 623 and begin to displace. In other words, at the start of displacement, there is less inertial assistance available compared to midway through the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large. However, by configuring the drive motor 631 to reduce displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when displacement begins.

The same applies to the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see Figure 45). In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a placed in the transmission slot 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the performance standby position, the extended state position) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission slot 623. This reduces the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in Figure 41, the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so the rotation angle of the gear teeth portion 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in Figure 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see Figure 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state for performance will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate performance state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate performance state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws have been omitted from the illustration to make the shape easier to understand.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate performance state and the extended state.

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented with the narrower third performance surface 661c facing the front. When the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see Figure 45).

As shown in Figure 44, the guide slot 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the standby state and the intermediate state is a linear displacement along the straight portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change states as described above, with the rotating member 620 located at the base end of this state change. That is, the rotating member 620 receives a driving force from the drive transmission device 630 and is displaced, and the supported member 640, first decorative rotation member 650, and second decorative rotation member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

For this reason, without any countermeasures, there is a possibility that the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 will increase the displacement resistance between the portion and the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 to be aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, when the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 is displaced from the performance standby state (Figure 41), it tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward. Furthermore, when the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 is displaced from the extended state (see Figure 46), it rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, with reference to Figure 47, the effects of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be explained, along with other effects. Figure 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and Figures 48(a) and 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that positive and negative values are shown with positive representing downward displacement and negative representing upward displacement, and Figure 48(b) illustrates the values in Figure 48(a) as a bar graph.

In Figure 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 as the rotating member 620 rotates is illustrated at 10-degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in its position when the first operating unit 600 is extended is illustrated in solid lines.

In Figure 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide slot 616 functions as a slot that guides the end of the supported member 640 along which the axis O1 is located. Displacement in the guide slot 616 occurs when the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620, displaces as the rotating member 620 rotates. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 will also be referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 along which the axis O1 is located will also be referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An overview of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the combined vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 due to the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is greater in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the rotating arm is positioned within a range of 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction to be small are met twice.

Both of these are reversed in the extended state, resulting in two conditions for increased vertical displacement. Therefore, the configuration is prone to situations where the speed is low at the start of downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, we will explain the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620. We will explain the displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state. When the rotating member 620 tilts, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

For this reason, if the guide slot 616 were formed vertically, the driven side of the supported member 640 could fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a position midway through the tilting displacement, see Figure 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured so that a curved portion 616b is combined below the straight portion 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces down the straight portion 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too forcefully beyond its position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 on the linear portion 616a will now be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces on the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the standby state for performance, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see Figure 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the left of the linear portion 616a (see Figure 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces back and forth in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear section 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player to be rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

This displacement mode allows for left-right sliding displacement to occur by utilizing the run-up caused by rotational displacement around the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide left-right from the start of displacement. This reduces the load required when the supported member 640 begins to move, and lowers the performance required of the drive motor 631. This allows for lower costs for the drive motor 631.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, sufficient displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is ensured in accordance with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 relative to the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This prevents the player from getting the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the second decorative rotating member 660 to move with force.

Furthermore, even in situations where sufficient displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is ensured, the direction of displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward). This reduces the load required to initiate displacement of the rotating member 620, and lowers the level of performance required of the drive motor 631. This allows for lower costs for the drive motor 631.

The effect produced by curved portion 616b will now be explained. The state in which the driven side of supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between straight portion 616a and curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of supported member 640 is positioned at curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in Figure 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses bending portions to increase displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is intentionally adopted to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 displaces downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 also displaces downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to move in a direction (to the right) opposite to the direction of displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 (to the left), and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to move in a direction (to the left) that follows the direction of displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 (to the left).

As a result, even before the downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is oscillated left and right, ensuring a high displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This prevents the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along any path from a specific initial position to the end position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the vertical speed will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase towards the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the imaginary axis OE1, which is guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown for comparison in Figure 47, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the end of the displacement (lower displacement end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the lower displacement end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the imaginary axis OE1 during the same period is greater.

As a result, when the virtual axis OE1 is displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which could adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the supported member 640 is stopped at the lower end of its displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by employing a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby achieving a uniform displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640.

In this case, "uniformization" does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed variations. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases as it begins to enter the curved portion 616b, and then gradually decreases once it begins to enter the lower half of the curved portion 616b.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when moving the rotating member 620 upward (raising operation) can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, referring to Figure 49, we will explain the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 that accompanies the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] that accompanies the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be considered to be the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through-hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotational transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see Figure 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotational transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see Figure 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotational angle with respect to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore changes in the angle θ can be understood as changes in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 41) to the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 44), and 90 degrees from the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 46).

When in the standby state for performance, the second decorative rotating element 660 is positioned with the first performance surface 661a tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c tilted 45 degrees to the right). As the angle θ changes, the state switches between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence, and the second decorative rotating element 660 rotates 45 degrees, causing the third performance surface 661c to face forward (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b to face forward (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by the design of the guide slot 616, which determines the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed to satisfy both the positioning of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotation member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state can be used to determine the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to simply calculate the value proportionally from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to prevent the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 from becoming constant, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This is explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the angle change from the standby state to the intermediate state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate state to the extended state is generally larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and eventually becomes below the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to approximately 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the rotational angle θ of the rotating member 620 to vary depending on the value of the angle per unit angle, the rotational angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be similarly configured to vary. In other words, when the value of the angle θ is small, the rotational angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easier to maintain its position, while when the value of the angle θ is large, the rotational angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, making it easier to quickly change the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a-661c).

The above-described configuration allows for variations in the speed of the displacement of the second decorative rotational member 660. As described above, the displacement of the second decorative rotational member 660 simultaneously involves changes in position and posture due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably larger when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotation member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the driven side position of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, it is possible to maintain the second decorative rotation member 660 in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction becomes clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is undergoing an instantaneous rotational displacement.

In this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the front at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620, and is visually recognized as a single unit when positioned closely to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28). Therefore, it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform. This prevents the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and prevents the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to this uniform displacement speed, the positioning of the central portions of the supported member 640 and second decorative rotating member 660 (e.g., the positioning of the cylindrical portion 643) at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This prevents the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from moving wildly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is configured to effectively obstruct displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of rebound (upper left) around the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620. In other words, the direction in which the lower half of the curved portion 616b slopes upward and left is the short side direction, which can suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, thereby preventing the supported member 640 from rebounding.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when it displaces in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

Without a guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the driving side displacement direction of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620). However, in this embodiment, by being guided by the guide elongated hole 616, it is slightly swung left and right in the direction along the guide elongated hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter follows a circular path centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616 rather than along the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the upward direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is primarily used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in Figure 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is designed to be at its minimum value when the rotating member 620 begins to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This reduces the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing up and down).

As a result, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotational member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotational member 620, the load applied to the rotational member 620 as an inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotational member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotational member 620 is twisted around an axis in the longitudinal direction, and the rotational member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by dispersing it in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid situations where the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 is configured to withstand any load that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The following explains the displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b. The protruding decorative part 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from the performance standby state to the protruding state, the protruding decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, with the protruding decorative part 652b rotating approximately 45 degrees. If the protruding decorative part 652b were to rotate 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it would appear as if it were to collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which serves as the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes position by rotating clockwise, thereby avoiding collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the protruding decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly positioned relative to the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state, when the supported member 640 changes from its protruding state position to its performance standby state position, the protruding decorative portion 652b may protrude to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially colliding with other operating units 800 or partially obscuring the protruding display in front of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, thereby adversely affecting the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, using the driven side of the supported member 640 as a reference. Therefore, when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retracting from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated by the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the position of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in Figure 47, when angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1 + b1) - (a2 + b2)) - (b1 - b2) = (a1 - a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means separate from the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's perspective, to consist of sections that are sliding movements and sections that are rotating movements, making the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b appear to be soft and not mechanical.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's perspective, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b influences the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to achieve a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state. While the case where it moves from one displacement end to the other displacement end has been described, the drive direction may also be switched so that it moves in the opposite direction midway through the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the standby state to the intermediate state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to return it to the standby state. In this case, the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway through its descent, so it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to accurately stop it at the desired position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of angle θ (see Figure 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. As described above, the magnitude of angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotation member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced relatively, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and its states are mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which it retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the player's field of view of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which it is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 to attract attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) that is the state between them.

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the components surrounding the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, with the lifting and reversing performance device 770 being shown in an unexploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 comprises a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 arranged between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable around the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and configured to be capable of being raised and lowered. The device comprises a left-side rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side of the lift-up plate member 740, a set of front support members 760 made up of a left and right pair fastened to the front sides of the right-side front plate member 710 and left-side rear plate member 750, a decorative blind member 768 fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal rod 702, and a lift-up and reversal performance device 770 configured to allow the lift-up plate member 740 and front support member 760 to be displaced in a manner that combines lift-up and down displacement with longitudinal displacement.

The right front panel member 710 comprises a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730; a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between it and the rear case 510; multiple detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detectable portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730; a front upper inclined portion 714 that is inclined at the front of the left side so that it approaches the front as it goes upwards and is capable of guiding the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770; and multiple fastening portions 718 that have female threads that receive fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart with detection grooves positioned where the detectable portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is positioned to match the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable portion 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

In other words, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio and lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to understand the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The pivoting arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 toward the front side, and comprises a main body 721 formed in the shape of a long, V-shaped plate when viewed from the front, a support tube 722 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at the bent portion of the main body 721 and has an inner circumferential shape large enough to insert the cylindrical protrusion 511b, a long hole 723 that is drilled in the longitudinal direction at the right end of the main body 721, and a support tube 722 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at the bent portion of the main body 721, and has an inner circumferential shape large enough to insert the cylindrical protrusion 511b. The main body 721 is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically forward (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner periphery, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically rearward at a position intermediate between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner periphery, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support cylinder portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body 721 in an upward direction (in a direction lifting the left side) between the main body 721 and the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is positioned toward the front compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is placed in the gap formed on the back side by this step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and is provided with an arc-shaped elongated hole 701a that is drilled to guide the cylindrical fastening portion 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the elongated hole 701a, sandwiching a ring-shaped collar C3, and threaded into the cylindrical fastening portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening portion 725 so that it cannot fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, which limits the left side of the pivoting arm member 720 from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front. This prevents the pivoting arm member 720 from tilting toward the front due to a load applied to the left side of the pivoting arm member 720, thereby stably supporting the displacement of the pivoting arm member 720.

The right side of the main body 721 is positioned in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the front-to-rear displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in a shape such that a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support tube portion 722. Therefore, when a load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the component of that load in the rotation direction of the pivoting arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 transmits driving force via the elongated hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and gear cam member 734 are each journaled at corresponding positions on a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the rear side of the right front plate member 710. Female threads are formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, allowing fastening screws to be threaded into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and gear cam member 734. By threading and securing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and gear cam member 734 are journaled on the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the aforementioned cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a, which supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is insertable into the arc-shaped hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends with a diameter longer than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 on the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the elongated hole 723 of the pivoting arm member 720, and displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivoting arm member 720 via the elongated hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be threaded into it. By threading and fixing this fastening screw, the pivot arm member 720 is securely connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a.

The lifting plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivoting arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 located on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted through it, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontal member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 comprises a long hole 743 drilled in the shape of an oval elongated from side to side with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted therethrough, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically from the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant from the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched between them, is threaded into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivoting arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is the portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and which supports the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in a state in which it can be displaced back and forth. In other words, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is not fixed to the lifting plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the lifting plate member 740 in a manner that allows it to be displaced back and forth relative to the lifting plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that separates the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting and reversing performance device 770.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, each comprising a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shafts protruding outward from the plate portion 745a to the left and right.

The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting and reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement; details will be provided later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the upper-front inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is provided with a front-upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that inclines toward the front as it approaches the upper side and is capable of guiding the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are threaded.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a three-dimensional shape, and a substrate with an LED fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

Each front support member 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having a through-hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined so that the back surface of the plate is inclined toward the front as it moves upward.

The fixing plate portion 761 is a plate portion that is fastened to the front side of the right-side front plate member 710 or the left-side rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole from the front side and threading it into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751. In other words, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 moves up and down while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and reversing displacement is explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) illustrate the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) illustrate intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

Figure 54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in Figure 30, and Figure 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in Figure 30. Figures 54(a) and 54(b) show the second operating unit 700 in an extended state.

The vertical displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the vertical displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described below. Note that in this description, reference will be made to Figures 28, 30, and 33 as appropriate.

When the drive force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see Figure 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see Figure 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, thereby suppressing the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate. The same holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see Figure 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, which maximizes the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is positioned on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to displace to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it displaces upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by the configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by the configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylindrical portions 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, which are positioned symmetrically (the front upper inclined portion 751 is positioned on the left side not shown in Figure 52; see Figure 56). By allowing the rotating cylindrical portion 774e to roll around the center of the cylindrical portion 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which moves along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by positioning the rotating cylinder portions 745b aligned front to back, with the front rotating cylinder portion 745b positioned slightly higher, tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder portion 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the rotation axis) is located slightly forward of the fore-and-aft center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased forward by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder 745b, which is positioned adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side thereof is lowered, is positioned slightly higher, and the rear rotating cylinder 745b, which is positioned adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side thereof is raised, is positioned slightly lower. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, a gap is created between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, allowing stable rolling between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, and a gap is created between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b, allowing stable rolling between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, reducing displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction.

The forward displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, when the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced forward in an upward displacement, the displacement resistance in the forward and backward direction can be reduced compared to when the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced downward.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. For vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counteract gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length when second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state (see Figure 53). In other words, when lifting/reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of lifting/reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of drive motor 731, whereas when lifting/reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of lifting/reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, if the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state, and then the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so that the second operating unit 700 is stopped in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second operating unit 700 so that it moves toward the intermediate performance state.

Furthermore, for example, when similar stop control is performed, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

Furthermore, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and then stopped to stop the drive motor 731 so that the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, the force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the lifting and reversing performance device 770 moves downward past the intermediate performance state, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. Furthermore, even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, allowing the second operating unit 700 to move toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, we will explain the effect of the lifting and reversing effect device 770, which is displaced forward and backward in response to lifting and lowering displacement. As a premise, movable devices are known that can be displaced in and out of the frame bounded by the center frame 86 to switch between a state that attracts the player's attention and a state that retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of these movable devices are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the attention of players.

However, in recent years, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been increased, and at the edge of the field of vision, where the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is viewed through the inside of the center frame 86, the line of sight reaches as far as the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the playing area). Therefore, if the appearance of the movable device retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side of the covering member 787 (first main decorative surface 787a1 in Figure 52), but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in Figure 52) and on the top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in Figure 52).The displacement direction of the lifting and reversing effect device 770 is then set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) and widens as it moves towards the back side (sloping downward as it moves towards the rear), i.e., along the direction of the player's line of sight at the edge of their field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1; first main decorative surface 787a1 in Figure 54) that is visible to the player in the protruding state (see Figure 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2; first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in Figure 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see Figure 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first major decorative surface 787a1 and the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second major decorative surface 787b1 and the second minor decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decorations formed on the upper surface are positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for display. This makes them easy to see when the player shifts their gaze between focusing on the balls flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and the display effects unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

As a result, the content of the decoration (notification content, such as "chance" or "jackpot") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can also be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 in the standby state for the effect.

This allows the third symbol display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the inconspicuously positioned covering member 787 continues to attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so that the decorative surface facing the player can be switched, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player when in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the lifting and reversing effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operation speed is excessively fast), and the configuration allows the contents of the decorative surface to be seen only from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the gaming board 13 in the effect standby state, forcing the player to focus on the LCD effect displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing the player's ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when a configuration is adopted in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing display device 770 in the display standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the effect standby state. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of attention to the covering member 787 regardless of whether it is in the effect standby state, the extended state, etc.

In this embodiment, the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured to move from a state where it is positioned behind the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in Figure 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for performance, the front of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are positioned opposite each other, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a that protrudes toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a forms the rear portion of the guide flow path that, after a ball enters the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 and reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, swings the ball backward as it flows down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86, then guides it forward again toward the first winning opening 64 located in the play area (see Figure 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see Figure 2).

Because balls that flow down the flow path forming portion 86a have a high probability of entering the first winning slot 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and players' gazes are likely to be drawn to the flow path forming portion 86a, especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. In the performance standby state (see Figure 52), the performance device 780 is positioned directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easier to create a state in which the performance device 780 comes into the player's field of vision in the performance standby state.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for performance, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end face BE1 (see Figure 52(a)); when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end face BE1 (see Figure 53(a)); and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end face BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 displaces upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time displaces toward the front so as to enter a front-to-back position that is the same as the front-to-back position of the playing area. Therefore, it appears to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, as the second operating unit 700 moves up and down, the performance device 780 moves in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face, when in the extended state, is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

This aligns the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and performance standby state than in the extended state, making it easier to visually distinguish the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 comprises a main body member 771 connected and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a performance device 780 configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, details of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Figure 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and Figure 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device 770. In explaining Figures 55 and 56, reference will be made to Figures 50 and 51 as appropriate.

The main body member 771 comprises a lower elongated portion 772 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction; a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the rear side; a pair of guide extensions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the rear side; an upper elongated portion 775 that is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction and is integrally formed with the left-right center of the lower elongated portion 772 by connecting portions that extend up and down; a plurality of guide portions 776 that are disposed from both left and right ends of the upper elongated portion 775 toward the rear side and are configured to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction; a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened to the left-right center of the upper elongated portion 775 from the rear side and is capable of supporting a drive transmission device; and light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened to the front sides of the lower elongated portion 772 and upper elongated portion 775.

The insertion cylindrical portion 773 is inserted into the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740 and is formed with dimensions that allow it to slide on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744, and sliding causes the main body member 771 to displace in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, by inserting the insertion cylindrical portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-to-rear direction relative to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 comprises a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b and whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported on the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inward on the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is positioned vertically opposite the lower base of the lifting plate member 740 when assembled, and by abutting against each other, forward tilting of the guide extension portion 774 is suppressed. In other words, by ensuring a width long enough that the second horizontal plate 774c is positioned vertically opposite the lower base of the lifting plate member 740, forward tilting of the main body member 771 relative to the lifting plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but rather the upper cylindrical portion 774d is offset forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This offset is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 is parallel to the direction of the line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d (see Figure 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can simultaneously abut against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 comprises a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in pairs, one above the other, and having internal threads formed on the inner periphery, and a plurality of anti-detachment plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of cylindrical portions 776a.

The anti-fall-off plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and threading them into the cylindrical portion 776a. It functions to prevent the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower ends so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastening member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the rear side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner periphery, and when a fastening screw is threaded into it while the transmission gear 781b is inserted, it pivotally supports the up-down reversal member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The insertion hole 777d is designed to accommodate a fastening screw that threads into the female thread portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper elongated portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming it in a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777.

The light-emitting means 778 comprises two elongated, plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, one above the other, with light-emitting elements such as LEDs arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a, on which light-diffusing processing is applied.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler-type detection devices, and are configured to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging the arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove; details will be provided later.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower elongated portion 772 at corresponding positions on the fastening portions to fasten and secure them, making the fastening screws less noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has insertion holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws. Fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 778c from the front side and threaded into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front and may be noticeable without any countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so the head of the fastening screw fixed in the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

As a result, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face forward, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and has a negative impact on the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom for the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device configured so that its outer shape is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and can be displaced. It comprises an up-down inversion member 781 pivotally supported on the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a drive motor 782 having a drive gear 782a fixed to its drive shaft that transmits driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up-down inversion member 781, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported at one end on each of the longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported at the other end of the intermediate arm member 783 and guided by the guide portion 776 for left-right displacement. It comprises a pair of linear plate members 784, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear plate members 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation members 785 together with the linear plate members 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are non-detachably fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation members 785 with their phases fixed, and covering members 787 arranged in front and behind the end plate members 785d and formed with a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down reversal member 781 comprises a main body plate portion 781a formed in the shape of a long plate, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the back side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both longitudinal ends of the main body plate portion 781a toward the back side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b toward the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in its center that extends in the front-to-rear direction. The cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is threaded into it from the tip side, so that the up-down reversal member 781 is pivotally supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction, causing the up-down inversion member 781 to rotate. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783, where the support hole 783a on one side is formed, moves in accordance with the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates and moves.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in the shape of a long rod (narrow plate) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as a bevel-shaped gear (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is threaded into this female thread and inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side. This ensures that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported on the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear plate member 784 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate that is elongated in the left-right direction and includes a cylindrical protruding portion 784a that protrudes cylindrically and is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, a pair of elongated hole portions 784c that are drilled in an oval shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged parallel to each other in a pair above and below the elongated hole portions 784c and protrude from the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged parallel to each other in a pair above and below the elongated hole portions 784c and protrude from the back side. It comprises a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protrusions protruding from opposite sides and extending in the front-to-rear direction, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens to the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, an arrangement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portions 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h with a semicircular surface that can hold a ring-shaped metal member 785e between it and the pivot support member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so that it can hold a magnet Mg between it and the pivot support member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a has an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and a female thread formed on its inner circumference. In other words, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is threaded into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported on the cylindrical protrusion 784a in a non-detachable manner.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. This positions the arc-shaped plate portion 784b closely facing the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state, limiting tilting displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This stabilizes rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted. A fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the anti-fall-off plate portion 776b and threaded into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, thereby supporting the linear plate member 784 on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidable along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion that holds the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to prevent it from moving up and down, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion that determines the left-right positioning of the metal rod 785a; details will be provided below.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the pivot member 785, but details will be discussed later.

The axial rotation members 785 are arranged in a pair on the left and right and are pivotally supported by the linear plate members 784. They consist of a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material in a generally cylindrical shape, a recessed groove portion 785b formed circumferentially at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a, and a bevel gear portion 785c arranged at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, which has bevel teeth (bevel gears) that mesh with the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783. It comprises: member 785c; end plate members 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of metal rod 785a and fixed to metal rod 785a; ring-shaped metal members 785e disposed around the metal rod 785a of end plate member 785d in a manner that raises it above end plate member 785d; and rotational position stabilization portions 785f protruding from the left and right inner sides of end plate member 785d, with metal screws threaded into internally formed female threads.

The metal rod 785a is positioned between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, with the protrusion portion 784e positioned to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with dimensions that allow it to slide relative to the protrusion portion 784e, while also being configured with dimensions that restrict left-right displacement relative to the protrusion portion 784e.

In other words, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left-to-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set shorter than the length of the gap between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the portion where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set longer than the length of the gap between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back side of the linear plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from moving left and right.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned to enter the positioning hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. With the bevel tooth member 785c partially inserted into the positioning hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

When assembled in this manner, the bevel tooth member 785c is positioned within the positioning hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front, and displacement toward the rear is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby achieving a fixed engagement.

However, the method for fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be secured using an adhesive or by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and threading a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread to fasten the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a, or by other methods.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to fit inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring it so that the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a slides against the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d is more likely to coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, reducing the load generated in the radial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a rectangular plate-shaped member and includes an insertion hole 786a through which a fastening screw threaded into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, a ring holding half 786b with a semicircular surface that can hold the ring-shaped metal member 785e between it and the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784, and a square box-shaped magnet holding half 786c that can hold the magnet Mg between it and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 786a from the rear side is threaded into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the pivot support member 786, the plate portion of the pivot support member 786 prevents the metal rod 785a from falling off to the rear side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right box-shaped members, one at the front and one at the back, with openings on the inside left and right. They are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the pivot member 785, and decorations consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be read in different ways are formed on the opposite sides.

That is, the covering member 787 comprises a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the protruding state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the backside thereof, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is positioned on the front side and the game is in a standby state for performance (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the backside thereof. Note that the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is positioned on the front side and the game is in a standby state for performance (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed from two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d. When assembled (see Figure 26), it is roughly box-shaped with open inner left and right sides. It has multiple extension portions 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and recessed portions 787d recessed between the extension portions 787c so as to retract to the left and right outward.

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are positioned close to each other when the covering members 787 are positioned close to each other (see Figure 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion that allows visibility of the circular portion located in the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778, the arc-shaped plate portion at the top center of the left and right of the upper elongated portion 775, and other portions when the covering member 787 is in a close proximity arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is configured so that, in response to the operation of the performance device 780, its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30). First, we will explain the mechanism that configures the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

Figures 57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the pivot member 785. Figure 57(a) illustrates the upside-down member 781 in a vertically oriented state (also referred to as an upright vertically oriented state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, while Figure 57(b) illustrates the upside-down member 781 rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in Figure 57(a). Note that, for ease of understanding, the end plate member 785d of the left-side pivot member 785 and the right-side pivot member 785 are omitted from Figures 57(a) and 57(b).

In the upright vertical position, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned so that it is inserted into the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see Figure 56). Furthermore, in the inverted vertical position, in which the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical position, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned so that it is inserted into the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see Figure 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio and lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced left and right while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the pivot member 785, and the amount of left and right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left and right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent; there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to provide an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves parallel to the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c in a front view, restricting the direction of displacement of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other cylindrical portion 783b. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions left and right along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in Figure 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced left and right by a length L1 until it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in Figure 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see Figure 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends).

Furthermore, the change in state from Figure 57(a) to Figure 57(b) causes a change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 to be 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in Figure 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the pivot member 785 (displaced upward in Figure 58(b)). Note that for ease of understanding, Figure 58(b) shows the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, transmitting the driving force and causing the axial rotation member 785 to rotate. As the up-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 57(a), the right-side axial rotation member 785 rotates backward, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 rotates forward.

In addition, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees. In other words, the angle by which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state in Figure 58(a) to the state in Figure 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement required for the abutting representative tooth to rotate to the arrangement of the adjacent tooth (the amount of displacement required for a 30-degree rotation, given that the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, and therefore the displacement accompanying the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c. As a result, the rotational orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 is maintained from the state shown in Figure 57(a) to the state shown in Figure 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the attractive force generated by the magnet Mg on the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see Figure 54) of the shaft rotation member 785.

In other words, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f, restricting the right-side shaft rotation member 785 from rotating backward, causing the right-side shaft rotation member 785 to receive a forward-rotation biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotation member 785 to rotate backward.

Furthermore, for the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is located in front of the end plate member 785d, just like on the right side, while the magnet Mg is located on the upper side, opposite to the right side (see Figure 55). As a result, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing the left-side axial rotation member 785 to receive a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c during the time it takes for the other cylindrical portion 783b to be displaced left and right by a length L1 from the state shown in Figure 57(a).

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c, absorbing the displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in Figure 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in Figure 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. Released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation begins, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, instantaneously increasing the rotational speed at the start of rotation. This increase in rotational speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see Figure 55) fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, thereby improving the dramatic effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg can delay the timing at which rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs relative to the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 begins to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, which receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg, consist of a pair, one above the other. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see Figure 52(b)). When the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (upper, see Figure 52(b)) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the closely spaced arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the closely spaced arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of rotational displacement (in both directions).

In other words, between the state shown in Figure 58(a) and the state shown in Figure 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond Figure 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

In this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same effect occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. As a result, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the pivot member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the pivot rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, during the rotation of the up-down inversion member 781, which starts from a vertically positioned state and ends in a vertically positioned state, the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 first increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and finally the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases again.

By causing linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 (see Figure 55). Next, we will explain the changes in the appearance of the covering member 787.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) chronologically illustrate the inversion operation of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. Figure 59(a) illustrates the performance device 780 in a vertically positioned upright state with the upside-down inversion member 781, Figure 59(b) illustrates the performance device 780 when the upside-down inversion member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertically positioned state, and Figure 59(c) illustrates the performance device 780 in a vertically positioned upside-down state with the upside-down inversion member 781.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see Figure 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is reversed 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see Figure 59(a)). This changes the decorative surface visible to the player (see Figure 59(c)).

The upside-down vertical position returns to the upright vertical position (see Figure 57(a)) by rotating the upside-down vertical member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). Therefore, the upside-down vertical position can be repeatedly switched between the state shown in Figure 59(a) and the state shown in Figure 59(c) each time the drive motor 782 (see Figure 56) is driven while reversing the direction so as to rotate the upside-down vertical member 781 180 degrees.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 57(a), the pivot member 785 also rotates 180 degrees by engaging with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right-side pivot member 785 rotates backward, and the left-side pivot member 785 rotates forward. In other words, the pair of pivot members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second minor decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first minor decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see Figure 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left-side covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right-side covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right sides, making it difficult for the player to recognize the content of the decorative surface, thereby reducing the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which also has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first minor decorative surface 787a2 (or the second minor decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see Figure 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement and from facing the player in the extended state, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on its placement, making it easier to avoid situations where the performance is excessively low compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (the space it occupies and the burden of hiding it well).

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see Figure 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is made of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, which limits the placement of the performance device 780 that can perform the rotational displacement. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing a rotational displacement will cause the decorative members, such as the right front plate member 710, left rear plate member 750, and front support member 760, which are arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a fixed to the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see Figure 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the pivot member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731, which causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, is controlled so that it can be executed on the premise that the output of the detection sensor 713 has determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to occur normally.

The extensions 787c are positioned close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, they are positioned facing the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 at the front and rear. Therefore, if the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c will collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extensions 787c are positioned close to each other creates the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as a single unit, and as this configuration is necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to linearly displace in the left-right direction by a length L1 before rotational displacement (see Figure 57). This linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension portion 787c to retreat from the front-to-rear position of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, thereby avoiding the problem of the extension portion 787c colliding with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772.

Furthermore, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) over length L1 while the covering member 787 is displacing left and right, and rotational displacement occurs over the remaining length L2, thereby keeping the amount of left and right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation small.

This reduces the attention drawn to the covering member 787 compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, making the rotational displacement less noticeable. Therefore, the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 can be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 begins to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs, for example, to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, thereby avoiding collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 59, the insertion hole 778c is positioned so that it is always hidden by the covering member 787. This prevents the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and prevents the fastening screw from reducing the visual effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, because the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Furthermore, because the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it tends to be visible in the dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the left and right decorations, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and stand out, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations on the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and it also simplifies the design of the illuminated board 778a.

As shown in Figure 59 (b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 moves linearly left and right during the reversal operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and even when the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down reversing member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are hidden so that they cannot be seen.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right elongated portions of the upper elongated portion 775 located at the front. Furthermore, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the circular plate portion of the upper elongated portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusing member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing the performance effect from being reduced by the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Referring back to Figure 26, the third operating unit 800 is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the standby state for performance, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see Figure 31) supported on the rear case 510, and is configured to be able to move up and down as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the up and down direction.

Figure 60 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 60 and 61 show the parts that make up the displacement of the third operating unit 800, and do not show the decorative members 870, 880 that serve as decorative parts arranged on the outside.

As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 comprises a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner circumference, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner circumference, a plurality of intermediate arm members 850 (five in this embodiment) rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force that displaces the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a cylindrical fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring; a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler-type sensor fixed with its detection groove facing toward the side that can receive the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840; a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861; multiple cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as cylindrical portions that non-detachably support the transmission gear 863; and multiple double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as double cylindrical portions that non-detachably support the load response gear 865.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-to-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner periphery when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and equipped with light-emitting means such as LEDs on the front side, an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) translucent decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material that can cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and configured to slide against the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is threaded into this female thread, thereby fastening the fixed cylindrical member 820 to the held member 810 so that it cannot rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through-hole on its inner periphery, and electrical wiring inserted through the through-hole in the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through-hole to the front side and connected to a connector located behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs: inner light-emitting units 823a, which are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices; and outer light-emitting units 823b, which are placed at 15 equally spaced locations around the circumference. The inner light-emitting units 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axes face forward, while the outer light-emitting units 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axes face radially outward (diametrically).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated portions 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged closely together at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixed to the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis. However, since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on a coaxial circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated onto the first decorative member 870 during rotation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and a cylindrical portion protruding rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion. The outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, allowing it to be slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, which is configured to rotate around it, is prevented. Furthermore, by arranging the sliding member 825 on the side with advantageous strength, namely the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange-shaped portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 being damaged or deformed by loads that occur during sliding or when sliding malfunctions occur (when displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equally spaced positions circumferentially around the main body 831 with their longitudinal lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linearly moving members 833 formed to allow the metal rods 832 to be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer portions of the linearly moving members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the circular flange portion 831a described above, a plurality of sliding ridges 831b extending rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal rods 832, and a plurality of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is configured to slide along the inner curved surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed with a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding ridge portion 831b is positioned at an angular midpoint between adjacent metal rods 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal rods 832 (a position offset by 180 degrees) from the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be absorbed by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is the portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central circular gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, relative rotation between the two is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central circular gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The linear motion member 833 comprises a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart and aligned in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear; a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 using the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b as a reference and is inserted into the rotating member 834; and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed circumferentially at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side that protrudes from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see Figure 28), and functions as a displacement control groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off radially outward by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside; details will be described later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and multiple cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but rather over the three-quarters circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on its inner periphery, and functions to fasten and secure the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by threading a fastening screw inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880; details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. By inserting the cylindrical portion 842a into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850 and threading a fastening screw into the female thread, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840; details will be described later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base-side rod portion 851 whose one end is journaled on the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 that is thickened toward the front side of the other end of the base-side rod portion 851, a tip-side rod portion 853 that extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base-side rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 that has gear teeth formed on the end of the tip-side rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that interfaces with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed with dimensions that allow the cylindrical protrusion 833a to pass through and rotate relative to each other; a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when it is inserted; and a bevel tooth part 854c that is formed in the shape of a bevel gear with the supported hole 854a as its central axis and that meshes with the bevel tooth part 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holder 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 non-detachably supported on the cylindrical protrusion 815 and meshed to transmit driving force via the drive gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central annular gear 864 and non-detachably supported on the double cylindrical protrusion 816, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the rotational load applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into its inner peripheral side. It is equipped with a transmission protrusion 864a that protrudes from the bottom plate portion toward the front side in a position and shape that corresponds to the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830 so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c, and a support annular portion 864b that protrudes from the bottom plate portion toward the front side in a coaxial double annular shape and is located on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In the assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recessed portion 831c, the rear end of the main body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a transition fit or interference fit. This allows the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 to rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by simply matching the positions of the transmission protrusions 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the orientation of the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864, allowing for quick assembly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864 are symmetrical in the direction of rotation (the same at 72-degree intervals), it is believed that there will be little impact from misalignment of the orientation of the inner rotating member 830 and the central circular gear 864 during assembly, so it is effective to space them equally.

If the intervals were unequal, the assembly process would require an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly. However, by utilizing the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be aligned.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. The torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that rotation of the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which it is allowed to rotate and a state in which it is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined tolerance is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with opposite transmission directions, allowing the torque limiter 866 to switch driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third operating unit 800, and omit the parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the above-mentioned inner rotating member 830, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), which can be seen by the player when the surface is facing forward.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent image or the like painted on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light using the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the positioning of the first covered portion 875, it is possible to vary the image or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display effect that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation occurs, so the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 comprises a second skeletal portion 881 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 is equipped with a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall out.

A metal screw is threaded into the second covering portion 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, ensuring the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the combined state (particularly in the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has figures, patterns, or character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the designs etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two, up to five) second covering portions 885 form a group, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined together, they are recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content perceived from the second covering portion 885 in a combined state does not change significantly even if the positioning of the second decorative member 880 in the rotational direction changes. In other words, the pattern does not have clear up, down, left, or right directions, and is designed so that the change in its external shape (in this embodiment, a circular shape) is not noticeable even when rotated.

For this reason, being able to firmly integrate multiple second covering portions 885 together improves the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visible to the player. In this regard, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, thereby improving the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is threaded and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view will also be reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw attracted to each magnet Mg2 is simply replaced with a metal screw threaded into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and because the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring, there is no change in the degree of attraction when they are integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This slightly weakens the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side, but this is intended to avoid any reduction in performance.

In other words, because each of the first covering portions 875 has an independent pattern or pattern painted on it, the degree of integration when combined is weak, and even if the positioning of the first decorative member 870 is slightly misaligned, there is no possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the pattern or pattern that is intended to be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance of the effects that utilize the pattern or pattern painted on the first covering portion 875.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, the positioning of the combined first covering portions 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with the lifting and lowering displacement (and then stopping), and vibrations that occur with the rotational displacement (and then stopping) as a single rotational movement or a switching rotational movement. This makes it possible to displace the first covering portion 875 in a manner that was not possible with conventional machines in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, thereby improving the dramatic effect of the performance provided by the first covering portion 875.

For the reasons described above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged closely together, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see Figure 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see Figure 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a), and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a), and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show, in chronological order, the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are shown in chronological order from rear and front views, showing the inner rotating member 830 rotating 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in Figures 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual combined state when viewed from the front (see Figure 66) (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "switching rotational movement"), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and therefore the inner rotating member 830 is permitted to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in its position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see Figure 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

Based on the configuration between the above-described components, the imaginary position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a. Since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, changes in the position of the supported hole 854a correspond to changes in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 displaces radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and simultaneously displaces circumferentially, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 similarly displaces radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and simultaneously displaces circumferentially. In other words, during the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 displaces 180 degrees circumferentially while also displacing radially.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position, and circumferential displacement can be maintained. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of dramatic effect during the switching rotation operation compared to when displacement is completed solely by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700).

In contrast, in the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700, a highly accelerated rotational operation is generated using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see Figure 58), thereby reducing the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the end of the outer displacement in the linear direction (see Figure 59(b)) is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of covering member 787 but not the end of rotation, the rotational speed of covering member 787 is increased, and even in situations where there is a continuous period of small left-right position change at the end of the outward left-right displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotational speed of covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect caused by the movement of covering member 787.

Because the switching rotation operation involves radial displacement, it is possible that a radial load will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 on the outer rotating member 840, potentially causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial load on the intermediate arm member 850 is generated equally at equal intervals (72-degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so the loads cancel each other out. This prevents the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 from shifting, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) during the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while also rotating in the circumferential direction. Therefore, to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be performed only when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

Furthermore, in conjunction with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 similarly displace radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displace circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, causing the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 to rotate around the metal rod 832 as their axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the imaginary position line 832F. Furthermore, the direction of rotation is set to be counterclockwise as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, as angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Because the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see Figure 60), the direction of rotation is set to be counterclockwise as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is oriented so that either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as a result of rotation through the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), which is the maximum value of angle θ31, the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle by which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of magnet Mg2 (see Figure 62) does not have any effect of slowing down the rotation of decorative members 870, 880 relative to the metal rod 832.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, a gap is created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, causing the attractive force to be lost.

As a result, the attractive force of magnet Mg2 is lost before rotational displacement around metal rod 832 begins, and there is no effect of slowing the rotation of decorative members 870, 880 around metal rod 832.

This reduces the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, allowing the drive motor 861 to be made smaller.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, during the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from a state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned with a reduced diameter and is capable of integral rotation is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see Figure 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see Figure 67(a)).

In other words, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state where it can rotate together with the decorative members 870 and 880, compared to when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, pivot the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870 and 880. However, the configuration described above reduces the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 begins to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, thereby preventing an excessive load from being placed on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 begins to rotate.

Furthermore, because the rotational displacement of decorative members 870, 880 around metal rod 832 occurs while they are shifted circumferentially when viewed from the front, the visibility of decorative members 870, 880 during rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the likelihood that the side surfaces of decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surfaces between first covering portion 875 and second covering portion 885) will be visible, improving the design freedom of the side surfaces of decorative members 870, 880.

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 forward and backward in sections. That is, by positioning the tip-side rod portion 853 and rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base-side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base-side rod portion 851 and the tip-side rod portion 853 and rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap front to back, thereby avoiding collisions during the switching rotation operation.

Furthermore, by positioning the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and rotation transmission portion 854 behind the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be positioned in front of or behind the extended arm portion 842 during switching rotation operations, thereby avoiding collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842.

Figures 64 to 67 illustrate a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individually combined state, see Figure 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is applied, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues in the same direction even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches the combined state from the individual combined state), a load that exceeds the tolerance of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the torque limiter 866's ability to maintain the position of the load response gear 865 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 will rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement will also be referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are combined and positioned close to each other.

As a result, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, and the integrated rotation operation can be performed while the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integrated rotation operation is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) can perform a switching rotation operation that involves radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that does not involve radially expanding displacement. While either operation can be performed in either drive direction, there is a priority order for the operations, and it is not possible to instantly perform any operation in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Furthermore, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) until the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be performed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this way, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotational direction of the drive motor 861.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is controlled so that it can determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it can drive and control the drive motor 861 in the appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing, in chronological order, an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813. As shown in Figure 68, the audio and lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reverse effects.

During a flip performance, an action including a switching rotation action is performed, and during a normal performance, an action not including a switching rotation action is performed. This is to prevent decorative members 870, 880 from colliding with surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned back on after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended, and then the rotation of the drive motor 861 is controlled. After the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid accidental collisions between the decorative members 870, 880 and surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in Figure 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see Figure 66(a))), and reverse rotation in Figure 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, collisions with surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched between a performance standby state and an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised or lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together as a unit while the lifting and lowering movement occurs.

Of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may be rotated together while the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered while the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are stopped from rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 only rotates in the forward direction, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as its initial position. By setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, we will explain the drive control during the reversal performance. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is extended. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 switches, indicating that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse. Driven in reverse, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to rotate in the same direction, a united state will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will begin to rotate together. After the united rotation begins, the outer rotating member 840 will also begin to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, causing the detected portion 844 to retract from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 will be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine from the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813 that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together.

After the integral rotation operation has begun, the drive motor 861 stops or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always occurs as an integral rotation operation. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, collisions with surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched between a performance standby state or an extended state at any time.

Since the drive motor 861 can only be driven in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, allowing the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from the reverse performance to the normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is first displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is extended. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 switches, indicating that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. The forward rotation causes the third operating unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 begins to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to retract from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and switching the output of the detection sensor 813. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation begins, the display transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal display are the same as those described for the normal display that preceded the reverse display.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine whether the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 is switched (integral rotation operation or switched rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from a state in which the integral rotation operation is continuing or a state in which rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

As a result, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot announcement will occur based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not change significantly depending on the rotational orientation of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the rotational orientation of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

As a result, unlike when the image in the united state differs depending on the rotational direction, the integral rotation operation to align the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, and the drive control up to the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this way, in this embodiment, both switching rotation and integral rotation can be achieved in both forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to when the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be achieved with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located. Electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and terminals are connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

Light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges out toward the front at the center of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion visible to the player at the center of the circle around which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined.

Light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated into the interior of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in Figure 69) located in front, illuminating the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state in which decorative member 870 is positioned at the front (see Figure 69) and a united state in which decorative member 880 is positioned at the front (see Figure 32), so that light LD1 can be switched between illuminating decorative member 870 and illuminating decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see Figure 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front by the plated portion 871a of the first skeletal portion 871, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 toward the front. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, effectively increasing the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when irradiated with the light LD1.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixed in position, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it. Therefore, the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the position of the decorative members 870, 880 can change as the decorative members 870, 880 rotate. For example, while the light LD1 may be irradiated onto the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may also be irradiated onto a position offset from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without countermeasures, the brightness of the first covering portion 875 due to the light LD1 is likely to change as the decorative members 870, 880 rotate, which may make it difficult to produce an effect in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the plated portion 871a, which is configured to reflect light LD1, is concave in shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and its center is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter of the circle on which the outer light-emitting element 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of its curvature radius, illuminating the area near the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the positioning of the plated portion 871a relative to the outer light-emitting portion 823b, the multiple light LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the area near the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be stably emitted near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, making it possible to view the first covering portion 875 with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first skeletal portion 871 is plated in the same manner as the plated portion 871a and includes an outer plated portion 871b that is positioned outside the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plated portion 871b, just like the plated portion 871a. However, because the outer plated portion 871b is positioned further back than the plated portion 871a, the degree of light reflected by the outer plated portion 871b can be reduced.

This prevents the light visible outside the first covering portion 875 from being too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is irradiated inside.

First, a gap VA1 is formed between the component edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the component edge 885a of the second covering portion 885, which is positioned opposite the component edge 875a, such that the internal structure can be seen in Figure 69. The outer plating portion 871b protrudes through this gap VA1 to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875, so that light LD1 that passes through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

Furthermore, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is positioned opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

The gap VA2 is formed primarily to avoid collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the metal rod 832 is sufficiently long and capable of guiding the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, gap VA2 is formed to ensure an assembly path for fastening screws that are inserted through skeletal portions 871, 881 and threaded into cylindrical protrusions 834b of rotating member 834 to fasten decorative members 870, 880 to rotating member 834.

Furthermore, the gap VA2 is formed for the third purpose of ensuring a light path for light that passes through the transparent portions of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is perceived as light that passes through equally spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

As a result, by rotating the decorative members 870 and 880 together, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light-emitting unit 823b (for example, by leaving all the light on), and it is possible to produce a lighting effect in which the light emitted radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 is visible as a rotating lighting mode.

In the combined state (see Figure 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light from light LD1 that is far from the optical axis (weak light) is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, making it possible to weaken the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885. On the other hand, because the light in the optical axis direction of light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light emitted radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to any color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged circumferentially within the frame of the second covering portion 885. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c has a light diffusion treatment formed on the inside. Therefore, light LD1 that enters the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, causing the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit light from its surface.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged circumferentially, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 appears to the player as a single unit.

As mentioned above, being able to firmly integrate multiple second covering portions 885 together can improve the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player, and this integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c appear to be continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 relative to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

This reduces the extent to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the back side comes into the player's field of view when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the combined state (see Figure 32), thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in a protruding state by itself in a combined state (see Figure 32), there are more gaps around the third operating unit 800 than when the other operating units 600, 700 are both in a protruding state (see Figure 33, F9), making it easier for the line of sight to pass through when viewing the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side of the third operating unit 800 will be visible, which can easily reduce the dramatic effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the combined state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface. Therefore, even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the combined state, the second covering portion 885 can be more easily seen than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

During the switching rotation operation that switches between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge portion 831b is intended to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is high, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, forcing the torque limiter 866 to increase its load transmission tolerance, which can easily hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to be able to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To that end, this embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to its rotation are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864, with gaps being left in other areas. This reduces the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce displacement resistance.

For example, because the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central circular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to prevent forward displacement relative to the central circular gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs this stopper function. In other words, the sliding member 825 may receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back surface of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion with an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and at its outermost diameter, a protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape with a semicircular cross section that protrudes toward the back surface.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-to-rear direction, reducing the contact area compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

Furthermore, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screws were to increase can be reduced accordingly.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixation, please refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by threading the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875, thereby fastening the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871. Then, the protruding portion 873 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 is inserted into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted externally), and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by threading the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885, thereby fastening and fixing the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881. Then, the protruding portion 883 extending from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 is inserted into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted externally), and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in conjunction with the linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

During the fixing process, the protrusions 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the position of the skeletons 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletons 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

Furthermore, since the skeletal portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, preventing the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this way, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linearly moving member 833, the portions that determine the position of the rotating member 834 on the linearly moving member 833 are formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834. This reduces the labor required for assembly and disassembly, unlike when the portions that determine the position on the linearly moving member 833 are formed on the rotating member 834 itself.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, removing the fastening screws that fasten the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834 not only releases the restriction on the position of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833, but also releases the restriction on the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833. This improves work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600-800 will be described with reference to Figures 70 and 71. Figures 70(a) to 70(d) and Figures 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically illustrate examples of combined operations of the operational units 600-800. Note that Figures 33 to 35 will also be referenced as appropriate in the description of Figures 70 and 71.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each performance surface 661a-661c of the first operating unit 600, each decorative surface 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each covering portion 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified using letters or the like.

That is, the first effect surface 661a displays the word "Normal" written vertically, the second effect surface 661b displays the word "Activated" written horizontally, and the third effect surface 661c displays the symbol "!" along the longitudinal direction.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Battle," the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

In addition, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covered portion 875, and five "circle" symbols are illustrated in the second covered portion 885.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600-800 is positioned in a standby state for effect (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in Figure 70 (b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotational motion of the third operating unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870, which is positioned adjacent to the second operating unit 700, can be successively replaced. Furthermore, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotational motion is continuing or after it has stopped, the third performance surface 661c can be protruded inside the center frame 86, making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of players who view the operation of the first operating unit 600.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 positioned adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This increases the attention to the first decorative member 870, which is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see Figure 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light onto the first decorative member 870, it is possible to turn on the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 that draws attention and turn off the other LEDs, thereby drawing attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually perceive the light and the first decorative member 870 as rotating along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where it is irradiated with light from that LED in sequence as it rotates together.

In the state shown in Figure 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing diagonally, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the effect of them being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71(a) is reached, the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate stage shown in Figure 70(b), and since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and it can now be visually perceived as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state, but as shown in Figure 71 (a), if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to extend further to the right than the right edge RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped, even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

In addition, this allows the player to see the second performance surface 661b as being positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), second performance surface 661b, and protruding decorative portion 652b being viewed as a single unit can be enhanced.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined to allow the player to distinguish the contents.

As shown in Figure 70(d), the player can identify the message "In trouble!?", and by stopping the drive of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus their attention on the subsequent movements of the second action unit 700, thereby drawing the player's attention to the second action unit 700.

For example, when announcing that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when the lottery result has not yet been notified or when announcing that the lottery result is a jackpot, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be reversed to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second operating unit 700.

In Figure 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, a second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in Figure 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as a single unit. Furthermore, the content of the characters is a continuation of the meaning of "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as a single unit.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see Figure 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as a single unit. Furthermore, the content of the characters is linked to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as a single unit.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to appear integrated with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This improves the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the positioning of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unified rotational movement. However, regardless of the state from which the switching rotational movement is performed, the player can visually recognize the same unified state (see Figure 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 is facing forward, the player cannot perceive the difference in the positioning of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify whether or not a jackpot has been hit by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced from the positioning of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display presentation (whether it is in the state shown in Figure 71(b) or the state shown in Figure 71(c)), the player's sense of anticipation regarding whether or not they will win the jackpot can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As mentioned above, each of the operating units 600-800 can be designed to have decorations that are visible either individually or in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed on each operating unit 600-800 are not complete for each operating unit 600-800 alone, but are designed to be decorations that are related to each other among the operating units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each operating unit 600-800 can be executed is affected by the positioning of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each operating unit 600-800 is executed at an inappropriate time, the component operations may collide and cause a malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed only after determining the positioning of the components of the other units.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The first operating unit 600 changes to an intermediate performance state, the state of the second operating unit 700 can be any, the vertical positioning of the third operating unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is controlled to be executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operating unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operating unit 600 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state can be performed when the state of the first operation unit 600 is arbitrary, the vertical positioning of the third operation unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotation operation is controlled to be performed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and rotation is not performed or only a united rotation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600-800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. Note that when describing the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 1 to 25. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

Figure 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 72 and Figure 5 above is that a light-transmitting window 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in Figure 72, the front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front panel made of a light-transmitting resin material, and a window section 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral area.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1, with a central area cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d, is attached to the front panel of the front design member 162. This configuration makes the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, allowing for differences in the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, thereby increasing the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed with the primary purpose of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, their line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162. The second purpose is to alleviate player complaints that they are unable to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that takes into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion with higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be placed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate, thereby changing the appearance of the front design member 162 for each light emission pattern of the light-emitting means such as LEDs. Alternatively, a pattern or picture may be directly painted on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening.

Furthermore, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in Figure 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band-like shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or it may be a shape that omits the portions extending outward to the left and right so that the horizontal width is equal to the horizontal width of the area that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Furthermore, while the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, this is not limited to this and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmitting area may be formed by a combination of multiple locations separated by lattice-shaped or ladder-shaped portions, the area may be divided into multiple small windows, or the area may be divided into multiple window portions arranged in a disorderly manner. The shape of the window portion may also be variable.

Furthermore, the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may have a surface shape with numerous irregularities, such as a surface shape created by embossing, or it may have numerous grooves or protrusions formed on the surface, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that ensures higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the area where the sealing member SL1 is formed) is sufficient. In addition to shapes similar to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above, various other shapes can be adopted.

Figure 73 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 73 and the content shown in Figure 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in Figure 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 that is formed above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub-window portion 162d2 are formed from a colorless, transparent resin material, maintaining high light transmittance. The shape of each portion is described in detail below.

The outer edge shape of the main window portion 162d1 in a front view is designed to be sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, and is V-shaped, sloping upward outward to the left and right to match the inclination of the second flow path component 335.

This allows the spheres flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained within the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the spheres flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see Figure 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the sphere passage hole 163b. In other words, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and visibility of the side wall portion 334a in particular is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a compared to when a design is required that is visible to players, such as when an attractive shape is required.

The outer edge of the secondary window portion 162d2 is designed to have a shape sufficient to ensure visibility of the sealing member 313 illuminated by light from the light-emitting means 351 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in Figure 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easier for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, the lighting timing of which is controlled based on the state of the balls flowing down, thereby providing the player with a comfortable game experience.

Figure 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16, and Figure 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 taken along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. Figures 74 and 75 differ from the contents shown in Figures 23 and 18 above in that a light-transmitting window 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in Figure 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), part of the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 located at the front position can be seen below the opening/closing plate 65b.

In contrast, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b when viewed from the direction shown in Figure 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

An excellent field of view toward the upper protrusion 376 is also ensured by the fact that the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

Furthermore, the fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of configuring the upper surface 314 as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it moves forward. When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed from above (at an angle) as shown in Figure 74 can be increased, which has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of making light visible through the light-diffusing surface 314c of the upper surface 314. However, the disadvantage is that the larger projected area of the upper surface 314 may increase the area over which balls flowing below it are hidden from the player's view.

In other words, while the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it moves forward, this is advantageous for the light effects, but may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby reducing the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path portion 336 from the second flow path portion 335, thereby improving the visibility of the ball flowing down below the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in Figure 74, when viewing the sorting device 300 from a downward perspective (angled perspective), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window portion 162d2. Therefore, without any countermeasures, the player will be forced to adjust the position or angle of their eyes so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable gameplay experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1, which serves as the optical axis of the light-emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window 162d2, and therefore some of the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the light-emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub-window 162d2.

Because the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, allowing the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light of the sealing member 313 reaches the sub-window 162d2, causing the sub-window 162d2 to glow red.

This makes it easy to see the difference between this and the colorless, transparent state of the sub-window 162d2 before the light reaches it, making it easier for the player to tell whether the light-emitting means 351 is lit or not. The sealing member 313 (or the wall on which the sealing member 313 is disposed) may also be provided with a light diffusion treatment. In this case, it is easier to make the sealing member 313 emit light evenly.

As shown in Figure 75, the straight line LL1 is positioned (at a height position) so as not to overlap with the spheres flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned above the range in which the spheres flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 could be positioned.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is positioned so that it does not overlap with the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned below the lower surface 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a rests.

Furthermore, as described above, the flow of the balls between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is hindered by the front design member 141 (see Figure 7), so the range of the balls flowing down is shifted to the left and right outside the left-right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, even for balls flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, they are prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (e.g., the play area), balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and balls flowing down the sorting device 300 (e.g., the third flow path component 336) on the straight line LL1, it is possible to prevent light from being reflected and refracted by the balls. This allows light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 to stably reach the secondary window portion 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the balls flow down.

Note that the placement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may be beneficial to the player, as it allows the sealing member 313 to remain difficult to see unless the player changes their line of sight.

For example, in a configuration where the sealing member 313 is always within sight, light enters the player's eyes every time the light-emitting means 351 emits light, which can be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light-emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where light from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fixed member 161 may be configured to have a light diffusion treatment in the area that intersects with the straight line LL1, thereby making it difficult for light to reach the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, it can be configured so that it is difficult to tell whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the player changes their line of sight from the state shown in Figure 74 to look directly at the seal member 313. Therefore, even if a player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, they can achieve this goal by maintaining the line of sight shown in Figure 74, thereby reducing the gaming burden on such players.

In this embodiment, the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window portion 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of its front and back surfaces is subjected to a light diffusion treatment, or that it has an air bubble inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, increasing the area of light visible through the sub-window 162d2. This makes it easier for players to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

Up to this point, we have explained the light emitted from the LEDs that make up the light-emitting means 351, which direct light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1. Next, we will explain the light emitted from the multiple LEDs that make up the light-emitting means 351, which are arranged in four locations on the left and right sides of the bottom row.

Figure 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. In Figure 76, the arrangement of the light-emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the inner left and right sides of the lowest row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the outer left and right sides of the lowest row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in Figure 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the inner light-emitting means 351c is positioned inside the light-diffusing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351c, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light-diffusing surface 332e, which is formed over an area extending to the left and right, is illuminated.

This light-emitting effect is performed on the rear side of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

As a result, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and a ball flows through the branching point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned on the front side of the light-diffusing surface 332e, which emits light in a range extending to the left and right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 (see Figure 75). Although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, they are positioned so that light near the optical axis can pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-to-rear and up-down directions.

As a result, a portion of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light-diffusing surface 340 (see Figure 75).

The light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire area of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 14), so by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336. This makes it easier to distinguish between spheres flowing down inside the third flow path forming portion 336 and out-spheres that pass through the outlet 71 (see Figure 75) and flow down the underside of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is located outside (above) the light diffusion surface 332e and inside the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light-emitting effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

As a result, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit and a ball passes through branch point BP1, the light-diffusing surfaces 319a and 333b above and in front of the ball will emit light, and the ball passing through branch point BP1 will be hidden by the light-diffusing surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to understand how the ball passed through branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, with the light diffusion surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 disposed above it (see Figure 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front to back, the light emitted from the light diffusion surface 314c also makes the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from an angle that looks at the light diffusion surface 333b from above (see Figure 74).

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, with the light diffusion surface 340 disposed below it, and this light diffusion surface 340 is formed on the lower back surface of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 14). Therefore, in addition to making it difficult to see the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, and as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, the ball blocks the light (light diffused by the light diffusion surface 340), creating a shadow that makes it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figures 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light-emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 333b, it is possible for the light to be obscured by the sphere. However, in this embodiment, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is disposed outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see Figure 76), thereby preventing the light from being blocked by the sphere disposed at the branch point BP1.

As a result, regardless of the flow pattern of the balls inside the sorting device 300, the light diffusion surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by illuminating the outer light-emitting means 351d. When the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17) located in front of it block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure is adopted to ensure that the balls flow smoothly downward, as a way to prevent light from being blocked by the balls placed at branch point BP1. This structure will be explained below.

When the ball reaches branch point BP1 and flows down, it flows straight down and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figure 20), and when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see Figure 18), it flows down to the left and right along the slope of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position and the ball flows down, the through-hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped portion 382 that supports the left and right outer ends of the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right. Therefore, balls that reach the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a are easily configured to flow down outward in the left and right direction.

This makes it easier to prevent balls that start to flow outward to the left or right along the slope of the ball guide portion 371b from flowing back inward to the left or right or bouncing after bridging to the through-hole edge portion 382a, thereby allowing the balls to flow down smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, it is impossible for a sphere to be placed behind the light diffusion surface 319a, and therefore it is unlikely that the light will be obscured by the sphere, regardless of the relative positions of the outer light-emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply positioned offset to the left and right; rather, the light-diffusing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b, which are positioned in front of them at different front-to-rear positions, are intentionally designed to have different positions relative to the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By differentiating the light-diffusing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches, the front-to-rear positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the cases where the inner light-emitting means 351c is illuminated and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is illuminated are described separately, and the explanation was given assuming that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off. However, in actuality, the light emission control of each light-emitting means 351c, 351d may not be performed one at a time, and control modes such as both being lit or both being turned off may also occur. Below, we will explain the light emission control patterns and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 appears in each case.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. To facilitate understanding, Figures 77(a) to 77(d) omit the illustration of the lines representing the shape of the light-diffusing surface, and each illustrates different combinations of the light-emitting means 351c and 351d being on and off, with the areas that glow brightly due to the light from the light-emitting means 351c and 351d being shown with a hatched pattern.

That is, Figure 77(a) shows a double-exit state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are extinguished, Figure 77(b) shows an inner-lit state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and the outer light-emitting means 351d is extinguished, Figure 77(c) shows an outer-lit state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is extinguished and the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit, and Figure 77(d) shows a double-exit state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are lit.

When both lights are off, as shown in Figure 77(a), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and although visibility behind them is ensured, the player is left with a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and out balls flowing down the far side (below) of the third flow path component 336.

In the internal lighting state, as shown in Figure 77 (b), the light diffusion surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing visibility of the outgoing balls flowing down the back (lower) side of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, because the light diffusion surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of spheres at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Furthermore, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b located in front of the light diffusion surface 332e are kept unilluminated, preventing the branch point BP1 from being obscured by light.

In other words, when the interior is lit, the area from the third flow path component 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the ball at the branch point BP1. Furthermore, because the light is lit on areas that require attention in grasping the flow pattern of the ball, the player is less likely to miss the areas of interest, reducing the player's stress while playing.

A light-diffusing surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 and see what is behind them.

When viewing through the front frame portion 333 to see what is behind, in the front-to-back direction, you must view the rear through two opposing side surfaces on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333. This means that there are many plates that need to be seen through, making it even more difficult to see the rear side.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through the front frame portion 333 to the back side with a line of sight that tilts diagonally from the inside left and right to the outside left and right (a line of sight that tilts from the center left and right position on the front side toward the normal detection sensor SE12).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed along the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (the sides facing the partition plate portion 338) are located along this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-back direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the exterior lights are on, as shown in Figure 77(c), the light-diffusing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, because the light diffusion surface 340 formed on the rear (bottom) side of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 can be improved. In other words, when the external lighting is on, improving the visibility of the balls flowing in the front has the effect of attracting the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in Figure 77(d), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide area. The lighting situation is a combination of the internal lighting state and the external lighting state, and the effects of both can be achieved, but they do not necessarily complement each other with beneficial effects.

For example, because the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the characteristic of the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 being hidden by light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various control modes for turning on and off the light-emitting means 351c, 351d are exemplified. For example, in round play during a jackpot game where there is a possibility that a ball will enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 76), control may be exercised to configure an inner lighting state to make it easier for the player to notice the branch point BP1, and in other round play, control may be exercised to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to brighten the overall scene.

Also, for example, control may be performed in a manner that alternates between a both-on state and a both-off state regardless of the type of round game.

Furthermore, the timing for lighting the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to round play, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light-emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up after a reach-up state is reached during symbol fluctuation, or the light-emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning slots 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67.

Returning to Figures 73 and 75, we will now provide a detailed explanation of the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls near the specific winning opening 65a. As shown in Figure 73, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b located on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outer sides.

As a result, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open or closed state, balls that have deviated to the left or right outside the opening/closing plate 65b and landed on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b can be diverted to the left or right outside (the side opposite the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is located), thereby preventing balls that land on the extension portion 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, the majority of balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll along the inner rail 61, preventing balls from bouncing up (highly bouncing) near the outlet 71. This prevents bouncing up balls from obscuring the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path component 336 located behind it, reducing visibility.

As shown in Figure 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed as a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. Meanwhile, the second flow path component 335 slopes downward toward the left-right center (toward the partition plate portion 338).

As a result, the closer you get to the center on the left and right, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path component 335 becomes, making it easier to distinguish between a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and a ball flowing from the second flow path component 335 toward the third flow path component 336.

As shown in Figure 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is shaped to funnel all balls placed on its upper surface into the specific winning opening 65a without any leakage, but various design features have been incorporated to prevent the flow of balls from being delayed.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the balls flowing rearward from the upper surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the balls inward to the left and right. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate that extends horizontally, but rather is formed as a plate that extends in a downward sloping direction to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical displacement of the balls flowing from the opening and closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

In other words, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned further rearward as it moves inward on the left and right, and extends in an inclined direction so that the left and right inner portions, where a ball being handed over to the receiving member 163, whose floor is lower than the opening and closing plate 65b, come into contact, are positioned lower than the left and right outer ends, where a ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.

This stabilizes the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height across the entire length of the ball), allowing the ball to be guided smoothly. In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed relative to the floor surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 so that it can contact the ball at the center height across the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b (the portion near the base end of the rotation) and the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 is reversed midway. That is, at the center position in the left-right direction where the lower surface 163a is at its highest height, the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface 163a slopes downward as it moves outwards, and is configured so that the top and bottom are reversed at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outer left and right sides in the width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 serves as a position for switching the flow pattern of the balls between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed to be flush with the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (directly above the front frame portion 333 in Figure 74).

In the left and right inner range of switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the vertical position of the ball's rolling surface inhibits the ball from rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163, while the ball can roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the center of the opening/closing plate 65b, hits the receiving member 163 (on its inner rear surface), and bounces forward again, once the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll, it is possible to prevent the ball from climbing off the opening/closing plate 65b and onto the receiving member 163.

In addition, the ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but rather, when the ball begins to come into contact with the lower surface 163a, the ball is forced outward to the left and right along the left-right slope of the lower surface 163a.

Furthermore, the front design member 141 (see Figure 7) prevents balls from falling near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b, making it difficult for balls to bounce. However, balls may still bounce due to collisions with each other.

In the left and right outer range of switching position EP1 (the range outside the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 (the side where ball passage hole 163b is located)), the vertical position of the ball rolling surface inhibits the ball from rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening and closing plate 65b, while the ball can roll with little resistance from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface 163a experiences a forward velocity due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the gaming machine, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, thereby preventing the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allowing the ball to flow down smoothly, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, when the ball rolls backward from the area between the pair of switching positions EP1, it does not roll backward and then switch to a left-right flow, but rather rolls along a diagonal straight line connecting the area between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of flowing in a path that intersects at right angles, as in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions, the ball can flow along the hypotenuse that connects the ends of a front-to-back straight line and a left-to-right straight line, one end of which is located in the same position, thereby shortening the ball's rolling path (this is equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides of a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backward across the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, by configuring the balls to flow forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, as in this embodiment, it is possible to more easily avoid the flow of balls becoming stagnant even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in Figure 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the ranges on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see Figure 16), but has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward to leave space in front of the range on the left and right central side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface 163f is designed to raise the position of the lower surface 163a, thereby reducing the possibility of balls getting stuck in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1, and the upper surface 163f ensures that there is enough vertical space for placing the balls.

This prevents ball jamming in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1, and prevents the ball from getting caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path component 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and is disposed in a position that abuts the ball at the center height of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path component 335 (a position 5.5 mm higher than the bottom of the second flow path component 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position that is off the center height of the ball, allowing the ball to roll more smoothly compared to when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If reduced visibility of branch point BP1 is acceptable, the thickness of symmetrical protrusion 161f can be made approximately the full length of the sphere to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from coming into contact with the sphere at a position that is off the center height of the sphere.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in more detail. Figure 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, state switching device 360, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380. To facilitate understanding, in Figure 78, the middle member 330 is shown as transparent using imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370, which is arranged below the middle member 330, can be seen through the view.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides back and forth at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side of the opposing discharge hole 337, even when in the front position (see Figure 78), maintaining a gap. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the goal of preventing the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11, while also preventing the front end of the slide displacement member 370 from being scraped or deformed by coming into contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that it shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent balls from becoming trapped and remaining between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337.

In other words, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so the load acting on the ball has a directional component directed outward to the left and right, allowing the ball to be pushed outward to the left and right. This helps prevent ball clogging.

Next, referring to Figure 79, we will explain the innovations used to guide the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Because the player's profit can change depending on the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 must be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

Figure 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, Figure 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and Figure 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. In the explanation of Figure 79, reference will be made to Figures 13 and 14 as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 79 (a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer edges, allowing balls to flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of balls rolling along this inclined surface, the slide displacement member 370 is configured to suppress changes in its posture that would change the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in Figure 79 (a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at both the left and right ends but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-shaped portion 382 of the lower member 380. As a result, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b, which are divided into left and right by the recessed portion 372, can be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported at both ends), thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

In other words, even if the loads exerted by the balls on the pair of left and right ball guide sections 371b are different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on them), each ball guide section 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, thereby preventing left and right tilting of the ball guide sections 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372, restricting upward displacement. In other words, the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from floating up or tilting backward.

This makes it easier to maintain the proper posture of the sliding displacement member 370, reduces displacement resistance to forward and backward displacement, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-shaped portion that protrudes forward from the base end of the upper protrusion portion 376, and its upper surface, which allows the ball to roll, is formed as a slope that slopes downward toward the left and right outward.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of hemispherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to make point contact.

As mentioned above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, on which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes left and right. Therefore, the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is resolved into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can displace the sliding displacement member 370 left and right (a direction that intersects with the front-to-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

In this case, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 and the protruding portion 383 of the sliding displacement member 370, as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also increases the likelihood of contact friction, which could result in functional problems.

For example, when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction while a ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b, excessively large contact friction may result in poor forward/backward displacement (e.g., no displacement occurring).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the protrusion 383 are configured to make point contact, thereby reducing the area over which frictional force occurs and minimizing contact friction. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be smoothly displaced in the forward and backward directions even when the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In particular, the forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 when a ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from one in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 to one in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, so by executing this displacement operation properly, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantages.

Furthermore, by increasing the displacement speed of this displacement operation, it is possible to change the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the sliding displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) shows the state in which the ball rests on the sliding displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) shows the state in which the sliding displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), arrows indicate examples of the rotation direction of the ball.

As shown in Figure 80 (a), the ball that rolls rearward and reaches the sliding displacement member 370 rotates in a forward direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 13) is driven so that the sliding displacement member 370 moves forward or backward to the rear position while the ball is resting on the sliding displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the sliding displacement member 370 acts to reverse the ball's rotation direction (guiding direction) (backward rotation direction).

This suppresses the rotation of the ball, making it easier for the ball to be affected by the force of gravity and allowing it to fall straight down. Therefore, when the sliding displacement member 370 is actuated while a ball is resting on it, the ball can be configured to easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has the function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 not only functions to guide the ball toward the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is also configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the position of the sliding displacement member 370, which is located upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear, the path configuration causes a ball that contacts the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. At this time, the curve at the end of the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 is a roughly arc-shaped structure with a longer front-to-rear width than its vertical width (see Figure 18), so the ball that contacts it is subjected to a load whose downward component is greater than its forward component. This prevents the ball that contacts the long front-to-rear protrusion 317 from bouncing back in the front-to-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the direction in which the ball flows downward is determined by the shape of the sliding displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curve.

Here, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a ball flowing in the forward/backward direction collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with full force, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backward by the load of the collision, potentially switching to a state where the ball can pass through to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the longitudinal protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, thereby correcting the ball's velocity direction downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is primarily downward, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being pushed backward.

In addition, because the load applied by the ball in the direction of displacing the sliding displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 13)) for maintaining the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that biasing force can also be reduced, resulting in improved design freedom for the electromagnetic solenoid 361.

Even when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is positioned at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 contact the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, directing the ball's momentum downward and outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the front-to-rear long protrusions 317 direct the ball's momentum downward. This reduces the ball's forward/backward velocity, stabilizing its position due to the inertia of its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow backwards even with the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, contact between the ball and the upper protrusion 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position at which it would contact the longitudinal protrusion 317. However, when the ball is lowered enough to contact the upper protrusion 376 (see Figure 80(a)), the point of contact with the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, which is located at a lower position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a longitudinal load from the upper protrusion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to climb from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, thereby reducing the degree of backflow of the ball.

Furthermore, the front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate 338 side is formed at an acute angle, so the flat surface does not collide head-on with the ball in the front-to-rear direction (see Figure 78). In other words, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-to-right direction and small in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows balls that come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid situations where the ball gets caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction, when the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position with a ball positioned at the branch point BP1.

Referring back to Figures 78, 79(b), and 79(c), the explanation will be given below. Because the sliding displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the sliding displacement member 370 will be displaced in a forward tilting direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion where the upper and lower protrusions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides in the front-to-rear direction, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 across that front-to-rear width. This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, because the upper and lower protrusions 374 are long in the front-to-rear direction, when a load is applied that tilts the sliding displacement member 370 forward, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 is prevented from concentrating at one point. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the sliding displacement member 370 (increasing its rigidity).

Furthermore, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where a ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front surface of the protruding portion 378a abuts against the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338 does not have a light-diffusing surface, and the surfaces that are arranged opposite the protruding portion 378a at the front and rear and can abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This allows for stable positioning of the sliding displacement member 370 in the front position.

The lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned inside the recessed portion 378, so the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front thick portion of the protruding portion 378a.

In this way, because the driving force is transmitted to the center of the sliding displacement member 370 in the left-right direction, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a balanced manner. In other words, it is easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in its position in the rotational direction around the vertical axis when displacing in the forward/backward direction.

Furthermore, the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to correct the position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the rotational direction around the vertical axis.

Here, if the position of the sliding displacement member 370 is maintained or restored by contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion 372a is small, so a load is applied locally, which may reduce the durability of the hemispherical protrusion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the sliding displacement member 370 has a rotational positional deviation about the vertical axis before the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the sliding displacement member 370 as the front surface of the protrusion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be corrected to the correct position.

The partition plate portion 338 contacts the protrusion portion 378a to align the sliding displacement member 370 when it is displaced in the forward/backward direction, and also functions as a portion that bears the load applied to the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b generates a load that causes the sliding displacement member 370 to change position in a forward tilting direction, and the protruding portion 378a begins to displace (displace in a forward tilting direction) within the allowable gap of the sliding displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, suppressing displacement of the protruding portion 378a and thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

Next, we will provide a detailed explanation of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800, focusing on areas that have not been fully explained. First, we will provide a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600, focusing on the rotating member 620.

Figure 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and Figure 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in Figure 81(a).

Figure 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 82 and 83 show the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which moves along the guide slot 616, positioned at the right end of its movement range.

As shown in Figures 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed with an asymmetrical shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 are explained below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 has a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat sides that receive a load when stopped. The first side surface 621a, the second side surface 621b, and the third side surface 621c are formed in order from closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that allows for surface contact with the base-end protrusion 617a, which protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (its shape is designed in relation to the base-end protrusion 617a). The displacement range of the rotating member 620 is defined by the base-end protrusion 617a restricting the displacement of the first side surface 621a, thereby defining the range of displacement of the rotating member 620 (see Figure 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displacement range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is shaped to be able to abut on the tip-side protrusion 617b, which protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (its shape is designed in relation to the tip-side protrusion 617b). The displacement range of the rotating member 620 is defined by the second side surface 621b being restricted by the tip-side protrusion 617b (see Figure 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displacement range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the side of the pivoting member 620 that is displaced upward, and is shaped so that it can abut against the rectangular box portion 618, which is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (its shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the range of displacement of the pivoting member 620 (see Figure 40 for the pivoting member 620 at the end position of its displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts against a corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, restricting displacement. In particular, multiple abutment points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming multiple contact points in this way is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of contact across multiple points, and to reduce deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the load in the front-to-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 across multiple points.

Examples of longitudinal loads that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward direction caused by the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load due to inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward tilting direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the tubular portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load acting at the contact point decreases the further the contact point that receives the load is from the tubular portion 622. With the goal of reducing the load acting at the contact point, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the tubular portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d recessed in the direction away from the drive motor 631 to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e that is thickened to include the area that includes the recessed portion 621d and that abuts against the base-end protrusion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

The base end of the rotating member 620 is narrow due to the formation of the recessed portion 621d, which could potentially cause breakage due to impact loads without countermeasures. However, the formation of the thickened portion 621e offsets the impact of the recessed portion 621d on strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Furthermore, by forming the thickened portion 621e in a range that includes a location where it can come into contact with the base-end protrusion 617a, the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base-end protrusion 617a can be improved.

Figure 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 84 and 85 show the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three or more times longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Making the extension portion 634b sufficiently long serves structural purposes in addition to its use in detection.

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, a load may be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward tilt direction. Without countermeasures, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-rear direction, potentially resulting in malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension portion 634b, which is positioned opposite the back surface of the fixed means 610 and is formed with a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, can withstand the load applied from the extension portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the cylindrical portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 over a wide angular range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (ensuring a large area over which the load is generated). This reduces the load received per unit area, preventing damage to the extension portion 634b and suppressing the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b provides structural advantages, while the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), the rotating member 620 will reach the terminal position on the initial position side (see Figure 40) due to loads such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each component is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating component 620 toward its terminal position on the initial position side. Not only is the inertial force generated by the rotational displacement of the rotating component 620 itself, but the inertial force generated by the rotational displacement of the supported component 640 and the second decorative rotating component 660 as they rotate clockwise around the axis O1 in rear view also occurs in a direction that displaces the rotating component 620 toward its terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating component 620 counterclockwise in rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which in this embodiment is the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a that constitute the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644, and is positioned at a position spaced apart to the left and right from the vertical position of the axis O1 that serves as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a.

As a result, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are subjected to a load due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 in a direction that rotates them counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625, and a load in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from behind is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear tooth portion 625. In other words, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, which is a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 toward the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the rotational load caused by the weight of the front rotating member 652, a load that rotates the rotating member 620 is generated even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized.

As a result, even if the drive motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized when the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 as shown in Figure 85 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will continue due to the load described above, allowing the rotating member 620 to reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see Figure 40).

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 are rear views of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 show in chronological order the rotational movement of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

Note that Figure 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 85, Figure 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 83, and Figure 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The following describes the arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a in the dish-shaped lid portion C2. The electrical wiring 618d, whose end is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618, is arranged to pass through the opening C2a and enter the second decorative rotation member 660.

Electrical wiring 618d is arranged to bypass the underside of partition 619, which protrudes from front cover member 612 toward base member 611 (see Figure 39), and enter opening C2a. Electrical wiring 618b is configured with a length that takes into account the movement trajectory of dish-shaped cover portion C2, which includes opening C2a, and is arranged between connector 618c and opening C2a so that it bends under its own weight.

The partition 619 comprises pillar-shaped portions 619a formed at both the upper and lower ends, and a long, protruding plate-shaped portion 619b that connects the pillar-shaped portions 619a. The pillar-shaped portion 619a and the upper plate portion 619b abut against the front side of the base member 611.

A female thread is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is threaded through an opening drilled in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and front cover member 612. In other words, the partition portion 619 not only serves to limit the placement position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also ensures the rigidity of the base member 611 and front cover member 612.

Next, we will explain the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d, focusing particularly on the movement of the opening C2a. First, we will explain the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 moves downward in the time sequence of Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

When moving from the performance standby state (see Figure 86(a)) to the state where the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 86(b)), the vertical position of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the position of the opening C2a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This allows the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a to be positioned away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 begins to fully descend, preventing the electrical wiring 618d from becoming pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In particular, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see Figure 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so that it faces the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This prevents the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, so even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition 619, problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken can be avoided.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, while the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is being displaced downward, the orientation of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise in rear view. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, intentionally creating downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d. This ensures the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself while avoiding unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slack in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough so that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b while the first operating unit 600 is in operation. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and is subjected to a load, even without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see Figure 88), the extension portion 634b is positioned away from the connector 618c (positioned on the opposite side of the connector 618c relative to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634). This allows for a large area to be secured for placing the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, thereby improving the design freedom for the length of the electrical wiring 618d.

Next, we will focus on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 88. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 undergoes upward displacement in the time sequence of Figure 88, Figure 87(b), Figure 87(a), Figure 86(b), and Figure 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is raised, from the lower end position (see Figure 88) until the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the partition portion 619, the opening C2a faces downward and does not face toward the partition portion 619. This allows the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to be raised while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a gradually rotates while maintaining its downward-facing position (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is aligned along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) (see Figure 87(a)).

Then, with the dish-shaped lid portion C2 sufficiently spaced away from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so that it enters (is housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This prevents the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also reduces the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the placement of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the relative positioning of the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the placement of the electrical wiring 618d and preventing the electrical wiring 618d from being placed between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the gap between them narrows, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, compared to when the electrical wiring 618d is positioned at an arbitrary location, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be positioned close to each other, thereby improving the degree of freedom in the placement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

Furthermore, the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted not by using a separate component such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a in the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As mentioned above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a component used to fasten and secure the first decorative rotation member 650 to the main body member 651, but it is also used to restrict the placement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for specialized components, such as cable ties, to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike cable ties, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be positioned on the appropriate side corresponding to the placement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from becoming taut or bent.

In this embodiment, opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110°. Because opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion of electrical wiring 618d (such as a connection terminal) that passes through opening C2a can be improved.

Next, we will explain the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d, which is located closer to the front than the opening C2a. Figure 89 is a front oblique view of the first decorative rotation member 650 and the second decorative rotation member 660.

In Figure 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and wire receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electric decorative board 662 and wire retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown in solid lines, and to facilitate understanding, the box-shaped member 661 is shown in imaginary lines so that the interior can be seen.

Figure 89 also illustrates an example of the arrangement of electrical wiring 618d, showing the dish-shaped lid portion C2 with an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655, with one wire connected to a terminal on the illumination board 653 (see Figure 41) and the other wire connected to a terminal on the illumination board 662.

As shown in Figure 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is equipped with a long wiring insertion hole 663a drilled in the shape of an elongated hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b drilled on either side of the insertion hole 663a as through-holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, so the wiring retaining plate 663 can prevent the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 (see Figure 39) from falling off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is threaded into the female threads formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This secures the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and the function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 also has the function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in Figure 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes through the inside of the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, where it is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by being clamped. In this embodiment, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 is not a full rotation or more, but rather a rotation of less than half a rotation (approximately 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so the second decorative rotation member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being twisted off.

When the second decorative rotation member 660 rotates, the load (torsional load) applied to the electrical wiring 618d is thought to be greater near the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a, where twisting is more likely to occur. However, in this embodiment, the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a is formed in an elongated hole shape, and the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being clamped within the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a, so displacement of the electrical wiring 618d within the elongated hole shape is permitted.

As a result, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs on the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the elongated wiring insertion hole 663a. This improves the durability of the electrical wiring 618d.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a in the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described. Because the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 twists in the rotational direction of the main body member 651. In other words, as the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction, a counterclockwise twist occurs when viewed from behind.

As the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d due to twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while displacing up and down along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time sequence from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to a state in which there is a small amount of slack.

In response to this, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as an operation that changes the state of the electrical wiring 618d from a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is located on the rear side (main body member 651 side) (see Figure 89) to a state in which the terminal is located on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electrical wiring 618d is pulled toward the front side.

In other words, in the time sequence from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the state of the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 is largely loose (the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is located on the rear side) to a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is little loose (the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the amount of slack is reversed (balanced) between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This reduces the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d as the first operating unit 600 operates.

The following explains the relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d located inside the main body member 651 and the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d located between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655.

In the time-series operation shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 twists counterclockwise when viewed from behind, while the portion of the electrical wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 twists in the rotational direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In other words, they twist in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the first operating unit 600 is designed to minimize twisting of the electrical wiring 618d when it is in a standby state, and to maximize twisting of the electrical wiring 618d when it is in the extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause problems (performance standby state, see Figure 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is intentionally left slack, reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.On the other hand, in a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extending state, see Figure 88), the rotational movement of the main body member 651, wiring receiving member 655, and illumination board 662 maximizes twisting, thereby suppressing slack in the electrical wiring 618d (suppressing displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is created, and a state in which twisting reduces slack and prevents contact between surrounding components (e.g., extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d.

In another embodiment, in the time-series operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured to be reversed (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d caused by the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the torsional deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, we will explain the characteristics of the decorative overhang 652b during operation of the first operating unit 600. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b), and 92 are schematic front views showing the elongated guide hole 616, rectangular box portion 618, and decorative overhang 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and rectangular box portion 618 are illustrated schematically, and the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 are omitted for ease of understanding, and the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order.

Figure 90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 for performance (see Figure 40), Figure 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), Figure 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 43), Figure 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which displaces along the elongated guide hole 616, is positioned at the right end of the displacement range (see Figure 82), and Figure 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 45).

In the performance standby state (see Figure 90(a)), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. This allows the protruding decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see Figure 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see Figure 2) in the performance standby state, which reduces the visibility of the protruding decorative portion 652b since the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73.

On the other hand, if the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, and the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced downward, the protruding decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the protruding decorative part 652b changes prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b (see Figures 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction around the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the protruding decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, this change in posture causes the protruding decorative portion 652b to retreat from a position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see Figure 91(a)), after which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 652b begin to move downward in earnest.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. During the downward displacement, the axis O1 moves in a direction (to the right) approaching the rectangular box portion 618 in accordance with the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 (see Figure 91 (b)), and therefore there is a possibility that the protruding decorative portion 652b may collide with the rectangular box portion 618.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface that conforms to the shape of the elongated guide hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the point where the elongated guide hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, i.e., to the right of the right end of the elongated guide hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind: avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 moves downward, the posture of the protruding decorative part 652b continues to change, allowing the protruding decorative part 652b to be displaced in a direction retracting from the rectangular box part 618. In this embodiment, when moving from Figure 91(a) to Figure 91(b), the leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the protruding decorative part 652b is designed to be equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the protruding decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In the state shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by changes in the posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in opposite directions and cancel each other out, so the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b is kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction, so the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, even though the posture change of the protruding decorative part 652b always involves a rotational movement around the axis O1, it appears to the player that the protruding decorative part 652b is being guided to make small left-right displacements (narrow displacement trajectories) in the up-down direction from Figure 90(a) to Figure 91(b), and to make large left-right displacements from Figure 91(b) to Figure 92.

Therefore, it is possible to create a difference between the structure (component shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

In other words, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be made to appear to the player as if it were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in an area where the width is narrow and sufficient left-right displacement would not be possible, such as the left and right sides of the center frame 86 (see Figure 30), the player can be made to see an unexpected displacement popping out to the left and right, thereby increasing the attention paid to the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of axis O1 has been compared with the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, axis O1 is a rotation axis that is part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis, has the same meaning as the left-right displacement of axis O1. Therefore, the above explanation can also be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Figure 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. Figure 93 shows a cross-sectional view of a plane passing through the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Figure 93, the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, with gear teeth 654a meshing with the intermediate gear 644 at the point where opening 645a is formed and communicates.

As shown in Figure 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. This allows the wiring retaining plate 663 to restrict axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is positioned with a small gap between the step formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a at the axial base end (upper side in Figure 93) and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and stabilizes the positioning of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is threaded into the female threads formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This secures the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together.

As shown in Figure 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore positioned closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) in the front-to-back direction than the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is positioned closer to the opening 511a (see Figure 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is positioned in the front-to-back direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it overlaps the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion to the player that the display area is expanded to the right.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (see, for example, Figure 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 and is easy to view independently of the display of the third pattern display device. This, in turn, accentuates the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the front side of the third pattern display device 81, appear to the player as part of the display (creating an illusion).

In other words, by providing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the degree of distinction of the other components (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b) is reduced. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is made from hard resin and its shape cannot be changed mid-way. However, by controlling the light-emitting aspects (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means, such as LEDs, mounted on the illumination board 653, it is possible to change the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light-emitting means, such as LEDs, arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the video displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it overlaps with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion to the player that the display area is expanding to the right.

Next, we will again provide a detailed explanation of the second operating unit 700. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the up/down displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during sliding (sliding in the forward/backward direction at an angle), but is designed to cause the displacement to occur smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but rather of a combination of vertical displacement and forward and backward displacement.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740, which is connected to the pivoting arm member 720, is guided by the metal bar 702 at its left end so that it can move up and down in the longitudinal direction (up and down) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, a left rear plate member 750 and a decorative blind member 768 are also positioned in front and behind the lifting plate member 740, preventing the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front and back direction. This makes it possible to restrict the movement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up and down direction.

The right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivoting arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by fixed members (front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see Figure 54). This prevents the right end of the lifting plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-to-rear direction, and limits the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up-and-down direction.

The performance device 780, supported by the lifting plate member 740, is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see Figure 50) so that it can move in the forward and backward directions. In this way, to achieve the diagonally tilted sliding movement in the forward and backward directions, the guidance for the displacement of the components of the lifting plate member 740 and performance device 780 is configured separately for the direction of gravity and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration that guides the device in the forward and backward directions at an angle.

The extension state of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 94 and 95 is a state in which it can be controlled to perform a displacement (see Figure 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787. In other words, in this embodiment, in other extension states (for example, the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 33)), the second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to cause a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are configured to be positioned so that they overlap the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750. This improves the degree of freedom in the placement of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750.

The following describes the ingenuity in the configuration of the performance device 780 in relation to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, the drive motor 782 (see Figure 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the performance device 780 (a position where its center is located directly above the center of the insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see Figure 95) of the second operating unit 700, which can perform a displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the left-right position of the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right.

In this way, while the right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported solely by the pivoting arm member 720, which allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724, acting as a support position, to be displaced left and right, when it is anticipated that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to change, that is, when performing a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 can be set to the same position as the center position of the performance device 780 or to the right, thereby stabilizing the position and posture of the performance device 780.

Note that the control to execute the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the standby state of the second operating unit 700 and place the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate operating state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate operating state.

As shown in Figure 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so that it overlaps with the inner ends of a set of front support members 760 when viewed from the front to the back. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see Figure 54) supported by the front support members 760 to be hidden from view by the player, preventing the player from realizing that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front to the back direction by being aware of the position and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is visible overlapping in a left-right line with the fixedly positioned three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in a front view (see Figure 94). In this state, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are positioned along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 in a front view, spanning the left-right length of the lower edge.

On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, there is a board with an LED fixed to the front side, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED can be used to create an illumination effect for the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This illumination effect can make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or make the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be brightened by light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to function both as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see Figure 54) and as a member that works together with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to create a light-emitting effect.

As shown in Figure 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that covers the area behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and away from the rear of the light diffusing member 778b (the area to the left), with a gap on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a concealing member formed across the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between it and the horizontal member 742. In other words, the electrical wiring for supplying power to the performance device 780 is guided from behind the concealing decorative member 768, through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742, toward the performance device 780, and connected to the drive motor 782, illumination board 778a, detection sensor 778d (see Figure 56), etc.

At this time, not only is the covering cover 742a placed in front of the electrical wiring, but the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are also placed overlapping each other, which makes it easy to block the player's line of sight and makes it easy to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, by placing the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally provided for light effects, in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of the covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, because the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the front-to-back direction when in the standby state (see Figure 31) or intermediate state (see Figure 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

In consideration of this, in this embodiment, the formation range of the horizontal member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. This allows the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusion member 778 to conceal the electrical wiring, preventing the electrical wiring from being visible to the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, or extended state).

Figures 96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. Figure 96 shows the up-down inversion member 781 in a horizontal position, with a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, while Figure 97 shows the up-down inversion member 781 in an inverted vertical position (see Figure 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed to have the same shape, but each has a curved portion 783d that curves upward from the lower surface when the inverted member 781 is in a horizontal position. The curved portion 783d is curved so that it protrudes in a direction retracting from the drive gear 782a to avoid collision between the intermediate arm members 783 and the drive gear 782a when the inverted member 781 is in a vertical position.

Figure 98 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device 770. In Figure 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is shown in imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are positioned near both left and right ends of the pair of covering members 787, rather than on the side where they are positioned close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnets Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787, but rather acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This prevents, for example, one covering member 787 from malfunctioning, which could lead to the other covering member 787 also malfunctioning.

Furthermore, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the upside-down member 781 begins to rotate from an upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction. Therefore, compared to when it is necessary to release the magnets from their attraction when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, it is easier to avoid situations where the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force, or where the displacement becomes unstable and causes malfunctions when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite top and bottom sides on the left and right. The effect of this will be explained below. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed, are arranged on the same side in the front-to-back direction (the front side when the upside-down member 781 is in the upright vertical position; see Figure 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an upright vertical position (see Figure 59(a)) to an inverted vertical position (see Figure 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates forward, causing the metal screw located close to the magnet Mg (located above) to move forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates backward, causing the metal screw located close to the magnet Mg (located below) to move forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force.

Furthermore, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see Figure 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see Figure 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates backward, and as a result, a rearward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force as the metal screw located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) moves backward, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates forward, and as a result, a rearward load is generated on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force as the metal screw located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) moves backward.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured to be the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, if a load is generated in the opposite front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides (for example, if the left-side magnet Mg is positioned in a lower position, causing the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides to be positioned in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left-side axial rotation member 785 is positioned on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement imparted to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and metal screw are separated from their adhering state will cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to rotate on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, rotational vibrations are likely to occur in the lifting/reversing performance device 770 around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction. In particular, in a configuration such as this embodiment, in which the bevel tooth member 785c (see Figure 96) elastically deforms in the process of releasing the magnet Mg, and the covering member 787 is forcefully rotated using the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c after the magnet Mg has released, it is expected that rotational vibrations are likely to occur in the lifting/reversing performance device 770 around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting and reversing performance device 770, which could result in damage to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in the durability of the lifting and reversing performance device 770. Therefore, measures are considered necessary to stabilize the displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 over the long term.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from their adhering state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining their posture is configured to be the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides. Therefore, the mode of displacement imparted to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from their adhering state can be such that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction.

This can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (displacement having a forward and backward component), preventing damage to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 due to the load generated when the magnet Mg and metal screw are separated from their adhering state.

In the second operating unit 700, the direction of sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-to-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-to-right direction) is perpendicular to the direction in which displacement begins (left-to-right direction) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (a vertically arranged state of the upside-down members 781).

This makes it easier to avoid one displacement occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when a sliding displacement of the performance device 780 is performed, it makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to move away from a state in which they are positioned close to each other (movement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be explained again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be explained. Figure 99(a) is a front oblique view of the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 99(b) is a rear oblique view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in Figure 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is positioned opposite the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850 and includes a base end reinforcement portion 852a positioned opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by removing material from the front side along the axial direction.

The base-end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the amount of hollowing out is relatively small, designed to increase deformation resistance. This prevents excessive deformation even when it comes into contact with the tip-end rod portion 853, which is formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the thickened portion 852 against elastic deformation. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

A curved recessed portion 852c is formed on both short side surfaces of the thickened portion 852. The curved portion 852c is shaped to smoothly accommodate the curved portion 854d formed on the base end of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of adjacent intermediate arm members 850 when they rotate and are positioned close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see Figure 66(a)) and the combined state. Therefore, which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

With this in mind, because the curved portion 852c is formed on both sides, it can smoothly accommodate the curved portion 854d in either combined state. This allows for a smooth transition to the combined state.

Furthermore, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into surface contact, it is possible to prevent excessive loads from being applied locally between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d when they are combined, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down using the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of this lifting and lowering displacement is not necessarily perpendicular to the direction in which the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 start to move when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined.

For example, as shown in Figure 66(a), the imaginary position line 832F, which is recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834, is set in a direction that differs at 72-degree intervals, so it is impossible for the displacement start direction of all rotating members 834 to be perpendicular to the direction of up-down displacement.

As a result, the load and inertia generated when the third operating unit 800 is raised or lowered may cause an unintended rotational movement (integral rotational movement or switching rotational movement). This section explains some measures to prevent this malfunction.

Figure 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, illustrating the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figure 100 shows the imaginary position line 832F of the metal rod 832, including the imaginary position line 832F that extends downward in the individually combined state and the imaginary position line 832F that has rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

In other words, Figure 100 shows a state in which angle θ51 is 45 degrees and angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotation of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotation operation.

The change in angles θ51 and θ52 in Figure 100 represents the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a and 854c (see Figure 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the gear teeth meshing upright, and the rotational responsiveness changes depending on how large or small this gap is set. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

In other words, during the time it takes for the angle θ51 in the combined state to change to angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is merely filled, and meshing rotation does not begin. Meanwhile, the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward from the third operating unit 800 along the imaginary position line 832F.

In other words, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individually combined state) begins, the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and sliding movement mainly occurs along the metal rod 832.

Figure 101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In explaining Figure 101, reference will be made to Figure 100 as appropriate. Figure 101 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in a combined state, and shows the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that generate resistance to the displacement of the third operating unit 800.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured so that even if the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, by approximately 5 degrees (see Figure 100)), no rotation occurs.

As a result, even in a configuration in which magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state of multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880, and an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction, as in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 displace in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, which is thought to make it easier for the magnetic force to disappear. In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 at the start of displacement from the combined state is strictly along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), making it easier to maintain the combined state due to magnetic force.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (for example, by approximately 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load.

As shown in Figure 101, torque limiter 866 is configured so that when rotating in the forward direction, it disconnects and generates a switching rotation DR1 to reduce resistance (spin), when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, and when rotating in the reverse direction, it generates an idling rotation AR1 to reduce resistance (spin). Torque limiter 866 is configured as a pair of opposite forward and reverse rotations.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the left-side torque limiter 866 is configured so that when rotating clockwise as viewed from the front, it generates resistance until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and when the allowable value is exceeded, it generates a switching rotation DR1 in which it spins freely, while when rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front, it generates an idling rotation AR1 in which it spins freely.

Furthermore, the right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 when rotating clockwise as viewed from the front, while when rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the front, it generates resistance until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and when the allowable value is exceeded, it generates a switching rotation DR1, which causes idling.

In this way, a pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotational directions, making it possible to perform switching rotation operations in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, when no load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction is applied, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see Figure 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, thereby suppressing rotation of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (such as the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in Figure 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are combined into a ring shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the adjacent second covering portion 885 that is arranged in close proximity.

This configuration prevents the gaps between the second covering portions 885 at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state from becoming larger, compared to when magnets Mg2 are arranged on both widthwise sides of a specific second covering portion 885 (i.e., when both second covering portions 885 arranged adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides receive a biasing force from the magnet Mg2 in a direction that draws them closer to the specific second covering portion 885), and makes it possible to equalize the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885.

Furthermore, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from its combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time rotation around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have separated to the extent that the magnetic combination is released (see Figure 100). Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle on which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it acts as a resistance force to the sliding movement radially outward of the second decorative member 880.

Furthermore, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each of the five directions dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. In other words, it is easier to stabilize the positioning of the third operating unit 800 compared to when the magnetic force Mg2 acts unevenly.

All five second decorative members 880 have the same shape, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-back positions of each magnet Mg2 are the same. This prevents the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load with a front-to-back component to the second decorative members 880, making it easier to avoid situations where magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction when displacement from the combined state begins or just before reaching the combined state, causing the second decorative members 880 to vibrate in the front-to-back direction.

Figure 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and intermediate arm member 850. Figure 102 illustrates the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 corresponding to their individual combined states. For ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is shown in phantom lines, allowing the outer rotating member 840, which is positioned to the rear, to be visible.

As shown in Figure 102, this embodiment is configured so that there is at least one location that restricts rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise when viewed from the front in Figure 102), and in most cases rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted in two locations. The configuration for restricting rotation of this intermediate arm member 850 will be described below.

First, there is the abutment protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutment protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at the intermediate angular position between adjacent extension arms 842, and the interior is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so that it can abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing excessive rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a recessed portion 852b that reduces the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation (see Figure 99(a)). Similarly, the abutting protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, thereby preventing damage to the abutting protrusion 845 or the thickened portion 852.

The abutting protrusion 845 is not provided at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detectable portion 844 is formed. This offsets the positioning of the abutting protrusion 845 and the detectable portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, allowing the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 to be set in the axial direction of the main body 841. This simplifies the design of the molding die.

In this way, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted in exchange for easier design of the molding die. However, in this embodiment, a base end reinforcement portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second feature that restricts rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base-end reinforcement portion 852a is positioned opposite the tip-end rod portion 853 (see Figure 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and is positioned so that it can abut when the tip-end rod portion 853 over-rotates, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The base-end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the amount of hollowing out is relatively small, and it is designed to increase deformation resistance. This prevents excessive deformation even when it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to make surface contact with the curved portion 854d, which prevents excessive localized loads from occurring between the curved portions 852c and 854d when they are combined, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are arranged opposite each other, the displacement of the pivot arm member 850 not only abuts against the abutment protrusions 845, but also abuts the curved portions 852c and 854d of adjacent pivot arm members 850, and abuts the base end reinforcement portion 852a and tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent pivot arm members 850. This configuration prevents over-rotation of the pivot arm member 850.

On the other hand, even if the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted by a configuration that allows the curved portion 852c and curved portion 854d of adjacent rotating arm members 850 to abut against each other, or the base end reinforcement portion 852a and tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent rotating arm members 850 to abut against each other.

These abutment structures are configured so that the five pivoting arm members 850 are related to one another (arranged in a circular fashion). Therefore, at first glance, it may seem as if the load upon abutment is concentrated because the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 has been omitted in one location and there is little configuration to restrict rotation only for the pivoting arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location. However, in reality, the interaction of the five pivoting arm members 850 allows the load upon abutment to be distributed.

This prevents the durability of a single pivot arm member 850 (the pivot arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing drastically.

Furthermore, the formation of the annular plate portion 846, which extends in the shape of an annular plate from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear end of the abutting protrusion portion 845, is also omitted in the area that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutting protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for simplifying the design of the molding die, similar to the omission of the abutting protrusion portion 845 described above. However, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is realized by the adjacent pivot arm member 850 (or the structure supporting it), even in areas where the annular plate portion 846 is omitted.

In other words, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as correcting misalignment of the fore-aft position of the pivot arm member 850. That is, even if the position of the tip of the pivot arm member 850 is unintentionally misaligned fore-aft when the pivot arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see Figure 65(a)) from the combined state (see Figure 64(a)) and then returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end rod portion 851 (see Figure 99(b)) is positioned opposite and can abut against the annular plate portion 846, and this abutment allows the fore-aft position of the pivot arm member 850 to be corrected.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, as there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 of the pivot arm member 850 is positioned opposite the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the tip of the pivot arm member 850 is misaligned forward or backward, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 is positioned opposite and able to contact the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842, and this contact allows the forward or backward position of the pivot arm member 850 to be corrected.

In this way, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. This allows the effect of correcting the front-to-back arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 to be produced for all rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of some of the annular plate portion 846.

Figure 103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Figures 103(a) and 103(b) show the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in a united state.

The state shown in Figure 103(a) corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in Figure 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (the state in which the switching rotation operation is complete), and the state shown in Figure 103(b) corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in Figure 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (the state in which the switching rotation operation is complete).

When comparing the combined state with the individual combined state (see Figures 64(a) and 66(a)), the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 closest to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, resulting in differences such as the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutting protrusion 845 being on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d being on the opposite side.

To accommodate this difference, the abutting protrusion 845 is symmetrical in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are symmetrical in front view with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar to the shape of the curved portion 852c. This allows the combined state to be formed with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned so that it is sandwiched on both sides between the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved portion 854d. This prevents the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 from displacing in either rotational direction, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and to maintain the combined state.

Figures 104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Figure 104 shows the decorative members 870, 880 positioned at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the united state), while Figure 105 shows the united state.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. The configuration of the third operating unit 800 allows the front-to-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 to be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, thereby reducing the visibility of the metal bar 832. In contrast, in this embodiment, the metal bar 832 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850, as shown in Figures 106 and 107.

With this arrangement, the metal rod 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This prevents the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, from standing out, improving the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

When exposed (see Figure 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance element that reflects light due to its glossy surface, thereby improving the performance effect of the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (see Figure 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective element for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 were placed on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 would block light from reaching the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is placed on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking light and creating an unsightly appearance.

In this way, in this embodiment, by configuring the metal rod 832 to reflect light when it is in the middle of a switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see Figures 104 and 107), the range in which light effects are performed can be expanded. In other words, reflected light can be seen by the player not only in the range behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the illumination board 823 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832, which is arranged to protrude radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front, is exposed and visible.

As a light-receiving portion, the bulge portion 824a is provided on its inner circumferential surface with a light-diffusing shape portion 824b (see Figures 106 and 107) that has a circular light-diffusing shape. Light emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a can be irradiated onto the light-diffusing shape portion 824b, and upon receiving this light, the light-diffusing shape portion 824b shines brightly in a circular shape.

As a result, the light-diffusing shape portion 824b appears bright and circular not only when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, making it easier to maintain the dramatic effect that utilizes the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 not only has a bulge portion 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension portion 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge portion 824a in a front view.

When the extension 824c is combined, it is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880, and therefore has little function as a decorative element. However, it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in Figure 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to shield and conceal mechanical parts that are difficult to use for performance purposes, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

Furthermore, because the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulging portion 824a but also to the front side of the extension portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen even in areas where the mechanism is shielded and concealed, improving the dramatic effect.

An example of drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by drive control of the lifting arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

In this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform its vertical displacement and rotational displacement independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, it is possible that the third operating unit 800 may undergo rotational displacement in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case, the third operating unit 800 may change its posture or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870, 880 may be displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the dramatic effect.

To avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be performed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 as it moves up and down as a dramatic action, preventing a decline in the dramatic effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load continues to be applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see Figure 101), preventing the third operating unit 800 from becoming uncoupled.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform vertical displacement and rotational displacement, the orientation of the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to adjust in advance the orientation of the rotational direction of the third operating unit 800 so that the orientation of the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by vertical displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detection target portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see Figure 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as a unitary rotation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is envisioned that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 will be designed in association with the control of the third operating unit 800.

This premise is based on the assumption that the switching rotation operation is performed while maintaining the posture of the outer rotating member 840 (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not linked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid any state in which this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the posture of the outer rotating member 840.

For example, if the resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases and exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may move in conjunction with each other, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850, which displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state, is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. In other words, because the intermediate arm member 850 displaces in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to reduce resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832, and to minimize resistance between the metal rod 832 and the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

When the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their radially outer end positions (see Figure 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 (e.g., the supported hole 854a) is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832. Therefore, particularly when the speed is insufficient, it is easy for the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 to move in parallel. In this case, the switching rotation operation will be poor.

In contrast, this embodiment employs a control mode in which, once the switching rotation operation has begun, driving continues at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached. When the linearly moving member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their outer radial end positions (see Figure 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834, which is fastened to the decorative members 870 and 880, rotates, and the bevel tooth portion 834a and the bevel tooth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, causing the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 to pass through the radially outer terminal position and rotate radially inward (see Figures 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is moved away from its radially outer terminal position, the rotational tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is more likely to displace in a direction along the metal rod 832, making it easier to minimize resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832.

In this way, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected portion 844 does not change. Therefore, the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection state of the detected portion 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting a drive time sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the dramatic effect may be reduced.

In contrast, rather than stopping the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control mode may be adopted in which a change in the detection state of the detection target 844 by the detection sensor 813 determines that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has begun (see Figure 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped after the switching rotation operation has been performed and before the decorative members 870, 880 have reached the combined state.

As mentioned above, the switching rotation operation is performed when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state as part of the drive control, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

The drive control allows the switching rotation operation to be performed regardless of the rotation direction arrangement of the third operating unit 800, which prevents the player from having to predict whether or not a jackpot will be announced, as described above in Figure 68. In other words, the switching rotation operation can be performed not only when the detectable portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see Figure 66(a)), but also when the detectable portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

However, unlike when a switching rotation operation is performed with the detected portion 844 positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change from the end of the switching rotation operation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so a control method must be devised.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed for a drive period that is preset as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to a united rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, making it possible to determine that the switching rotation operation has already ended and that the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a period of time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and allow the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, a switching rotation operation is performed from any rotational position of the third operating unit 800, and while the united state (see Figure 32) is maintained, driving continues until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

As described above, when the third operating unit 800 is in the combined state, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 continues until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the combined state, it is easy to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when controlling the return from the reverse performance to the normal performance shown in Figure 68, the detectable portion 844 is already positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switch rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844, which is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, to retract from the detection groove, so the length of time required for the control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, this embodiment aims to improve the degree of freedom in the rotational positioning of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action that switches from a normal performance to a reverse performance. While the return action can usually be lengthy, this embodiment aims to shorten the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in rotational position of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a single combined state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the dramatic effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, the time required for the remaining return operation, which is the switching rotation operation, can be shortened.

A cross-sectional explanation will be provided of the configurations commonly adopted by multiple operating units 600, 700, and 800, including the reasons for the differences in their adoption.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will review the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800, and explain the reasons for the differences in their use (number of sensors, shape of the detected pieces, etc.).

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the position of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The first operating unit 600 is equipped with only one detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 41). The multiple displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, supported member 640, protruding decorative portion 652b, and second decorative rotation member 660, are configured so that the positions and positions of the other displacement members are determined once the position of the rotating member 620 is determined. Therefore, the positions and positions of the multiple displacement members can be determined from the detection results of a single detection sensor KS1. This reduces the number of detection devices required.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection groove allows the detected portion 735 to enter. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see Figure 50), which correspond to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700, respectively.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the standby state is required to determine whether the device has returned to its initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the extension state is required to determine whether the device has reached the end position of the upward displacement, as well as to determine whether the device has reversed its up-down reversal performance device 770 or whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate performance state is required to determine whether the device has reached the up-down position in the intermediate performance state, as well as to determine whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The reversal performance and the influence of unintended loads will be explained below in order.

First, the inversion operation will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is configured to enable not only the up and down displacement of the lifting and inversion performance device 770, which occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, but also the inversion operation of the lifting and inversion performance device 770 (see Figure 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the performance may not be performed properly.

In contrast, this embodiment is equipped with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, for example, it can be determined that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by inverting the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the position of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result, it is possible to maintain the proper positioning of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

In this embodiment, reversal movement is only permitted when the second movement unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of its movement), so positional deviation during reversal movement can be easily corrected by simply rotating the gear cam member 734 towards the end of its movement.

Next, the effects of unintended loads will be explained. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 occurring in conjunction with the pivoting arm member 720, which rotates due to the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, there is also a longitudinal displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 relative to the lifting plate member 740, which displaces to a longitudinal position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 (see Figures 52 to 54).

As a result, as the lifting and reversing effect device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction due to a load applied in the front-to-back width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting and reversing effect device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may result in a change in the posture of the gear cam member 734. Examples of loads applied in the front-to-back width direction of the gaming machine include impact loads when a player hits the gaming machine, and loads when opening and closing the front frame 14.

There is a possibility that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 may be displaced in the vertical direction due to loads in the front-to-back width direction. Therefore, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine vertical positional deviations in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 may not be able to maintain the correct position.

In contrast, this embodiment is equipped with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700. Therefore, for example, if a load is applied to the gaming machine in the front-to-rear width direction in the intermediate state, and the vertical positions of the lifting and reversing effect device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction, making it possible to determine that the lifting and reversing effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction. Based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (so that it is in the intermediate state), thereby maintaining the proper positioning of the lifting and reversing effect device 770.

In addition, when the detectable portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is positioned on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, if it is determined that the detectable portion 735 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load, in this embodiment, it is not possible to determine in which direction the detectable portion 735 has come off, but the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive in a direction that will first cause the performance device 780 to move downward. This makes it possible to prevent a collision between the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is determined that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of upward displacement of the performance device 780, and by stopping the drive at that point, the effects of the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it will be clear that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of downward displacement of the performance device 780. If the drive is continued to cause upward displacement again and the drive is stopped when the detectable portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effects caused by the unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have the structural purpose described for the extension portion 634b, and is therefore formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the position of the upside-down member 781 (see Figure 56), and they correspond to the upright vertical position and the inverted vertical position of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see Figure 59(a)) or an inverted vertical position (see Figure 59(c)).

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical position of the upright inverted member 781) is used, it is possible to determine whether the upright inverted member 781 has shifted in position from the upright vertical position, and it is possible to control the drive motor 782 to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, it is not possible to determine whether the upright inverted member 781 has shifted in position from the inverted vertical position, so even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical position changes due to an unintended load or poor control, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will remain released, which is not desirable from a performance perspective.

In contrast, this embodiment is equipped with detection sensors 778d that correspond to the upright vertical positioning state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical positioning state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical positioning state or the inverted vertical positioning state is present, the detection sensors 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and by controlling the drive motor 782 to return to the combined state based on the determination result, the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state. This improves the dramatic effect of the second operating unit 700.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have the structural purpose described for the extension 634b, and is therefore formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and the detection groove allows the detected portion 844 to enter (see Figure 60). The third operating unit 800 uses one detection device to detect the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (for both purposes) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped (switching rotation operation).

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have the structural purpose described for the extension portion 634b, and is therefore formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840, and there is only one of them, so it is insufficient to determine whether the decorative members 870, 880 have deviated from their combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that would cause the combined state to be released when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a position where the detection target portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then returning to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a fixed period of time (e.g., a short period of time) at fixed time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66(a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103(b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to their combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, thereby preventing the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from remaining released for an extended period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the function of magnets Mg and Mg2. As mentioned above, in the second operating unit 700, magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of decorative members 870 and 880. Similar technologies are used, but the design concepts for the direction of the load generated by magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a, which serves as the axis of rotation for the rotational movement of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to when the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 as they move toward and away from each other can be reduced. This reduces the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to move.

On the other hand, the third operating unit 800 is designed so that the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis for the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of magnet Mg2 applies a load to decorative members 870, 880 in the direction of rotation can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that could cause decorative members 870, 880 to wobble in the direction of rotation due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it appears to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to see the display area and the protruding decorative portion 652b as a unified display effect.

In the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is positioned at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see Figures 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 easier to see as a unified display presentation.

In the third operating unit 800, each first covered portion 875 that is visible to the player in the individually combined state is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned to surround it when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covered portion 875 is to be placed in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first covered portion 875 more easily visible as a unified display presentation.

Furthermore, if the third operating unit 800 is controlled to rotate as a unit, it is possible to perform a roulette-like operation in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. Even in this case, for example, by moving the display so that it runs parallel to the first covered portion 875 in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display effect.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration sections 334-336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment is equipped with a first flow path configuration section 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path forming portion 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path forming portion 334 in the first embodiment, a configuration disposed on the right side will be illustrated and described, but a configuration disposed on the left side can also be used as the first flow path forming portion 2334. Furthermore, the configurations may be different on the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming portion 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming portion 334.

Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through-hole 2410 drilled in the front-to-rear direction at the bottom of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 that is guided along the through-hole 2410 so as to be able to slide back and forth, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to generate a driving force that slides the slide member 2420.

In Figure 108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 protrudes inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the balls can roll, and in the rear position RP, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 is configured so that it does not protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position RP, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides and displaces while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be minimized.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward-forward, and the sliding displacement direction of slide member 2420 is in the front-to-back direction, so the sliding displacement direction of slide member 2420 is in line with the downward flow direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of slide member 2420 affects the strength of the ball's rotation.

The ball rolls on bottom surface 2334c facing forward, causing it to rotate forward in the direction of travel (forward). When solenoid 2430 is de-energized (see Figure 108) and current is applied to solenoid 2430, causing slide member 2420 to slide from front position FP to rear position RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rotation of the ball, increasing the degree of rotation and increasing the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from an energized state to a de-energized state (see Figure 108), causing the slide member 2420 to slide from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, a forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b via the upper surface of the slide member 2420. As a result, the forward rotation of the ball is slowed down, the degree of rotation of the ball is reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, because the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is higher in the vertical direction than the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in the direction of pushing the ball upward. As a result, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by executing control to cause sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see Figure 74).

In this embodiment, the slide member 2420 is positioned behind the second flow path component 335, making it difficult for the player to see the ball being affected by the slide member 2420.

In other words, the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before it is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract their attention, making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given a rotation or displaced vertically. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player as they watch the ball flow down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced while a ball is positioned above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, whereas a ball passing above the bottom surface 2334c before or after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when it stops) is not subjected to a contact load with the slide member 2420.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is moving and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 109. In the first embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 3300 of the third embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and back. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

As an example of a change in the placement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, the description will be given to the right of the center, but the configuration on the left side of the center can be designed as desired. For example, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side, as in the first embodiment, so that the placement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is different on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300. Also, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side, as described in detail below, so that the placement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is symmetrical on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, while Figure 109(b) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the third flow path component 336 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the position of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the central member 3330 of the distribution device 3300 has a rear frame portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal rate detection sensor SE12, and is configured in a shape that is open to allow balls to be received from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the sliding displacement member 3370 (see Figure 109 (b)) is set so that the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear inner surface of the opening 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as the entrance to the path that guides the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are aligned (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the sliding displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 will be forced to the right while coming into contact with the front side surface 376a of the sliding displacement member 3370 and will pass through the normal detection sensor SE12; on the other hand, if the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 will be forced to the right while coming into contact with the front side surface 376a of the sliding displacement member 3370 and will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In other words, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position of the ball flowing to the right.

As a result, it is difficult for a player viewing the third flow path component 336 from the front to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal rate detection sensor SE12.

The sliding displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod-like shape, an upper front protrusion 3376b formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376, and an upper lateral protrusion 3376c formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376.

The upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c are formed on both the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. They pass through the front side of the discharge hole 337 and are configured to be able to be housed on the underside of the third flow path component 336.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is positioned on the underside of the third flow path component 336 and does not come into contact with the ball; when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged across the front-to-rear gap between the front surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the lower left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, allowing the ball to be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent balls from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the balls from being erroneously guided down.

Furthermore, by positioning the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 so that it rests on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, which is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, it is possible to prevent a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b in the front-to-back direction. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backward forward, or a ball getting caught between the front surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is a shaped portion similar to the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18) described above in the first embodiment, and is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376 in a positional relationship similar to the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper horizontal protrusion 3376c is a shaped portion similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see Figure 18) described above in the first embodiment, and is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in a positional relationship similar to the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action that the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c exert on the ball they come into contact with acts on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the positioning of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 or the left-to-right inner protrusion 318 (see Figure 18) are fixed in position, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusions 3376b and 3376c can eliminate the effect of stimulating a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the sorting device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear of the special chance detection sensor SE11, so that the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and back. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, showing the downstream configuration of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, probability change detection sensor SE11, normal detection sensor SE12, and slide displacement member 4370 taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and Figure 111(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, probability change detection sensor SE11, normal detection sensor SE12, and slide displacement member 4370 taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). For ease of understanding, the upper abutment portion 4373 has been omitted from Figure 111(b).

The sliding displacement member 4370 is configured to block either the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to prevent the ball from passing through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through. It comprises a front sliding member 4371 that slides left and right above the special rate detection sensor SE11, and a rear sliding member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to the left and right due to the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when changing from the front open state shown in Figures 110(a) and 111(a) to the rear open state shown in Figures 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides to the left, and the rear slide member 4375 slides to the right.

The front slide member 4371 comprises a slide plate 4372 that is positioned so as to cover the top of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment portion 4373 that is formed in a shape similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see Figure 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). In other words, in Figure 110, the slide plate 4372 and upper abutment portion 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction (see Figure 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear-open state (see Figure 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows balls rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front-open state (see Figure 111(a)), a ball that passes through the lower bottom surface 336a abuts against the upper abutment portion 4373 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward (downward and to the right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points, and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 that is positioned so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper abutment portion 4377 that is formed in a shape similar to the shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion portion 317 (see Figure 17), and these are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in Figure 110, the slide plate 4376 and upper abutment portion 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed with a shape that is the reverse of the upper surface 4372a (see Figure 111(a)). Therefore, in the front-open state (see Figure 111(a)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows balls placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear-open state (see Figure 111(b)), balls that pass through the lower bottom surface 336a and upper surface 6372a come into contact with the upper abutment portion 4377 and are subjected to a load, causing them to flow downward.

Therefore, when the rear slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a ball that has passed backward above the probability change detection sensor SE11 to return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby increasing the attention paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336.

As an example of how the ball may return to above the probability change detection sensor SE11, the solenoid may be activated to change state from the rear-open state to the front-open state as the ball passes backward over the upper surface 4372a. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper surface 4376a, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, when the timing of the ball passing through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven coincide, the ball is configured to return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to gaming machines configured so that a ball that passes downstream above the probability change detection sensor SE11 does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11, attention can be improved to the ball after it has passed through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path for the balls is common up to the third flow path component 336, and a branch point BP1 is located behind the third flow path component 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path for the balls changes upstream of the third flow path component 336. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112(a) shows the state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the right side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the special rate detection sensor SE11, while Figure 112(b) shows the state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the left side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the normal rate detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path component 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the position of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable left and right by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protrusion portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the top surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is thin enough to allow a ball that has passed through the first flow path component 334 to ride up onto it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protrusion portion 5376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, allowing the incoming ball to flow smoothly backward.

In this embodiment, like the sorting device 5300, the path along which the balls flow is long from front to back, making it easier for balls flowing down the front side to be more visible than balls flowing down the rear side. By positioning the slide displacement member 5370 on the front side where the balls are more visible, it is possible for players to easily distinguish the balls' flow pattern (path along which they flow).

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is positioned at the right side, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, allowing balls to enter. On the other hand, balls flowing downstream upstream of the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flow toward the front side as they flow down the first flow path component 334.

As a result, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration 334, the ball is unlikely to move in the opposite direction, toward the rear, making it difficult for the ball to enter the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, the need for a component to block the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 has been deliberately omitted, thereby reducing component costs.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and do not merge. However, in the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merged flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b, with a space for one sphere, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336, which serves as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the spheres flowing down the right flow path and the spheres flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the spheres may collide with each other.

The converging flow path 6341 has a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface that is higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This creates a difference in height between the spheres flowing from the converging flow path 6341 into the connection point JP1 and the spheres flowing down the right flow path and into the third flow path component 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the spheres collide with each other.

Contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when there is no contact between the balls. This allows the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 16) to reach the branch point BP1 to change depending on whether or not there is contact between the balls.

The operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the timing at which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, regardless of the ball's entry state. Therefore, by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, it is possible to make the ball reach the branch point BP1 when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned differently.

The premise for balls to come into contact with each other is that the balls will merge, and that there will be balls flowing down the merging flow path 6341. If a player wants to make balls come into contact with each other, they can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter each of the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see Figure 74). If a player wants to avoid balls coming into contact with each other, they can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter only the ball passage hole 163b on one side (the right side).

In this embodiment, adjusting the ball launch strength is related to whether or not the ball makes contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profits. This can therefore increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a series of balls. In other words, two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be caused to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being positioned close to each other.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the flow path to branch point BP1 was described as being solely a flow path formed by flow path components 334-336. However, the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that balls can flow to branch point BP1 without passing through first flow path component 334 and second flow path component 335. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has, in addition to the ball passing hole 163b, a ball passing hole 7163b formed in approximately the center of the left and right direction as a path through which balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71, which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1, which is used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and determine the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state when a specified number of balls have entered.

Downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b is a cylindrical flow path 7164 with a rectangular cylindrical cross section that extends in a direction sloping downward toward the rear. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down its interior, and its end extends to above the front side of the branch point BP1. In other words, after passing through the ball passing hole 7163b, the balls can flow down the interior of the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for a ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for a ball to pass through the flow path components 334-336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334.

For example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled using the above-mentioned operation pattern Y (see Figure 25), as described above, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b and passes through the flow path components 334-336 can only reach the branch point BP1 after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position, whereas a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b and flows down the cylindrical flow path 7164 may reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in its rear position.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes state to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In other words, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a can be configured so that whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or not changes depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can increase the player's ability to focus on the way the ball flows down inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in Figure 114, the cylindrical flow path 7164 has been positioned to prevent the cylindrical flow path 7164 from reducing the visibility of the branch point BP1, slide displacement member 370, and flow path components 334-336 when viewed from a general viewing direction during gameplay.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by increasing the number of paths through which the ball is guided to branch point BP1 while maintaining high visibility of branch point BP1, it is possible to increase the variety of lengths of time it takes for the ball to reach branch point BP1, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the specific winning port 65a.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 116. In the first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 connects the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one location, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at this connecting position, thereby switching the displacement direction of the axis O1. However, in the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at this connecting position, thereby switching the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the elongated guide hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 116, the elongated guide hole 8616 bends twice to the left and right below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide slot 8616 comprises a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape) with the center of curvature radius opposite that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, thereby reducing (slowing down) the displacement speed of the axis O1.

In addition, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., at the connection between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, thereby reducing (slowing down) the displacement speed of the axis O1.

In this way, multiple intermediate positions at which the axis O1 can be easily stopped can be configured, thereby increasing the variety (variations) of stopping positions of the second decorative rotation member 660 (see Figure 43) that is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1 midway.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 117. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 was described as being composed of a single path, but in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 comprises a first path composed of a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the elongated guide hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Figure 117, the elongated guide hole 9616, like the elongated guide hole 616 in the first embodiment, has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and also has an angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and connects to a midpoint on the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when the axis O1 is assumed to displace while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction from a state in which the axis O1 is positioned at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced along the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained with the third performance surface 661c facing forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c as the rotating member 620 rotates, the rotational pattern of the box-shaped member 661, which rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, can maintain a position in which the third performance surface 661c faces forward over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, the change in angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, and therefore the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the curved portion 616b is different from the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by varying the path along which the axis O1 moves on the left and right, it is possible to vary the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, there is only one angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned at the upper end of the range of possible displacement, and one angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end, so the posture of the box-shaped member 661 can be maintained when the axis O1 is positioned at the upper or lower end of the range of possible displacement (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned between the ends (mid-way position) of the displacement range, it is possible to generate multiple types of positions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 (see Figures 43 and 44) related to the position of the axis O1, and multiple types of displacement speeds of the supported member 640 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotation member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1.

The guide slot 9616 is simply composed of multiple paths and does not have a mechanism to limit the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This prevents malfunctions caused by a fault in the path-limiting mechanism and reduces product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, we will explain the case where the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces in the tilting direction.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (straight portion 616a and curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see Figure 40) is controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (up and down), and continues to displace to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right-hand path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see Figure 40) is controlled to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the drive motor 631 is controlled to drive again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of displacement along the direction in which the linear portion 616a extends (vertical direction) is reduced, so the choice of whether the axis O1 will displace along the left or right path is made based on the path with less displacement resistance.

Here, when axis O1 enters angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see Figure 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to components downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the driving force transmission. In other words, because there is less displacement resistance, axis O1 can enter angle maintaining portion 9616b.

In this way, in this embodiment, when controlling the drive of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, the path along which the axis O1 displaces can be selected by controlling the drive motor 631 to stop midway or not.

When the rotating member 620 is displaced in the upright direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in a diagonally upward and upward direction, which makes it difficult for the axis O1 to displace into the connecting portion 9616d, and allows the axis O1 to be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between connecting portion 9616d and curved portion 616b is set midway along curved portion 616b, so the right side of curved portion 616b is formed as an upper-left sloping surface located to the upper right of axis O1, which is located at the bottom end of curved portion 616b.

As a result, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle centered on the circular through-hole 624.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above form, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form a different embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 causes the balls to flow downwards toward the front, and then downwards, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of configuring a portion that causes the balls to flow downwards toward the front, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downwards by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that slows the balls.

In the first embodiment above, we described a case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape that can block the flow of balls by abutting against it will suffice. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from the flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the first embodiment described above, when a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300, it flows primarily down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they will not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time required for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment described above, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are positioned behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be positioned directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. That is, when a ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, branching to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left-right direction, or branching to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front-to-back direction (toward the front).

In the first embodiment above, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing a pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that occurs on a daily basis.

Raised refers to the pachinko machine 10 being installed at an incline in the front-to-rear direction, rather than being installed in a vertical position. Typically, pachinko machines are installed in a position (raised) tilted backward by approximately 1 degree (4.5 rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (without being laid down) above, when considering an installation angle of approximately 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and second flow path component 336, which have an inclination in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear. However, when the installation angle is taken into consideration, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are similarly inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined left and right, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at approximately 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, as the balls flow down within the sorting device 300, the acceleration of the balls is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Furthermore, because the first flow path component 334 is still shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

As such, the flow of balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the orientation of the pachinko machine 10 due to the presence of flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the angle of orientation (approximately 1 degree), the direction in which the balls flow through the flow path components 334, 336 will change (be reversed) depending on the quality of the orientation (angle setting), so the inclination angle must be set larger than the angle of orientation.

Furthermore, if the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-to-back direction for the balls to flow down, and this flow path is configured to be visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down this path. If it is desired to be able to determine the degree of tilt, then the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment described above, to prevent the degree of "rest" from being determined from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is reduced except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of approximately 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "sagging" of the pachinko machine 10 being determined by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment described above, the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or the two may be configured with similar inclinations.

Furthermore, while each of the flow path components 334-336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape, or may have a flow path shape that bends in a stepped manner.

Furthermore, while the flow paths are configured to bend at right angles at the connection points of each flow path component 334-336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Furthermore, a crane may be used for each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the first embodiment described above, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment above, we described a case where the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges protruding from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the gaming ball, and to configure the gaming ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly distributed throughout the entire path up to the slide displacement member 370, or they may be unevenly distributed. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

The protrusions may be oriented in a staggered manner so that they extend from the left and right toward the inside of the path along the ball's downward flow path, or they may be oriented so that they extend upward from the bottom at a predetermined interval.

When the protrusions are protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusions has a left-right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not cause the ball to be erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed toward the partition plate portion 338 rather than toward the normal detection sensor SE12, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the protrusion extends from the bottom upward, the protrusion itself may act as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may also be formed so that they can be moved up and down. In this case, they may block the flow of the balls when in the protruding state, and allow the balls to resume flowing when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment described above, the slide displacement member 370 is blinded by the balls flowing down the front side thereof, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path components 334-336 may be blinded by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

Furthermore, when a ball provides a screen, it is not limited to being placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of that mirror, then the ball can be placed between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror to provide a screen function.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the balls reaching the sliding displacement member 370 were blindfolded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning openings 63 may be blindfolded.

In the first embodiment described above, the flow path components 334-336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or as flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured with varying flow path widths so that balls tend to remain in areas with larger flow path widths.

In the first embodiment above, we described a case where a blinding effect is created by balls heading toward the sliding displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an ejection path for ejecting balls that have entered other winning openings 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be located in front of the sliding displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so that it intersects with the front side), and the sliding displacement member 370 may be blinded by this ejection path and the balls placed on the ejection path.

In the first embodiment described above, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 toward the second flow path component 335 (near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow toward the second flow path component 335, causing some balls to flow toward the second flow path component 335.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or it may be driven by a drive device to perform a constant operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or it may be controlled to operate in a constant pattern from the time the power to the pachinko machine is turned on.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow toward the second flow path component 335 when the type of ball that enters changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls per round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow toward the second flow path component 335. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the sliding displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Furthermore, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning slot 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbol 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing toward the second flow path configuration section 335, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbol 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, the specified action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or the action may be configured to vary depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, if one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, but if two or more balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if it takes a long time for the balls to flow from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370, the long ball discharge time may result in the game being drawn out. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to cause the first certain balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to flow down toward the second flow path component 335, and any subsequent balls to be discharged without passing through the second flow path component 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to have completely flowed down the flow path components 334-336, allowing the time between rounds to be set shorter.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 is positioned below the third pattern display device 81, and balls are directed toward the front near the bottom edge of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific winning opening 65a may be positioned above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be configured to be positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player can gain from the flow of balls down the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the LCD display, the player can easily understand whether the profit they have gained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, while the case has been described where the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view relative to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured to be positioned so that they are not shifted up or down in front view relative to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, and are seen overlapping. In this case, it is possible to make the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 function as a screen for not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern Y of the sliding displacement member 370 was described as switching the sliding displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sliding displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be made to enter the through-hole of the special rate detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has elapsed will enter the through-hole of the normal rate detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to act as a screen for the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the flow of the forward flow ball switches (downward) toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, as it will be hidden by the trailing ball. Furthermore, because the trailing ball lands on the normal detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not landed on the special rate detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if no ball has entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, thereby improving the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain player anticipation by displaying the same effects for both the time-saving state and the probability variation state.

In the first embodiment described above, a ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load from the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured to accommodate multiple speeds and rotations of the ball before it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (for example, by providing a crane or widening the path width to increase the freedom of the ball's flow direction), and the ball can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load from the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone, depending on the speed and rotation of the ball.

In the first embodiment described above, the sliding displacement member 370 and the protruding portions 317-319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317-319 may be formed integrally with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317-319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment described above, the operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 was explained as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of it being hidden by a ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by a ball.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by changing the shape of the elongated guide hole 616, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width of the elongated guide hole 616 to form an external gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment described above, the guide slot 616 is configured with a shape that bends midway, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured with a shape that bends multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed with the purpose of varying the amount of change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed with a shape that can guide the supported member 640 so as to partially define a range in which the size of angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment described above, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple guide slots 616 may be formed, through which the axis O1 is movable, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another drive device or a button-type switching device that switches by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

In the first embodiment described above, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to face the first performance surface 661a diagonally to the left front when positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face the right front when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face the upper front (downward) when positioned below (above) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment described above, the rotating member 620 was configured to be positioned at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this; a linearly displacing member may also be positioned at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 rather than a linearly displacing member advantageously functions to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a horizontally sliding member is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when using the rotating member 620, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driving side of the supported member 640.

In the first embodiment described above, the second decorative rotation member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotation member 660 may be formed as a pentagonal cross section, and configured so that it can be controlled to stop with each side facing forward.

In the first embodiment described above, the decorative fixing member 670 was a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one unit with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at a right angle, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-to-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the first embodiment described above, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be disposed near the elongated hole 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an attractive force between itself and a magnet disposed on the right front plate member 710, making it easier for this attractive force to be generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

Furthermore, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751, 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Furthermore, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to generating a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, the position of the shaft rotation member 785 is maintained by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment described above, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front of the rear end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may protrude forward by downward displacement. In this case, it may go over the upper edge of the center frame 86 from below to the front, or it may protrude forward from above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction, preventing the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 from being visually recognized together, thereby reducing the ability to distinguish. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of rotating while facing the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front, they may rotate while facing outward to the left and right. Furthermore, even if they rotate in the same direction, they may be configured to rotate at different rotation angles.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if a groove is dug in a single stroke on the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which control was performed such that when the detectable portion 844 is positioned on the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 changes to determine that the operation has switched from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed when the detectable portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the operation has switched from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment described above, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in some places, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870, 880, or both decorative members 870, 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation were clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that an oil damper generates resistance at all times regardless of whether the operating mode is switched. Therefore, a torque limiter can reduce displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operating mode is switched to integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment described above, the light LD1 is reflected toward the front by the plated portion 871a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During integral rotation, the linear moving member 833 is positioned on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear moving member 833. However, when the linear moving member 833 is positioned on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during switching rotation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, making it possible to reflect the light LD1.

In the first embodiment described above, the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is described as sloping downward inward to the left and right, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured so that it is not sloping inward to the left and right (parallel to the horizontal plane), or it may be configured so that it slops downward inward to the left and right. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path component 335 than the latter.

Also, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the front-to-rear direction, or may be configured to slope downward toward the rear. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 more than the latter.

Furthermore, while the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that slopes downward inward in the left-right direction, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be configured so that it is not sloped in the left-right direction (parallel to the horizontal plane). In this case, the degree to which the balls are urged toward the partition plate portion 338 is reduced, thereby keeping the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collisions or friction with the balls low.

In the first embodiment described above, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d is positioned outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branching point (by lowering the position). In this case, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d, allowing the light to be reflected toward the back surface, thereby preventing light from reaching the light diffusion surface 333b (a dark state).

In other words, while the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point can be correlated with the brightness of the light diffusion surface 333b (and the light diffusion surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion surface 333b). Because each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the first embodiment described above, the timing for controlling the illumination of the light emitting means 351 was described as during a jackpot game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination may be controlled when a win is detected in a winning slot 63, 64, 140, etc., or when an input operation is made on the frame button 22, or when a winning number exceeding a specified number (the number of winning balls that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, or the maximum number of pending changes based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140) occurs.

In the first embodiment described above, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, this means that the assembly position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect. Therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined during the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor may be provided to detect the position of the sliding displacement member 370, and the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 during operation may be detected. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 becomes misaligned due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even though this was not apparent during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of this misalignment can be determined by a malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370, which switches the direction of the ball's downward flow at the branch point BP1, is a linear displacement in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it could be a rotational movement (e.g., a roulette-style), or it could be provided with a shape that causes the ball to flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) so that the ball can flow in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment described above, the distribution device 300 was used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding balls to the starting winning opening (winning opening 64, 140), or as a device for guiding balls to the specific winning opening 65a, or as a device for guiding balls to other winning openings or winning areas.

In the first embodiment above, the sorting device 300 is described as being placed in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), or in the left or right corner (either left or right outside the left or right edges of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when the sorting device 300 is placed in the upper corner of the play area, the player's line of sight looking at the sorting device 300 is tilted diagonally upward relative to the horizontal, so the flow path portion that slopes downward toward the front can be configured so that the balls on the downstream side hide the balls on the upstream side.

In addition, the flow path configuration sections 334-336 may be configured so that they are inclined in the opposite direction, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 may be positioned near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment described above, the shape of the window portion 162d was designed based on the shape of the flow path configuration portions 335, 336 when viewed from the front and the arrangement of the sealing member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that the sliding displacement member 370 (only) is visible from the player's eye level (viewed diagonally downward), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the sliding displacement member 370 is reduced. Furthermore, the shape may be such that the sliding displacement member 370 is visible from either the front or rear position, but not from the other.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334-336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides and do not merge, which reduces the number of balls entering one flow path (allows the balls to be dispersed), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while the sliding displacement member 370 can be used to switch the paths of any of the balls that pass through each flow path.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the pair of left and right components of the sliding displacement member 370 (for example, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper protrusion portion 376) is visible, while the other is not. In this case, the player can predict the path the ball will take on the side that is not visible, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the first embodiment above, we described a case where the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 from a state where the ball can land on the ball guide portion 371b is set to a backward direction (the same direction as the ball's travel as it flows down the third flow path component 336), and the sliding suppresses the ball's forward rotation, thereby reducing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which a ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be forward (the opposite direction to the direction of travel of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336).

In other words, by displacing ball guide portion 371b forward and allowing ball guide portion 371b to enter the underside of third flow path component 336, it is possible to open probability change detection sensor SE11. The upper protrusion portion 376 is constructed separately from ball guide portion 371b and is positioned so that it protrudes toward branch point BP1 when a ball can land on ball guide portion 371b. When ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where a ball cannot land on it, the upper protrusion portion 376 displaces in the opposite direction at the same time as ball guide portion 371b is displaced, ensuring a passage for the ball to probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the ball's forward rotation can be accelerated by the sliding contact with the ball when the ball guide portion 371b is slid, thereby increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball fell instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment described above, the control of the rotating member 620 takes into account the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b has been placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced, and the drive motor 631 may be rotated more slowly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position where the performance is ready to begin).

In the first embodiment described above, the grooves of the front-upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 are described as being straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by using grooves with a partial curve, such as a curve toward the front at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-and-down sliding displacement, forward-and-backward sliding displacement, and forward-and-backward posture displacement.

The groove shapes of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 can be exemplified in various forms. For example, they may be V-shaped (or inverted V-shaped) when viewed from the left and right, or may be curved in an S-shape.

In the first embodiment described above, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 was described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the components to avoid collisions between them (for example, the main body component 771 and the covering component 787, or the drive motor 782 and the covering component 787). However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used that avoids collision between the components by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the pivot member 785.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 is described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the tip of the rotation of the pivoting arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the tip of the rotation of the pivoting arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, a longer support position distance can be ensured between the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivoting arm member 720 that supports the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows for stable support of the lifting plate member 740.

In the above-described third operating unit 800, the bulge portion 824a is configured as a part that remains unchanged in shape and is visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or a combined state, and the bulge portion 824a is visible to the player as a part (central portion) in both the individual combined state and the combined state. This explains the case where the bulge portion 824a, first covering portion 875, and second covering portion 885 are designed to have shapes that minimize incongruity with each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be positioned so that the display unit is located directly in front of the bulge portion 824a. In this case, unlike when the visibility of the bulge portion 824a is changed by changing the illumination mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light-emitting portion 823a, the object visible through the bulge portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

Furthermore, for example, the shape of the covering portion 875, 885 of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be modified to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, with the extended portion covering the bulge portion 824a. In this case, the bulge portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player in either the individual combined state or the combined state, thereby reducing the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulge portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885.

In the first embodiment described above, the third operating unit 800 was described as having multiple decorative members 870, 880 attracted to each other by magnetic force, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load caused by a concave-convex engagement, or by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is achieved by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that builds momentum, the switching rotation operation can be achieved even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode that adds momentum, rotation control in the reverse direction may be performed as a preparatory operation (preparatory movement). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from its position in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the magnetic attraction.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to undergo radial displacement before the reversal motion as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation motion of the third operating unit 800. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the magnet Mg2 is configured to be arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force is drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832, which serves as the rotation axis for the reversal motion, is placed, even if the reversal motion occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, thereby suppressing wobbling that occurs in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation motion.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation action is configured so that the decorative members 870, 880 are rotated 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be reunited by a 120-degree rotation. In this case, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the side visible in a front view of the decorative members 870, 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation action, but the angle at which the covering portions 875, 885 are visible is different (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the action and 60 degrees to the left after the action).

Furthermore, the structure of the multiple intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that, for example, the lengths are not common, or the formation range or shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c is not common, thereby allowing decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure their combined state with a 180-degree inversion during the switching rotation operation to coexist with decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure their combined state with a 120-degree inversion. For example, of five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 120 degrees during the switching rotation operation, and the other four decorative members 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 180 degrees during the switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal movement in the switching rotation movement can be set as desired. It can be the aforementioned 180 degrees or 120 degrees, or it can be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 and 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment described above, a pair of torque limiters 866, one on each side, are arranged in asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be arranged in symmetrical positions, or both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right, or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment described above, multiple (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and guide holes 854b in which the linearly moving members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, thereby creating differences in the timing at which the linearly moving members 833 start to slide along the metal rod 832.

For example, by modifying the design so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and mixing in intermediate arm members 850 in which the shape of the guide hole 854b has been modified accordingly, it is possible to create a difference in the timing at which the linear moving member 833 begins to move during the switching rotation operation.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened to the rotary member 834 connected to the linear member 833, to have different timings at which they move radially outward from their combined state, thereby separating the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required to remove the suction can be reduced, which reduces the driving force required by the drive motor 862 and also stabilizes the positioning of the third operating unit 800.

It is not necessary for the displacement pattern that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) at the attraction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 to occur every time. For example, the displacement pattern that causes displacement in the shear direction may be configured to occur when a switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward path), but not when the switching rotation operation leads to the combined state (return path).

For example, by designing the intermediate arm member 850 so that it rotates from the combined state (where the rotation tip is positioned on the rotation axis side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state where the decorative members 870, 880 are positioned at the outermost diameter position) in a different manner, and by configuring the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate from a state where the decorative members 870, 880 are positioned at the outermost diameter position in a different manner to the combined state in a different manner, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that causes a shear direction (radial direction) displacement in the attraction portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment described above, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 for each operating unit 600, 700, and 800 was described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, multiple detection sensors KS1 may be configured to be positioned in positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or fewer or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used. An example of the placement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where it can detect the extension portion 634b when the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state or extended state.

Furthermore, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be used, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged in positions where they can detect the detected portion 844. For example, by arranging five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state of the third operating unit 800 can be determined in five different ways (five different patterns depending on the direction of rotation).

In the second embodiment above, we described a case where the ball continues to roll regardless of the position of the slide member 2420, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front position FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, which strengthens the deceleration effect of the ball and makes it easier for the ball to become trapped.

In the second embodiment above, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a protrusion for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set so that it abuts either the ball resting on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the ball resting on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP, but not the other. In this case, the deceleration effect of the protrusion can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in either the front position FP state or the rear position BP state.

In the third embodiment described above, the sliding displacement member 3370 was described as having the thin plate portion 371, the upper front protrusion 3376b, and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion 3376c, which are separate members, may appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned in the front and rear positions, thereby creating a state in which they abut against the ball and a state in which they do not abut against it.

Note that there are no limitations on the front-to-back arrangement of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, but placing the special rate detection sensor SE11 on the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winnings on the special rate detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the sliding plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the sliding plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these may be formed as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (linked) at the same time. They may also be configured to slide forward and backward.

In the above fourth embodiment, we described a case where the sliding members 4371, 4375 slide and displace when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the sliding plate 4372, causing the ball to be returned to the front due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the sliding plate 4372 in the front-open state.

In this case, the system can be configured so that only the ball that was on the slide plate 4372 when the state changed from the rear-open state to the front-open state is guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor. The greater the benefit that the player can gain from the ball entering the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, winning multiple jackpots or gaining the right to transition to a higher probability state, which is greater than the right gained from the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11), the more attention can be paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration section 336.

In the sixth embodiment described above, the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path with the connection point JP1 side facing rearward near the raised floor portion 6342. This allows both the sphere entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the sphere entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path forming portion 335 to have a rearward velocity component, preventing backflow due to collision between these spheres.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. The flow path components 334-336 may also be configured to have an inclination that is reversed front to back, with the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 located near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is easier for balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down toward the front, improving attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the above ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the location of the guide elongated hole 9616 through which the axis O1 passes is switched depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 may be configured to switch. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as an elongated hole, while the curved portion 616b, angle maintaining portion 9616c, and connecting portion 9616d are configured as elongated holes, and the elongated holes are alternately configured as closed holes. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the branched elongated guide hole 9616 may be configured with a switching valve that blocks one of the paths to limit the displacement path of the axis O1. In this case, the shape of the elongated guide hole 9616 remains fixed, while the switching valve can limit the displacement path of the axis O1. This prevents the axis O1 from displacing along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotation member 660 from displacing in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Control examples of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 87, a control example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first control example. Fig. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, Fig. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device 65 provided in an area below the front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 118, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to open and close towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 119) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 137) that launches balls into the front area (play area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to Figure 119.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. To support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118). The front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed serving as the opening and closing axis. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which juts out toward the front and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed onto this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, to change the stage of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 119) or to change the content of the super reach presentation.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting devices such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their illumination by lighting up or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during gameplay. The periphery of the window 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps, such as jackpot lamps. When a jackpot is hit or a reach is reached, the built-in LEDs light up or flash, causing each illumination unit 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is just one step away from a jackpot. Additionally, the upper left corner of the front frame 14, as viewed from the front (see Figure 118), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating LEDs or other light-emitting devices that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 by attaching transparent resin to the backside so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 119) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, to create a more dazzling effect, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the component configuration common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The control handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for enabling the ball launch unit 112a to operate, a launch stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the rotation amount (rotation position) of the control handle 51 based on changes in electrical resistance. When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the rotation amount. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. When the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off. In other words, this control example includes a launching means for launching balls into the play area formed on the game board 13 and a launch intensity varying means for varying the launch intensity based on the rotation amount (rotation position) of the control handle 51. This allows the player to perform both the act of firing a ball using the firing means and the act of varying the firing strength of the ball, simply by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the operation of firing a ball toward a specific play area among the play areas formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, allowing the player to play without placing excessive strain on the player.

In this control example, the firing intensity is varied based on the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, but this is not limited to this. For example, a firing intensity selection button may be provided that allows the player to select the firing intensity, and the firing means may fire the ball at a firing intensity that corresponds to the operation result (selection result) of the firing intensity selection button.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 119, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, along with numerous ball guide nails (not shown) and a windmill, as well as rails 61 and 62, a general ball entry port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and a variable display unit 80, with its periphery attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing and are fixed to the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 118). Below, the configuration of the game board 13 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figure 119.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate and shaped like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 118) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area in front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is the area in front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (the area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 137) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of Figure 119), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of Figure 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a certain amount of force hits the return rubber 69, and is bounced back toward the center while its momentum is reduced.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first symbol display device 37 is arranged so that it is covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13, which is made of transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured to prevent the launched ball from colliding with the first symbol display device 37.

This first symbol display device 37 is provided with a first symbol display device 37 equipped with multiple LEDs and a 7-segment display, which serve as light-emitting means. The first symbol display device 37 displays information in response to various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 20), and primarily displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be activated when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the results of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery), which is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), which is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, and therefore the results of the two types of special symbol lotteries (special symbol lotteries) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), it is sufficient to provide a display area corresponding to one type of special symbol on the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., normal mode, time-saving mode, or probability variable mode) by their lighting status; whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for statically displaying a combination of symbols to indicate the lottery result); whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a favorable jackpot, a disadvantageous jackpot, or a loss symbol; and the number of reserved balls by their lighting status. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The device is also configured to indicate when the special symbol change is temporarily stopped (interrupted) by its lighting status. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different light colors (e.g., red, green, and blue), and the combination of these light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs. In this control example, various game states are indicated by a combination of light-emitting colors from the light-emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish between various game states will suffice. For example, various game states may be indicated by varying the length of the periods when the light-emitting means is lit and when it is off (blinking pattern).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for a special symbol) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbol, a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery). If it is determined that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which puts the player into a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is executed, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 enters an open state, allowing balls to easily enter the specific winning port 65a. By entering the specific winning port 65a, a game is executed in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time. This jackpot game is executed (if) after the lottery result for the special symbol is displayed (confirmed), and the jackpot game period is composed of an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is set to a closed state making it difficult for balls to enter), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the start of the next round game after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting an opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed (confirmed display), preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing when the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, allowing for a smooth jackpot game. Furthermore, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

Furthermore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new special symbol lottery from being held immediately after the final round of play ends, allowing players to prepare to fire the ball in any direction for the game that will be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth changeover between games.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this control example is configured to allow multiple types of jackpot games to be played, and the number of rounds played during the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. By configuring it in this way, players can be interested not only in whether or not they win a jackpot through the lottery for special symbols, but also in the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning.

The length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) that is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol may also be set to different lengths depending on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot win is won in which the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends is set to be different from the game content at the time of the jackpot win, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a presentation can be implemented during that ending period to inform the player in advance of the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to provide players with an easy-to-understand game experience.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot where the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content that will be played after the jackpot win end are the same, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, instead of using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning a jackpot and the game content that will be executed after the jackpot game has ended, it is possible to predefine the game state that will be set after the jackpot game has ended, for example, based on the type of jackpot that has been won and the game state at the time the jackpot was won, and then predefine the ending period for each jackpot game according to that predefined content.

Specific details will be provided later, but the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to be able to set three different game states by combining two states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols) with two states with different probabilities of winning the regular symbol lottery (high probability state for regular symbols, low probability state for regular symbols) as described below. Specifically, it is configured to be able to set the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for regular symbols), the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for regular symbols), and the probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for regular symbols). Both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured so that a win is easier in a high probability state than in a low probability state. Therefore, of the multiple game states that can be set on the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability variable state is the game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in other game states, and the probability variable state and the time-saving state are game states in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the normal symbol lottery than in other game states.

Furthermore, if a winning normal symbol lottery is won, a winning game (normal symbol winning game) is executed, making it easier to execute a special symbol lottery. Specifically, the electric device 640 attached to the second ball entrance 640 opens, executing a normal symbol winning game that provides a state in which it is easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time-saving state, i.e., a high-probability state for normal symbols, are set, the game state is more likely to execute a special symbol lottery than in other game states. Furthermore, when the high-probability state for normal symbols is set, the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is statically displayed (dynamic display period) is more likely to be set to a shorter period than when the low-probability state for normal symbols is set. Therefore, when the probability variable state and the time-saving state, i.e., a high-probability state for normal symbols, are set, the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period than in other game states, making it easier to execute a new special symbol lottery.

Although a detailed explanation will be provided later, in this control example, a specific area is provided within the variable winning device 65, which opens during a jackpot game, and a high probability state for a special symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends only if the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. Depending on the type of jackpot won, two types of jackpot games are possible: a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game), and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game). Hereinafter, advantageous jackpot games, i.e., jackpot games in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, are referred to as variable jackpot games, and a jackpot in which a variable jackpot game is executed is referred to as a variable jackpot game. Additionally, disadvantageous jackpot games, i.e., jackpot games in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game, are referred to as normal jackpot games, and jackpots in which normal jackpot games are executed are referred to as normal jackpots.

In this control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, it is determined to be a miss and no bonus is awarded to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small bonus game may be executed in which the player is awarded a smaller bonus than the jackpot as described above (for example, a bonus to open the variable winning device 65 for only one round). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (whether it is a small bonus or not) as the stopped symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also, if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Returning to Figure 119, we continue the explanation. At the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are multiple left general ball entry ports 63a, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. A variable display device unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area. The variable display device unit 80 is equipped with a third symbol display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as the "display device") that displays a variable third symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol executed by the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning), and a second symbol display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable normal symbol (second symbol) in response to a ball passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A center frame 86 is also provided on the variable display device unit 80, surrounding the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 described below, thereby displaying, for example, three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) at the top, middle, and bottom (see Figure 230 (a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (Special Pattern 1) or the second special pattern (Special Pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns each with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9." These third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, resulting in a variable display (dynamic display) of the third patterns on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. While the first pattern display device 37 displays the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see Figure 20), the third pattern display device 81 in this control example displays decorative images in response to the display of the first pattern display device 37. Instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

As shown in Figure 122 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main pattern sz is formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the results of the special pattern lottery, allowing for easy gameplay. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, if the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (described below) is a jackpot, a variable display is displayed in which the same main pattern is lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot game occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a pattern that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three symbol columns, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displays the third symbol described above in a specified order. That is, the main symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the display changes periodically by scrolling left and right for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern column Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to scroll from right to left as the display changes. The middle pattern column Z2 and the lower pattern column Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as the display changes. Furthermore, each pattern column also has sub-patterns (blank patterns) fz formed between the main patterns sz that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery. In Figure 122(b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) fz are displayed using patterns resembling triangles.

As shown in Figure 122(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1 to L3 formed in the vertical direction and two active lines L4 and L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed stopped, if the third symbol (main symbol sz) stops on the active line in a jackpot symbol combination (in this control example, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot animation is displayed to indicate a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 122(a), in this control example, each active line (L1-L5) is formed to include the symbol display positions of each symbol column Z1-Z3, making it difficult to understand the lottery results for the corresponding special symbol until all symbol columns Z1-Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the changing display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last symbol column (in this control example, the middle symbol column V2) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, of the three symbol sequences (Z1-Z3) described above, a specific symbol sequence (symbol sequence Z2), i.e., the symbol sequence among multiple symbol sequences in which the variable display stops last, is configured to have a greater number of main symbols than the other symbol sequences. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (for example, the number "4") is made greater than the other symbol sequences. As a result, when an identifier imitating a specific number reaches a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identifiers imitating a specific number) passing along the pay line can be made greater than when an identifier imitating another number reaches a reach state, allowing the player to visually predict that there is a high chance of winning the jackpot.

The manner in which the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above and can be arbitrary. The number of symbol rows, the direction of the display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, the third symbol may be a combination of an image such as a figure or character and a number. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is being performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the area in which the third symbol is displayed may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), making it difficult for the player to tell whether the third symbol is changing. Furthermore, the change in the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special symbol is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences that are difficult for a player to distinguish), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to Figure 122(b). As shown in Figure 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth symbol (special symbol 1 fourth symbol) indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (special symbol 2 fourth symbol) indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

Furthermore, the small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information is displayed to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (normal symbol fourth symbol) to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, the player can be notified of the lottery status for the special and normal symbols. As will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode that resembles a circle and a cross. The variable display of the fourth symbol in small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122(b)) indicates the status of the changing special symbol, and the static display of the fourth symbol in small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see small display area Dm2 in FIG. 122(b)) indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol may be displayed in a display mode that uses a number or a display mode that shows multiple colors, and the variable display of numbers or colors may be used to indicate the changing special symbol, and the static display of a specific symbol or color may indicate the result of the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing), and the lottery result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is in progress (changing). Also, as shown in Figure 122 (b), in this control example, a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) where the fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol is formed in the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and a regular fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) where the regular fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the regular symbol is formed in the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be configured to change depending on the presentation mode of the changing presentation executed in the central part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area and the regular fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable presentation is performed, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect. In this case, it is also possible to remove the fourth pattern display area and the regular fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the number of acquired special symbol lottery rights (reserved memory). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37 or a winning game is being executed, i.e., when a new special symbol lottery cannot be executed, and a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is reserved up to a maximum of four times. The reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds are the same number as the number of reserved balls entered. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to four, so a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The standby area Ds1b is an area for displaying reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special symbols, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8, corresponding to the maximum number of reserved symbols (8), are displayed in order from left to right. When a reserved ball for a special symbol is acquired, the reserved symbol is displayed on the lowest-numbered pedestal of the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 that does not currently display a reserved symbol.

In the example shown in Figure 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special pattern are stored in reserved memory, and in the standby area Ds1b, four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) in display modes (white circles) corresponding to the reserved balls of the first special pattern (Special Pattern 1 reserved balls) are displayed on the first base hr1 to the fourth base hr4.

The in-progress area Ds1a is a display area where the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently active special symbol change is shifted and displayed, with the in-progress reserved symbol hz0 being displayed on the in-progress base hr0. In other words, when a new special symbol change begins, the reserved symbol hz1 that was displayed on the base hr1 in the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the base hr0 in the in-progress area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a preview effect (e.g., an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) indicating the expected probability of winning a jackpot is executed for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b, the player can easily tell that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview effect was executed is being executed.

Furthermore, by making it possible to display reserved symbols that correspond to currently active special symbol changes, the effect of changing the display mode of reserved symbols can also be performed on reserved symbols that correspond to currently active special symbol changes, allowing players to play while anticipating the display mode of the reserved symbols changing for a longer period of time than if the reserved symbols that correspond to currently active special symbol changes were not displayed.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds allows the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved symbol is a reserved symbol indicating a reserved ball with the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved symbol) or a reserved symbol indicating a reserved ball with the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved symbol), with the special symbol 1 reserved symbol being displayed as a white circle (see Figure 122(b)) and the special symbol 2 reserved symbol being displayed as a black circle (see Figure 124(a)). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing to place a ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the displayed content of the reserved symbol.

As shown in Figure 122(b), in this control example, reserved patterns are displayed in numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special pattern, and the special pattern lottery is executed using the reserved balls corresponding to the reserved patterns displayed on the lowest-numbered pedestal (the lowest-numbered pedestal is pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved patterns are displayed in the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved patterns may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls are acquired, and consumption order information may be attached to each reserved pattern to indicate the order in which they will be used in the special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player which reserved balls were acquired at what timing correspond to which reserved pattern.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in Figure 122 (b), up to eight reserved symbols can be displayed side by side, but this is not limited to this, and the display area for the special symbol 1 reserved symbol and the display area for the special symbol 2 reserved symbol can also be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, if a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain a special symbol 2 reserved symbol is set, the display area for the special symbol 1 reserved symbol can be displayed more prominently than the display area for the special symbol 2 reserved symbol, and if a game state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to obtain a special symbol 2 reserved symbol is set, the display area for the special symbol 2 reserved symbol can be displayed more prominently than the display area for the special symbol 1 reserved symbol.

In the tenth control example, as explained with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical from left to right, and the same game results are awarded when playing with a right hand and when playing with a left hand, so no display is provided. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to allow settings such as a game method in which right-hand play is more advantageous than left-hand play, or a game method in which left-hand play is more advantageous than right-hand play, depending on the set game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guide display mode to guide the player in the direction in which to fire the ball (game direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily determine which area of the game board the ball should be fired towards simply by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, thereby providing a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

Explaining in more detail, the guidance display area may be configured to display a "Right Hit" display mode to guide the player to play right-handed games, and a "Left Hit" display mode to guide the player to play left-handed games. The "Right Hit" display mode may be displayed during game states in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as during a special mode, a time-saving mode, and a jackpot game, while the "Left Hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after right-handed games have ended. Furthermore, when right-handed games are detected to be being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, i.e., during a normal mode, the "Left Hit" display mode may also be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds). The various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above control examples may be displayed as appropriate.

<About the effects of the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 123 to 131, we will explain characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example. First, with reference to FIG. 123(a), we will explain the display screen when a reach is achieved during normal operation. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a reach state is achieved during normal operation (normal operation). In this control example, the variable-displayed third symbols are displayed in the order of upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z2, and the reach state is achieved when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as stopped symbols on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) as part of a third symbol combination indicating a jackpot win. The active line on which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as stopped symbols as part of a third symbol combination indicating a jackpot win is set as the reach active line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed as a variably active line. After the ready state is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to variably display each identification information (third symbol) at a slow speed that is visible to the player (the time required for one main symbol (third symbol imitating a number) to move is about 0.5 seconds).

As mentioned above, in this control example, the middle symbol row has 10 main symbols (one each of the main symbols numbered "1" to "3" and "5" to "9", and two main symbols numbered "4"), so when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a slowly varying manner, it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution. The middle symbol row Z2, which is displayed in a slowly varying manner, remains stationary and is displayed. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when a specific transition condition is met.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in Figure 123(a), regardless of which third symbol (in Figure 123(a), the identification information imitating "9" (third symbol imitating a crab)) is used to enter the reach state, the slow-changing display is executed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (third symbol imitating an octopus) is the first to be visible in the middle symbol row Z2 (see Figure 122(a)) that is displayed in a variable manner during the reach state.

In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to change depending on the variation mode of the middle symbol column Z2 after the reach state is reached. For example, it is configured to be able to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when the middle symbol column Z2 has completed one revolution after the reach state is reached (5 seconds after the slow variation display is executed) or when it has completed two revolutions (10 seconds after the slow variation display is executed). Therefore, by standardizing the identification information of the middle symbol column Z2 that first becomes visible after the reach state is reached, as in this control example, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what point the change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) will occur.

In this control example, the timing for changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol column Z2 completes one or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but this is not limited to this. For example, the timing for changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) may be set when, after the reach state is reached, identification information that forms a combination indicating a jackpot (identical identification information to the identification information for which the reach state is stopped) passes over the reach effective line, or when identification information one step away from the identification information that forms a combination indicating a jackpot passes over the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring the system to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on specific identification information corresponding to the type of identification information for which the reach state is stopped passing over the reach effective line, a relationship can be established for the player between the timing when the middle symbol column Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that results in a jackpot and the timing for changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, if the system is configured so that identification information that forms a combination indicating a jackpot after a reach state has been reached (identical identification information that is the same as the identification information that has been stopped in a reach state) changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when it passes through the reach effective line, the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped in a jackpot combination and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) can overlap for the player, allowing the player to focus on the changing presentation with great anticipation when identification information that forms a combination indicating a jackpot (identical identification information that is the same as the identification information that has been stopped in a reach state) approaches the reach effective line.

As mentioned above, in this control example, regardless of which third symbol is used to reach the winning state, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to slowly fluctuate so that a specific identification state (the third symbol resembling the number "1") is first visible. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol combination that is ultimately displayed as stopped is a combination that is one type different from the third symbol combination that results in a jackpot (one frame off from reaching the winning state) (if the final stop display pattern is determined in advance), a new problem arises in that the period from when the winning state is reached to when all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display pattern is stopped and displayed) will differ depending on the type of third symbol that results in the winning state.

Specifically, when the reach state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "1," middle symbol row Z2 slowly fluctuates to display the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to display the middle symbol row Z2 stopped and one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode. When the reach state is reached with the third symbol imitating the number "6," middle symbol row Z2 slowly fluctuates to display the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to display the middle symbol row Z2 stopped and one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode.

As a result, in order to achieve a reach state with different types of third symbols in a fluctuation pattern where the same fluctuation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process that reverse-calculated the timing at which the reach state would occur from the timing at which the third symbol stopped displaying. In other words, there was a problem in that the period from the timing at which the fluctuation started to the time at which the reach state would occur varied depending on the type of third symbol that would result in the reach state being achieved, resulting in an inconsistent reach effect, which reduced the effectiveness of the effect.

In contrast, in this control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the first symbol to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the determined variation time via a variation pattern command. The voice lamp control unit 113 then selects a variation display effect with a presentation period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, synchronizes it with the variation display of the first symbol, and executes the variation display effect of the third symbol. The variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an additional time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of third symbol that will enter a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the additional time command. More specifically, if a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional time. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the added time. In other words, the content of the added time command notification allows the voice and lamp control device 113 to identify that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time. This makes it possible to set the type of third symbol that will result in a reach state simply by checking the content of the added time command.

Next, with reference to Figures 123(b) through 126, we will explain the presentation of the second special symbol variation (lottery) that is executed when the normal state is set. First, with reference to Figure 123(b), we will explain the display content of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of a normal symbol variation that results in a winning combination in the normal state. Figure 123(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display content displayed during the execution of a normal symbol variation that results in a winning combination in the normal state. As shown in Figure 123(b), when a normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that a normal symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon resembling the electric device 640 that opens when a normal symbol is won is displayed therein. A highlighting display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to notify the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In the situation shown in Figure 123(b), a winning normal symbol variation is in progress, so the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is in a display mode that resembles the closed electric device 640. This configuration allows the player to predict that a normal symbol win will soon be played, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that Figure 123(b) uses an example of a normal symbol variation that results in a win as an explanation, but the system is configured to form a small display area Dm3 during a portion of a normal symbol variation that results in a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation) and execute a presentation (fake presentation) that displays an icon resembling the electric device 640. In this case, a presentation mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) currently in progress is stopped and displayed. By configuring it in this way, a presentation display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when there is no win in the normal symbol lottery, allowing the player to play while hoping that a normal symbol winning game will be executed. Also, Figure 123 (b) shows an example of a presentation suggesting the start of a regular winning game by displaying an icon resembling an electric device 640 in the small display area Dm3, but this is not limited to this; for example, it may be configured to display a comment suggesting the start of a regular winning game in the sub-display area Ds or part of the main display area Dm.

The display mode of the third symbol change display currently being executed in the main display area Dm may also be configured to suggest the start of a normal winning game. In this case, the effect suggesting that a normal winning game will be executed will only be executed if a special symbol change is being executed while a normal symbol change is being executed. Therefore, for example, a player who is only executing the normal symbol lottery by passing the ball through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter than the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery, will not be given advance notice of the results of the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, a player who is playing normal games in which both special and normal symbol changes are executed can be given a special benefit (execution of an effect suggesting the results of the normal symbol lottery in advance). Similarly, the execution condition for the effect using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set to be the execution of a special symbol change or the continued execution of a game in which a ball is launched.

In addition, the system may be configured to vary the likelihood of a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game depending on the game being played. For example, if a player is playing normally, when a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed, the normal winning game will be executed with a probability of nearly 100%. However, if a player is playing a game that executes only a normal symbol lottery without executing a special symbol lottery (stop-hit game), in other words, if the player is not playing normally, the normal winning game will only be executed with a probability of about 10% even if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing a stop-hit game to determine the start timing of a normal winning game based on the suggestive effect that is executed, and penalties can be imposed.

Although details will be provided later, this control example is configured to allow up to four lottery rights for normal symbols to be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reserved) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the result of this preliminary determination can be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive effect suggesting the execution of a normal symbol winning game can be executed before the execution of a normal symbol variation that has been hit and won, i.e., from the stage when a normal symbol reserved with a pre-determined winning result has been acquired. In this case, it is preferable to execute the suggestive effect in a manner that is less obvious to the player than the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 123(b). For example, the suggestive effect can be executed in the same manner as an effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executing special symbol variation, or the pre-determined result for the acquired special symbol reserved, and the executed suggestive effect can be configured to only notify the player that a favorable situation will soon be upon them.

In this way, the greater the difference between the timing when a normal winning game is actually played and the timing when the suggestive effect is played, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation style of the suggestive effect that indicates that a normal winning game will be played.By making it more difficult for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, it is possible to increase the interest in the game when the suggestive effect is played.

Next, referring to Figure 124(a), the presentation content when a normal symbol winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal mode will be explained. Figure 124(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation content displayed when a normal symbol winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal mode (normal mode). In this control example, during the normal mode in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the normal symbol fluctuation time executed in the low probability state for normal symbols is designed to be 10 seconds. As described above with reference to Figure 119, the system is configured so that approximately half of the balls fired pass through the through gate 67 in both right-hand and left-hand hit modes. Furthermore, the system is configured to be able to store up to four normal symbol lottery rights (normal symbol reserves).

In other words, while play continues in normal mode, the normal symbol lottery is continuously executed, and a normal symbol win occurs approximately once every 1,000 seconds. Furthermore, if a normal symbol win occurs in normal mode, a normal symbol win game (long open win) is executed, in which the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 119, because the electric device 640 is located below the first ball entrance 64, the ball can be fired into the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing play aimed at the first ball entrance 64. This prevents situations from occurring in which the player is unable to get the ball into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal symbol win game during a low probability state in which a normal symbol occurs with a low probability.

When a normal symbol lottery is won in normal mode, as shown in Figure 124(a), the identification information (symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm2 in a combination (two circles in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol lottery result is a win, and a normal symbol winning game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and an icon resembling an open electric chute (electric device 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Note that the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapping), so the display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the special symbol change, and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1, continue to be executed even during a normal symbol winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved symbol (shown as a black circle in the figure), which indicates the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved balls) acquired based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, is displayed in priority (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) over the special symbol 1 reserved symbol (shown as a white circle in the figure), which indicates the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved balls) acquired. In other words, the state shown in Figure 124(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and after the maximum number of reserved special symbols, four, has been acquired.

In this control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to take priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, so the special symbol lottery for the later-acquired Special Symbol 2 reserved ball is executed in priority over the earlier-acquired Special Symbol 1 reserved ball. By configuring it in this way, if a normal symbol winning game is executed during normal play and multiple Special Symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol consecutively with priority. This makes it possible to execute a special effect during the period when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In this control example, the standby area Ds1b is configured to display the acquired special 1 reserved ball and special 2 reserved ball side by side (up to eight balls can be displayed). However, if a special 1 reserved ball display area that displays only the special 1 reserved ball and a special 2 reserved ball display area that displays only the special 2 reserved ball are used, for example, if the reserved ball for the second special pattern, which is the reserved ball for which the special pattern lottery is executed first, has not been acquired, the special 1 reserved ball display area can be displayed more prominently than the special 2 reserved ball display area, and if the reserved ball for the second special pattern is acquired, the display can be switched to make the special 2 reserved ball display area more prominent than the special 1 reserved ball display area. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player whether the next lottery will be for the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

The display screen shown in Figure 124(a) is configured to remain displayed until either the end of normal win gameplay during normal mode or the start of the second special symbol variation during normal mode. In other words, even during normal win gameplay, if the second special symbol variation begins, a chance zone effect, described below with reference to Figure 124(b), is executed. On the other hand, if the end of normal win gameplay has arrived but the second special symbol variation does not begin, for example, if a normal win game (5 seconds) is executed while a first special symbol variation with a long variation time selected (e.g., 60 seconds) is being executed, the words "Chance Zone Waiting" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and when the currently executing first special symbol variation ends, a standby screen is displayed informing the player that the second special symbol variation will begin.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), if a normal winning game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the third symbol variation effect (shown by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display area Dm in response to the ongoing first special symbol variation continues to be displayed, while a portion of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) indicates that a normal winning game is in progress. In this case, the size of the display area used to indicate that a normal winning game is being executed can be configured to be variable based on the results of the lottery for the ongoing first special symbol variation. For example, if the ongoing first special symbol variation results in a jackpot, the small display area Dm3 can be made smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the small display area Dm3 can be omitted. This configuration can prevent the formation of the small display area Dm3 from reducing the visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating a jackpot. Furthermore, if a normal winning game is started without the small display area Dm3 being formed, the player can be notified that the special symbol change (first special symbol change) in progress is a jackpot change, so even if the small display area Dm3 does not notify the player that a normal winning game has been executed, the player can be made to pay close attention to the operating status of the electric device 640. When using such a configuration, it is advisable to configure it so that the same presentation as a jackpot change is executed even in some cases where the special symbol change in progress is not a jackpot change (it is a miss change).

On the other hand, if the currently executing special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is a miss variation, or if no special symbol variation is being executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the entire main display area Dm may be used to display that a regular winning game has been executed.

In other words, when multiple pieces of information (lottery results and winning game status) need to be displayed overlappingly within the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient to configure the display so that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed preferentially, and various display modes can be used based on this technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous may differ depending on the player. For example, some players may consider information indicating a jackpot win in a special symbol lottery to be advantageous, while other players may consider a presentation with a lower appearance rate to be more advantageous than the results of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operating means that can be operated by the player and an advantage degree selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of the various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operating means, and to configure the display mode corresponding to the various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the advantage degree selected by the advantage degree selection means. This allows various pieces of information to be displayed in a display mode that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the effects in the chance zone in which the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during normal mode will be explained with reference to Figures 124(b) to 126. Figure 124(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the effects executed when a chance zone is set. As shown in Figure 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during normal mode, the comment "Entering Chance Zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm. This chance zone is a favorable period set for the period until all reserved special symbols 2 acquired during normal mode are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 for the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that they are currently in an advantageous period.

In addition, if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "High probability of winning a jackpot" as a guide display indicating that there is a high probability of entering the high probability state. As will be explained in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has the same probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. However, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that, although the probability of winning a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery is the same as the probability of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability state is more likely to be entered after the jackpot game ends if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is primarily executed, the chance zone period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to win a jackpot that will result in the high probability state than periods other than the chance zone in the normal state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 124(b), the words "High probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state" are displayed as a guide display indicating that there is a high probability of entering the high probability state.

As will be explained in more detail later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-change effect is executed to make it appear as if multiple special symbol changes have been executed during a single special symbol change (second special symbol change). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) showing the reserved number of special symbols displayed in the secondary display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special symbol 1 (in the figure, "2" indicating that the reserved number of special symbol 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special symbol 2 (in the figure, "3" indicating that the reserved number of special symbol 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in Figure 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see Figure 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable effect is executed during the chance zone, it can be made to appear as if multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been executed, enhancing the effect of the effect. Note that in this control example, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a portion of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12). However, without being limited to this, the number of reserved special symbols may be configured not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or the number of reserved special symbols may be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, the system can be configured to make it difficult for players to distinguish the number of reserved special symbols. For example, the system can be switched from a display mode using numbers that allows players to easily distinguish the number of reserved special symbols to a display mode that changes color to correspond to each reserved special symbol number. In this configuration, even if a player can easily understand the display mode used to indicate the number of reserved special symbols, it is possible to prevent the current number of reserved special symbols from being easily distinguished, thereby achieving the same effect as this control example.

Also, as shown in Figure 124(b), a rabbit-shaped character 1801 is displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, indicating that the second special symbol is currently changing. As mentioned above, the special symbol lottery (changing) and the normal symbol lottery (changing) are executed in parallel (overlapping), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is being executed may overlap with the first special symbol changing period (see Figure 124(a)), or may not. If the normal symbol winning game is executed during the first special symbol changing period, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the ongoing first special symbol change ends; if the period does not overlap with the first special symbol changing period, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special symbol lottery will differ depending on the state of the first special symbol when a regular winning game is played, creating the problem of players finding it difficult to accurately determine whether the currently active special symbol variation is the first special symbol variation or the second special symbol variation.

In contrast, in this control example, when the second special pattern variation is executed, character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special pattern variation is the first special pattern variation or the second special pattern variation.

Next, with reference to Figures 125(a) and 126, we will explain the content of the pseudo-variation effect (special variation effect) among the variation effects executed during the chance zone. Figure 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol temporarily stops during a special variation effect, Figure 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in a special variation effect executed when the special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired, and Figure 126 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the third symbol restarts in a special variation effect executed when the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired.

Here, we will explain the content of the special variation effect (pseudo-variation effect). This special variation effect involves temporarily stopping the display of the third symbol during a single second special symbol variation and then restarting it, creating a pseudo-variation effect that makes the player believe that multiple special symbol variations have occurred. First, a reach effect is executed during the first half of the special variation effect (approximately 10 seconds). At the end of the first half, as shown in Figure 125(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (shown as "353" in the figure). At this point, i.e., the end of the first half of the special variation effect, the word "Sorry" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery was a miss, convincing the player that the second special symbol lottery performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable effect, a special first half effect is executed in which the reach effect that creates hope for a jackpot win stops (temporarily stops) with a result indicating a miss.

Then, during the second half of the special variation effect (approximately 30 seconds), a variation effect (special second half effect) is executed to restart the temporarily stopped third symbol. This special second half effect is configured to vary its presentation style depending on the number of reserved special symbol 2 symbols already acquired. For example, when a reserved special symbol 2 ball is secured, the special second half effect is executed in a presentation style corresponding to the second special symbol variation during the chance zone, as shown in FIG. 125(b). When a reserved special symbol 2 ball is not secured, the special second half effect is executed in a presentation style corresponding to the first special symbol variation that occurs after the chance zone ends, as shown in FIG. 126. In other words, in this control example, the type of special symbol variation that will be executed after the currently executing second special symbol variation ends is determined based on the number of reserved special symbols, and the presentation style of the special second half effect is set to a presentation style corresponding to the determination result. This makes it more likely that the player will experience multiple special symbol variations during a single second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a special second half effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the second special pattern change in the chance zone (see Figure 125(b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the second half period is varied to correspond to the number of reserved special pattern 2 balls that have been acquired. Although detailed explanations are omitted, if neither the reserved special pattern 2 balls nor the reserved special pattern 1 balls have been secured when the special change effect is executed, the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in Figure 125(a) is not executed, and a single change effect (a change effect in which the third pattern is never temporarily stopped) is executed using the entire change period of the second special pattern change. This means that the special change effect described above is executed only when the reserved special pattern number is secured, making it seem even more likely that multiple special pattern changes have been executed during a single second special pattern change.

In addition, only if the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, is a presentation mode set in which the number of provisional stops of the third symbol executed during the second half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol provisionally stops five or more times, the player can be made to expect that the second special symbol variation currently being executed will result in a jackpot. As mentioned above, this control example is configured to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between when the third symbol is provisionally displayed and when it is permanently displayed, making it difficult to accurately determine the number of provisional stops. Therefore, it is possible to mix the number of provisional stop displays and the number of permanent displays, making it appear as if the provisional stop has been displayed five or more times, or to mistake some of the provisional stop displays for permanent displays, making it appear as if the provisional stop display count has not reached five, even though it has actually been displayed five or more times, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the presentation outcome.

Note that other configurations may also be used as the presentation mode for the special variation effect. For example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation, allowing the player to easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Alternatively, at least a portion of the presentation mode for the special variation effect (for example, the background color or the effect of the third pattern) may be configured to change in stages depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Furthermore, a display mode indicating the number of times the temporarily stopped third pattern has been temporarily stopped (for example, 1st time, 2nd time) may be temporarily displayed when the temporarily stopped third pattern is redisplayed.

As shown in Figure 126, if a special variation effect is executed without securing the special symbol 2 reserved ball, the words "Chance Zone Ended" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds to indicate that the chance zone has ended, and a special second half effect is executed in which the variation display of the third symbol executed in the primary display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (a variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally). Therefore, after the player is led to believe that the chance zone has ended, the result of the special variation effect, i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol, is displayed frozen. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

A detailed explanation will be provided later, but in this control example, the special variation effect described above is executed for some of the second special symbol variations during normal play, and for the rest, one variation effect is executed for each second special symbol variation. This prevents the special variation effect from being executed for an unnecessarily long time when multiple (up to four) special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired during a normal play.

Next, referring to Figure 127, the presentation content executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be explained. Figure 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, Figure 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, Figure 127(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and Figure 127(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won during normal play is a jackpot game that is likely to set a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player (high probability jackpot game), the jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game that is unlikely to set a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player (normal jackpot game). Specifically, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds for high probability jackpot games and 15 seconds for normal jackpot games. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player during the ending period (before the high probability state is set) that the game content will change significantly through the jackpot game (transition from normal play to high probability state). Furthermore, the long ending period can be used to notify the player of the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, as described above, in this control example, even when a special jackpot game is being played, the special jackpot state will not be set unless the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 flows down into the specific area (V gate) 65v (see Figure 120). Therefore, if the ball cannot be made to flow down into the specific area (V gate) 65v during a special jackpot game, the special jackpot state will not be set after the special jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set, just like in a regular jackpot game.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state will be set is executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect will differ from the actual game state that will be set, causing dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the notification effect presentation period will differ, resulting in a notification effect that feels strange to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation style of the notification effect executed in the second half is then determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 127, when a normal jackpot game is played, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is to display the words "Chance Mode 100 Times" for the first half period (8 seconds) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see Figure 127(a)), and then, for the second half period (7 seconds), if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery), a notification effect is executed in which the words "Win and Super Chance GET in Chance Mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a probability variable state is likely to be set (see Figure 127(c)).

On the other hand, when a special jackpot game is played, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is configured to display the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" (see Figure 127(b)) in the first half (10 seconds) to indicate that a special jackpot state will be set, and then, in the second half (7 seconds), to display the words "Be careful not to forget to remove your card" (see Figure 127(d)) as a warning that is not directly related to the game content.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process to determine the presentation mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game, when various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processes executed during the jackpot game.

Here, we will explain what happens when a special jackpot game is executed, but the ball cannot flow down into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. In this case, among the display modes shown in Figure 127(b), a process is executed to hide the word "Super" and to switch the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the normal jackpot ending period (see Figure 127(c)).

More specifically, in the display mode shown in Figure 127(a), the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed is different from the display layer on which the word "100 Chance Modes" is displayed, and the display instruction for the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed can be switched on or off based on the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during jackpot play. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the determination result of whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during jackpot play through simple control processing. Furthermore, because the presentation mode is switched during the second half of the jackpot ending period, which is set to be the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without causing any discomfort to the player.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period varies depending on the jackpot type, but this is not limited to this and the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. Also, in this control example, the second half of the jackpot ending period is set to be the same length for all jackpot types, but this is not limited to this and the first half of the jackpot ending period may be configured to be the same length for all jackpot types. Furthermore, if there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of them. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be the same length.

Furthermore, in this control example, the ending period is configured to have different lengths depending on the type of jackpot won, but this is not limited to this, and the length of the ending period may also be configured to vary depending on the game results during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to Figures 128 to 130, the effects executed during chance mode will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that a high probability state for normal symbols is set 100 times after the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state for special symbols is set 50 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, as will be explained in detail later, the machine is configured to be able to set whether or not to execute a V notification effect that notifies players that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game.

If a V notification effect is executed during a jackpot game, a presentation mode (special chance mode) is set to notify the player that a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) has been set after the jackpot game has ended. If a V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, that is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, or if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v but the V notification effect is not executed, a presentation mode (chance mode) is set that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether a probability variable state has been set after the jackpot game has ended.

When chance mode is set as the presentation mode, the words "Chance mode in progress" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and a remaining period notification is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the secondary display area Ds to indicate the period until the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see Figure 128(a)). The example shown in Figure 128(a) shows the state in which the 20th special symbol variation has been performed since chance mode was set, and the remaining period notification displays the words "80 times," indicating that chance mode will end when 80 more special symbol variations have been performed.

In this way, when chance mode is set as the presentation mode, the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 make it difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, allowing the player to play while hoping that the current game state is a game state advantageous to the player (probability variable state).

Furthermore, only if the V notification effect is not executed during jackpot play, chance mode can be set as the presentation mode even if a special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends. This prevents a situation in which the player is confused when chance mode is set after the jackpot play ends, even though the effect indicates that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during jackpot play, i.e., that a special probability state will be set after the jackpot play ends. In addition, if a V notification effect is executed during jackpot play to indicate that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v, super chance mode is set as the presentation mode to indicate that a special probability state will be set after the jackpot play ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed, chance mode is set as the display mode after the jackpot game ends.However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure super chance mode to be set in some cases where the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it has become impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during this jackpot game), a determination is made as to whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during this jackpot game and whether a V notification effect was executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery) where a determination result that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v or a determination result that a V notification effect has not been executed is obtained, a display mode (FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(d)) indicating that a probability variable state will be set during the ending period of the jackpot game can be displayed, and a super chance mode can be set as the presentation mode after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, the possibility of the Super Chance Mode being set remains, allowing the player to play with a sense of anticipation until the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode that is set after the end of a jackpot game, the game state may be set to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state. Regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern will continue is displayed. In other words, the gaming machine is configured to be able to set a first advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) and a second advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) as gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state after the end of a jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until 50 special symbol variations are performed), and the second advantageous gaming state continues for a second period longer than the first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until 100 special symbol variations are performed). After the first advantageous gaming state is set after the end of a jackpot game, if the first period has passed, the second advantageous gaming state is set until the second period has passed, and the normal state is set after the second period has passed. In this gaming machine, regardless of whether the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a remaining period notification is possible to indicate the remaining period until the advantageous gaming state ends (second period).

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner of the duration of the advantageous game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Furthermore, in this control example, when the remaining period of the second period (remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state indication effect is configured to indicate to the player whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, using the notification mode (display mode) for the remaining period notification.

Here, referring to Figure 128(b), we will explain the content of the game state suggestion effect executed during chance mode. Figure 128(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the display content of the game state suggestion effect executed during chance mode. As shown in Figure 128(b), when a chance mode is set while a special probability state is set and a predetermined notification condition is met, a game state suggestion effect (displayed as a white display in Figure 128(b)) is executed, in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed. Then, the comment "Expected jackpot increased" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting which of the advantageous game states has been set while notifying the player of the period until the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in Figure 128 (b) can be displayed when the currently executing special symbol variation is a jackpot variation, or when the acquired special symbol 2 reserved ball contains information on winning a jackpot, and during the period in chance mode when a probability variable state can be set (within the period after the jackpot game ends until 50 special symbol variations have been executed).

By configuring it in this way, during chance mode, which indicates the duration of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player, various information that is more advantageous to the player (information indicating that a high probability state has been set, information regarding a jackpot win) can be displayed using the same display format, providing a presentation that is easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, even if a time-saving state is actually set, a display format that is likely to be displayed when a high probability state has been set based on a jackpot win can be displayed, making the player believe that a high probability state has been set at a rate higher than the design value, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Note that the effects during chance mode may be configured to be executed using a different technical concept from that of the control example described above. For example, when chance mode is set during a probability variable state, if a jackpot is won or if the acquired special chart 2 reserved ball contains information indicating a jackpot, a suggestion effect may be executed to suggest that the currently set game state is a time-saving state (for example, an effect in which the remaining time notification is displayed in a different display mode (kanji numerals) than those shown in Figures 128(a) and (b)). This makes it possible to make a player believe that they have won a jackpot during a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than a probability variable state, even in an advantageous game state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, because the percentage of times a probability variable state has been set in the game history can be made to appear lower than it actually is, the player can play with greater anticipation that a probability variable state will be set in the next jackpot game.

128(a) and (b), in this first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the duration (remaining period) of the chance mode is changed to suggest the currently set game state to the player, thereby making it easier for players who are carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode to understand the game state suggestion effect that suggests the currently set game state. However, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode. For example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a first display mode (e.g., the word "chance") that is more likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., the word "pinch") that is more likely to be displayed when the time-saving state is set than when the probability variable state is set, or the game state suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this first control example, both the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are configured to end when the number of times the special pattern variation has been executed reaches a predetermined number of times.Therefore, as shown in Figures 128(a) and (b), the display mode of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period for which the chance mode will continue (the remaining period for which the high probability state of the special pattern or the high probability state of the normal pattern can continue) is used to make it possible to suggest the current game state.However, for example, the above-mentioned chance mode configuration may also be used in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the high probability state of the special pattern will continue until the next jackpot game is executed. In this case, if a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period until the high probability state for the normal symbols ends (the period until the time-saving state ends) is notified by a remaining period notification. When the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time-saving state is set, an effect is executed to notify that the state has transitioned to the normal state. If a probability variable state is set, an effect can be executed in which the word "Congratulations" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the high probability state for special symbols will continue until the next jackpot game is executed, i.e., a display mode indicating that the remaining period for which the probability variable state will continue is the period until the next jackpot. If a predetermined notification condition is met during the period in which the chance mode is set, the word "Congratulations" can be displayed.

In other words, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) that is updated as needed to correspond to the remaining period of the chance mode, which is updated each time a special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode that simply indicates the remaining period of the chance mode may be used, i.e., a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the number of remaining special symbol draws that can be executed during the chance mode, like the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128(a), may be used, or a remaining period notification mode that can roughly indicate the remaining period of the chance mode by varying the display mode (for example, varying the display color) to correspond to the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. Furthermore, multiple remaining period notification modes may be displayed, and by combining the display modes of the multiple displayed remaining period notification modes, the player may be able to grasp the remaining period of the chance mode.

129 and 130, we will explain the effects that are executed when a player operates the operating means during chance mode. In this control example, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation content and operation timing. Detailed explanations will be omitted, but the system is configured to execute various effects, such as an operation effect that changes the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, an operation effect that issues a notification to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22 as part of a variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, an operation effect that executes a different effect when the player operates the frame button 22 than when the player does not operate the frame button 22, and an operation effect that livens up the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. This motivates the player to play games other than firing balls, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

Here, we will explain the details of the various operation effects executed during chance mode, among the above-mentioned operation effects. Details will be provided later with reference to Figure 18, but in this control example, when a favorable gaming state (time-saving state, probability variable state) is established, a different fluctuation time can be selected depending on the number of special symbol fluctuations since the favorable gaming state was established. Specifically, the period from the first to the twentieth special symbol fluctuation since the advantageous gaming state was established is the first period (high-speed fluctuation period) in which a short fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds) is likely to be selected. The period from the 21st to the 49th special symbol fluctuation since the advantageous gaming state was established is the second period in which a longer fluctuation time (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set. Only the 50th special symbol fluctuation is the specific period in which a specific fluctuation time (e.g., 20 seconds) is set. The period from the 51st to the 100th special symbol fluctuation is the third period in which a fluctuation time similar to the second period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set.

In other words, during the specified period (first period) after the chance mode is set, i.e., the specified period after the jackpot game ends, special symbol variations are more likely to occur in a short variation time, so if a jackpot is won during this first period, it becomes easier to play multiple jackpot games at short intervals. This makes it possible for the player to wonder if the next jackpot game is being played as part of the previous jackpot game, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The system is configured so that during the second and third periods described above, special symbol fluctuations with shorter fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and special symbol fluctuations with longer fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than in the first period. This ensures that during a single special symbol fluctuation in chance mode, a period is provided for the execution of suggestive effects to indicate whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a special variable state. Furthermore, during the specific period (the 50th special symbol fluctuation after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol fluctuation with a specific fluctuation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a suggestive effect of 20 seconds is executed to indicate to the player whether or not the special variable state has been set (or is being set).

In this way, by allowing the user to select different change times depending on the number of times a special symbol change is performed, it is possible to execute effects for each change over an appropriate period of time.

Figure 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (normal fluctuation period) when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode and the normal state is set internally, and Figure 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the presentation mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display presentation shown in Figure 129(a). In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by the player pressing (operating) the frame button 22, the background is configured to alternate between an ocean background (ocean mode) and a mountain background (mountain mode).

As shown in Figure 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a framed button 22 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm in a display mode indicating that it is operable (in the figure, an arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of button depression), and the words "Sea Mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the secondary display area Ds, indicating that sea mode is currently set. When the player operates the framed button 22 in this state, the display switches from "Sea Mode" to "Mountain Mode," as shown in Figure 129(b).

Next, referring to Figure 130, the operation effects during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be explained. In this control example, if the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state or the probability variable state is set until the 20th special symbol fluctuation ends), the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation period, when a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time for one special symbol fluctuation, if the background image were switched, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 would change frequently, making it difficult for the player to grasp the results of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). However, if all player operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period were disabled, there was a problem in that it would reduce the player's motivation to play.

In this control example, when a player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed rather than switching the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in chance mode, the words "Special Mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, informing the player that they are currently in the high-speed fluctuation period. During this "Special Mode," a special symbol fluctuation with a 5-second fluctuation time is executed regardless of the results of the special symbol lottery, and the third symbol fluctuation effect is also executed in a "Special Mode"-specific fluctuation effect. Furthermore, even during "Special Mode," the icon HR10 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, a game status suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed, as shown in FIG. 130(b).

In this way, even if a player performs the same operation (presses the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect executed can be varied depending on the timing of the operation, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 at various times as they play. Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the same guide display (icon HR10) is used to guide the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, and when a player performs the same operation (presses the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect executed varies depending on the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know what operation effect will be executed until they actually operate (press) the frame button 22, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more.

Details will be provided later with reference to Figure 18. In this control example, multiple operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the rate at which each operation effect is selected varies depending on the set game state. In other words, the appearance rate of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period can be used to predict whether the currently set game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is executed repeatedly during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, pressing the frame button 22 switches the background image only if certain conditions are met. Specifically, if a reserved ball with a second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved ball) acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information indicating a jackpot win, a special fluctuation effect can be executed using the fluctuation time between the jackpot special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the jackpot win information and the special pattern change executed before the jackpot special pattern change (the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the jackpot win information). When the player presses the frame button 22 while the conditions for executing the special fluctuation effect are met, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (e.g., ocean mode) to a dedicated special background image (e.g., space mode). In other words, if the background image display is switched based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player's chances of winning the jackpot increase, and the player is encouraged to press the frame button 22 more aggressively.

In addition, even during high-speed fluctuation periods, the background image can be switched by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22. This special operation (long press) is determined to have been performed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for two seconds, and the period until the operation is determined to have been performed is longer than that for a normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. Therefore, since this operation is less likely to be performed frequently than a normal operation (press), even if the background image can be switched, the background image can be prevented from being switched too frequently. Note that in this control example, a long press operation is used as a special operation with a longer operation time than a normal operation, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22, an operation means having multiple operation units (e.g., a cross key) may be provided as the operation means, and special operations may be performed by operating the multiple operation units in a predetermined order.

Next, referring to Figure 131, we will explain the effects that are executed during "Super Chance Mode," in which the player is notified that a special probability state has been set. Figure 131(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects that are executed when a first special symbol variation is executed during "Super Chance Mode," and Figure 131(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects that are executed when a second special symbol variation is executed during "Super Chance Mode."

In this control example, when a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability variable state is set with a high probability (a probability variable jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). Furthermore, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the probability variable state is set, the probability variable state can be looped with a high probability as long as a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery (the jackpot probability in the high probability state for special patterns is 1/50) before the specified number of special pattern lotteries (50) are executed. This allows players playing during the probability variable state to play with enthusiasm, hoping to win the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even when the probability variable state is set, for example, if a probability variable jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed in normal state, and immediately after the probability variable state is set after the jackpot play ends, i.e., when the probability variable state is set and the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired and the special symbol 1 reserved ball has been acquired, the first special symbol lottery will be executed. In this control example, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, probability variable jackpot play is executed 100% of the time, whereas when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, probability variable jackpot play is executed 50% of the time, and normal jackpot play is executed the remaining 50% of the time. In other words, even when the probability variable state is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, it may not be possible to loop the probability variable state.

In this way, if a player wins a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery during the probability variable state, and the player quickly determines that the jackpot is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) that results in a normal jackpot game, the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this control example, the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the probability variable state is configured to more easily execute a double reach effect, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the probability variable jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot simultaneously enter a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state, the double reach effect described above is always executed (see Figure 131 (a)).

This prevents the execution of a reach effect in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in reach when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, thereby preventing players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the special symbol fluctuation period.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 131(a), in this control example, during "Super Chance Mode," small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed, just as during the above-mentioned "Chance Mode," making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. Furthermore, the words "In Super Chance Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to notify the player that they are currently in a special probability state.

Here, when the double reach shown in Figure 131(a) is executed during the super chance mode (a double reach effect in which the third symbol (identifier information marked with the number 1) corresponding to a special jackpot and the third symbol (identifier information marked with the number 2) corresponding to a regular jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state), there is a risk that the player will easily realize that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change. Therefore, in this control example, the double reach effect shown in Figure 131(a) can also be executed in the change effect executed in response to the second special symbol change. In other words, the double reach effect using the third symbol corresponding to a regular win can be executed in the change effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always executes a special jackpot game when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, even if the double reach effect shown in Figure 127(a) is executed, it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the type of third symbol that reaches the reach state when the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third symbol corresponding to a special jackpot (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9), as shown in Figure 131 (b) (promotion effect to a special double reach).

By configuring it in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that a guaranteed jackpot game will be played. Furthermore, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play while expecting that the effect will be upgraded to a guaranteed double reach midway through.

In this control example, the variable condition for changing (promoting) the ongoing double reach effect to a guaranteed double reach effect is set as a variable condition that is met when the change pattern of the middle symbol Z2 reaches a predetermined pattern (one lap has passed). However, this is not limited to this. For example, a variable condition may be set to be met when the third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol that forms a combination that results in a jackpot) as the third symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the reach effective line, or a variable condition may be set to be met when a specific operation result is obtained from the operation means (frame button 22) that the player can operate.

In addition, in this control example, the type of third symbol that is in a reach state when the variable condition is met is changed, but this is not limited to this; for example, the number of third symbols that are in a reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (shown as triangles in the figure) may be erased, and a triple reach effect may be executed in which "3, 2, 1" is displayed from left to right as the upper symbol column Z1, and "1, 2, 3" is displayed from left to right as the lower symbol column Z3. Even in this configuration, the triple reach effect can increase the number of third symbols that are in reach, corresponding to a special jackpot, compared to the double reach effect, and therefore the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility that they have won a special jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concepts may be applied to variable effects executed during the normal state. For example, if a variable condition is met during a normal single reach effect in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in a reach state, the type of third symbol in the reach state may be switched to a third symbol type corresponding to a special jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while anticipating a more advantageous performance result until the variable effect ends.

Next, referring to Figure 132, we will explain the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern selected in this control example and the performance mode that is executed. Figure 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the performance flow when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the third symbol variation performance, and Figure 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing the performance flow when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the third symbol variation performance.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to Figure 25, but in this control example, a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that combines basic time and added time is defined as the fluctuation pattern for showing the results of the special symbol lottery. The period corresponding to the basic time is then defined as the common fluctuation pattern, and the period corresponding to the added time is defined as the specific fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, the presentation of the third pattern change executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the results of the special pattern lottery is configured so that the period from when the reach state is displayed until the third pattern is displayed stationary varies depending on the type of third pattern that will result in the reach state. The third pattern that corresponds to the time set as the added time is then set as the third pattern that will result in the reach state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the third pattern change presentation (the third pattern change presentation that is executed in accordance with the basic time) that is executed during the specified period after the third pattern begins to change.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 132 (a), in the case of a non-reach variation effect, no additional time is set, so a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation effect (for example, 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a manner that does not result in a reach state on the active line, and two seconds later the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a manner that indicates a miss. After that, after a one-second stationary display period (determination time), the result of the special pattern lottery is displayed as a final decision.

As shown in Figure 132 (b), when a reach variation effect is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the effect mode from when the reach state is reached until 5 seconds have passed is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the effect mode from when the reach state is reached until the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the effect mode (reach pattern, stopping symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to Figure 133, we will explain the presentation style of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of a jackpot game. Figure 133(a) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot, Figure 133(b) shows the flow of presentation for a special jackpot game, and Figure 133(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow through a specific area (V-gate) during a special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different for normal jackpots and special jackpots, with the ED period set to 15 seconds for normal jackpots and 17 seconds for special jackpots. The ending performance is then divided into a first half period and a second half period, respectively (see Figure 127).

In this control example, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and a determination is made at the start of the ending period (ED period) as to whether or not a V win has occurred during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

First, referring to Figure 133 (a), we will explain the content of the presentation during the ending period of a jackpot game when a normal jackpot game is played. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during a jackpot game from becoming complicated and increasing the processing load during the jackpot game, the presentation mode of the presentation (ending display presentation) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the round game (game in which prize balls can be won) during the jackpot game is executed (before the jackpot game starts or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When a normal jackpot game is played, the display mode of the ending effect (see Figures 127(a) and (c)) is set to indicate to the player that a "chance mode" will be set (a time-shortened state will be set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. Then, in a normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a pre-set ending effect is executed as the ending effect of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to Figures 133(b) and 133(c), the content of the presentation during the ending period of a jackpot game when a variable probability jackpot game is played will be explained. When a variable probability jackpot game is played, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the presentation style of the ending presentation is determined based on the result of that determination. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is being played, the controller 100 determines whether to execute a V notification effect, which executes a guide notification instructing the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a V passage notification informing the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. If it is determined that a V notification effect should be executed, the controller 100 sets a display mode (see FIGS. 127(b) and 127(d)) as the ending effect to inform the player that a "Super Chance Mode" will be set (a probability variable state will be set) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a V notification effect should not be executed, the controller 100 sets a display mode (see FIG. 127(c)) as the ending effect to inform the player that a "Chance Mode" will be set after the jackpot game ends (a display mode in which the "Super" display is deleted from the display mode in FIG. 127(b)).

When the V notification effect is executed, a guide notification is executed in time with the start of the V round (first round) game, in which the comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v within the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V passing notification is executed in which the comment "Got V!!" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) despite the execution of the guide notification, an emphasis guide notification is executed to more emphasize the ball's passage into the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game ends, the above-mentioned V passing notification is executed, and if the V round game ends without the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the message "Sorry, you didn't get V!" is displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, a determination is made based on the actual game results of the V-round game as to whether to replace the preset display mode of the ending effect. Here, as described above, if it is determined that a V-notification effect should be executed at the start of the jackpot game, a display mode indicating that "Super Chance Mode" will be set as the ending effect (see Figures 127(b) and 127(d)) is preset. Therefore, if the ball passes through the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the V-round game, the ending effect is executed without switching the display mode of the ending effect. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the V-round game, a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, a process (replacement process) is executed to switch the display mode of the ending effect to a display mode indicating that "Chance Mode" will be set, and the ending effect is executed in the replaced display mode (a display mode in which the "Super" display is deleted from the display mode of Figure 127(b) and Figure 127(c)).

Furthermore, if the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, just like in a normal jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to know from the various effect displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 that a V round game is being executed, or that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. This makes it possible to provide a state in which a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, even though a probability variable state is actually set.

Furthermore, if "Chance Mode" is set while the probability variable state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during jackpot play (during probability variable jackpot play), making it difficult to know in advance that the probability variable state will be set by the effects during jackpot play. In this control example, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during jackpot play without the V notification effect being executed, "Chance Mode" is set after the jackpot play ends, even though the probability variable state is actually set. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, the V passage notification may not be executed at a predetermined rate, and if the V passage notification is not executed despite the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, "Chance Mode" may be set after the jackpot play ends. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the V notification effect to be executable even when a normal jackpot play is being played.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier to create an event where the V-pass notification is not executed even though the V notification effect has been executed, thereby preventing players from feeling uncomfortable about the "Chance Mode" being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the V notification effect was executed.

Next, referring to Figure 134, the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a jackpot game will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, a high probability state for normal symbols is set for a predetermined first specific period (the period until 100 special symbol variations are performed) after the end of a jackpot game. If the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state for special symbols is set for a predetermined second specific period (the period until 50 special symbol variations are performed) after the end of a jackpot game. If the game state set after the end of a jackpot game is a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols), a "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see Figure 134 (b)). Furthermore, if the game state set after the end of a jackpot game is a probability variable state (a state with a high probability of special symbols or a state with a high probability of normal symbols), the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game differs depending on the presentation content during the jackpot game (depending on whether or not a V notification presentation is present). As shown in FIG. 134(a), if a notification that a probability variable state will be set is received during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), i.e., if a display mode indicating entry into "Super Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending presentation, "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display a in FIG. 134(a)). If a notification that a probability variable state will be set is not received during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), i.e., if a display mode indicating entry into "Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending presentation, "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in display a in Figure 134(a), if "Super Chance Mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, that "Super Chance Mode" will continue until the special probability state ends, and when the game state transitions from the special probability state to the time-saving state, the display will switch to "Chance Mode." In this case, while "Super Chance Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 131(a), the remaining period until the special probability state ends (up to 50 times) is displayed in the small display area Ds2. This allows the player to easily understand the period for which the most advantageous game state for them will continue. In addition to the display content shown in FIG. 131(a), a pre-announcement display may be implemented to notify the player that the time-saving state will be set to 50 times after the high probability state ends. For example, if the remaining period indicator (shown in white as "49 times" in FIG. 131(a)) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state displayed in the small display area Ds2 falls below a predetermined period (e.g., "10 times" or less), the remaining period indicator indicating the number of times the time-saving state will continue (50 times) that will be set later may be displayed in a different display format (e.g., "50 times" in black) from the remaining period indicator indicating the remaining period of the high probability state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state will be set even after the high probability state ends.

Alternatively, when "Super Chance Mode" is set, a remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the special variable state and a remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be displayed, and each time a special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be decremented by one. Alternatively, a remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the special variable state and a remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state that will be set after the special variable state ends may be displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the special variable state may be decremented first, and when the remaining period of the special variable state reaches 0 and the game transitions to the time-saving state, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be decremented. Even with this configuration, a player playing during the special variable state can be notified in advance that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the special variable state ends.

Next, the effects during chance mode will be explained using display b in Figure 134(a) and Figure 134(b). In this control example, chance mode is set as the effect mode in some cases when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Then, during chance mode, as described above with reference to Figure 128, a game state suggestion effect is executed that changes the notification mode of the remaining time notification. This game state suggestion effect is set so that it appears more frequently in chance mode during probability variable state than in chance mode during time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, the content of the operation effects during chance mode will be explained. In this control example, the operation mode of the operation effects (effects executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 (operation means)) executed during chance mode is configured to be variable depending on the timing and operation method of the player's operation of the frame button 22 (operation means), and the currently set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), during chance mode when the time-saving state is set, if the button push "normal press" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed change period until 20 special pattern changes are executed, an operation effect of "reach suggestion" that suggests whether the currently executed change effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, or a "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state, is configured to be executed. After that (after the special pattern change has been executed 21 times), an operation effect of "background mode transition" that transitions to background mode is configured to be executed. Additionally, as an operation method, when a long button press is executed ("long press"), a "background mode transition" operation effect that switches background mode can be executed during the high-speed change period up until 20 special symbol changes have been executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 special symbol changes (second period), a "state suggestion" operation effect that suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and from that point on (after the 51st special symbol change), a "past state suggestion" operation effect can be executed to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 135(b), during chance mode when a probability variable state is set, if a "normal push" button is executed as an operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period up until 20 special symbol fluctuations, the following operation effects can be executed: a "reach suggestion" that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will reach a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, a "state suggestion" that suggests the currently set game state, or a "background mode transition" that transitions to background mode. During the period from 21 to 50 special symbol fluctuations (during the second period), the "background mode transition" or "state suggestion" operation effects can be executed, and thereafter (after the 51st special symbol fluctuation), the "background mode transition" operation effect can be executed. Furthermore, if a "long press" button is executed as an operation method, the "background mode transition" operation effect can be executed, regardless of the number of special symbol fluctuations.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state is set or when the probability variable state is set, a "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode. The duration of the chance mode (100 time-saving periods) is divided into multiple periods depending on the number of special pattern variations executed during the chance mode, and the presentation style of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) is changed for each set game state and period. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation when the chance mode is set, thereby encouraging the player to play a game that motivates them to operate the operation means.

As explained above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if a "normal press" operation is performed on the frame button 22, the "background mode transition" operation effect is less likely to be executed than in other periods. However, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which transition to background mode is less likely) may be set at other times. For example, the period from the end of the jackpot game until the end of the first special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game may be set as the normal time-saving fluctuation period, and the period from the execution of the second special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot game until the execution of the 20th special pattern fluctuation may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring it in this way, for example, during the first special symbol changing period after the end of a jackpot game, a message such as "You won't be able to change the background mode from the next change! Choose your desired background now" can be displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a warning that a high-speed changing period will be set. This prevents the player from suddenly entering a period in which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed changing period), preventing them from playing in the background mode they desire and reducing their motivation to play. Furthermore, the one special symbol changing period after the end of a jackpot game can also be used to display messages such as "Chance mode may be in a special state! Don't give up!" or "It's your chance when the display of the remaining number of times changes!" as a guide to explain the gameplay details of "Chance mode" to the player.

In addition, in cases where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot, as in this first control example, the background mode during "chance mode" can be selected during the playing period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period was set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and once "chance mode" is set, the player can be notified that the background mode cannot be changed for a specified period (high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to Figure 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the winning lottery is a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, a "circle" symbol), the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time, resulting in a winning game (normal symbol winning game).

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (normal symbol change time) varies depending on the set probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state, high probability state). When the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state) is set, the normal symbol change time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set, the normal symbol change time is set to 3 seconds. This allows for a significant difference between the frequency with which a normal symbol win game is executed in the low probability state of the normal symbol and the frequency with which a normal symbol win game is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In other words, by shortening the normal symbol change time in the high probability state of the normal symbol compared to the low probability state of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol lotteries (normal symbol lotteries) that can be executed per unit time can be increased, and further, it is possible to make it easier to win in the normal symbol lotteries that are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a normal winning game when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, but to make it easier to play a normal winning game when a high probability state for normal symbols is set.

In this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time and winning probability are set to be more advantageous to the player when the normal symbol is in a high probability state than when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only one of them is advantageous to the player. For example, it may be configured so that the same normal symbol fluctuation time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, and only the winning probability is differentiated. As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time it takes for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer in the normal state than in the time-saving state to make it difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) is difficult to execute to the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game is easy to execute, it is possible to prevent a transition to the time-saving state during the execution of a long normal symbol variation executed during the normal state (a normal symbol winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state), resulting in a long period being set during which a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state despite the time-saving state being set.

As described above with reference to Figure 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (or is unlikely to be any difference) in the game value obtained by the player whether the player plays a game in which the ball flows down to the left area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down to the right area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to a perpendicular line at the center of the gaming board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there are arranged a first ball entrance 64, which can trigger a lottery for a first special symbol when a ball enters it, a second ball entrance 640, which is provided below the first ball entrance 64 and can trigger a lottery for a second special symbol when a ball enters it, an electric device 640a, which is provided at the second ball entrance 640 and opens in a normal symbol winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a variable winning device 65, which is provided below the second ball entrance 640 and opens in a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

Balls launched in left-handed play flow down the left-hand area, and half of them pass through the through gate 67 located in the left-hand area. Both balls that pass through the through gate 67 and balls that do not are guided by nails planted in the game board 13 toward the first ball entrance 64 located in the lower area. Balls that flow directly downward between the nails enter one of the two general ball entrances 63. In this control example, approximately 1/50 of the balls flowing down the left-hand area are configured to enter one of the two general ball entrances 63, and if a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the opening at a rate of 1 in 15, and when a ball enters the opening, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640 is closed (shown in white in Figure 2), almost no balls enter the opening. When the electric device 640 is open (shown in black in Figure 2), approximately one in two balls that are fired in left-handed play and flow down the left side area enter the opening. When a ball enters the opening, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. Furthermore, the variable prize-winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the opening when a jackpot game is not being played, and approximately two in three balls enter the opening during a jackpot game. When a ball enters the opening, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Now, we will explain the variable winning device 65. This variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means that is opened during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. It is configured so that a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game passes through a specific area (V-gate) located within the internal area of the variable winning device 65, thereby setting a high probability state for the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, depending on the type of jackpot won, the system is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game in which a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 is likely to pass through a specific area (V-gate) (probable jackpot game), or a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through (normal jackpot game).In this control example, a jackpot game in which a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 is likely to pass through a specific area (V-gate), i.e., a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V-gate) if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a probable jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 is unlikely to pass through a specific gate, i.e., a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area (V-gate) even if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As mentioned above, even if a probability variable jackpot game is executed, if the ball fails to pass through the specific area (V gate) during that jackpot game, the high-probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this control example, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the time the jackpot game is executed. As will be explained in detail later, this control example is configured so that the round game (V round game) that is easiest to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) is executed in the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. By configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends in this way based on the game results during the jackpot game, players can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high-probability states of special symbols) during the jackpot game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

On the other hand, when using the above-mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set in advance (for example, at the start of a jackpot game) the presentation mode of the notification effect used to notify the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends (for example, the presentation mode for the jackpot ending period). This means that the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to ball output and control processing related to display are executed closely, resulting in a problem of complicated control processing for the pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, in this control example, when a probability variable jackpot game is played, the notification effect is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) to indicate that a probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether to switch the notification effect's presentation mode based on the ball's passage through a specific area (V gate). If the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the pre-set presentation mode is executed. Only if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) is the notification effect presentation mode switched. In this way, when normal play is performed during a jackpot game, the notification effect presentation mode is set in advance to anticipate the game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends, and the notification effect presentation mode is switched only if it is determined that an unexpected game state will be set. This reduces the frequency with which control processing is executed to set the notification effect presentation mode during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different for special jackpot games and regular jackpot games, with a longer ending period set for special jackpot games, which are more advantageous to the player, than for regular jackpot games. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game) before the special jackpot state actually is set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, notifying the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is made shorter.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between special jackpot play and regular jackpot play, simply switching the presentation mode for the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of regular jackpot play when the ball fails to flow into the specific area (V-gate) during special jackpot play would result in an unnatural notification presentation being executed during the ending period due to the different ending period lengths. Furthermore, if a dedicated presentation mode that is set only when the ball fails to flow into the specific area (V-gate) during special jackpot play is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode would need to be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which would increase storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to be the same regardless of the type of jackpot (probable jackpot, normal jackpot). If the ball cannot be made to flow into the specific area (V-gate) during a probable jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without having to provide a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow into the specific area (V-gate) during a probable jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot. This allows the mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot be made to flow into a specific area (V-gate) during a guaranteed jackpot game to be switched and set. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the notification effect may be executed from the final round of the jackpot game, making it possible to execute a notification effect that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period. Alternatively, the round effect that is executed during the final round of the jackpot game may be executed continuously for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification effect may be executed, thereby executing a notification effect for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

In this control example, as shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical on both sides, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain does not differ significantly between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left-hand area may be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right-hand area, and the rate at which balls enter the first ball entrance port 64 may be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play. This may make it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but makes it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and it may make it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but makes it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during normal play, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any way they like, and in games in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (plays in the time-saving mode or the probability variation mode), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

Returning to Figure 2, we will continue the explanation. The normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is attached to both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the through gate 67 in the left side area is configured to allow half of the balls flowing down the left side area of the gaming board 13 to pass through. The through gate 67 in the right side area is configured to allow half of the balls flowing down the right side area of the gaming board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After this winning lottery for the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol on the variable display.

A ball can be held for a maximum of one pass through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol hold lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of held balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the second pattern display device, as in this control example, or it may be performed using part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by part of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for a ball passing through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). Furthermore, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 installed is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). Furthermore, the installation position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right of the variable display device unit 80. Additionally, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the gaming board 13 when played from the left are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 2, we will continue the explanation. Below the variable display device unit 80 (below the electric device 640), a variable winning device 65 with an opening width of approximately 50 mm is disposed so that both balls launched by left-handed play and flowing down the left area, and balls launched by right-handed play and flowing down the right area, can win. By providing a variable winning device 65 with such a wide opening width, both balls launched by left-handed play and balls launched by right-handed play and flowing down the left side of the electric device 640 can win in the variable winning device 65.

Now, with reference to Figure 120, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be explained. Figure 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and Figure 120(b) is a schematic diagram showing the path taken by a ball that has won in the variable winning device 65. As shown in Figure 120(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and is configured so that a ball that has flowed down the open/close door 65b and won in the specific winning port 65a flows down in the left-right direction.

Specifically, a ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning opening 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide channel 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the first opening 65a1. Furthermore, a ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning opening 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide channel 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, a ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) is provided to detect a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65. When this ball detection sensor detects a ball, payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, by providing an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and entered the variable winning device 65 can pass, and by providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, the player can enjoy the same game whether they play left-handed or right-handed during a jackpot game.

Next, referring to Figure 120(b), we will explain the flow of balls that enter the specific winning slot 65a. As shown in Figure 120(b), a ball that passes through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and then flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

An outlet 65h1 is provided at the downstream end of the third flow path 65e3, and balls that flow down the third flow path 65e3 enter the outlet 65h and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path along which balls that enter the outlet 65h1 flow, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that enter the outlet 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and at its downstream end is an outlet 65h2 into which balls that have passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v enter. The specific area (V gate) is equipped with a detection sensor for detecting passing balls, and if it detects that a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a specified period during a jackpot game, the detection result is stored. When the jackpot game ends, the stored result is referenced to set the game status after the jackpot game ends.

Here, we will explain the operation of the switching valve 65y during a jackpot game. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V solenoid 209a (see Figure 137), not shown. When the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), it maintains a closed state (see Figure 120(b)) that allows balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the third flow path 65e3. When the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state), it maintains an open state that allows balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the fourth flow path 65e4.

This V solenoid 209a is normally in the OFF state, and is controlled to be ON only for a predetermined period during jackpot play. Specifically, it is controlled to be ON when a specific round of play (the first round of play) among the multiple rounds of play executed during jackpot play begins, and to be OFF when the specific round of play (the first round of play) ends, or when the play time of the specific round of play has elapsed for a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during jackpot play.

This configuration allows balls to enter the variable winning device 65 only when a jackpot game is being played (when jackpot control is being executed), and also makes it possible for balls that enter the variable winning device 65 to flow down into the specific area (V gate) 65v. Furthermore, the bonus (setting of a high probability state for a special symbol) awarded based on a ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is awarded at the end of the jackpot game (processing executed at the end of the jackpot game), so the bonus will not be awarded to the player even if fraudulent activity is committed by passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v at a time other than during a jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot control process executed during a jackpot game is configured to execute switching control to switch the switching valve 65y in accordance with predetermined rules based on the timing when a specific round of play begins. However, switching control may also be configured to be executed based on other triggers. For example, the start of a jackpot game may be the trigger for executing switching control, or the end of the opening period of a jackpot game may be the trigger for executing switching control. Alternatively, the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game may be measured and the measurement result may reach a specific number. Furthermore, if the trigger for executing switching control is the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 reaching a specific number, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game or the number of balls per round of play may be the target of discrimination. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to understand at what point during a jackpot game a state is established that makes it easier for balls to pass through to the specific area (V-gate).

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when a jackpot game is executed and the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 65b may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if the same switching control is executed on the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to execute jackpot games in which it is easy for the ball to reach the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the period in which a state is set in which it is easy for the ball to pass through to the specific area (V-gate), and jackpot games in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through.

Next, with reference to Figure 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. Figure 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in Figure 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with an MPU (a single-chip microcomputer) that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and other necessary components.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 21). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 137). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, the flow of gameplay in this control example will be explained with reference to Figure 136. Figure 136 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of gameplay in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in Figure 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states as game states: a normal state (a low probability state of special symbols, a low probability state of normal symbols), a probability variable state (a high probability state of special symbols, a high probability state of normal symbols), and a time-saving state (a low probability state of special symbols, a high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to set the normal state in the initial state (the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of shipment, or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)).

During the normal state, a game is played that primarily involves the first special symbol lottery, which is executed by having a ball enter the first ball entrance 64. In the normal state, which sets a low probability state for special symbols, the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when a jackpot is won, either "Jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or "Jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the jackpot type. If "Jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (probable jackpot game) is played in which it is easy to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and if "Jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) is played in which it is difficult to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game.

If the ball passes through a specific area (V-gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This special probability state ends when the number of special symbol lotteries (variations) reaches 50, or when a jackpot is won, and the game transitions to another game state. Specifically, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times while the special probability state is set, the game state will transition from the special probability state to the time-saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is executed. In this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variable state to the time-saving state is configured to be executed when the special pattern variation corresponding to the 50th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, but it is sufficient that the 51st special pattern lottery is not executed when a high probability state for the special pattern is set. For example, the gaming state may be transitioned immediately after the 50th special pattern lottery is executed (when the 50th special pattern variation begins), or immediately before the 51st special pattern lottery is executed (when the execution conditions for the 51st special pattern lottery are met but the special pattern lottery has not been executed).

Because the probability variable state is a state with a high probability of winning normal symbols, the electric device 640 is more likely to open when a normal symbol is hit than in the normal state, which is a state with a low probability of winning normal symbols, and play is mainly based on the second special symbol lottery. In the probability variable state, which is a state with a high probability of winning special symbols, the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is set to 1/50, and if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, one of the following jackpot types will be selected: "Jackpot C" (selection rate 3/10), "Jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), or "Jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10).

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are executed, "Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are executed, and "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are executed. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, probability variable jackpot play will always be executed. Therefore, in terms of the probability of executing probability variable jackpot play, the second special pattern lottery is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, details will be described later with reference to Figure 141, but in this control example, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 7 rounds of play will always be played, and if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, an average of 8.8 rounds of play will be played (4 rounds: 30%, 7 rounds: 40%, 16 rounds: 30%). Therefore, in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery. Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that 4 rounds of play will be played, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game will be the smallest if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the first special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery.

Next, we will explain the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). The time-saving state is activated if "Jackpot B" is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the special symbol state exceeds 50, or if the ball fails to pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the special symbol state. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed since the end of the previous special symbol state reaches 100, or if a special symbol is won before reaching 100. In other words, if the time-saving state is activated after the end of a special symbol state (if Jackpot B is won), the time-saving state is activated from the end of the special symbol state until 100 special symbol variations are executed (the time-saving count is set to 100). On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the special symbol state exceeds 50, the time-saving count is set to 50 after the special symbol state ends.

During this time-saving state, a high probability state for normal symbols is set, just like the special symbol state described above, so the electric device 640 is more likely to open, and the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed. Furthermore, the probability of the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery makes this a more advantageous game state for players than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower probability of winning than in the special variable state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the special variable state. In other words, in terms of the probability of winning a jackpot through the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a gaming state that is less favorable to the player than the special variable state. Note that in this control example, the special symbol lottery is executed with the same ease in both the special variable state and the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the special variable state may be different from the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state, and the special symbol change may be executed in a shorter change time during the special variable state than during the normal state.

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration in the First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The main control unit 110 uses the MPU 201 to execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and third symbol display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second symbol display device.

In addition, to instruct sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via the data transmission/reception circuit, but these commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control unit 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing lots for special symbols, drawing lots for normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. Various counters are provided in the RAM 203 for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 138, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 are explained. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to draw lots for special symbols, draw lots for normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The lottery for the special symbols and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 use the following: a first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols; a first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbols; a stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the type of stop for a losing special symbol; an initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1; and a variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used to draw the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1, which is used to select the normal symbol variation pattern, are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching their maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156).In addition, some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64, which is made up of four reserve areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640, which is made up of four reserve areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

Then, when the conditions for initiating the special pattern (variation conditions) are met, the various values stored in the reserved area 1 of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, or the various values stored in the reserved area 1 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, which contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed, are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern variation based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this and there may be only one type of special symbol. When the start condition (variation condition) for the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) for the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and a special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple types of special symbols, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) can be configured to have its own special symbol execution area. This allows the next special symbol variation to be executed promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be either a jackpot or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result for the special symbols is a miss, it may be possible to win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller bonus than when the jackpot is won (a bonus different from when the jackpot is won). By configuring in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, there is an opportunity to award the player with a bonus, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. In this case, a small prize type counter can be provided in RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small prize type counter can be configured to be able to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be referenced when the lottery for the special symbols is executed.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery is configured to allow a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on a jackpot win and the game state transition content based on a small jackpot win may be configured to be different. For example, when a jackpot win is won, the game state may transition to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of the small jackpot win is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, with the game state not transitioning even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, the presence or absence of a transition in game state and the content of the transition can be varied depending on the type of win (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of gameplay.

In addition, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to balls entering (balls passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas). The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

Then, when the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values begins.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to Figure 138. The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for a special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and a jackpot for a special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to Figure 140(a). Figure 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines the random number value (determination value) that is used to determine a jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202a specifies different values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in Figure 140(a), for a game state with a low probability of a special symbol (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 value of "0 to 4" is specified as the jackpot determination value, and any other value ("5 to 999") is specified as the loss determination value. Furthermore, for a game state with a high probability of a special symbol (probability variable state), the first win random number counter C1 value of "0 to 19" is specified as the jackpot determination value, and any other value ("20 to 999") is specified as the loss determination value. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from 0 to 999, so in a low probability state for special symbols, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and in a high probability state for special symbols, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set depending on the game state, but the invention is not limited to this; the probability of winning a jackpot may be set to the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be set to different values for up to four game states set by combining special symbol states and normal symbol states, or simply, three or more types of special symbol states may be set, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "jackpot" and "miss," are determined as the lottery results for the special symbol. In addition, a "small prize" may be determined as a third lottery result, as a type of "miss." If this "small prize" is won, a small prize game is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is opened for a shorter period (one round) than a "jackpot." By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player even if the jackpot is not won. Note that if a "small prize" is considered a type of "miss," it is possible to award prize balls to the player through a small prize game, but because the jackpot has not been won, it is preferable to configure the system so that processing to change the game state (setting the game state different from the game state at the time of winning) is not executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to a player based on winning a jackpot and the bonus awarded to a player based on winning a small prize.

As mentioned above, if the configuration is such that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win." By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for special patterns can be executed using the same process, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110 compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed using different processes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won at the same time in a single special pattern lottery.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 in the event of a jackpot with a special pattern. It is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first win type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, by referring to the first win type selection table 202c. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to Figure 141.

Figure 141(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in Figure 141(a), this jackpot type selection table 202d has a special 1 jackpot table 202d1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and a special 2 jackpot table 202d2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to Figure 141(b). Figure 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, this special symbol 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and defines different jackpot types depending on the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, for the jackpot type for the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), "Jackpot A" is specified as corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") ranging from "0-49." This "Jackpot A" is a jackpot type with seven jackpot rounds, in which a variable probability jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "50." Note that if the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable prize-winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when it is not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, for "Jackpot A," the ending period of the jackpot game is specified to be set to "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 are associated with "Jackpot A." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "Jackpot A" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

Also, as shown in Figure 241 (b), a "jackpot B" is defined as a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99." This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7 and a normal jackpot game is executed, and after the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the probability change counter 203ja is set to "0." Furthermore, for "jackpot B," it is defined that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "15 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 are associated with "Jackpot B." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "Jackpot B" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable winning device 65 during jackpot play, and are configured so that "jackpot A" executes a jackpot game in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during jackpot play than "jackpot B." Therefore, "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B."

Next, the contents defined in the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained with reference to Figure 241(c). Figure 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in Figure 241 (c), the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 in this first control example specifies three jackpot types for the second special symbol (special symbol 2): "Jackpot C" to "Jackpot E."

Specifically, for the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), a "jackpot C" is specified corresponding to the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 ranging from "0 to 29." This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is four and a variable probability jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "50." If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable prize-winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when it is not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, for "jackpot C," the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

As shown in Figure 241(c), a "jackpot D" type is defined as a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "30 to 69." This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7 and a variable probability jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "50." If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable prize-winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (non-V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, for "jackpot D," the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 are associated with "jackpot D." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in Figure 241(c), a "jackpot E" is defined as a jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99." This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16 and a variable probability jackpot game is executed. After the jackpot game ends, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "50." If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable prize-winning device 65 during the variable probability jackpot game (when it is not V), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, for "jackpot E," the ending period of the jackpot game is defined as "17 seconds."

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 are associated with "Jackpot E." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "Jackpot E" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

In other words, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there are three jackpot types that can be set (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E), all of which result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of jackpot game differs, with "jackpot E," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot A" being the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, making it a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game ends than the first special pattern lottery, which has a 50% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game. Furthermore, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special pattern lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Furthermore, the second special pattern lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, while the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous in other respects. Note that while this control example specifies the jackpot types shown in Figure 241, it is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be set based on the same technical concepts as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the control examples described above.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play is executed for all jackpots. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to allow a different number of rounds of play to be executed depending on the type of jackpot selected. Also, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol, the time-saving mode is set for the same period (100 times of time-saving play) after the jackpot play ends for all jackpots. However, this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the time-saving mode is not set for some jackpots (some of the jackpot types that are set), or the number of time-saving play times (time-saving end conditions) differ depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot selected, there may be jackpot types in which the time-saving mode is set at the end of the jackpot play, and jackpot types in which the normal mode is set.

Returning to Figure 138, we will continue the explanation. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode (variation time) of what are known as short-term misses, long-term misses, normal reaches, super reaches, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the main processing (see Figure 167), described below, is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time within the main processing. Furthermore, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see Figure 142) that stores random number values that determine one variation time for the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Figure 142. Figure 142(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in Figure 142(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b defines a normal table 202b1 that is used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a special chance/time-saving table 202b2 that is used when the special chance state or time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, different data tables are used to select a variation pattern depending on the game state, so the variation pattern (variation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Figures 142(b) and 143. Figure 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are defined depending on the type of special pattern drawn and the result of the special pattern lottery executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to Figure 142(b). Figure 142(b) is a diagram showing the specifications of this normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 specifies various variation patterns corresponding to the results of the special symbol lottery, and a value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each variation pattern. Specifically, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the win/loss determination result is a jackpot, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0-19," a normal (reach) variation pattern with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is specified. When this normal is selected, a variation pattern command is output, which is a combination of a base time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 3 to 12 seconds. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments according to the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is "3 seconds", if it is "1", the added time is "3.5 seconds", if it is "2", the added time is "4 seconds", if it is "3", the added time is "4.5 seconds", if it is "3", the added time is "5 seconds", if it is "4", the added time is "5.5 seconds", if it is "5", the added time is "6 seconds", and if it is "6", the added time is "6.5 seconds". "," "7" gives an additional time of "7 seconds," "8" gives an additional time of "7.5 seconds," "9-11" gives an additional time of "8 seconds," "12" gives an additional time of "8.5 seconds," "13" gives an additional time of "9 seconds," "14" gives an additional time of "9.5 seconds," "15" gives an additional time of "10 seconds," "16" gives an additional time of "10.5 seconds," "17" gives an additional time of "11 seconds," "18" gives an additional time of "11.5 seconds," and "19" gives an additional time of "12 seconds."

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a reach symbol (type of third symbol) is set based on the information contained in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third symbol in middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible to the player first when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third symbol (a third symbol with the number 1 attached in this control example), reach effects can be executed with various types of third symbols without varying the period from when the variation effect is executed until the reach state is reached.

Furthermore, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20-169," a Super (Reach) variation pattern with a variation time of 43-52 seconds is specified. When this Super is determined, a variation pattern command is output that combines a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 13-22 seconds. In this control example, the added time is set in more detail in 0.5-second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1; this is the same as the normal pattern described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this control example, the presentation style of the reach effect can be changed depending on the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, if the number of seconds included in the addition command is between 3 and 12 seconds, a normal reach effect (a display in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around once and then stops) is executed, but if it is between 13 and 22 seconds, a super reach effect (a display in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around twice and then stops) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode for an initial specified period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, the period during which the same performance mode is executed can be set based on a basic command (a command containing information indicating the basic time), and the variable performance after the branch can be set based on an addition command (a command containing information indicating the added time). Therefore, even if the overall variable time is the same, for example, different variable performances can be easily set on the audio lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the proportion of the variable time that is accounted for by the basic time and the proportion indicated by the added time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed depending on the length of the variable time set as the added time. However, this is not limited to this, and the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, with the added time selected from a range of 3 to 12 seconds just to determine the type of third symbol.

Next, if the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is between 170 and 198, the variation pattern is specified as SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds. Once this SP is determined, a combination of commands indicating a base time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when SP is determined, a variation effect is executed in which the variation effect of the third symbol that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation effect. Therefore, even if the type of third symbol in the middle symbol column Z2 that becomes visible to the player first when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third symbol (in this control example, a third symbol with the number 1), the display order of the third symbols in the middle symbol column Z2 can be changed during the variation to correspond to the third symbol that will ultimately stop without causing the player any discomfort. Therefore, there is no need to set the type of third symbol that will reach the reach state by varying the added time, as with the normal and super modes described above.

Similarly, if the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the win/loss judgment result is a miss, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0-179", a miss with a variation time of 8 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. Here, if a miss is determined, a variation effect is executed for the third symbol, in which the third symbol stops and is displayed in a combination indicating a miss without entering a reach state. Therefore, there is no need to set an added time.

Furthermore, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180-198," a variation pattern with a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified as a reach-miss. When this reach-miss is determined, a variation pattern command is output, indicating a combination of a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5-second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Since this content is identical to the normal pattern described above, detailed explanation is omitted. In other words, even when the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command is set as when the lottery result is a win. Note that when the lottery result is a miss, the type of third symbol to be stopped and displayed must be set so that the third symbol that is ultimately displayed is not a combination that results in a jackpot. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 113 performs a correction process to set a third symbol that is one step away from the setting of the third symbol type based on the added command referenced when a win occurs. This makes it easy to set a presentation mode in which, when a reach miss effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped near the third symbol that forms the jackpot combination (miss stop display).

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99," a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the value of the acquired fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198," a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

In this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed while the normal state is set, a variation effect within the chance zone is executed, as described above with reference to Figures 124(b) to 126. When a command (basic command) indicating a base time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the audio lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a special reach is set based on the information contained in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a base time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command for the second special symbol while the normal state is set, a special variation effect is set in which the third symbol varies vertically, as shown in Figure 124(b). Then, when the basic time has elapsed, a variation effect is set in which the third symbol is displayed as a static display (temporary static display) as shown in Figure 125(a). When an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as a fixed display, and the variation effect ends.

On the other hand, if an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (if the variation pattern is a special reach), a variation effect is set in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted, as shown in Figures 125(b) and 126.

Next, the contents of the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 will be explained with reference to Figure 143. Figure 143 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2. This probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variable state or time-saving state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of special symbol variations since the end of a jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

In this control example, a high probability state (probable chance state or time-saving state) for normal symbols is always set after a jackpot game has ended. The set high probability state for normal symbols is then configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times a special symbol variation has been executed since the high probability state for normal symbols was set reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed when the high probability state for normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, the system is configured to transition from the high probability state for normal symbols to the low probability state for normal symbols.

During this high probability state for normal symbols (probable win state, time-saving state), a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the low probability state for normal symbols (normal state). This increases the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time, providing players with an efficient game experience (special symbol lottery game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period when the number of special symbol variations is between 1 and 20 after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is selected, regardless of the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, or the value of the variation type counter CS1 obtained. In other words, the predetermined period after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol variations are performed 20 times) becomes a high-speed variation period (first period) during which the special symbol lottery is performed with a shorter variation time than other periods. By setting this high-speed variation period, it is possible to easily execute the next jackpot game within a short period after the end of a jackpot game, which makes the player believe that the next jackpot game is being performed in connection with the previous jackpot game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, during this high-speed variation period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" is always selected, making it easier to set the duration of an effect spanning multiple special symbol lotteries (continuous effects).

In addition, if a jackpot is won when the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) will not have been acquired by the time the jackpot play executed based on that jackpot win ends, making it more likely that a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) will be executed using the reserved ball for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball) that has already been acquired. If a jackpot is won when the normal state (high probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the special symbol 2 will have been acquired by the time the jackpot play executed based on that jackpot win ends, making it more likely that a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) will be executed using the reserved ball for the special symbol 2.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state for normal symbols is set, a special symbol lottery for any symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be executed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 143, for a predetermined period after the high probability state for normal symbols is set (the period until 20 special symbol variations have been executed), the same variation pattern is selected regardless of symbol type. This allows the same special symbol variation to be executed regardless of the symbol type when a special symbol lottery for any symbol type is executed, making it easier to set the duration of an effect (continuous effect) that spans multiple special symbol drawings.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is configured so that when a high-probability state for normal symbols is set, both balls fired by left-handed play and balls fired by right-handed play reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one in two balls. Therefore, simply by continuing to play balls during the high-probability state for normal symbols, the special symbol lottery can be executed without interruption. Therefore, when a high-probability state for normal symbols is set, the high-speed fluctuation period is preset to 100 seconds, which is the period until the end of the high-speed fluctuation period, i.e., the period until the 20th special symbol fluctuation (5 seconds x 20 times). A 100-second continuous effect spanning 20 special symbol lotteries can be easily executed. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period does the switching process for switching the presentation mode of the continuous effect already set be executed, simplifying the process for executing effects during the high-speed fluctuation period.

In addition, a determination means may be provided that determines whether or not to temporarily stop the 100-second continuous performance set during the high-speed fluctuation period. For example, if it is determined that the period from when the currently executing special symbol fluctuation is stopped and until the next special symbol fluctuation is executed is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), in other words, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation has been interrupted, a process may be executed to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performance from progressing ahead even if the player leaves their seat during the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, an operation means (e.g., frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided, and if a predetermined operation is performed on that operation means, a process may be executed to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance.

In this control example, the same fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) during the high-speed fluctuation period, but this is not limited to this and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time other than 5 seconds may be selected. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to set a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when a jackpot is not won. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to lengthen the period from when the presentation mode of the pre-set 100-second continuous presentation is switched to when the special pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state, so that a jackpot can be announced in a presentation mode that allows the player to fully understand the lottery results, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, rather than setting the continuous performance mode all at once for the time (100 seconds) expected as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) can be divided into multiple periods, and, for example, the first continuous performance to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous performance to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent situations where a performance mode (the performance mode for the second half of the continuous performance period) that will not be executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous effect for the entire high-speed fluctuation period, and the continuous effect may be executed only during a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, the period from the 10th to the 20th fluctuation of the special pattern fluctuations (20 in total) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to Figure 143, we will continue the explanation. If the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game) is "21 to 49 times (second period)," and the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is a "win," the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is regulated to be "0 to 198," i.e., a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (win) is selected across the entire range. If the lottery result is a "miss," the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is regulated to be "0 to 179," where a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long miss), and to be "180 to 198," where a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short miss) is selected.

In this control example, when a high probability state (probability variable state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed. During the second period in which 21 or more special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state for normal symbols was set, the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed as long as play continues. However, as described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has a game board 13 configuration that allows balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 whether playing with the left or right hand. Therefore, for example, if play is interrupted during a probability variable state or time-saving state, the first special symbol lottery may be executed after play resumes.

As described above, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility (50% chance) that a normal jackpot game will be played. If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in a game mode (probability mode, time-saving mode) in which the second special symbol lottery is primarily played, and a normal jackpot game is played in the first special symbol lottery, the lottery result will be unfavorable to the player among all jackpot wins. Furthermore, in this control example, the variable effect (variable effect using the third symbol) played on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to suggest to the player not only whether or not a jackpot has been won, but also the type of jackpot. For example, if the main symbols sz with odd numbers are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, this suggests a jackpot win in which a probability jackpot game will be played, and if the main symbols sz with even numbers are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, this suggests a jackpot win in which a normal jackpot game will be played.

Therefore, when a reach state (a state in which a portion of the main pattern sz, which is a combination indicating a jackpot that will result in a normal jackpot game, is displayed as a static display and the remaining pattern row is displayed as a variable display) is created with an even-numbered main pattern sz during a variable effect executed during a probability variable state or a time-saving state, the player may be led to believe that they have won an unfavorable jackpot before the special pattern variable display, which can reduce their motivation to play. Therefore, in this control example, when a jackpot that will result in a normal jackpot game is won in the first special pattern lottery during a game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the second special pattern lottery is primarily executed, a variable effect (double reach effect) is always executed in which both the odd-numbered main pattern sz and the even-numbered main pattern sz are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a). This prevents players from thinking they have won an unfavorable jackpot before the special symbol variation stops and is displayed.

To execute this double reach effect, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected. If the double reach effect, which is executed as a variation effect during the probability variable state or the time-saving state, were executed only when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing, the player would be aware of the jackpot win for the first special symbol when the double reach effect is executed. Therefore, in this control example, a variation pattern (30-second variation time) for executing the double reach effect is selected for some (approximately 80%) cases where the first special symbol drawing is a miss, some (approximately 25%) cases where the second special symbol drawing is a jackpot, and some (approximately 5%) cases where the second special symbol drawing is a miss.

By configuring it in this way, when a double reach effect is executed during a probability change state or a time-saving state, it becomes difficult to tell whether the corresponding special symbol lottery is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and it also becomes difficult to tell whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not, allowing the player to play with a sense of anticipation until the result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, because the system is configured to execute a double reach effect even for the second special symbol lottery, which always triggers a variable jackpot game if a jackpot is won, it is easier to create an effect indicating a jackpot that triggers a variable jackpot game for the entire double reach effect (an effect in which the odd-numbered main symbols sz stop in a combination indicating a jackpot win) than when the double reach effect is executed only for the first special symbol lottery. This increases the expectation for a variable jackpot game when a double reach effect is executed.

Returning to Figure 143, we will continue the explanation. When the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (number of times the special symbol will fluctuate after the jackpot game has finished) is "50 times (specific period)", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v within the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, a high probability state for the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. The conditions for ending the high probability state for the special symbol are: a first high probability state ending condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed reaches 50; and a second high probability state ending condition that is met when a jackpot for the special symbol is won while the high probability state for the special symbol has been set. When either of the high probability state ending conditions is met, the game transitions from the high probability state for the special symbol to a low probability state for the special symbol.

In other words, depending on the results of play during a jackpot, after the jackpot ends, a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches 50, and then a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches 50, or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches 100 after the jackpot ends.

The display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a game state indication effect to indicate to the player the currently set game state. For example, if a V notification effect is executed to notify the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is in a special probability state. If the presentation mode during a jackpot game is set so that a V notification effect is not executed even if the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to tell whether the current game state is in a special probability state.

When the Super Chance Mode effect is being executed, the probability variable state will end after the 50th special symbol variation (specific period), so an effect is executed indicating that the probability variable state will end and that Chance Mode (time-saving) will then be set, using the 20-second variation time set for the 50th special symbol variation. Also, when Chance Mode is being executed, an effect is executed indicating whether or not the probability variable state was set during the specific period.

In this way, when using the special pattern variation period to show the results of a special pattern lottery during a specific period to execute an information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the results of the special pattern lottery (information to notify the player that the game state is changing, or information to suggest the game state that was previously set), by fixing the variation time of the selected special pattern variation, it is possible to reduce the variation in the presentation style (including presentation time) of the information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the results of the special pattern lottery.

In this control example, the execution period of the special pattern change (the 50th special pattern change after the end of a jackpot) that marks the end of the special variable state is set as the specific period, and the change time of the special pattern change is fixed at 20 seconds. However, this is not limited to this, and the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special pattern changes after the end of a jackpot may also be set as the specific period (the period for which a fixed change time is selected), including the time before and after the special pattern change that marks the end of the special variable state, and the information notification effect may be implemented using the change time of the special pattern change that is executed during that specific period.

The presentation mode of the information notification effect may also be changed depending on the result of the special symbol lottery held during the specific period mentioned above. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the presentation mode may be changed to one that does not notify information indicating that the special symbol state is ending. Alternatively, regardless of the actual game state that has been set, the presentation mode may be changed to one that indicates that the previously set game state (the game state that was set after the previous jackpot game ended) is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state).

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period may be varied depending on the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the timing of the information notification effect may be delayed compared to if a jackpot is not won. This makes it possible to pique the player's interest not only in the content of the information notification effect, but also in the timing of its execution, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of the effect.

Furthermore, as in the example above, if the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period is varied depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, the information notification effect may be set to be executed at a specific timing in advance, and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (for example, a jackpot), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the specific timing described above. Alternatively, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may not be set in advance, and one execution timing may be determined from multiple execution timings depending on the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period.

Next, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the jackpot game ends) is "51 to 100 times (third period)," and the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is a "win," the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198," i.e., a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (win) is selected across the entire range. If the lottery result is a "miss," the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected for the range of "0 to 179," a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long miss), and for the range of "180 to 198," a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds" (second super fluctuation) is selected.

This third period is the period during which the game state is in the time-saving state. In other words, even if the probability variable state was set after the jackpot game ended, this is the period during which the probability variable end condition is met and the time-saving state is set. Like the second period described above, this third period is also the period during which the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed, but the first special symbol lottery may also be executed depending on the game method being executed. Since executing the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than executing the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period is configured to more likely select a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation will be executed using a variation pattern with a long variation time, making it easier to obtain reserved balls for the second special symbol during that time. This prevents the first special symbol lottery from being executed too frequently during the time-saving state.

In addition, during this third period, the double reach effect (see Figure 131) is executed in the same way as during the second period described above, so the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in the case of a jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery, some of the losing wins, and some of the jackpot wins and some of the losing wins in the second special pattern lottery.

Next, we will explain the various variation patterns stipulated for the second special symbol lottery when the special mode or time-saving mode is set.

As shown in Figure 143, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game) is "1 to 20 times (first period)," a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, during the first period, the same fluctuation pattern (5-second fluctuation) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, if the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of a jackpot game) is "21 to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (the lottery result for the special symbol) is "win," then the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified so that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the range of "0 to 149," and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198." If the lottery result is "lose," then the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified so that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the range of "0 to 191," and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198."

During the second period, which is a high probability state (probability change state, time-saving state) for normal symbols primarily when the second special symbol lottery is executed, a 10-second variation pattern is selected, except for the variation pattern in which the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed (a variation pattern with a 30-second variation time). In other words, the second special symbol variation is completed in a short period of time when balls can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed efficiently. This prevents a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when the maximum number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 has been stored, allowing the player to enjoy a satisfying gameplay experience.

In this control example, the short-term fluctuation time is set to "10 seconds," but this fluctuation time may be set to an even shorter time (for example, 3 seconds) that is longer than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that it takes for a ball fired onto the game board 13 to reach the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring where the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 decreases even though the player is continuing to fire balls, resulting in the first special symbol lottery being executed, which is set as a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery.

Next, if the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)," a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected in response to the first special symbol lottery described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (number of special symbol fluctuations executed after the end of a jackpot game) is "51 to 100 times (third period)," and the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) is a "win," then a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149," and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198." If the lottery result is a "lose," then a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191," and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198."

As explained above, in this first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 and a probability variable/time-saving table 202b2, and is configured so that the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible to vary the type of variation pattern selected depending on the set game state, and to show the player the results of the special pattern lottery in a variety of variation patterns, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the system is configured to select a variation pattern by referencing the same data table (probability variable/time-saving table 202b2) when the game state is set to either the probability variable state or the time-saving state. Therefore, when the "chance mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that makes it difficult for players to tell whether the time-saving state or the probability variable state is set, the type of variation pattern selected in response to the special symbol lottery that is executed can prevent players from understanding the set game state. Note that in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the probability variable state and the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state are the same, but this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to reference different data tables.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a data table for probability variation that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during probability variation, and a data table for time-saving that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during time-saving, and to provide a specific variation pattern that is specified only in one of the data tables as a type of variation pattern that is selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). This allows the player to understand the currently set game state based on the type of variation pattern selected only when a specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability of each variation pattern being selected may be different between the probability variation data table and the time-saving data table. By configuring it in this way, the bias in the variation patterns selected for the special symbol lottery performed during "Chance Mode" can be analyzed, providing the player with the fun of predicting the currently set game state.

As mentioned above, in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern is configured to differ depending on the game state that is set, but it may also be configured to select the data table to be referenced based on conditions other than the game state. For example, when a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the same time-saving state may be configured to differ based on the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern) that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game (whether or not a V win was achieved).

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is advisable to configure the setting to include information indicating the type of referenced data table (variation pattern selection table). This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113, when it receives a variation pattern command, to determine not only the type of variation pattern that has been set this time, but also the circumstances under which the current game state was set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it can determine that, for example, even though a guaranteed jackpot game has been executed, the ball was unable to land in a V and a time-saving state has been set, and a dedicated presentation mode (for example, "regret mode") can be set.

Returning to Figure 138, we will continue the explanation. The second win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value (i.e., 299). Furthermore, when the second win random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of RAM 203.

The random number value that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the main control unit's ROM 202, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. This second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types: one for low probability normal symbols, and one for high probability normal symbols, where the probability of winning is higher than the low probability, and each type contains a different number of random numbers that result in a jackpot. In this way, by varying the number of winning random numbers, the probability of winning changes between low probability normal symbols and high probability normal symbols.

The contents defined in this second win random number table 202c will be explained with reference to Figure 140(b). Figure 140(b) is a schematic diagram that illustrates the contents defined in the second win random number table 202c. As shown in Figure 140(b), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, a normal win is defined as a value of "0 to 2" for the acquired second win random number counter C4, and when the normal symbol is in a high probability state, a normal win is defined as a value of "0 to 149" for the acquired second win random number counter C4.

In other words, in this control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery (1/100) is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment, in which the same game method (left-hand play) is played in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, thereby making it less likely that a normal symbol win game will be played during the normal state and the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery (1/2) is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to play a normal symbol win game based on a normal symbol win during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, different lengths of fluctuation time are set as the fluctuation time for the normal pattern fluctuation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state for the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state for the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the fluctuation time for the normal pattern fluctuation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (probable win state, time-saving state) that makes it easier to win the normal pattern lottery and get the ball into the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed with a low probability state for normal symbols is selected, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric device 640 opens in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, regardless of the game state selected, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed remains available for the player, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 167).

In this way, RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters, etc.

Returning to Figure 137, we will continue the explanation. The ROM 202 contains various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Figure 138. Now, with reference to Figure 139(a), we will explain the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. Figure 139(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 139 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a jackpot type selection table 202d. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, and the jackpot type selection table 202d were described above when explaining the various counters shown in Figure 138, so their explanation will be omitted here.

Returning to Figure 137, we will continue the explanation. In addition to the various counters shown in Figure 138, RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

In addition, RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during the startup processing (see FIG. 166) when power is turned on. Note that when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

As shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 also has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a special chance counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, a special chance setting flag 203m, a special chance pass counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special chance active flag 203r, a special chance active timer 203s, a dispensed ball count counter 203t, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a memory area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), up to the maximum number (four in this control example).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to the maximum number (four in this control example).

The special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the display of changing special patterns are stored. When the special patterns stop changing, if various counter values are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, those counter values are shifted and stored in this memory area. In this control example, the second special pattern lottery is executed in priority over the first special pattern lottery, so if various counter values are stored in both the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to and stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of a starting winning. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a. Furthermore, when it detects that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), it obtains the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the special symbol variation (lottery), it shifts the data corresponding to one of the start wins (counter values C1-C3, CS1) stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to this special symbol reserved ball execution area in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Note that in this embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area in which the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) is stored upon detection of a ball passing through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 detects that a ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserve areas so that data (counter C4 values) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. The data of the reserved balls is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (start winning), starting with the reserve area with empty data that is consumed first.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display effect based on the start winning, it stores the values of each counter, and is memory for storing data (counter C4 value) to be referenced in processes such as the normal symbol winning lottery and setting the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display effect, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning win from the data corresponding to each start winning win (the value of the second win random number counter C4) stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c described above to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and display settings for the second symbol display device 83. In this embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81) based on a winning entry into the first ball entry port 64 detected during a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every two milliseconds. The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is initially set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a starting winning entry is detected and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

In addition, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and the counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special pattern reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1.

The second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the variable display effect performed by the first pattern display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third pattern display device 81) based on a winning entry into the second ball entrance 640 detected during a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every two milliseconds. The second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is initially set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a starting winning entry is detected and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases, one is added to the counter, up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

In addition, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), and the counter value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a second special pattern reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special pattern reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 references the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special pattern jackpot determination process (see S301 in Figure 158), draws a jackpot based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the result of the lottery. Under the control of the main control unit 110, the first pattern display device 37 displays variations based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special symbol variation pattern command and stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (wait times) for the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to one time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), which is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. This normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initialization process of RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a initial winning is detected and the number of reserved balls for the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f subtracts one each time a variable display of a normal symbol is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game status storage area 203g is a memory area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (setting status of the time-saving counter 203h, setting status of the special probability counter 203i) that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the normal status is stored when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0; the time-saving status is stored when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0; and the special probability status is stored when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is greater than 0.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is being played, the system is configured to store a jackpot game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played. In addition, the system is also configured to store regular jackpot game in-progress information indicating that a regular jackpot game is being played.

A status command is then set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and this status command is output to the voice and lamp control device 113. The voice and lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g is set during the startup process (see Figure 166) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter that indicates when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and is set to a value that corresponds to when a high probability state for normal symbols is set. After a jackpot game ends, a value that corresponds to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state for normal symbols is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded to players during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203h reaches 0, the high probability state for normal symbols ends and a transition to a low probability state for normal symbols occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and the high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to continue until, for example, the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the high probability state of normal symbols and the condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the number of special symbol lotteries (variations). However, this is not limited to this, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing content of the various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented when the result of each symbol lottery executed when the high probability state of normal symbols is set is a predetermined result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined result (for example, a special normal win).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one at a time, but it may also be configured to decrement multiple values of the time-saving counter 203h at once (for example, 2) depending on the type of termination condition that is met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the time-saving counter 203h so that the value becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This not only allows players to play jackpot games, but also makes them interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game they have played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability change counter 203i is a counter that indicates when a high probability state for a special symbol is set, and is set to a value that corresponds to when a high probability state for a special symbol is set. This probability change counter 203i is set to a value after the end of a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area (V gate) 65v during that jackpot game (see S2102 in Figure 170). It is then cleared to 0 if a jackpot game is won. As a result, a high probability state for a special symbol is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded to players during jackpot games.

In this embodiment, when a high probability state for a special symbol is set, the value of the probability counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability counter 203i is decremented based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability counter 203i reaches 0, the high probability state for a special symbol ends and a transition to a low probability state for a special symbol occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and the high probability state for a special symbol may be configured to continue until, for example, the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the probability counter 203i may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the high probability state of special symbols and the condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lotteries (variations). However, this is not limited to this, and the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing content of the various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when the result of each symbol lottery executed when the high probability state of normal symbols is set is a predetermined result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined result (for example, a special normal win).

Furthermore, the value set in the probability change counter 203i may be different based on the type of jackpot won and the status of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Similar to the above-mentioned subtraction of the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted based on conditions other than the number of times the special symbol changes. Alternatively, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted multiple times at once when the subtraction conditions for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i are met. This makes it difficult for players to know how long the high probability state of the special symbol will continue, allowing them to keep an eye on the results of the special symbol lottery that is held during the high probability state of the special symbol without getting bored.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for terminating the high probability state, i.e., the condition for decrementing the value of the high probability counter 203i, is set only to decrement the value of the high probability counter 203i based on the number of special symbol lotteries (variations). However, this is not limited to this, and the value of the high probability counter 203i may be decremented, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the content of various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the high probability counter 203i may be decremented when the result of each symbol lottery executed when the high probability state for special symbols is set is a predetermined result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined result (e.g., a special normal win). Alternatively, the value of the high probability counter 203i may be decremented based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the probability change counter 203i is decremented by one at a time, but it may also be configured to decrement multiple values of the probability change counter 203i at once (for example, 2) depending on the type of termination condition that is met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the probability change counter 203i so that the value of the probability change counter 203i becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the probability change counter 203i. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the probability change state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the probability change state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the probability variable state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the probability variable state (jackpot type). This not only allows players to play a jackpot game, but also makes them interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game they have played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot is to start. When this jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and when it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203j is set on when the timing for the variable display indicating a jackpot to end has arrived. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203j is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. When this jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and when it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a special symbol is drawn as a jackpot and the jackpot game (special game state) begins (see S1903 in FIG. 168). It is also set to off when the jackpot game (special game state) ends (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 157), this jackpot flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability variable setting flag 203m is a flag that indicates whether the game state will transition to the probability variable state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether the game state is set to the probability variable state is determined by whether a ball enters (flows down) a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided within the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Here, when a ball enters (flows down) this specific area (V gate) 65v (passes through the probability variable switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the probability variable setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). Meanwhile, this probability variable setting flag 203m is set to OFF upon the end of a jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). This probability variable setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), it is set to the state it was in immediately before the power was turned off. It is also set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

In addition, if the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the probability change switch was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the probability change switch was passed, the probability change setting flag 203m may be officially set to ON and restored. In this case, whether the probability change switch was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the probability change passing counter 203n, described below, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203m to ON and then turning the power back on while the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming facility.

The probability change passage counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that pass through the probability change switch (flow down a specific area) during one round of jackpot play (in this embodiment, one jackpot round). The sum of this probability change passage counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t, described below, can be used to determine whether all balls that entered the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. This probability change passage counter 203n is updated by incrementing by one each time a ball passes through the probability change switch (flows down a specific area). After a process is executed to determine whether the number of balls that entered the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the counter is reset to its initial value of "0." This probability change passage counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. It is also set to 0 when initialized.

The winning ball counter 203o counts the number of balls that enter the specific winning slot 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of jackpot play, and is updated by increments of one each time a win into the specific winning slot 65a is detected. When one round ends, the number of balls that entered the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning ball counter 203o) matches the number of balls dispensed (the total value of the dispense ball counter 203t and the special chance pass counter 203n), and then the counter is reset to its initial value of "0." The value of the winning ball counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. It is also set to 0 when initialized.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag that indicates whether or not a round has ended and the ball discharge period has begun after the specific winning port 65a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that the ball discharge period is in progress. While this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203q, described below, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter that determines the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter that determines whether the time required for a winning ball to be discharged from the variable winning device 65 has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 closes. In this embodiment, the time required for a winning ball to be discharged from the variable winning device 65 is 0.5 seconds, and a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is preset as the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203q. When the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment) is reached, a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is issued. This allows early notification that the variable winning device 65 is clogged with game balls.

In addition, if the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag can be set to ON, and if this flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203m will not be set to ON even if the gaming ball passes through the probability change switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability change state from being improperly applied.

The probability variable valid flag 203r is a flag that determines whether or not a game ball's passage (entry) through the specific area (V gate) 65v is valid when the switching valve 65y switches to a configuration that prevents balls from being allocated to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When this probability variable valid flag 203r is set to on, it indicates that it is normal for game balls to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The probability variable active timer 203s is a counter that counts the time since the probability variable active flag 203r described above is set to ON. This probability variable active timer 203s can determine the period required for a game ball to pass through the probability variable switch normally after the switching valve 65y has been switched to a configuration that prevents balls from flowing down the specific area (V gate) 65v. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the probability variable switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the probability variable active timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and any passage through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that is determined to be fraudulent and is not determined to have occurred.

This reduces damage caused by fraudulent actions such as illegally placing a gaming ball in a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passing through the probability change switch, using piano wire or similar to push the gaming ball up from below the probability change switch and pass through, or using radio waves or similar to cause the magnetic sensor to mistakenly detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball number counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball number counter 203t is reset to its initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls.

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for gameplay, counters, flags, etc.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 211, as well as a work area (working region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lights on and off from the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, such as variable effects (variable display) and preview effects, performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving devices for performances provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The sound and lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode using commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the presentation content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, the sound and lamp control device 113 sends a rear image change command including information about the changed stage to the display control device 114, so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed behind the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands sent from the voice and lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it may be configured to send a device drive command to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), set an audio output command to have the audio output device 226 output audio corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or set a lamp output command to have the lamp display device 227 emit light in an illumination pattern corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice and lamp control device 113 also receives commands (display commands) from the display control device 114 that indicate the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display commands received from the display control device 114, the voice and lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice and lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice and lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to promptly display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in Figure 144 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal special chart 2 effect selection table 222b, a special chance effect selection table 222c, a continuous preview execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation effect selection table 222f.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns for each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a variation pattern selection counter value (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, reducing the problem of players quickly becoming bored.

In this control example, a variation effect (see Figure 123) is executed in which the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a horizontally scrolling manner in response to the special pattern variation that is being executed. In this variation effect, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit/miss determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Therefore, by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can play the game (special pattern game) while predicting whether or not the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot.

The normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b is a data table referenced when selecting the effect mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and it specifies different effect modes (effect contents) corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal state is set and a win is achieved in the normal symbol lottery, the electric device 640 opens for 5 seconds to play a normal symbol win game. The system is configured so that a second special symbol lottery can be executed by inserting a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol win game. In other words, when the game state (normal state) in which the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute is met (when a normal symbol win occurs), it is configured so that for a specified period of time (during the normal symbol win game period), it is easier to obtain the lottery trigger for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved ball) (making it easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see Figure 142 (b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" can be selected, and when the second special symbol lottery is executed with the variation pattern set to "40 seconds", the presentation mode of the variation presentation is set by referring to the normal special symbol 2 presentation selection table 222b.

Now, with reference to Figure 145, the contents of the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b will be explained. Figure 145 is a diagram that schematically shows the contents of the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b. This normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the effect mode for the third symbol change effect when a change pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from the second special symbol changes executed while the normal state is set, and different effect modes (effect contents) are specified in accordance with the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of special symbol 2 reserved, the number of special symbol 1 reserved, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see Figure 142(b)), in this control example, when a second special symbol variation is executed during normal mode, a common miss reach effect is executed corresponding to the base time (10 seconds) (see Figure 125(a)), and then a pseudo-variation effect (see Figures 125(b) to 126) is executed during the added time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 79" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3 effect," and a range of "80 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect," and a range of "90 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect."

Also, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved Special Chart 2 is 0, a "special end effect" will be set if the number of reserved Special Chart 1 is 1 to 4, and a "pseudo none effect" will be set if the number of reserved Special Chart 1 is 0.

If the lottery result is a loss, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained will be in the range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1, and the fluctuation pattern is specified as "pseudo 3 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained will be in the range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1, and the fluctuation pattern is specified as "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained will be in the range of "0 to 99" regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1, and the fluctuation pattern is specified as "pseudo 1 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, the fluctuation pattern is specified as "no pseudo effect."

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the presentation mode for the pseudo-variation presentation of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbol 2 and the reserved number of special symbol 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variation presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the next special symbol lottery to be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to believe that the pseudo-variation presentation executed during one special symbol variation period is a variation presentation corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, because the number of pseudo-variations (number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo-variation effect is configured to correspond to the number of special symbol 2 reserves already acquired, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol win play executed in normal mode have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo-variation effect resulting in a jackpot is executed, the player can be made to believe that they have won the jackpot as a result of acquiring many special symbol 2 reserves during normal symbol win play executed in normal mode. Also, when a pseudo-variation effect resulting in a miss win is executed, the player is made to believe that all of the special symbol 2 reserves have been used up, and then a variation effect using the special symbol 2 reserve is executed (as the chance zone continues), providing the player with an unexpected effect.

In addition, this control example has pseudo-variation effects (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) that are set only when a jackpot is won, so players can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation effects and the number of special chart 2 reserved.

Next, the contents of the special effect selection table 222c will be explained with reference to Figure 146. Figure 146 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special effect selection table 222c. This special effect selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when setting the variation effect when a variation pattern with a base time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern for the special symbol variation that is executed during the special effect state (time-shortened state), that is, during the high probability state of the normal symbol. This special effect selection table 222c is referenced when setting the variation effect mode for the special symbol variation that is executed, and is set in the "Super Chance Mode" that is a presentation mode that notifies the player that the special effect state is in a special effect state (S5005: Yes in Figure 183), in the special symbol 1 variation mode setting process (see S4903 in Figure 183) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182), and the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern that is currently executed is " It is referenced when the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern being executed this time is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes), or when the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) is in "Super Chance Mode," a presentation mode that notifies the player that a probability variation state is in progress (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes), and the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern being executed this time is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes).

In this control example, when the first special pattern lottery is executed during a high probability state for normal patterns, in order to prevent a situation from occurring in which a player realizes that they have won a jackpot that can only be won through the first special pattern lottery (a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played) before the lottery result for the first special pattern lottery is displayed, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a double reach effect is executed in which both the third pattern (a third pattern with an even number) indicating a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played, and the third pattern (a third pattern with an odd number) indicating a jackpot that results in a special jackpot game being played, are in a reach state.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed in the high probability state of normal symbols or the time-saving state, to prevent players from realizing that the currently executing special symbol lottery is the first special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned double reach effect is also executed in the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always results in a high probability jackpot game if a jackpot is won. Furthermore, both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which are executed when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, are configured to allow selection of a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds." When this "30-second" variation pattern is selected, the double reach effect is executed. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect, which results in the same variation effect, is executed. This prevents players from realizing the type of the currently executing special symbol variation from the variation effect being executed. Furthermore, by sharing the effect data used for the variation effects, the amount of effect data used for various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in Figure 146, the special effect selection table 222c prescribes different effect modes depending on the symbol type (type of special symbol), the lottery result (the result of the special symbol lottery), and the value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a special jackpot (jackpot A), a "special jackpot single reach" is prescribes for a value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49," a "double reach" is prescribes for a value of "50 to 99," a "double reach" is prescribes for a normal jackpot (jackpot B), and a "non-reach" is prescribes for a miss.

In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2) and the lottery result is a jackpot, a "special double reach" is defined as a value in the range of "0 to 49" on the effect counter 223f, and a "double reach" is defined as a value in the range of "50 to 99" on the effect counter 223f. If the result is a miss, a "double reach" is defined as a value in the range of "0 to 4" on the effect counter 223f, a "double reach" is defined as a value in the range of "5 to 10" on the effect counter 223f, and a "non-reach" is defined as a value in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring it in this way, whether the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability variable state or the second special symbol lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third symbols, including the third symbol corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in Figure 131(a)) will be executed, making it difficult for the player to tell which third symbol variation effect is being executed corresponding to which special symbol lottery when a "double reach" is executed.

Furthermore, when a "special double reach" is set, the "double reach" presentation mode is set first, and then a reach presentation is executed in which the presentation mode changes to the "probable double reach" shown in Figure 131 (b). Therefore, even if a "double reach" is executed in response to the first special pattern lottery, the player can play while hoping that it will be upgraded to a "probable double reach" midway through. Note that in this "special double reach," the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is when the middle pattern column Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may also be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

When the second special symbol variation is executed during normal mode, if a variation pattern (special miss) with a variation time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, the miss reach effect shown in Figure 125(a) is executed, and then the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a miss. On the other hand, if a variation pattern (special win) with a variation time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, then after the symbol variation for 10 seconds, the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a jackpot win (for example, "777").

In this way, by providing a special variation pattern that simulates multiple variation effects during one special pattern variation period, and a normal variation pattern that executes one variation effect during one special pattern variation period, as variation effects corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for players to tell when a new second special pattern variation has been executed, allowing them to play in the hope that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the more variable effects (including simulated effects) that are executed during the chance zone, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot, allowing players to play while hoping that the chance zone will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the fluctuation time (10 seconds) of the normal fluctuation pattern is set to be the same as the pseudo-fluctuation time (10 seconds) of one execution of the special fluctuation pattern, which executes multiple pseudo-fluctuation effects during one special symbol fluctuation period. Therefore, for example, if a second special symbol fluctuation executed in the special fluctuation pattern is executed followed by a second special symbol fluctuation executed in the normal fluctuation pattern, a 10-second fluctuation effect will be repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This makes it difficult for the player to tell whether a pseudo-fluctuation effect is being executed repeatedly as a special fluctuation pattern, or whether the special fluctuation pattern and the normal fluctuation pattern are being executed consecutively. This makes it difficult for the player to tell when a new second special symbol fluctuation has been executed, allowing the player to play in the hope that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation during normal mode, a special variation pattern variation effect is executed; however, this is not limited to this, and a variation time other than 40 seconds may be selectable as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during normal mode. Also, in this control example, the pseudo-variation time, which is part of the variation effect of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the pseudo-variation effect is more likely to be executed for a length other than 10 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play while anticipating that the execution period of one variation effect will be longer.

Returning to Figure 144 (a), we will continue the explanation. The continuous preview execution selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to establish the execution conditions for a continuous preview effect that is executed across multiple periods of special pattern variation, based on the winning information (whether or not a jackpot has been won) included in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. When the execution conditions for the continuous preview effect are established, a special effective time is set that determines whether operation of the frame button 22 is valid. Then, if the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous preview effect is executed.

When this continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode changes to a different background mode (sky mode) from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a continuous effect is executed using the period until the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition was met is displayed. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to when the 20th special symbol fluctuation is executed), the background mode is less likely to change based on operation of the frame button 22 than during other periods. Even during such a high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, which motivates the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, unlike normal background mode transitions, it is possible to execute a background mode transition that increases the likelihood of winning a jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuation periods, the fluctuation time of special symbols tends to be shorter than during other periods. Therefore, if the background mode is transitioned as in other periods, there is a risk that the results of the crucial special symbol lottery will be missed. Therefore, the system is configured to make it difficult to transition to background mode. However, when transitioning to background mode based on the execution of continuous preview effects, continuous preview effects are executed using the fluctuation time of multiple special symbol fluctuations, so the results of the continuous preview effects are not displayed immediately after transitioning to background mode. Therefore, even if a transition to background mode is executed, it is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for players to understand.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during a high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than transitioning to background mode can be executed, and the system is configured to encourage the player to operate the frame button 22 even during a high-speed fluctuation period, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on. By executing a transition to background mode based on the fulfillment of the conditions for executing a continuous preview effect, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect and increase their interest in the game.

Here, the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d will be explained with reference to Figure 147(a). Figure 147(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d. As shown in Figure 147(a), the continuous preview execution selection table 222d specifies whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect will be met in correspondence with the lottery result (lottery result for the special pattern) included in the received winning information, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (number of reserved balls for the second special pattern), and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a "jackpot," the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79," "continuous preview available" is defined, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are met, and if it is in the range of "80 to 198," "continuous preview not available" is defined, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are not met. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149," "continuous preview available" is defined, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are met, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198," "continuous preview not available" is defined, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are not met.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "lose", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", it is defined as "no consecutive preview" where the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effect are not met, while the range of "195 to 198" is defined as "with consecutive preview" where the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effect are met. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", it is defined as "no consecutive preview" where the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effect are not met, while the range of "190 to 198" is defined as "with consecutive preview" where the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effect are met.

As described above, in this control example, the greater the number of reserved special symbols 2, the more likely the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are to be met. Furthermore, the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are more likely to be met when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to play (play by throwing a ball into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous preview effect, thereby increasing the operation of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, the greater the number of reserved special symbols 2, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot when the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are met. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous preview effect with a high likelihood of a jackpot, players can be motivated to play (play by throwing a ball into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous preview effect, thereby increasing the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

In this control example, when a winning information command (winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110, the continuous preview execution selection table 222d is referenced to determine (determine) only whether the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are met. Even if the conditions for executing the continuous preview effect are met, the continuous preview effect is not executed at that time. Instead, the continuous preview effect is executed when the frame button 22 is operated within a specific period after the execution conditions are met. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the winning information that is the target of the execution conditions being met, even if multiple balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during one special symbol variation period and multiple winning information commands are received. Therefore, when a continuous preview effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous preview effect will continue, and the content of the continuous preview effect can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

As mentioned above, this control example is configured so that the player is not notified (hinted) that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that a notification (hinting) performance is executed to notify (hint) the player that the conditions for execution have been met. For example, the player may be notified (hinted) that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met by displaying the words "Waiting" in the secondary display area Ds. By configuring it in this way, when a notification (hinting) performance is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview performance, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm as a valid period notification mode that can notify the player that a valid period has been set (that the player is within the valid period) for validly determining the player's operation of the frame button 22. However, the display mode of the icon HR10 is configured so that it is not possible (or difficult) to determine whether a special valid time has been set, which is set when the conditions for executing a consecutive preview effect are met, or whether a normal valid time has been set. By configuring it in this way, the player will not know whether a consecutive preview effect or a normal operation effect will be executed until they operate the frame button 22, and will therefore be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute a consecutive preview effect.

Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 may be configured to allow the player to distinguish whether the currently set valid period is the special valid period or the normal valid period, or the timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to allow the player to distinguish whether the currently set valid period is the special valid period or the normal valid period. Furthermore, the period during which the special valid period is set may be set to a different period from the period during which the normal valid period is set (e.g., 3 seconds after the special symbol variation begins), and the player may not be notified (indicated) that a special valid period has been set. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to determine when to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview effect, thereby encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22. Similarly, if the setting of the special valid period is not notified (indicated) to the player, only an effect that indicates (indicates) that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effect have been met (e.g., displaying the word "Waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executable. This prevents the frame button 22 from being operated unnecessarily when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects have not been met. In addition, if the frame button 22 is operated outside of the special effective time when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects have been met, a notification display may be displayed to inform the player that the special effective time is not currently in effect (for example, a "Not now" message may be displayed in the secondary display area Ds), or a guide display may be displayed to inform the player of the special effective time (for example, a "Please press again in 2 seconds" message may be displayed in the secondary display area Ds).

Furthermore, in this control example, when a winning information command containing winning information for the second special symbol is received, processing is performed to reference the consecutive preview performance table 222d and establish the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are established when a winning information command containing winning information for the first special symbol is received.

Referring back to Figure 144, the V notification execution selection table 222e is a data table referenced when determining whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided within the variable winning device 65, which opens during a jackpot game. When a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability variable state) for a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Depending on the type of jackpot game being executed, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (probability variable jackpot game), and a jackpot game in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game than the probability variable jackpot game (normal jackpot game).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided within the variable winning device 65, and depending on the position of the switching valve 65y, balls that flow into the variable winning device 65 are allocated to a third flow path 65e3 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v. This switching valve 65y is controlled and driven so that it switches to a position that allows balls to be allocated to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round of play when a guaranteed jackpot game is executed.

The V notification effect can execute the following effects to a player playing a jackpot game: a V guidance effect that guides the player during the jackpot game during the period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the gameplay method for aiming for the specific area (V gate) 65v; a V period effect that notifies the player that the current period is a V period; a V success effect that notifies the player that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period; and a V failure effect that notifies the player that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Executing this V notification effect makes it easy to play a game to get the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v when a special jackpot game is played, and because the player is notified that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, it can clearly notify the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In this control example, after a normal jackpot game is played, a time-saving state (a low-probability state for special symbols and a high-probability state for normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a "chance mode" presentation mode is set (see Figure 134). Furthermore, the "chance mode" is also set in some cases when a high-probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This allows the possibility that a high-probability state is set internally even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, allowing the player to play while expecting the high-probability state. However, if a V notification presentation is executed during a jackpot game, it becomes easy to determine whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. Consequently, if a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, even if the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player may be distrustful that the high-probability state has disappeared. In particular, in pachinko machines 10 like this control example, where the condition for ending the probability variable state is met when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the probability variable state ends without a jackpot being won in the special symbol lottery, so there is a strong risk that even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, it may be thought that the probability variable state was not set.

In this control example, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game, and the presence or absence of a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined based on the results of this process. Then, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game in which a V notification effect is not executed (in which case a special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to determine whether a special probability state has been set internally, allowing players playing in "chance mode" to play with the expectation that a special probability state has been set, without creating a sense of distrust.

Here, the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be explained with reference to Figure 147(b). Figure 147(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the V notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a V notification effect during the current jackpot game (S4704 in Figure 180) when it is determined that it is time to start a special jackpot game (S4701 in Figure 180: Yes) in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in Figure 180) executed in the main processing (see Figure 174) of the sound lamp control device 113.

As shown in Figure 147 (b), the V notification execution selection table 222e specifies whether or not to execute a V notification (the determination result of whether or not to execute a V notification effect) in accordance with the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed this time (the jackpot type that resulted in the jackpot) and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 149," "V notification yes" is specified, indicating that a V notification effect will be executed, and when it is in the range of "150 to 198," "V notification no" is specified, indicating that a V notification effect will not be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E," and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 189," "V notification yes" is specified, and when it is in the range of "190 to 198," "V notification no" is specified.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, which triggers a special jackpot game, the V notification effect is executed approximately 75% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 50% of the time it will result in a special jackpot game ("Jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% is a regular jackpot game ("Jackpot B"). Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game approximately 37.5% of the time, and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game approximately 62.5% of the time. Furthermore, when a V notification effect is not executed, the probability of a special jackpot game being executed is approximately 20%.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "Jackpot C, D, E," which triggers a variable jackpot game, the V notification effect will be executed approximately 90% of the time. Here, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is configured to always trigger a variable jackpot game ("Jackpot C, D, E"). Therefore, in reality, in approximately 10% of cases where a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot game will be executed without the V notification effect being executed. By providing a setting where the V notification effect is not executed even for a jackpot won in the second special pattern lottery, which always triggers a variable jackpot game, the probability of the game state being in a variable jackpot state can be increased when the V notification effect is not executed, i.e., when "Chance Mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

As mentioned above, the rate at which the V notification effect is executed differs between winning a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery ("Jackpot A") that triggers a special jackpot game and winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery ("Jackpot C, D, E") that triggers a special jackpot game. Specifically, the V notification effect is less likely to be executed when a special jackpot game is executed for the first special pattern lottery, which makes it less likely to result in a special jackpot game, than for the second special pattern lottery, which makes it more likely to result in a special jackpot game. This configuration increases the frequency with which the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery. This makes it easier for players to feel excited even when "Chance Mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game based on the first special pattern lottery, which may result in a normal jackpot game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the execution rate of the V notification effect varies depending on the type of jackpot, but it is also possible to vary the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on other factors. For example, it is possible to vary the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, or the number of times a jackpot is won without transitioning to the normal state (the so-called number of consecutive wins), or the result of the player operating the frame button 22. By varying the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on various conditions in this way, it is possible to set multiple apparent probability rates (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed across all jackpot wins), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this control example, the V notification effect described above is only executable when a special jackpot game is being played, i.e., when a jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is being played. However, this is not limited to this; the V notification effect may also be executable when a normal jackpot game is being played. In this case, the V notification effect is executed in accordance with the timing when the V period (the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the special jackpot game (the timing when the first round of round play is played), and a V failure effect is ultimately executed to notify players that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Furthermore, if the V failure effect is executed despite normal play during a jackpot game, for example, the V failure effect may be executed even when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the special jackpot game, and a "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, it is possible to set a pattern in which the V notification effect is not executed during the variable jackpot game whether the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the V notification effect is always executed when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes the variable jackpot game when a jackpot is won.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), we will continue the explanation. The button operation effect selection table 222f is a data table referenced when determining the effect type of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when "chance mode" is set as the effect mode. It is referenced (see S5315 in FIG. 186) when it is determined that a valid operation has been executed on the frame button 22 during chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S5315 in FIG. 186). In this way, by varying the effect type of the operation effect executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the button operation effect selection table 222f, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of operation effects.

Here, the contents of the button operation effect selection table 222f will be explained with reference to Figure 148(a). Figure 148(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in Figure 148(a), the button operation effect selection table 222f defines a time-saving state selection table 222f1 that is referenced when the time-saving state is set, and a probability variable state selection table 223f2 that is referenced when the probability variable state is set.

In this control example, the "Chance Mode" presentation mode is set when the time-saving mode is set and in some cases when the special mode is set. A common variation presentation is executed during the "Chance Mode" regardless of the set game state. Furthermore, when the special mode is set and when the time-saving mode is set, the same variation pattern table (special mode/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time). This makes it difficult to determine whether the currently set game state is the special mode or the time-saving mode from the special symbol variation executed during the "Chance Mode" and the third symbol variation presentation executed in response to that special symbol variation, allowing players to play while hoping that they are currently in the special mode.

However, if players playing in "Chance Mode" are not provided with information that suggests the currently set game state, there is a problem in that they will quickly become bored with playing in "Chance Mode." Therefore, in this control example, multiple types of operation effects can be executed during "Chance Mode," and the execution rate of each operation effect is varied depending on the set game state. In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but by varying the rate at which each operation effect is selected, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the multiple operation effects that are actually executed. This allows players to enjoy predicting the game state.

Similarly, the presentation mode of the operation effects executed when the normal state is set, the presentation mode of the operation effects executed during the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies that the special state is set, and the presentation mode of the operation effects executed as part of the variable effects are configured to select and execute one of multiple presentation modes, but detailed explanations of these will be omitted.

Next, with reference to Figure 148 (b), the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be explained. Figure 148 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. This time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set, and defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 148 (b), when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149," it is set to "none," indicating that the operation effect will not be executed; in the range of "150 to 189," it is set to "reach suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will enter a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation; and in the range of "190 to 198," it is set to "state suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests the currently set game state. Furthermore, when the operation method is "long press," it is set to "background mode transition," indicating that the background mode will be transitioned, in the range of "0 to 198."

In this control example, multiple operation methods that a player can perform on the frame button 22 are set, including a "normal press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, and a "long press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or more. Different operation effects are then executed depending on the player's operation method. This allows the player to select the operation method of their choice and execute a variety of operation effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

In this control example, the two types of operation methods described above are used as the operation methods that the player can operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with operation means other than the frame buttons 22 (e.g., a second frame button) and a different operation presentation may be selected depending on the type of frame button pressed by the player. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple operation methods are set in accordance with the order of operations performed on multiple operation means within a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a "normal press" is determined when the player presses the frame button 22, and if the pressed state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds), an additional determination is made that it is a "long press," thereby executing an operation presentation specifically for a "long press."

Furthermore, in addition to the frame buttons 22 that can be pressed by the player, operation means that can be operated by the player may include operation means consisting of a lever member that the player can tilt up, down, left, or right, or a rotating member that the player can rotate. Also, rather than the player directly operating a member, an operation means (such as a touch sensor) with a predetermined detection area may be provided that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed by having the proximity sensor detect a hand that has entered that detection area. Any operation means that allows the player to perform predetermined operations at will and allows the player to select different operation methods depending on the operation content may be provided.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration with two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press," has been described, but this is not limited to this; three or more operation methods may be provided, or only one operation method may be provided. Here, if only one operation method is provided, it may be configured so that different operation presentations are executed depending on the interval at which that operation is executed. This makes it possible to allow the player to select from a variety of operation presentations, even if there is only one type of operation method.

Returning to Figure 148 (b), we will continue to explain the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198," "background mode transition," which indicates a transition to background mode, is defined. Furthermore, when the operation method is "long press," the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198," and "state suggestion," which indicates a presentation suggesting the currently set game state, is defined.

Furthermore, if the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect will not be executed regardless of the operation method or the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variation period (third period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198," a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified. Furthermore, if the operation method is "long press," a "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state set in the past (at the time "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Next, with reference to Figure 149, the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be explained. Figure 149 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2. This probability variable state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the probability variable state is set, and defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 119," it is "none," indicating that the operation effect will not be executed; in the range of "120 to 139," it is "reach suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will enter a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation; in the range of "140 to 189," it is "state suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests the currently set game state; and in the range of "190 to 198," it is "background mode transition," indicating a transition to background mode. Furthermore, when the operation method is "long press," the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 198," it is "background mode transition," indicating a transition to background mode.

Furthermore, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is displayed, and a "state suggestion" indicating a presentation suggesting the currently set game state is displayed in the range of "170 to 198". Furthermore, when the operation method is "long press", a "state suggestion" indicating a presentation suggesting the currently set game state is displayed in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Furthermore, if the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect will not be executed regardless of the operation method or the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variation period (third period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198," a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified. Furthermore, if the operation method is "long press," a "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state set in the past (at the time "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

As explained above, when "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode after a jackpot game ends, different data tables are referenced to select the presentation mode for the operation presentation depending on whether the game is in the time-saving mode or the probability variable mode, and the proportion at which each presentation mode is selected varies depending on the set game state. This allows the player to predict the currently set game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation being executed, which encourages the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among the multiple game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) for which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode at a specific operation timing, a presentation mode (advantageous presentation mode) that is likely to be executed when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set is provided, such as a "state suggestion" operation presentation that is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period." This allows the player to play with a sense of anticipation, wondering if an advantageous game state has been set when the "state suggestion" operation presentation is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period."

Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period," the more times the operation effect is executed in the advantageous effect mode described above during the "first period," the higher the expectation that an advantageous game state will be set, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, at a specific operation timing, of the multiple game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) for which "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode) is executed only when an advantageous game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, an operation presentation for "background mode transition" is set by "normal pressing" during the "first period." Therefore, when the operation presentation for "background mode transition" is executed by "normal pressing" during the "first period," it is possible to know that an advantageous game state has been set.

In addition, the advantageous presentation mode and the confirmed presentation mode described above use presentation modes that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal press" during the "second period"). More specifically, the "state suggestion" presentation mode is configured so that when executed by "normal press" during the "first period," the likelihood of a special state being set increases, and when executed by "normal press" during the "second period," the likelihood of a time-saving state being set increases. This configuration allows players to enjoy playing while analyzing which presentation mode was executed during which period when the "chance mode" is set.

With reference to Figures 148 and 149, we have explained above the contents of the presentation modes of operation effects that can be selected when a player operates the operation means (frame button 22), and the contents of the data table (button operation presentation selection table 222f) that is referenced when making a selection. In this first control example, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state. Each data table defines the same presentation mode with different selection rates. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current game state based on the presentation mode of the executed operation effect alone, but by executing the operation effect multiple times, the player can understand the current game state by understanding the selection rate of each presentation mode. This can motivate the player to play by executing the operation effect multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to reference different data tables to select the presentation style of the operation presentation based on the currently set game state and the currently set presentation mode. This makes it possible to execute different operation presentations when a probability variable state is set and when the presentation mode is set to "Super Chance Mode" or "Chance Mode."

Here, when "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode, for example, there is no need to execute a "State Suggestion" presentation mode, which is a presentation mode that suggests that the current game state has been set. Instead, it is better to specify a "Reach Suggestion" presentation mode or a "Prediction Suggestion" presentation mode, which suggests whether the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains information indicating a specific lottery result (such as a jackpot win or a fluctuation pattern with a set fluctuation time of more than a predetermined time). This makes it possible to motivate the player to execute the operation presentation even when "Super Chance Mode" is set.

Furthermore, the type of data table (button operation effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect may be configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the type of jackpot (stop display mode of the special pattern), the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or whether or not a V win occurs during jackpot play.

In this case, for example, if the time-saving mode is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, the presentation style of the operation presentation executed during "chance mode" can be different between when "chance mode" is set after the end of a normal jackpot game and when the ball fails to land in a V-shaped jackpot game during a special jackpot game and "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, during "chance mode" in which the time-saving mode is set after the end of a special jackpot game, it is recommended to specify a "past jackpot type indication" presentation style that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This can make the player believe that a special jackpot state has been set, even though the time-saving mode is actually set. Furthermore, it is also possible to specify a "past game history notification" presentation style that notifies the player that a V-shaped jackpot was not achieved despite the previous jackpot game being a special jackpot game. This can make it easier to change the content of future games.

Next, referring to Figure 144 (b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in Figure 144 (b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol variation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a secondary state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h, a special performance in progress flag 223i, a V winning flag 223j, a V performance execution flag 223k, a V notification flag 223m, a time-saving counter 223n, a special continuous preview flag 223o, a performance mode memory area 223p, a continuous preview in progress flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operation in progress counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The command memory area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are temporarily stored until the processing corresponding to those commands is executed. In more detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see Figure 61) of the voice lamp processing unit 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs the processing appropriate to that command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (area 1 to area 4) for special symbols, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main control unit 110 is stored in each of these areas, starting with area 1. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control unit 113 to determine the lottery results for reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls for the first special pattern and four reserved balls for the second special pattern can be reserved and stored. Therefore, the winning information storage area 223b is configured to have four reserved areas for the first special pattern and four reserved areas for the second special pattern. In this control example, the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are not executed simultaneously. When a new special pattern lottery is executed while both reserved balls for the first special pattern and reserved balls for the second special pattern are held, the oldest stored winning information (winning information stored in the first area) in the reserved area for the second special pattern is moved to the execution area. Each winning information stored in the second to fourth areas is then shifted to the reserve area with the next lower number. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured so that the lottery for the second special pattern is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special pattern.

Note that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, for example, a pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which reserved balls are acquired regardless of the type of special symbol (a so-called winning order consumption pachinko machine 10), eight reserve areas can be provided in the winning information storage area 223b, and the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 can be stored in order starting from the first area. Furthermore, for a pachinko machine 10 that can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery simultaneously (overlapping) (a so-called simultaneous variation type pachinko machine 10), the configuration of this control example can be configured such that, instead of a single execution area, a first execution area for the first special symbol and a second execution area for the second special symbol are provided, and the winning information stored in the first area of the reserve area corresponding to each special symbol is transferred to the execution area corresponding to each special symbol.

The special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is a counter for counting values corresponding to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and includes a first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As mentioned above, the voice and lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the main control device 110's RAM 203. Therefore, the voice and lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls for each special symbol based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the main control unit 110 subtracts the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern to execute a new first special pattern lottery, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball count command (special pattern 1 reserved ball count command) indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d after the addition or subtraction to the sound lamp control unit 113. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the main control unit 110 subtracts the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern to execute a new second special pattern lottery, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball count command (special pattern 2 reserved ball count command) indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the sound lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command (special symbol 1 reserved ball count command, special symbol 2 reserved ball count command) sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d or the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c (first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c1, second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d and second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is used to display the reserved symbols. That is, upon receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, and sends a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, i.e., the number of reserved balls equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the secondary display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122(b)) of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d changes in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the execution of the special pattern lottery is pending.

The special symbol variation start flag 223d is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special symbol variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is received, notifying the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variation display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. The special symbol variation start flag 223d has a first special symbol variation start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol variation start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and is set to on or off according to the type of special symbol indicated by the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main control unit 110.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received notifying the variable stop type of the special symbol. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. This special symbol stop type selection flag 223e has a first special symbol stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and is set to on or off according to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special symbol stop type command) sent from the main control unit 110.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used to select a variation pattern or various effects, and is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 198. It is updated by incrementing by 1 each time the main processing is executed. While a detailed explanation is omitted, this effect counter 223f is made up of multiple counters, each with a different update rule. Each counter is configured to update each time the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 174) is executed. When multiple types of variation pattern selection or effect selection processing are executed within the execution interval of the main processing, different counter values held by the effect counter 223f are obtained and the processing is executed. This prevents the same value of the effect counter 223f from being used to select various effects, even if processing using the value of the effect counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same time (within the same cycle of the main processing).

The slave state setting area 223g is set with data corresponding to the state command output from the master control unit 110. The data set in the slave state setting area 223g also allows the audio and lamp control unit 113 to determine the current game state. The state setting command is also output from the master control unit 110 when the power is turned on, allowing the audio and lamp control unit 113 to determine the backed-up game state. Furthermore, the slave state setting area 223g includes a current game state memory area that stores the currently set game state and a past game state memory area that stores the game state set before the current game state was set, allowing calculation of the process through which the current game state was set. This allows, for example, when a time-saving state is set, to determine whether the time-saving state was set after the end of a jackpot game, or whether a special probability state was set after the end of a jackpot game and then the special probability end condition was met, and then a presentation (a past state suggestion presentation to suggest the player's past game state) based on the results of this determination can be executed. Additionally, the secondary state setting area 223g is configured to be able to store game states such as the normal state, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state, as well as the jackpot game state and the regular win game state.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the normal symbol reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and its value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f, which counts the number of reserved normal symbol balls stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. The only difference from the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is that the target has been changed from special symbols to normal symbols; otherwise, the two are identical, and so detailed content will be omitted here.

The special effect in progress flag 223i is a flag that indicates that a second special symbol change will be executed during normal mode, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing a second special symbol change during normal mode are met. Specifically, it is set to ON when a second special symbol change is executed during normal mode, or when special symbol 2 is reserved while a first special symbol change is being executed. It is set to OFF when a first special symbol change is executed while the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to ON, i.e., when special symbol 2 is reserved at 0. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see Figure 124 (b)) is executed to indicate the period during which the special effect in progress flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag indicating that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set in the main control unit 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), that V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that a V winning command has been received (S4407: Yes in FIG. 177) in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control unit 113, the V winning flag 223j is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced (S4801 in Fig. 181) in the ending process (see S4715 in Fig. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in Fig. 180), and determines whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v (whether a V winning occurred) during the current jackpot game. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in Fig. 181) (S4801 in Fig. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect to cause the ball to pass through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game, and the presentation style of the effect executed at the time of V winning (end of V round) and at the end of the jackpot game is configured to be variable depending on whether or not a V winning has occurred. Furthermore, the presentation style at the time of V winning and the presentation style at the end of the jackpot game are configured to be variable depending on whether or not a V notification effect has been executed. In this way, to enable the presentation that is variably set based on whether or not a V winning has occurred to be executed at a timing (at the end) different from when a V winning has occurred, the presence or absence of a V winning can be determined based on the setting status of the V winning flag 112j.

The V effect execution flag 223k is a flag indicating that a V notification effect will be executed during jackpot play, and is set to ON when it is determined that a V notification effect will be executed during jackpot play. Specifically, if it is determined during jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) and the current jackpot is a variable jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect. Then, if it is determined that a V notification effect will be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), the flag is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending processing (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set to ON, i.e., if a V winning does not occur during jackpot play, it is referenced (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), processing is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S4804 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to OFF (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when a variable probability jackpot game is played, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect during that jackpot game. If a decision is made to execute a V notification effect, the effect mode during the ending period is set to a mode indicating that a variable probability state will be set (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)). In other words, when a V notification effect is executed during a variable probability jackpot game, the player is notified of this when a V win is made, so the ending effect executed during the ending period is also set to a mode indicating that a variable probability state will be set (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)). Therefore, if a V win is not made during a jackpot game, processing is executed to switch the effect mode of the ending effect to a mode indicating that a time-shortened state will be set (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)).

On the other hand, if a V notification effect is not executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, even if a V win occurs, the player will not be notified of this, and the ending effect will be pre-set to a presentation mode (see Figures 127(a) and (c)) that indicates that a time-saving state will be set. Therefore, even if a V win does not occur during jackpot play, there is no need to execute processing to switch the presentation mode of the ending effect.

The time-saving counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) when the high probability state for normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or greater, the value is decremented by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes "0," it is determined that a transition to a low probability state for normal symbols has occurred. Furthermore, the system is configured to determine the detailed period during which the high probability state for normal symbols is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 223n.

The special consecutive preview flag 223o is a flag that indicates that the conditions for executing a consecutive preview effect have been met during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) when "Chance Mode" is set as the effect mode, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing a consecutive preview effect are met. When this special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set during which operations on the operating means can be effectively identified, and if a specific operation is performed on the operating means during that special effective period, a consecutive preview effect will be executed.

Specifically, in the winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, when a special symbol winning information command (a winning information command corresponding to a special symbol) is received, the special symbol winning information command processing (see S4406 in FIG. 178) is executed. If it is determined that the current period is a high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and if it is determined that a continuous preview performance should be executed by referring to the continuous preview execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to on (S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) that is executed when "chance mode" is set references the setting status of the special continuous notice flag 223o (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to on, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s as the special effective period during which operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, by setting a special effective period in which operations on the operating means are deemed valid only when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects are met, and by making the consecutive preview effects executable only when the player performs a specific operation on the operating means within that special effective period, it is possible to motivate the player to play in order to execute the consecutive preview effects. Furthermore, by varying the notification mode of the notification effect that notifies the player of multiple pieces of information required to execute the consecutive preview effects (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects have been met, information indicating the period (the set period) for which the special effective period is set, and information indicating the operation to be performed on the operating means to execute the consecutive preview effects), the difficulty of executing the consecutive preview effects can be easily adjusted.

In this case, it is advisable to configure the system so that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects are more likely to be met when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. This can motivate the player to play in order to execute the consecutive preview effects. In addition, when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview effects are met, if the player performs a specific operation on the operating means outside of the special effective period, it is advisable to configure the system so that a notification effect is executed to inform the player of the timing when the special effective period will be set. This can motivate the player to operate the operating means, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

The presentation mode memory area 223p is a memory area that stores various presentation modes that are set during a high probability state for normal symbols, and different presentation modes are stored depending on the value of the time-saving counter 223n. The stored presentation mode is then read out when determining the current presentation mode. Specifically, during the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read out (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the presentation mode corresponding to the read value (high-speed period (high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) is set and stored. The stored information is then cleared when the high probability state for normal symbols transitions to a low probability state.

The continuous preview execution flag 223q is a flag that indicates that a continuous preview execution has been set as the third symbol variation execution, and is set to ON when a continuous preview execution is being executed. The setting status is then determined (S5208 in FIG. 185) during the chance mode execution execution setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), the execution mode corresponding to the continuous preview execution is determined. Then, when the continuous preview execution has ended, it is set to OFF. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a different execution mode that does not correspond to the continuous preview execution from being set in a new variation execution executed during the continuous preview execution.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the valid operation period during which operation of the frame button 22, which is set within the variable display period of the third symbol, is validly determined. When the valid operation period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period is set, and the value is decremented as time passes. If the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting a valid operation period during which operation of the frame button 22 is validly determined, excessive execution of effects (operation effects) that are executed when the operating means (frame button 22) is operated can be prevented.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operating means that can be operated by the player. However, if, for example, multiple operating means, such as a second operating means, are provided in addition to the frame button 22 (first operating means), different valid operating periods may be set for each operating means. In that case, by providing an SW valid time timer 223r for each operating means, it is possible to set overlapping valid operating periods for each operating means.

The special effective time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the effective operation period (special operation effective period) during which operation of the frame buttons 22 is determined to be valid. It is set only when the special consecutive notice flag 223o is set to ON and the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed. When the special operation effective time is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective time is set, and the value is decremented over time. Then, in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not the special operation is within the effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186). If it is determined that the operation is within the effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame buttons 22 is treated as valid. In this control example, different operation effects are executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the normal operation valid period (the period when the value of the SW valid time timer 223r is greater than 0) and when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation valid period (the period when the value of the special valid time timer 223s is greater than 0). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation valid period, a continuous preview effect is executed spanning multiple special pattern change periods from the next special pattern change to the end of the target special pattern change. When this continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode is transitioned to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period when transition to background mode is suppressed by normal operation of the frame button 22, simply transitioning to background mode can increase the player's chances of winning a jackpot.

The operation counter 223t is a counter that measures the period during which the player presses a frame button 22, and while the player is measuring and pressing the frame button 22, the counter value is updated as time passes. Based on the value measured by this operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data described above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to Figure 137, we will continue the explanation. The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern variable presentation and the like on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display content of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can synchronize the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 equipped with a RAM erase switch 122 (see Figure 121). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., 5-volt voltage for logic, and backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as necessary to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can successfully execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control unit 110 to clear backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see Figure 121) is pressed. When the main control unit 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control unit 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Figures 150 to 155. Figure 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice and lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if different models of pachinko machines 10 have different lottery probabilities for winning a special symbol jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for a single special symbol jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113, which is based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, which reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power is applied (including power recovery from a power outage; the same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Furthermore, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the pointer value indicated by the setting command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, as will be described in more detail below, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used by that control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As will be explained in more detail below, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, by storing control programs, etc. in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the incidence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, NAND flash memory generally suffers from the problem of slow read speeds, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged contiguously across multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read quickly, but reading the first page of data requires a significant amount of time from the time the address is specified until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading non-contiguous data, a significant amount of time is required each time that data is read. Because NAND flash memory has such a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to read a control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the instructions that make up the control program. This could result in a degradation of the processing performance of the display control device 114, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231.

In this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233, which is provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is made up of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), which allows for high-speed data reading and writing, allowing the MPU 231 to read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complex effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via bus line 240. After a system reset is released, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via bus line 240 and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 (described below) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 (described below) of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is modularized and consists of a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit of the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program storage area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character storage area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

NAND flash memory has the advantage of being able to achieve a large storage capacity in a small area, making it easy to increase the capacity of the character ROM 234. As a result, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes in this pachinko machine, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, to further increase the player's interest, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Furthermore, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character memory area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program memory area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234, which is provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the incidence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits with incorrect data written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on data read from NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes bad data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to those bad data blocks, allowing the MPU 231 and image controller 237 to easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address locations of bad data blocks, which differ between individual NAND flash memories 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

Buffer RAM 234c is memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to character ROM 234 is specified by MPU 231 or image controller 237 via bus line 240, ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address has been set in buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data containing the data corresponding to the specified address is read from NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in buffer RAM 234c. ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to MPU 231 or image controller 237 via bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, each capable of holding one page of data from the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from one bank to the outside while leaving data set in the other bank, or to perform two parallel processes: transferring and setting one page of data from the NAND flash memory 234a, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, to one bank, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of character ROM 234 readouts.

NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in character ROM 234, and is configured with a significantly smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores the control programs stored in character ROM 234 that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a; specifically, a portion of the boot program that is executed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting up the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After a system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. This enables various controls to be executed in the display control device 114. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from this boot program, starting with the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after a system reset is released (for example, if one page has a capacity of 2 kilobytes, then 1,024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions), within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). The number of instructions in the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately to suit the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Meanwhile, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address in the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, instead of storing the entire control program in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d for the following reason: As mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that, when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all control programs are stored in this NAND flash memory 234a, when address "0000H" is specified via bus line 240 by MPU 231 to fetch the first command code to be executed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 must read one page of data, including the data (command code) corresponding to address "0000H," from NAND flash memory 234a and set it in buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a significant amount of time to read the data and set it in buffer RAM 234c, so MPU 231 must wait a long time between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the command code corresponding to address "0000H." This increases the time it takes for MPU 231 to start up, which can result in a problem in which control of third symbol display device 81 in display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, NOR ROM is a memory capable of high-speed data readout. Therefore, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the first command to be processed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, in NOR ROM 234d, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d to buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," thereby enabling MPU 231 to start up in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in display control device 114 can be immediately initiated.

The boot program is programmed to transfer a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a (i.e., control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d) and fixed value data used in those control programs (e.g., the display data table and transfer data table described below) to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, after releasing the system reset, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set.

As mentioned above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the internal bus address being set to "0000H," the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 can be left set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and the transfer process can be performed using the other bank. Therefore, since there is no need to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program memory area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. In other words, rather than reading out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a that has the second program memory area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 that has the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, because the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the processing for those instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and so that the instruction pointer 231a is set to the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used by those control programs (e.g., the display data table and transfer data table described below) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is set to the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) by the boot program is completed.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to completion by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referencing the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complex effects.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions, starting with the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 to be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, simply adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234 enables MPU 231 to start up in a short time, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies this shortened startup time.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) transmitted from the MPU 231, which will be described later, and displays the drawn image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the one frame of image information previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 processes the drawing process of this one frame of an image and the display process of this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time of one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 sends a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as the "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see Figure 189 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for the next frame of image and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at the image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing is complete, so it is possible to prevent starting to draw a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or to prevent an image from being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information contained in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

NAND flash memory generally facilitates large ROM capacity, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. As described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been completed after power is turned on, image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. This eliminates the time required for reading, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for the drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As will be described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise result from providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

Image data transfer instructions issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 using transfer instructions and transfer data information in the drawing list include the starting address (starting address of the source storage) and ending address (final address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the starting address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that has been read from character ROM 234 over a period of time to be temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from buffer RAM 237a to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short period of time. This prevents resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long period of time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, making the video RAMs 235, 236 unavailable for image drawing processing, which can result in the image not being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time.

In addition, the transfer of image data from buffer RAM 234c to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is performed by image controller 237, so it is easy to determine the period when resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to retain image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without overwriting it while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a background image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area that stores data corresponding to the power-on main image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area that stores image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 through a variable presentation when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in Figure 187).

Here, we will explain the power-on variable image with reference to Figure 151. Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram that explains the power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in Figure 151 (a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, upon receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image with a "○" design in the lower right position as viewed from the screen, as shown in FIG. 151(b), and a power-on variation image with an "X" design in the same position as the "○" design, as shown in FIG. 151(c), during the variation period. The result of the lottery conducted by the main control device 110 is then determined from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if the result is a "jackpot for the special pattern," the image shown in FIG. 151(b) is displayed for a fixed period after the variation effect has stopped, and if the result is a "miss for the special pattern," the image shown in FIG. 151(c) is displayed for a fixed period after the variation effect has stopped.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to view the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take its time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235.

In addition, when checking operation at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on.Furthermore, using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of the operation check from being reduced.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 151 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable effect to be produced using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable effect image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, if a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Figure 150, we will continue the explanation. The rear image area 235c is an area that stores image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, with reference to Figure 152, we will explain the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c. Figure 152 is an explanatory diagram that explains four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. Figure 152(a) shows rear A corresponding to the "town stage," and Figure 152(b) shows rears B to D corresponding to the "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage."

As shown in Figure 152, the back images corresponding to each of the backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234 and are all horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image by scrolling the image horizontally from left to right so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are all configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images the horizontal width of the display area, and after the image between positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the image between positions a and a' is displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81.

When a change in the back surface type is determined based on the back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," or "sky stage," the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back surface image between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that each successive display area is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from positions a to a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the image between positions a and c, scrolling repeatedly and smoothly as it flows to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear surface E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... over time. Specifically, on rear surface E, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage," an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of back E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a bright blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating back image returning to the back image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear view image stored in the rear view image area 235c for each rear view image will be explained. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the entire range of rear view A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear view image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Typically, the game is played while the initial stage, the "city stage," is displayed, without changing the stage. Therefore, by keeping all image data for rear view A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" resident in the rear view image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, for back side B corresponding to the "Forest Stage," back side C corresponding to the "River Stage," and back side D corresponding to the "Sky Stage," as shown in Figure 152 (b), only image data corresponding to a partial area of the back side, i.e., the image between position a and position b, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, image data corresponding to back side E corresponding to the island stage is stored and remains resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on.

Here, in order to instantly change the background image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all background images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, doing so would require the resident video RAM 235 to have a very large capacity, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including this initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when a stage change is determined by lottery at the start of the change, the initial positions of backs B to D can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can also be made to scroll or change color over time. Furthermore, because only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for backs B to D, the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be kept small, thereby suppressing increases in cost.

Furthermore, the range from positions a to b for backs B to D is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using image data resident in back image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, while the image data corresponding to the images from positions b' to d can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. This allows image data from positions b' to d to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using image data stored in back image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the back image stored in normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear surface E, after the image in the initial position is displayed, the range of image data is set so that while the image is being displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the image data for the remaining image can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. This allows the image data corresponding to the remaining image to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be displayed sequentially over time on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 without delay.

For rear surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images, which is provided in the image storage area 236a (see Figure 150) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, ensuring that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

Furthermore, for backs B to D, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with image data corresponding to the image between positions b' and b. Then, under control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, thereby smoothly scrolling the back image on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as the display area on the third pattern display device 81 using image data from the normal video RAM 236. Next, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as the display area on the third pattern display device 81 using image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c, scrolling repeatedly and smoothly as if flowing to the left.

Returning to Figure 150, the explanation continues. The third pattern area 235d is an area where the third pattern used in the variable effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 resides. That is, image data corresponding to the 10 main patterns numbered "0" through "9" as described above, which are the third patterns, resides in the third pattern area 235d. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third pattern display device 81, there is no need to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable effect can be quickly started on the third pattern display device 81. This prevents a situation from occurring in which the variable effect does not immediately start on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable effect has already started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d also stores image data corresponding to main symbols without numbers "0" through "9," such as a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, or a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol and additional symbols resembling characters such as a plane, a furoshiki cloth, or a helmet. This image data is used for a demo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not begin. As a result, when a demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in that demo effect. Therefore, by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image on the third symbol display device 81, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in demo mode.

In addition, this control example is configured to display a third pattern that differs in display mode depending on the background mode (background image) that is set. Therefore, each time the background mode is switched, display image data for the third pattern that corresponds to the new background mode is stored in the third pattern area 235d. This eliminates the need to store image data for all third patterns that correspond to all background modes in the third pattern area 235d, thereby reducing storage capacity.

In this control example, the background mode can be switched by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22), so there is a possibility that the background mode may be switched multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the previous background mode is not erased from the third symbol area 235d for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the background mode is switched. This prevents the cumbersome process of storing image data in the third symbol area 235d from being executed, even if the background mode is frequently switched. Furthermore, the third symbol memory area 235d may be configured to store image data of multiple third symbols corresponding to multiple background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area that stores image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters, including a "boy," an "old man," and a "girl," are displayed in accordance with the various effects. By storing the corresponding data in the character design area 235e, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of a command received from the audio/lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 can draw the specified image by reading image data that is pre-resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, rather than reading corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. This eliminates the need to read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, allowing the character design to be changed instantly even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs within the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound and lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound and lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by means of an error command. Furthermore, if the sound and lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of any other error, the sound and lamp control device 113 also notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error along with the type of error by means of an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the perspective of preventing player cheating and protecting players from errors, it is required that error messages be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. Therefore, the display control device 114 is able to instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required to draw the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 that stores the type of image data. In response, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described below) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of image in that frame buffer. While the image is being displayed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously displayed is read from the other frame buffer, and the image information is transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby causing the third pattern display device 81 to display that one frame of image.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the read one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

The work RAM 233 is a memory configured from DRAM that stores the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily stores work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. This work RAM 233 includes at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background image change flag 233w, a background image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Once all the control programs have been stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 then executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As mentioned above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, allowing for high-speed read operations. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and diverse and complex effects can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a single effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a single effect displayed by the display data table.

These data tables are typically stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234. After a system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231, and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Once all data tables have been stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 then controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As mentioned above, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, allowing for high-speed read operations. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can easily be used to execute diversified and complex effects.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable performances, opening performances, round performances, ending performances, and demo performances are prepared.

The variable effect is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable effect is also received. For example, when a variable effect is started, if the stop type of the variable effect is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss will be displayed as the final stop, whereas if the stop type of the variable effect is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot will be displayed as the final stop. By visually checking the stop patterns in this variable effect, the player can recognize the type of jackpot and easily determine the game value awarded according to the type of jackpot.

The opening effect is intended to notify the player that the pachinko machine 10 will transition to a special game mode and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is intended to notify the player of the number of rounds that will begin. The ending effect is intended to notify the player that the special game mode has ended.

As mentioned above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a starting win has not started. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9," is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. When the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, round effect, ending effect, and demo effect. Furthermore, if there are 32 variable effect patterns set, one table per variable effect pattern will be prepared for a total of 32 variable display data tables, which are display data tables for variable effects.

Now, with reference to Figure 153, the display data table will be explained in detail. Figure 153 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table from among the display data tables. The display data table corresponds to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and, depending on the sprite type, drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is specified.

The sprite type is information used to specify the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information used to specify the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information used to specify the magnification ratio relative to the standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to that magnification ratio. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when rotating a sprite for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite will be visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing it.

The variable display data table specifies the drawing content for one frame corresponding to each address, including one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light on the image, and drawing information for each sprite, such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. One or more pieces of information about effects and characters are specified depending on the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time, so the variable display data table only specifies the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display one of rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to E. Furthermore, if the rear type specifies that a rear image different from rears A to E is to be displayed, information specifying which rear image to display is also included.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to E should be displayed based on the back face type, it identifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery from back faces A to E as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame as time passes. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to E should be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed based on the back face type.

In this control example, we will explain the case where only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. However, instead, the back surface type and position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to that back surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table began. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the time the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began based on the display database, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the type of back surface and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. Alternatively, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) have symbol type offset information recorded as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of third symbol is because the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance and the stopped symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the variable performance until a predetermined time has passed records the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance. This causes the variable performance to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, each third symbol is assigned a unique number, so the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stopping symbol corresponding to the stopping type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to that third symbol.Furthermore, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time period during which the symbol offset information is switched from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the third symbol is displayed in a rapidly changing state, it is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the symbol offset information from the offset information for the stopped symbols in the previous variable effect to the offset information for the stopped symbols in the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 153) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation style to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to use in response to commands (e.g., display variable pattern commands) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the next image content to be drawn is identified and a drawing list (see Figure 155), described below, is created. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, which issues a drawing instruction for that image. As a result, the drawing content is identified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 simply by replacing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

Here, if a program executed by the MPU 231 were to be launched each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 were changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the launch and execution of programs that become increasingly complex and expansive as the variety of effect images increases would place a heavy load on the processing, restricting the processing power of the display control device 114 and potentially limiting the variety of effect images that can be controlled. In contrast, with the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. This means that a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, the reason why a display data table can be prepared for each presentation mode, a display data table buffer can be set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the results of a lottery performed based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than pachinko machines, the display content changes on the fly based on user operation, making it impossible to predict the display content. Therefore, it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table for each presentation mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the results of a lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to Figure 154. Figure 154 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in accordance with the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Note that if all image data for sprites used in the effects specified in a display data table is stored in resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This prevents the capacity of the data table storage area 233b from increasing.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table and lists transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that should begin transferring at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 154 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing for the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specific sprite begins according to the display data table, and the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, meaning that there is no image data to be transferred at the address indicated (address "0002H" in Figure 154).

The transfer data information includes the starting address (storage source starting address) and ending address (storage source ending address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the starting address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of Figure 154) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred that should be specified in that transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to use in accordance with commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. If a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads that transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, it identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see Figure 155), which will be described later, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds that transfer data information to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of Figure 154, if pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after addition to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if pointer 233f is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it determines that there is no image data to be transferred and from which transfer should begin, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 without adding any transfer data information to the created drawing list.

If transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for image data to be transferred at a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in image storage area 236a without fail. The image data stored in image storage area 236a can then be used to draw the specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that sprite image data used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easier to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

In addition, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, corresponding to the address. Therefore, the timing for starting transfer can be specified so that the image data for a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can easily be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag that indicates whether the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 151(a) to (c) are to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON during the main processing (see Figure 187) executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 187). Then, once all resident target image data has been stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the flag is set to OFF to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 199(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced during V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed so that various images are displayed in accordance with commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in Figure 199(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process (see Figure 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 200) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing display data tables corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands, etc. sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands, etc. from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the commands, etc. sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to that presentation mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 then increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155), described below, that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the presentation corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see Figure 155) for each frame that contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing transfer data tables corresponding to the display data tables stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands, etc. sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands, etc. from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if transfer data information for the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if null data is not written), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list (see Figure 155) described below, which contains image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes processing to transfer image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing that sprite can be sure to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Pointer 233f is used to specify the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is to be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in Figure 189(b)) of the V interrupt process, which is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, pointer update processing (see S7205 in Figure 198) is executed, and the value of pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this way, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and creates a drawing list (see Figure 155) described below. The MPU 231 also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should begin transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e and adds this transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d are displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and used to draw a specified sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on that transfer data table by the time the drawing of that sprite begins using the corresponding display data table. This means that even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the images of each sprite specified in the display data table are being drawn. Furthermore, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, and is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to Figure 155. Figure 155 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in Figure 155, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite used in one frame's image, such as the background image, third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information that causes the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, as well as its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs scaling on a standard image generated from the image data for that sprite read from the various video RAMs according to the magnification, rotation according to the rotation angle, translucency according to the translucency value, compositing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction according to the color information, and filtering according to the filter specification information using a method specified by that information, before drawing the resulting image at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count symbol, or a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data, among the detailed information for each sprite, are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from other image content. In other words, the area of resident video RAM 235 where the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address where the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies the other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) specified in the display data table as is among the detailed information for each sprite.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed closest to the front, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and then overwrites the drawn sprites in the frame buffer. Therefore, in one frame of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front.

Furthermore, if transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing and display processing for one frame of image is completed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one each time the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed using the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the effect.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag that indicates the storage status of all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in Figure 187) executed by the MPU 231 during main processing when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred corresponding to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see Figure 200) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF."

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 references the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in Figure 200). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in Figure 200) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is canceled. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 will be expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information about this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list (see S7802 in Figure 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is displayed on the specified drawing target buffer. Simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 also reads previously displayed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value from "0" to "1" and vice versa. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the MPU 231 executes the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 189(b)) based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing and display processes are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the drawing process for one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag used to determine whether or not to change the type of rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When this rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of rear image will be changed; when it is off, it means that no change will be made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in Figure 195 (a)). In addition, this rear image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in Figure 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in Figure 200). This makes it possible to display a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that has been set. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, with each bit corresponding to a different rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, this means that the rear image type corresponding to that on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if bit 0 of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, this means that rear image A has been set. When a rear image change command sent from the voice and lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by that command is set to on (see S7002 in Figure 195 (a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The currently set rear image type can be easily identified using this rear image discrimination flag 233x.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo effect is in progress. When this demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo effect is in progress; when it is off, it means that a demo effect is not in progress. This demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo effect is currently in progress.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag that indicates whether a confirmation display effect is currently being executed. Here, a confirmation display effect refers to an effect in which the stopped symbols are displayed stationary (confirmed display) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second) after a variable pattern. When this confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that a confirmation display effect is currently being executed, and when it is off, it means that a confirmation display effect is not currently being executed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when a confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a) , S6705 in FIG. 192(a) , S6805 in FIG. 192(b) , and S6905 in FIG. 193). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether a confirmation display effect is currently being executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 156 to 172. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (every 2 ms in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in this first control example, when both the right to draw for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the right to draw for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority. Furthermore, by passing a ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V located within the variable winning device 65 while a jackpot game is being played, a high probability state for the special symbol is established after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, another end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) is set.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The timer interrupt process first executes a process for reading various winning switches (S101). That is, the status of the various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the status of those switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, first win type counter C2, and second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and also sets the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or a ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process is executed in response to the ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 163 and 164. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, provided that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51 and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) makes various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determines the special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and controls the first pattern display device 37 to display the variable symbol in the determined variable display mode through predetermined control, sets various commands to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute variable display performances of the third and fourth symbols, and executes control to display the symbols in a stopped state in a display mode that indicates the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). The special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described below.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot (jackpot game) is currently in progress (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot (jackpot game) is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S201 that a special symbol jackpot (jackpot game) is not currently occurring (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is currently changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not currently changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable displays based on the lottery for the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved variable displays based on the lottery for the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 (described below). Upon receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In processing S207, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and then the process proceeds to processing S208.

On the other hand, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d obtained in the processing of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

If the process of S210 determines that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S210 determines that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., is 1 or greater) (S210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by processing S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted using the same method as processing S207 (S213), and processing proceeds to processing S208. In processing S208, which is executed after processing S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), followed by a special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), after which this processing ends. Details of this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to Figures 158 and 159.

If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is currently changing in the S202 process (S202: Yes), it is then determined whether the change time has elapsed (S214). If the change time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the S215 process, the value of a change time counter used to measure the change time of the special symbol is updated, and the display of the first symbol display device 81 is updated to correspond to the updated change time counter value. This change time counter is set to a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special symbol change pattern selection process (S209) at the start of the special symbol change, and is then updated (decremented) each time the S215 process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S214 process that the change time has elapsed (S214: Yes), i.e., if the value of the change time counter updated in the S215 process is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a lottery for special symbols is conducted based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has occurred is determined based on the value of the first win random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has occurred, one of the jackpots A to E is determined based on the value of the first win type counter C2.

In this control example, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED on the first pattern display device 37 is lit, if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is lit, if a jackpot C occurs, the green LED is lit, and if a jackpot D occurs, the blue LED and green LED are lit. Furthermore, if a miss occurs, the red LED and green LED are lit. The LEDs are turned off when the next variable display starts, but they may also be lit for only a few seconds after the variable display stops.

After S216 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the values of the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and processing proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by S218, if the jackpot control process of the main processing executed by the main control device 110 (see S1804 in FIG. 113) is executed, processing branches to S1901: Yes and an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, a jackpot presentation is initiated on the third symbol display device 81.

If the result of the current lottery is a miss for the special symbol in the processing of S217 (S217: No), the processing of S218 and S219 is skipped, the update processing is executed (S221), and then the processing proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process (described below) executed by MPU 201. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status recognized by the voice and lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the process of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (S220), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 158, we will explain the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104 in Figure 157). Figure 158 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the S301 process matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

After completing the processing of S302, it is next determined whether the result of this lottery is a jackpot (S303). If it is determined to be a jackpot (S303: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a jackpot (S304), and the special jackpot pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (S305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S303 that the result of this lottery is not a jackpot (S303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S306), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 159, we will explain the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (S104 in Figure 157). Figure 159 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S401).

If it is determined in the processing of S401 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see Figures 141(a)-(c)) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, special state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the processing of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the processing of S404 (S405), and a special symbol variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S405 (S406). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the results of the special symbol lottery and the variation time of the special symbol, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in Figure 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stopping pattern is set (S407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set as the value of a special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, i.e., a rough type such as a miss that does not result in a reach, or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, referring to Figure 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in Figure 15) will be explained. Figure 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This update process (S221) is executed when the variation time for the special symbol variation has elapsed (when variation stops), and executes processing to update the remaining period for which the high probability variation state is set to continue, or the remaining period for which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S221) is executed, the process first determines whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a special symbol (S501). If the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the process subtracts 1 from the value of the probability change counter 203i (updates it) (S502). Next, the process determines whether the updated value of the probability change counter 203i is 0 (S503). If the value is 0 (S503: Yes), the process sets a time-saving state in the game status storage area 203g (S504), and proceeds to S505. Furthermore, if the process determines in S501 that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), the current state is not a high probability state for a special symbol, and the process skips S502 through S504 for updating the value of the probability change counter 203i and proceeds to S505.

Also, in the processing of S503, if the value of the probability change counter 203i is not 0, i.e., the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 and the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), processing of S504 is skipped and processing proceeds to S505.

In the processing of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that it is greater than 0, i.e., if the current state is a high probability state for normal symbols (S505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement is 0 (S507). If it is determined in the processing of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S508), and the value of the probability variable counter 203i, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a status command indicating the current game status are set (S509), and this processing ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S505: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S507: No), the processing proceeds directly to S509.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, up to the maximum reserved number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result, the selected variation pattern, etc. in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The start-up winning process (S105 in Figure 161) is explained below.

The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) first determines whether a ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) located inside the first ball entry port 64 is detected. Once it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (S602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether the current number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the upper limit of reserved balls has not been stored). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one (S604), and a reserved ball number command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number of balls for the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

Furthermore, if the process of S601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or if the process of S603 determines that the number of balls currently reserved for the first ball entrance 64 is at the upper limit (S603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, the processes in S607 to S612 differ only in that the same processes performed in S601 to S606 in response to a ball entering the first starting hole (first ball entrance hole 64) are performed for the second ball entrance hole 640, and therefore detailed explanations will be omitted.

After steps S601 to S612 are executed, the pre-reading process is executed (S613) and this process ends.

This look-ahead process (S613) will be described later with reference to Figure 162, but a process is executed to determine the win/loss judgment result, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. from the counter values newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. Note that in this control example, the process is configured to execute the process to determine the win/loss judgment result, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. based on the newly stored counter values, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a new start win occurs, the process may be configured to execute the process to determine the win/loss judgment result, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (contained) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

Furthermore, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the right to draw a special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance. However, this is not limited to this, and the content of the right to draw a special pattern (winning information) may also be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for a normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading process (S613) may be executed when the process of S603 determines that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is the upper limit (4) (S603: No), i.e., when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls for the special pattern has reached the upper limit. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the number of reserved balls for the special pattern has reached the upper limit. Additionally, added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with the special pattern has reached the upper limit, which can prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with the special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, with reference to Figure 162, we will explain the look-ahead processing (S613), which is one process in the starting winning processing (S105 in Figure 161). Figure 107 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead processing (S613).

In the pre-read process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, various counter values, namely the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S701). The read data is then stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss determination is determined based on the counter values newly stored in the pre-read reserved memory area. Note that here, both a hit/miss determination for when the special symbol is in a low probability state and a hit/miss determination for when the special symbol is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot determination is made based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) that will be set at the time when the jackpot determination is made based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, the system determines whether the result of the hit/miss determination indicates a jackpot (S703). If the result indicates a jackpot (S703: Yes), it sets a winning command containing information that can identify the jackpot type and variation pattern based on the various counter values that were read (S704), and then terminates this process.

On the other hand, if the result of the S703 process is that the jackpot is not reached (S703: No), a winning command is set based on the various counter values read out, including information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern (S705), and then the process ends.

Here, the winning command set in the processing of S704 or S705 includes, in addition to the information indicating the result of the win/lose judgment described above (information that has different meanings depending on the win/lose judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see Figure 167).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can change the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on the various information contained in the winning command, or it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change begins to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information set in the winning command (win/lose determination result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose determination result for the high probability state for the special pattern and the winning/lose determination result for the low probability state for the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each determination. Alternatively, a determination value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that determines a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that determination value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot will be output to the audio and lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of winning a jackpot even with special pattern changes that do not involve the execution of a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to accurately determine the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is held based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and to perform a win/lose determination based on that game state. In this case, rather than varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls, this determination is possible by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of variation. When performing a pre-read, the game state at the start of variation can be determined by determining the order in which the reserved balls will vary until they begin to vary based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a look-ahead process is executed based on that winning information, and a win/loss determination is predicted in advance during this look-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, the look-ahead process of the main control unit 110 may be configured to set information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b as a winning command, and the win/loss determination result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received by the voice lamp control unit 113.

By configuring it in this way, the processing load on the main control unit 110 can be reduced. Furthermore, the audio and lamp control unit 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect, and if it determines that a look-ahead effect should be executed, analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control unit 110 (predict the win/loss determination result). This prevents specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the win/loss determination result) from being executed if the look-ahead effect is not executed, thereby preventing unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, it can prevent the player from fraudulently obtaining the results of look-ahead processing that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to Figure 163, the normal symbol change processing (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. Figure 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol change processing (S106) is processing for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role device 640a, and is processing for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change currently being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), it is first determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a win (from when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric device 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not currently winning (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is currently displaying a changing normal pattern (S802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not currently displaying a changing normal pattern, that is, if it is currently possible to execute a new normal pattern change (lottery) (S802: No), it then obtains the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f (S803) and determines whether this value is greater than 0 (S804).

If the processing of S804 determines that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the processing of S804 determines that the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). In other words, if the processing of S804 determines that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation has been reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the processing of S806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted sequentially toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value in the second win random number table 202c (see Figure 140(b)) for high probability situations (S809), and processing proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value in the second win random number table 202c (see Figure 140(b)) for low probability situations (S810), and processing proceeds to S811.

In the S811 process, it is determined whether this normal pattern variation (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S811 process that this normal pattern variation (lottery) is not a win (a loss), the display mode of "X", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.

In the processing of S814, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is referenced to determine whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S814). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S814: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S816), and this processing is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the normal symbol fluctuation time varies depending on the probability state of the normal symbol that is set. However, this is not limited to this, and the fluctuation time may always be set to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring it in this way, when the game state switches, specifically at the end of a jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols), which generally tends to have a long fluctuation time, to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), which tends to have a short fluctuation time, a normal symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is being executed, and it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring where the time-saving state has been set but the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state.

The method for setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied depending on the game status, the number of normal symbol reserved balls, or an acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be configured to be variably set based on the set normal symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of normal symbols reserved). Furthermore, the ease of a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 may be configured to differ depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to vary depending on the length of time the normal symbol variation is set, the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 can be easily varied depending on the game state, creating a variety of gameplay possibilities.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing state (S802: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern change time being executed by the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S817), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S817: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S817 that the variation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), then the static display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S818). In the processing of S818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a win, the second pattern display device 83 is set to statically display (light up) a "○" pattern. On the other hand, if the normal pattern lottery is a loss, the second pattern display device 83 is set to statically display (light up) an "X" pattern. In other words, settings are made to statically display the display mode set in the processing of S812 or S813 described above.

When the stop display is set by processing S818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S812 or S813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S819: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S820). If it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to an opening time of 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) for the electric device 640a (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, if the processing of S820 determines that the game is not currently in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (S820: No), the game content for a normal symbol win is set to an opening time of 5 seconds x 1 (opening operation) for the electric device 640a (S821), and the processing proceeds to S822.

In S822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric feature 640a is set based on the scenario set in S821 or S823 (S822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a in this control example will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to perform a win/loss determination for the normal symbol based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the win/loss determination for the normal symbol is made (the timing when processing S808 to S811 is performed), and to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is set (the timing when it is determined in processing S817 that the variable time has elapsed).

In other words, in this control example, the variable processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols and the variable processing (lottery processing) for special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbols is configured to be variable based on the results of the variable processing (lottery processing) for special symbols. Therefore, depending on the results of the variable processing (lottery processing) for special symbols that is executed in parallel while the variable processing (lottery processing) for normal symbols is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbols is set when the win/loss determination for the normal symbols is made, and the low probability state of the normal symbols is set when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is set.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric reel 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the time of determining whether the normal pattern is a hit or miss, there is a problem in that the electric reel 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the normal pattern is in a high probability state) when the normal pattern is in a low probability state.

In this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role device 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role device 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In this control example, the win/loss determination for the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the time when the win/loss determination for the normal symbol is made, and the release pattern of the electric device 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the time when the release control mode (release pattern) of the electric device 640a that is moved in a win game for the normal symbol is set. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the electric device 640a may be configured to perform a long open only if a high probability state for the normal symbol is set when the win/loss determination for the normal symbol is made and also when the high probability state for the normal symbol is set when the release control mode (release pattern) of the electric device 640a that is moved in a win game for the normal symbol is set, or the release pattern of the electric device 640a may be set based on the game state that is set when the win/loss determination for the normal symbol is made.

In addition, although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (normal symbol lottery results, normal symbol variation time, normal symbol winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal symbol variation processing (see S106 in Figure 108) is set as commands indicating the content of each type of information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see S1801 in Figure 167) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see Figure 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to Figure 164. Figure 164 is a flowchart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see Figure 156) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal pattern starting port (through gate) 67, and, if a ball has passed, acquiring the value indicated by the second win random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, this process uses the acquired value of the normal win random number counter C5 to acquire the lottery result (win/lose determination result) in advance before the actual win/lose determination is made (before the win/lose determination (see S811) is made in the normal pattern variation process (see S106 in Figure 163)).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S902), and it is then determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols has reached the upper limit) (S903).

If it is determined in the processing of S903 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 4 (the upper limit of 4) (S903: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), the lottery results are obtained in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) (S906), a normal symbol winning information command including the normal win determination result (the advance determination result obtained in the processing of S906) is set (S907), and this processing is terminated.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the processing of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same processing as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each of the control examples described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery that corresponds to the reserved and stored lottery right for the normal symbol, and to execute an effect based on the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, when a chance zone is set, i.e., when a second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during normal mode, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a normal symbol win, an effect can be executed to continue the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if all second special symbol lotteries are completed and a first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to an effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (e.g., an effect corresponding to the vertical movement of the third symbol as shown in FIG. 124(b)), rather than an effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (e.g., an effect corresponding to the horizontal movement of the third symbol as shown in FIG. 122(b)). By configuring it in this way, if multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period during normal mode, the chance zone can be set for a longer period, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Furthermore, if the chance zone has not ended despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times since the chance zone was set, the player will know that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, which will make the player interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, this control example is configured to execute a pseudo-variable effect in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed. This can provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to Figure 165. Figure 165 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt processing causes power outage information to be stored in RAM 203. That is, when power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage information in RAM 203 as the power outage information setting (S1601), and terminates the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/launch control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in RAM 213. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, causing the MPU 211 to interrupt the control currently being executed and start the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to Figure 166, we will explain the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when power is applied to the main control unit 110. Figure 166 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 166), first, the initialization process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is on (S1704), and if it is on (S1704: Yes), processing proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), it is possible that processing did not end normally during the previous power outage, so in this case too, processing proceeds to S1712.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to S1712. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are saved correctly.

In the processing of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout initialization command is received, the payout control device 111 clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized at power-on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Also, if power outage information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is executed. In RAM initialization processing (S1713, S1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1714). After RAM 203 initialization processing is executed, processing proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state it was in when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and processing proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls while retaining the data stored in RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio and lamp control device 113 to allow various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main processing described below.

Next, referring to Figure 167, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing. Figure 167 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 167), first, an external output process is executed (S1801) in which output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) is sent to each sub-controller (peripheral control device). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected during the switch reading process in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if winning detection information is present, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls acquired is sent to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball count command set during the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 157) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 161) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167) sends various commands set during various processes in the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and uses them as information for setting various effects (such as changing effects and decorative effects) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It also transmits the opening command, number of rounds command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 158) to the voice and lamp control device 113. It also transmits various commands set in other control processes to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, it transmits a ball firing signal to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Once the variable type counter CS1 has finished updating, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803). Next, if a special symbol jackpot state is reached, the audio lamp control device 113 sets a command to execute a jackpot presentation and executes jackpot control processing to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172. In this jackpot control process (S1804), a specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning opening, etc.) is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and a determination is made as to whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a). When either of these conditions is met, the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a) is closed. This opening and closing of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric device opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric device opening/closing process, when the start of the electric device opening/closing control is set by the process of S822 in the normal symbol variation process (see Figure 163), the opening/closing control of the electric device begins. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric device continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S821 and S823 in the normal symbol variation process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special pattern variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B start displaying variations according to that variation pattern. In this control example, from the start of variation until the variation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on; if the green LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on; and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 once the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) has ended, the fluctuation display being performed on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display on the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the processes of S815 and S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), a change display is started on the second pattern display device. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the second pattern, a "○" and an "X" symbol, are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when a stationary display on the second pattern display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being executed on the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stationary symbol (second symbol) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

Then, it is determined whether or not power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S1809). If power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has not output a power outage signal SG1, and the power supply has not been interrupted. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and the processes described above from S1801 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of this main processing (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the timing of the next main processing execution (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same way as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, the execution time for each process from S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next main process is executed is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly using this remaining time to update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4). Similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. This makes it difficult to understand the processing content for updating the determination values related to the lottery for special and normal symbols, and prevents fraudulent play that targets the timing when a determination value corresponding to a win is obtained.

Furthermore, if power interruption information is stored in RAM 203 during the processing of S1809 (S1809: Yes), power was interrupted due to a power outage or power-off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, resulting in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 165. Therefore, the processing for power interruption from S1813 onward is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Next, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved (S1815), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816). This infinite loop continues until power is completely interrupted and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the backed-up stack area and work area of RAM 203.

Note that S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in game status, performed in S1801 through S1808, or at the end of one cycle of S1811 and S1812, which are performed within the remaining time. Therefore, since the main control unit 110 checks for power outage information when each setting is completed during its main processing, when recovering from a power-off state, processing can begin from S1801 after the startup processing is completed. In other words, processing can begin from S1801, just as it would if initialization were performed during startup processing. Therefore, during power-off processing, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer; instead, the stack pointer can be set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initialization processing (Fig. 166, S1701). This reduces the control burden on the main control unit 110, and enables accurate control without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be explained with reference to Figure 168. Figure 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see Figure 167), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on (S1903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is off (S1901: No), it is next determined whether a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904). If it is determined in the process of S1904 that a jackpot is not currently in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is off) (S1904: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that a jackpot is currently occurring (the jackpot flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905).

If it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds (S1906), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1905: No), it is then determined whether it is the timing to start the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending period. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203 and is sent to the sound and lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by MPU 201. When the sound and lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it sends a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending presentation indicating the end of the jackpot is started on the third pattern display device 81.

In this first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a process is executed to determine the type of jackpot using the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) (S402 in FIG. 159), and an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1908, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined for the jackpot type is set. Note that, rather than setting the length of the ending period when a jackpot is won as in this first control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), if it is determined that the ending period has started (the end of the final round), it is determined whether a V has been won during this jackpot game (whether the special probability setting flag 203m is set on), and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is set on, the ending period of the jackpot game is set to 17 seconds in order to display a 17-second ending display indicating that the special probability state has been set (see FIGS. 127(b) and (d)), and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is not set on, the ending period of the jackpot game is set to 15 seconds in order to display a 15-second ending display indicating that the time-shortened state has been set (see FIGS. 127(a) and (c)).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game depending on the game results during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period that corresponds to the game state that is actually set.

Furthermore, when using a configuration in which the ending period of a jackpot game varies depending on the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any time between the time the game result during the jackpot game is determined and the time the ending period begins. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, after the first round of round play ends (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area (V gate 65V) ends), it can be determined whether or not a V win has occurred, and based on the result of this determination, the ending period of the jackpot game can be set to the period during which the second to final rounds of round play are being played.

Furthermore, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V win occurs during jackpot play. Alternatively, for example, as in this first control example, the ending period for a jackpot play can be set in advance based on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds can be set in advance if a variable probability jackpot is won, and 15 seconds can be set in advance if a regular jackpot is won. If it becomes necessary to vary the length of the ending period based on the results of the jackpot play, i.e., if a variable probability jackpot play is executed but a V win cannot be achieved during the jackpot play, the length of the preset ending period can be varied. By configuring it in this way, the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during jackpot play can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1907 that the timing is not the start timing of the currently executing ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the timing of the end of the jackpot refers to when the execution period of the ending presentation has elapsed. If it is determined in the processing of S1909 that the timing is the end of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end processing is executed to set the game state after the end of the jackpot (S1910), and this processing ends. Details of this jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that the timing is not the end of the jackpot (S1909: No), then winning processing is executed to perform control in accordance with a win in the specific winning port 65a (S1911), and abnormality processing is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally (S1912), and then this processing ends. Details of the winning processing and abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 169, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. Figure 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed during the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169) begins, it is first determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). If it is determined in the S2001 process that it is time to start one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario for the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2003).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted here, in this control example, of the round games that are executed multiple times during a single jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (first round) varies depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (probable jackpot), a round game is executed as the first round of round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, allowing the player to play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of a special jackpot game is played, a V notification effect is executed in which the text "Aim for V" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification to inform the player that this is a chance period for the ball to flow into the specific area (V Gate 65V). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player of a specific period of the long-term jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to flow into the specific area (V Gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed into the specific area (V Gate 65V), the text "V GET" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification to inform the player that the ball has flowed into the specific area (V Gate 65V). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the conditions for setting the special jackpot state after the jackpot game ends have been met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time or remaining time of a specific period in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to a specific gate, the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be varied to emphasize more (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This can prevent situations in which a player does not fire a ball in a situation in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65, and by varying the operating pattern of the switching valve 65y, it is possible to set periods during which balls are likely to flow down to a specific gate and periods during which they are unlikely to flow down to that specific gate. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate using a common operating pattern from the start of a jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a opens may be varied depending on the type of jackpot, thereby allowing for periods during which balls are likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and periods during which they are unlikely to flow down to that specific area. This allows the operating pattern of the switching valve 65y to be standardized, making it difficult for a player to determine whether the current jackpot game is one in which balls are likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V), even if the operation of the switching valve 65y is known. Furthermore, because the operation of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, preventing failure of the V accessory (switching valve 65y).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processing of S2002 and S2003 is skipped, the normal opening of the specific winning slot 65a is set (S2004), and processing proceeds to S2005. In the processing of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S2005), and this processing ends.

The round count command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives the round count command, it sets a display round count command for displaying the newly started round count on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the display content of the third pattern display device 81 to be updated to match the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see Figure 169), the specific winning slot 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the first round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can almost certainly cause the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) simply by firing the ball in the first round, so it is possible to set a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the jackpot game ends.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 170, the details of the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. Figure 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed within the jackpot control process (see S1804 in Figure 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot termination process (S1910), it is first determined whether the special rate setting flag 203m is on (S2101). If it is determined in S2101 that the special rate setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special rate counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102) and processing proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, if the special rate setting flag 203m is off in S2101 (S2101: No), processing skips S2102 and proceeds to S2103.

In the S2103 process, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2103), and then a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special probability counter 203i (S2104). The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the secondary status setting area 223g to match the game status notified by the status command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the jackpot flag 203k and the special probability setting flag 203m are both set to OFF (S2105), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see Figure 170), the game status after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 171, the details of the prize winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be explained. Figure 171 is a flowchart showing this prize winning process (S1911). This prize winning process (S1911) is executed as part of the jackpot control process (see Figure 168), and as described above, is a process for performing control in response to a prize winning into the specific prize winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), it is first determined whether the current time is the valid round period (S2201). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if the current time is not the valid round period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the current round is within the valid period (S2201: Yes), it is then determined whether a win has been detected in the specific winning slot 65a (S2202). If a win in the specific winning slot 65a has been detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), a winning command indicating that a win in the specific winning slot 65a has been detected is set (S2204), and processing proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if a win in the specific winning slot 65a has not been detected in the processing of S2202 (S2202: No), processing skips S2203 and S2204 and proceeds to processing S2205.

In the S2205 process, it is determined whether the value of the prize count counter 203o is 10 or greater (S2205), and if the value of the prize count counter 203o is 10 or greater (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, if it is determined in the S2205 process that the value of the prize count counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and if the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the S2206 process, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of play for the current jackpot. In this control example, the conditions for ending a round of play are met when the same round time has elapsed and the same number of winnings have been achieved, regardless of the type of jackpot or number of rounds, but this is not limited to this; the conditions for ending a round of play may differ depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds played.

In the processing of S2207, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S2207), and a closure command indicating that the specific winning opening 65a has been set to be closed is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the current closure of the specific winning opening 65a is due to the end of one round (S2209). If it is determined that the closure is due to the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to off (S2210), and processing proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the current closure of the specific winning opening 65a is due to the end of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), since the flow path solenoid (probable win solenoid) 2665k is not set to on, processing of S2210 is skipped and processing proceeds to S2212.

In the processing of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the probability variable active flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and processing proceeds to S2212. Also, if the processing of S2205 determines that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), and the processing of S2206 determines that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), processing of S2207 to S2211 is skipped, and processing proceeds to S2212.

In the processing of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the processing proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203r is on (S2217). In the processing of S2217, if the special chance active flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the processing ends immediately.

On the other hand, if the special rate active flag 203r is on (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the special rate active timer 203s (S2218), and then a determination is made as to whether the value of the special rate active timer 203s is at its upper limit (S2219). If the value of the special rate active timer 203s is not at its upper limit (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, where the ball's passage through the specific area (V Gate 65V) is monitored and the special rate setting flag 203m is updated. As a result, if the special rate active timer 203s is not at its upper limit, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V Gate 65V), and the special rate state can be set taking into account the ball clearance time. Furthermore, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be active, it is possible to prevent the special rate state from being improperly granted by passing a ball through the specific area (V Gate 65V).

On the other hand, if the value of the special rate active timer 203s is at its upper limit (S2219: Yes), the special rate active flag 203r and round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), the value of the special rate active timer 203s is reset (S2221), and this process ends.

Furthermore, in the processing of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passage counter 203n (S2214), the special chance setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), a V winning command is set (S2216), and this processing ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 172. Figure 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality processing (S1912) is executed during the jackpot control processing (see Figure 168), and as described above, is processing for determining whether a ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was ejected normally.

The abnormality processing (S1912) first determines whether the current time is the valid round period (S2301). If the current time is not the valid round period (S2301: No), the processing ends. On the other hand, if the current time is the valid round period (S2301: Yes), the processing then determines whether a ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the S2302 processing, it is determined whether a ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting balls that have passed through the discharge port 65h1 (see Figure 120(b)) has detected the passage of a ball.

If it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the ball has passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203t is incremented by 1 (S2303), and the processing proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2302 that the ball has not passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: No), the processing skips S2303 and proceeds to S2304.

In the processing of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), since it is the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is at its upper limit (S2306: Yes), it then determines whether the number of balls dispensed (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203n and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203t) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203o) (S2307).

If it is determined in the processing of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308) and processing proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the audio and lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Number of winning balls mismatch error") is displayed and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This prevents fraudulent behavior of illegally directing balls into the fourth flow path 65e and passing them through a specific area (V-gate 65V) while the fourth flow path 65e4 (see Figure 120(b)) is closed (the period when the switching valve 65y is closed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2307: Yes), processing of S2308 is skipped and processing proceeds to S2309. In processing of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the number of winning balls counter 203o, number of dispensed balls counter 203t, and probability change passage counter 203n are each reset (S2311), and this processing ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 172), it is possible to quickly detect and notify the occurrence of a malfunction in which a ball that has entered the specific winning port 65a is not discharged normally, for example, due to a ball jamming inside the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice and lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 173 to 186, we will explain each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, referring to Figure 173, we will explain the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Figure 173 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is initiated when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was initiated during the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information about a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before executing this power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is set on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is set off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is currently being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), this startup process was initiated after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

Checking for data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" was written to a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If this startup process is initiated after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because RAM 223's memory is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that RAM 223 data has been corrupted (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if this startup process is initiated after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power-off process of S4117 has been completed, or if it is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 is normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was initiated after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4117 was in progress. In this case, the power-off processing is in progress, so the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, control cannot continue in this case, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This byte-by-byte writing and checking is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written to a specific area of RAM 223, and RAM corruption check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written to this specific area, it is possible to check whether data corruption has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in RAM 223 is reported (S4007), and an infinite loop occurs until the power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is reported by the indicator lamp 34. The abnormality in RAM 223 may be reported by sound output from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81.

In S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S4008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process was started after a momentary power outage and after the power-off process of S4117 had been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, initial values are set in RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the working area of RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands, etc. received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is set to OFF and S4008 is reached, this occurs because the current startup process was initiated after the power supply was completely shut off, and so S4004 to S4006 was used to reach S4008, or because noise or other factors caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which clears the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and processing proceeds to S4010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S4010).

The clearing process of S4009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the startup process begins, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart illustrating this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or since the previous execution of the processing of S4101 (S4101). If 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S4101: No), processing of S4102 to S4111 is not performed and processing proceeds to S4112. The reason for determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed in processing of S4101 is that S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in short cycles (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4112 and the variable display setting processing of S4113 in short cycles. By executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set the variable display effects without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114, which were set by the processing of S4103 to S4113, to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamps 34 is set, and the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the lamps edited by the processing of S4108 described below (S4103). Then, a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when power is turned on. This notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not being turned on, the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the processing of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update processing is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has passed without the player playing the pachinko machine 10, settings are made to switch the display on the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and these settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

Then, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors whether the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the processing, and sets up a corresponding effect when input from the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this processing, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Details of this frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

Once the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S4108), followed by the sound editing and output process (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29-33 are set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display made by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD display execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the display update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the LCD display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD display execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing S4111, command determination processing (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and processing proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110, and a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process for setting up the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 182.

After processing S4113 is completed, it is determined whether power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in processing S4114 (S4114: Yes), the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are both turned on (S4116), and power failure processing is executed (S4117). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing then enters an infinite loop. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off output from the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: No), a determination is made as to whether RAM 223 is corrupted or not based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S4115). If RAM 223 is not corrupted (S4115: No), processing returns to S4101 and the main processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 223 is corrupted (S4115: Yes), processing is infinitely looped to stop subsequent processing. If RAM corruption is determined and an infinite loop occurs, the main processing is not executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred and to call a parlor staff member or the like to request repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that RAM 223 is corrupted, a RAM corruption alert may be issued by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

Next, with reference to Figure 175, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see Figure 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S4112) will be described in detail below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, it first determines whether a status command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), it executes the status command reception process (S4202) and terminates this process. This status command reception process (S4202) receives a status command indicating the current game state, sets a mode presentation style corresponding to that game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation style (e.g., a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, if a status command indicating a probability variable state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and if a status command indicating a time-shortened state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Details of the game state actually set and the control over switching presentation styles in the executed mode presentation will be described later. Details of this status command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a status command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether a special chart variation pattern command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that a special chart variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special chart variation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special chart variation pattern command is set to on (S4204), and the variation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that a special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is then determined whether a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206). If it is determined that a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special chart stop type flag 223e1, second special chart stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special chart stop type command is set to on (S4207), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S4206 that a special symbol stop type command has not been received (S4206: No), it is next determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (S4209: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved ball count command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, if a special symbol reserved ball count command has been received, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the special symbol variable display) are extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a command for the number of reserved balls for a normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the normal symbol) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

Here, the reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the various ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented when various variable start processes are executed. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c and normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110 by processing S4210.

Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 becomes out of sync with the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, if a reserved ball number command is notified at the time of initial winning or when the variable display is set, i.e., when the various reserved ball numbers are changed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the various reserved ball counters of the main control device 110, the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that a reserved ball count command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), winning command processing is executed (S4212) and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4212) analyzes the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command and stores (memorizes) the analysis result in the corresponding memory area (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113), and performs processing to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the received winning information. The details of the winning command processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

If it is determined in the processing of S4211 that a winning command has not been received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether a pattern confirmation command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that a pattern confirmation command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S4214), and this processing ends. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is then determined whether a normal map-related command has been received (S4215). If it is determined that a command has been received (S4215: Yes), normal map-related processing is executed (S4216), and then this processing ends. Note that a detailed explanation of executing normal map-related processing (S4216) will be provided below with reference to FIG. 124.

If it is determined in the processing of S4215 that a normal game-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4218), and then this processing is terminated. A detailed explanation of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to Figure 176, the status command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 176 is a flowchart showing this status command reception process (S4202). This status command reception process (S4202) is executed within the command determination process (see Figure 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. The status command reception process (S4202) will be described in detail below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game status will be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether the game status set in the slave status setting area 223g differs from the game status indicated by the currently received status command. If it is determined in the S4301 process that there is no change in the game status (S4301: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a change in the game status (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game status is normal (S4302).

If, in the processing of S4302, it is determined that the post-change game state is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (S4303), and processing proceeds to S4304.

If, in the processing of S4302, it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), it is then determined whether the changed gaming state is the time-shortened state (S4306). If it is determined that the gaming state is the time-shortened state (if the status command received this time is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (S4306: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223n is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating chance mode is set (S4308), and processing proceeds to S4304.

If it is determined in the processing of S4306 that the game status is not in the time-shortened state (S4306: No), it is then determined whether the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the processing proceeds to the processing of S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the processing proceeds to S4304.

In the processing of S4304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g is set in the past status area (S4304), and the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g (S4305), and this processing ends.

Here, the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311 are notified to the display control device 114, thereby executing the variable effect display during the normal state. In this way, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and outputs a command indicating that type to the display control device 114.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible, for example, to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This reduces the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As mentioned above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 can be configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means can be provided to determine whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate.If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information can be set, and the contents of the display data that has already been set can be rewritten with the simple display data.

By configuring it in this way, if the voice lamp control device 113 is unable to set appropriate display data for the various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable effect display based on that simplified display data. This prevents a variable effect display that differs from the actual game result (the result of the special symbol lottery) from being executed, which could reduce the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, the simplified display data mentioned above can be display data with a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable effect displays, such as display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth symbol.

Note that while this control example uses the configuration described above, it is not limited to this and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game status and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to Figure 177, the contents of the winning command processing (see S4212) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in Figure 175) will be explained. Figure 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is processing that is executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (probability change switch) during jackpot play.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information memory area) 223b (S4401). It then determines whether the currently received command is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402). If it is determined that it is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402: Yes), it determines whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal symbol win) (S4403). If it is determined that winning information is present (S4403: Yes), it then determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a normal symbol (S4404).

If it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state for a normal symbol, i.e., that the current state is normal (S4404: No), the player has acquired the right to enter a normal symbol lottery to win a normal symbol during normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set. Therefore, a display command is set to indicate the long opening of the electric chute (S4405), and processing proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control processing of the other sound lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect is executed (for example, an effect indicating whether a normal symbol win will be played during normal state and the electric device 640a will be long-opened (open for 5 seconds)) suggesting that a normal symbol win will be played and the electric device 640a will be long-opened (open for 5 seconds).

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestive effects are only executed when the player has acquired the right to enter a regular symbol lottery that will result in a regular symbol winning during normal play. However, this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned suggestive effects can also be executed when it is determined that the regular symbol winning information command contains winning information indicating a specific losing win. This makes it possible to set whether a regular symbol winning game will be executed when the suggestive effects are executed, or whether it will not, allowing the player to play while predicting the game content that will be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in this control example, a suggestive effect is executed when the right to draw for a normal symbol lottery that results in a normal symbol win is acquired during the normal state. In addition to this configuration, a pre-game state process may be executed to determine whether the game state is normal at the time when the normal symbol win game is actually executed, i.e., the time when the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the normal symbol win information command indicating a normal symbol win is executed (the time when the normal symbol win game is executed), based on the pre-determination results of the special symbol lottery currently being executed or the special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and if it is determined to be normal, the suggestive effect described above is executed. This makes it possible to more accurately indicate that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to Figure 177, the explanation continues. If it is determined in the processing of S4402 that a regular winning information command has not been received (S4402: No), if it is determined in the processing of S4403 that there is no winning information (S4403: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S4404 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the processing also proceeds to the processing of S4406.

In S4406, special prize winning information command processing is executed (S4406), and processing proceeds to S4407. Details of this special prize winning information command processing (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In the processing of S4407, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) that is set when the ball flows down to the special gate (specific gate) during the winning processing (see S1911 in Figure 171)) (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4408), and processing proceeds to S4409. Also, if it is determined in processing of S4407 that a V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), processing proceeds to S4413.

In the processing of S4409, it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409). If the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to off (S4410), a display command to notify of a V win is set (S4411), the V notification flag 223m is set to on (S4412), and processing proceeds to S4413. Also, if the V effect execution flag 223k is off in the processing of S4409 (S4409: No), processing proceeds to S4413.

In S4413, other processing is performed (S4413), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 178, we will explain the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406) executed in the prize command processing (S4212 in Figure 177). Figure 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406).

When the special winning information command process (S4406) is executed, the current game state is first extracted based on the information set in the sub-state setting area 223g (S4501), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), a determination is made as to whether the special consecutive preview flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special consecutive preview flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the presence or absence of a consecutive preview is selected using the consecutive preview execution selection table 222d (Figure 147(a)) (S4504), and a determination is made as to whether a consecutive preview is being executed (S4505). If it is determined that a consecutive preview is being executed (S4505: Yes), the special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to on (S4506), and processing proceeds to S4507.

In addition, if the processing of S4502 determines that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), if the processing of S4503 determines that the special consecutive announcement flag 223o is on (S4503: No), or if the processing of S4505 determines that a consecutive announcement has not been executed (S4505: No), the processing proceeds to S4507.

In S4507, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize winning information command (S4507), and this process ends.

Next, referring to Figure 179, the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in Figure 175) will be explained. Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216). This normal symbol related processing (S4216) is processing that is executed when a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal symbol win start command indicating that a normal symbol win game has started, or a normal symbol win end command indicating that a normal symbol win game has ended is received.

When the normal symbol-related process (S4216) is executed, it first determines whether a normal symbol variation pattern command has been received (S4601). If it is determined that a normal symbol variation pattern command has been received (S4601: Yes), it sets a normal symbol variation start command for display (S4602). Next, it determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether a normal symbol is in a high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), it terminates this process. If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), it determines whether the normal symbol variation pattern command received this time is a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the normal symbol lottery that resulted in a normal symbol win (S4604). If it is determined that a normal symbol win has not been determined (S4604: No), it terminates this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a normal win has been won (S4604: Yes), this is a normal win variation in which a long opening win is executed, so a display command indicating that a long opening is waiting is set (S4605), and this processing ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4605, the display mode shown in Figure 123 (b) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This makes it easy for the player to predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this control example, a process is used to display the display mode shown in Figure 123(b) (a display mode that forms small display area Dm3) based on whether the normal pattern variation is a winning variation or not. However, without being limited to this, it may also be configured to display the display mode shown in Figure 123(b) (a display mode that forms small display area Dm3) for a specific normal pattern missing variation (for example, a part of a normal pattern missing variation for which the same variation time as a normal pattern winning variation is set).

The size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may also be varied depending on the content of the variation effect (third pattern variation effect) corresponding to the currently executing special pattern variation. For example, if a variation effect with a high probability of winning (e.g., a reach effect) is being executed in the third pattern variation effect, the display content may be varied so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variation effect with a high probability of winning (e.g., a reach effect) is not being executed. In this way, by variably controlling the display content and establishing a relationship between the variation effect suggesting the result of the special pattern lottery and the variation effect suggesting the result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information unnecessarily, and to provide an easy-to-understand game experience.

Returning to FIG. 179, the explanation continues. If it is determined in the processing of S4601 that a normal symbol variation pattern command has not been received (S4601: No), it is next determined whether a normal symbol win start command has been received (S466). If it is determined that a normal symbol win start command has been received (S4606: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No), a display command indicating that a long opening is in progress is set (S4608), and this processing ends. By setting the display command in the processing of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S4607 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the processing of S4608 is skipped and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S4606 that a normal winning start command has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4609). If it is determined that it has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), it is then determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h is 1 or greater (S4611). If it is determined that it is 1 or greater (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223i is set on (S4612). If it is determined that it is not set on (S4612: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect in progress flag 223i is set off (S4614), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the processing of steps S4610 to S4612 determines that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination results, the processing ends.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be explained with reference to Figure 180. Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related processing (S4218). The jackpot-related processing (S4218) performs processing to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a display effect corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4218), it is first determined whether the currently received command is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4702). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output processing (S4102) of the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703). If it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into chance mode (time-saving mode is set) is set (S4708), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined to be a special jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (Figure 147(b)) is used to select whether or not to execute a V notification effect (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not a V notification effect is present (S4705). If it is determined that a V notification effect is present (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), an ending display mode indicating entry into super chance mode (special jackpot mode is set) is set (S4707), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the processing proceeds to the processing of S4708 described above.

141, different lengths of ending periods are set depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the currently executed jackpot game is preset at the timing when the jackpot game starts. This configuration eliminates the need to execute display control to set the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed depending on the progress of the jackpot game (e.g., control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds currently being played), and prize ball payout control to pay out prize balls according to the number of balls entered into the variable prize winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In this control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. The ending display mode may also be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that a jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it then determines whether a round count command has been received (S4709). If it determines that a round count command has been received (S4709: Yes), it sets a display round count command based on the number of rounds (S4710) and determines whether the current number of rounds is 1 round (V round) (S4711). If it determines that there is 1 round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it determines whether the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4712). If it determines that the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4712: Yes), it sets a display command to notify of a V win (S4713), and this processing ends. Furthermore, if the processing of S4711 determines that the current round number is not one round (V round), i.e., that a round of play other than the first round will begin (S4711: No), or if the processing of S4712 determines that the V effect execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this processing will end immediately.

If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the number of rounds command has not been received (S4709: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes), ending processing is executed (S4715) and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that an ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this processing ends immediately.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be explained with reference to Figure 181. Figure 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in Figure 180), and executes processing to ultimately determine the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this process ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is ON (S4802). If it is determined that the V effect execution flag 223k is OFF (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V effect execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode for the second half (7 seconds) of the ending period (S4803), and processing proceeds to S4804.

When a display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and processing is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of a probability variable state (see FIG. 236(d)), to the display mode corresponding to the setting of a time-saving state (see FIG. 236(c)). In this control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), making it easy to switch the display mode.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be explained with reference to Figure 182. Figure 1827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed within the main processing (see Figure 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

The variable display setting process (S4113) first determines whether the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223d1 stored in RAM 223 is on (S4901). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223d1 is not on (i.e., off) (S4901: No), the process proceeds to S4905, since no variable pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the process sets the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223d1 to off (S4902). Next, the process executes the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) to generate a display variable pattern command based on the acquired variable pattern type for notification to the display control unit 114. The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to Figure 183.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223d2 stored in RAM 223 is on (S4905). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223d2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4905: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to process S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), and then the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special symbol among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to process S4909. Details of the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In S4909, the process determines whether the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 stored in RAM 223 is on (S4909). If it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (i.e., off) (S4909: No), this indicates that a variation pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, and the process terminates. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2, which is set to on, is set to off (S4910), and then the special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), after which the process terminates.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) will be explained with reference to Figure 183. Figure 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903). This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182), and executes processing to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation that corresponds to the set game state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is executed, it first determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the processing of S5004, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode memory area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined to be the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the special chance variation presentation selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5009), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the processing proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the mode is not super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not chance mode (S5010: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the processing proceeds to the processing of S5009 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S5010 that the mode is chance mode (S5010: Yes), chance mode presentation setting processing is executed (S5012), and the processing proceeds to the processing of S5009. Details of the chance mode presentation setting processing (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) will be explained with reference to Figure 184. Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182), and executes processing to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation that corresponds to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed, it first determines whether the current game state is normal (S5101). If it is determined to be normal (S5101: Yes), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S5102). Next, the special presentation flag 223i is set to ON (S5103). The presentation mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 presentation mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 145) (S5104). A display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5101 that the state is not normal (S5101: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5107), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5108), and the processing proceeds to S5109. If it is determined in the processing of S5106 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processing of S5107 and S5108 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5109.

In the processing of S5109, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode memory area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If it is determined to be the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the special chance variation presentation selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), the processing of S5105 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the processing proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5110 that the mode is not Super Chance Mode (S5110: No), chance mode effect setting processing is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and processing proceeds to S5115. Details of the chance mode effect setting processing (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In the processing of S5115, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the processing of S5105 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 185, the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184).

In the chance mode effect setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the read value of the time-reduction counter 223n is 99 (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the effect mode memory area 223p (S5203), and processing proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in processing S5202 that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is next determined whether the read value of the time-reduction counter 223n is 79 (S5204). If it is determined that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), a normal first period is set in the effect mode memory area 223p (S5205), and processing proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the processing of S5204 that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-reduction counter 223n that was read is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the effect mode memory area 223p (S5207), and processing proceeds to S5208. If it is determined in the processing of S5206 that the value of the time-reduction counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), processing skips S5207 and proceeds to processing S5208.

In the processing of S5208, it is determined whether the continuous preview in progress flag 223q is on (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous preview in progress flag 223q is on (S5208: Yes), the continuous performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is determined (S5209), and the processing proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the continuous preview in progress flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous preview flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous preview flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), the special effective time timer is set to a value corresponding to 3 seconds (S5211), the special continuous preview flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the processing proceeds to S5213. If it is determined in the processing of S5210 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the processing proceeds to S5213.

In the processing of S5213, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to processing of S5214. In processing of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets display commands based on the operation of the frame buttons 22 in order to execute presentations (operation presentations) in response to the player's operation in order to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, the player can operate the frame button 22 using multiple operation methods. Specifically, the system can distinguish between a "normal press," in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short period of time (less than two seconds), and a "long press," in which the frame button 22 is pressed and held for a long period of time (two seconds or more). Different operation effects can then be executed depending on the distinguished operation content. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 in various operation methods to execute various operation effects, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. While this control example uses two distinguishable operation methods, this is not limited to this, and one operation method or three or more operation methods may be provided. Furthermore, while this control example uses only one operation means, the frame button 22, the system is not limited to this, and multiple operation means may be provided. Furthermore, distinguishable operation methods may be determined not only by operations performed on individual operation means, but also by combinations of operations performed on multiple operation means. Additionally, when multiple operating means are provided (for example, a first operating means and a second operating means), the system may be configured to determine that the same operation has been performed (the same operation method) when a first operation is performed on the first operating means and when a second operation is performed on the second operating means. By configuring it in this way, for example, when the first operating means and the second operating means are located at a distance from each other, the player can select the operating means that is easiest for them to operate and enjoy playing.

The frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S4107 in FIG. 186) first determines whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, i.e., whether the SW effective time has been set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is greater than 0) (S5301). Note that this SW effective time is set in accordance with each variation pattern when an effect using a variation pattern that uses the frame buttons 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time has been set (S5301: Yes), the value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223r (S5302), and processing proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in processing S5301 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), processing skips S5302 and proceeds to processing S5303.

In S5303, it is determined whether the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special valid time timer is decremented (S5304) and processing proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special valid time timer is 0 (S5303: No), processing skips S5304 and proceeds to S5305.

In the processing of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the operating counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the valid time is within (S5306). If it is determined that the valid time is within (S5306: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is set to a value corresponding to 2 seconds (S5308), and processing proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that the valid time is not within (S5306: No) or if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S5307: No) in processing of S5306, processing of S5308 is skipped and processing proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value of the operating counter 223t is 1 or greater (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the processing proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the processing proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and processing proceeds to S5314.

In the processing of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current mode is chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the current mode is chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the processing proceeds to S5309.

If it is determined in the processing of S5314 that the current mode is not Chance Mode (S5314: No), a button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the effect being executed is set (S5316), and processing proceeds to S5309. In processing of S5309, other button processing (such as changing the background) is executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4107) described above with reference to Figure 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and special effective time are configured so that the remaining period becomes 0 at the time operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. In other words, the number of times an operation effect is executed during the period for which each effective time is set is set to one. This makes it possible to prevent excessive execution of operation effects.

However, the processing for the remaining SW valid time and special valid time is not limited to this. For example, if a valid time of 10 seconds is set, and operation of the frame button 22 is accepted within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186), a new valid time may be set during the special symbol variation period. By configuring it in this way, the number of operation effects executed during one special symbol variation period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 187 to 201, the various controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is repeatedly executed after power-on; command interrupt processing, which is executed when a command is received from the audio/lamp control device 113; and V interrupt processing, which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. Note that if the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal occur simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the audio/lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to Figure 187, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. Figure 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing executes initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is applied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and a system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided within the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H," it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts executing the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main processing.

Here, if the boot program to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released were all stored in NAND flash memory 234a, when character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on bus line 240 is "0000H," it must read one page of data, including the data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H," from NAND flash memory 234a and set it in buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a significant amount of time to read the data and set it in buffer RAM 234c, so MPU 231 must spend a lot of time waiting between specifying address "0000H" and receiving the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H." This increases the time it takes for MPU 231 to start up, resulting in a problem in which control of third pattern display device 81 in display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d. Because NOR ROM is a memory capable of high-speed data readout, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H," main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is made up of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to Figure 188. Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234, which is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND-type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, and is therefore able to store sufficient image data as well as control programs, etc., while eliminating the need for a dedicated program ROM to store control programs, etc. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failure due to an increased number of parts.

However, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 were to directly read and process the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, this could degrade the processing performance of the display control device 114, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, this boot process transfers and stores the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233, which is composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 begins executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by processing S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, rather than reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, because the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, read operations are performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot program whose execution is initiated by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) mentioned above among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing (see S6002 in Figure 187) that should be executed after the completion of this boot process (see S6001 in Figure 187) (S6105), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referencing the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of DRAM, which has a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex effects using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions, starting with the first instruction to be processed by MPU 231 after system reset is released, can be stored, and the remaining boot program can be stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, but the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, simply adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234 enables MPU 231 to start up in a short time, thereby suppressing the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies this shortened startup time.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by processing S6101 is configured to include all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program memory area 234d1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by processing S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be executed following processing S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute processing to set the starting address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The processes of S6103 to S6105 may then be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. The portion of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing may further transfer a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. The process of transferring a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a may then be repeated multiple times, including the processing of S6101 and S6102, before executing the processing of S6103 to S6105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a to transfer it to the program storage area 233a in predetermined amounts at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which the first program storage area 234d1 stores a portion of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. However, all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute steps S6103 to S6105 without executing steps S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time for the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to more quickly start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 187. Once the boot process is complete, initial setting processing is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for registers within the MPU 231, I/O devices, etc. Also, processing is performed to clear the storage of the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236. Furthermore, various flags are set in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to a different color depending on the model of pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color appropriate for the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has completed. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of internal memory provided within image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read the information in this register or partial area of internal memory as needed, and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby determining that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has completed.

Image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off. Based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, once the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the starting address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of that image data, information about the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the starting address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 199(a)) described below is executed, which instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (see S7502 in FIG. 199(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during this time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)).

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 10 uses NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main processing, after power is turned on, the power-on main image and power-on variable image are first transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows players and hall staff to view the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining resident image data is being transferred to resident video RAM 235. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining resident image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and can therefore wait until initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Furthermore, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and preventing the efficiency of operation checks from being reduced by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image. Therefore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, resulting in a ball entering the special ball entry port 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be immediately displayed during the variable effect period, allowing a simple variable effect to be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable effect, even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As mentioned above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and this transfer takes time, the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, with this pachinko machine 10, simple variable effects can be produced using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. This allows players to play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After processing S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and the main processing then executes an infinite loop until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by processing S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Figure 189 (a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 189 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

This command interrupt process extracts the received command data and sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in work RAM 233 (S6201), then terminates. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Figure 189 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Figure 189 (b) is a flowchart showing this V interrupt processing. This V interrupt processing executes various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing, and also identifies the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, creates a drawing list of that image, and sends that drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing for that image.

As described above, this V interrupt processing begins when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing processing or display processing of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer where the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first provide an overview of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189(b), it is first determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, a command determination process (S6302) is executed to display a normal effect image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

This command determination process analyzes and processes all commands currently stored in the command buffer area. This is because the command determination process is performed every 20 milliseconds that the V interrupt process is performed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands will be stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control unit 110 decides to start a variable effect, it is highly likely that display variable pattern commands, display stop type commands, and the like will also be stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly determine the variable effect mode and stop type selected by the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113, and control the drawing of images so that a performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 190 to 195.

The display setting process (S6303) specifically identifies the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 196 to 198.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). This task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, as determined by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Furthermore, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance or image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 199 and 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 155 is generated from the types of sprites that make up one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, as determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). This drawing list is then sent to the image controller 237 along with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, V interrupt processing is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the processing of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and update processing is performed each time V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type counter is compared with the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, reach for front or rear miss, reach other than front or rear miss, complete miss), and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to Figures 190 to 195, we will explain the details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Figure 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 190, this command determination process first determines whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S6401). If there are no unprocessed new commands (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there are unprocessed new commands (S6401: Yes), the new command flag is set to ON (S6402), which notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the command type is analyzed for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 191 (a). Figure 191 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always determines the start of a variation at least several seconds apart, so it is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In order to prepare for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the main control unit 110 actually instructs a change presentation with a shorter change time than the set display data table, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control unit 110 while the change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which could cause a sense of discomfort to the player.

In contrast to this, by setting the variable display data table corresponding to the variable pattern with the shortest variable time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 actually instructs a variable presentation with a longer variable time than the set display data table, as will be described later, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the variable presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, allowing the player to continue watching the third pattern variation on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and identifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, the display setting process uses the timing counter 233h, for which time data has been set by the processing of S6503, to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable effect in the variable display data table has ended, controls the stop display settings so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be explained with reference to Figure 191 (b). Figure 191 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of big win A-G, small win A-C, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and this stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see Figure 189 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance (S6602).

Then, of the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination processing.

As described above, the variable display data table contains offset information (pattern offset information) from the stopped pattern set by the S6602 process as type information that identifies the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation based on the data table. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stopped pattern set by the S6602 process is identified from the stopped pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting process is added to the identified stopped pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Note that the main control unit 110 always determines the start of fluctuations at least several seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands will be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a risk that part of the command may change due to noise or other factors, and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. To prepare for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the S6601 process determines the stop type table, assuming that the stop type is a complete miss. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the S6602 process.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, even if the actual result was a "special pattern miss," the third pattern display device 81 would display the stopping pattern corresponding to the "special pattern jackpot," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had achieved a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss, as in this control example, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would achieve a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display opening command (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409) and processing returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be explained with reference to Figure 192 (a). Figure 192 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6408 that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), it is then determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a display round number command (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, details of the number of rounds command processing (S6411) will be explained with reference to Figure 192 (b). Figure 192 (b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In round count command processing, first, the round count display data table corresponding to the round count indicated by the display round count command is determined, and the determined round count display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, clearing its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the duration of the effect is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing ends, and processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), it is then determined whether there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is a display ending command (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be explained with reference to Figure 193. Figure 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, clearing its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the duration of the performance is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6412 that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a display fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 194 (a). Figure 194 (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command indicates a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in Figure 182), i.e., at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special symbol in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command).

When processing the fluctuation stop command, first the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and then the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6414 that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, details of the notification command processing (S6417) will be explained with reference to Figure 194 (b). Figure 194 (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command output to the display control device 114, one of the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands set by the main control device 110 to indicate various abnormal conditions.

In notification command processing, first, the display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, clearing its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In this control example, of the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to distinguish only display commands indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device). However, this is not limited to this, and related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role device drive commands, may also be received, and the related commands may be output to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to Figure 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a background image change command (S6418: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be explained with reference to Figure 195 (a). Figure 195 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the background image change command processing, first, the background image change flag 233w, which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of a change in the background image resulting from receiving a background image change command in the ON state, is set to ON (S7001). Then, of the bits of the background image discrimination flag 233x provided for each background image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the background image type indicated by the background image change command is set to ON, and the bits corresponding to other background image types are set to OFF (S7002), after which the background image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the processing of S7001 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7002.

Furthermore, in task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image, the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used to identify the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time, and the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that because a player does not operate the frame button 22 consecutively within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to noise or the like, causing another command to be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This rear image change does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately depending on the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420). If there is an error command (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be explained with reference to Figure 195 (b). Figure 195 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state, is set to ON (S7101). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), after which the error command processing ends and the processing returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the processing of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the processing of S7102, and a warning image corresponding to that error type is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, processing in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of Figure 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there are no error commands (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and processing returns to S6401.

In S6401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether there are any unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If there are any unprocessed new commands (S6401: Yes), S6402 to S6422 are executed again. S6401 to S6422 are then repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area. If S6401 determines that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on during V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the corresponding processing, that is, the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 191(b)), is executed. Other commands are discarded without being processed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and since the image data of the power-on main image and power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figures 196 to 198, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 196, this display setting process first determines whether the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command was not processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and steps S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and processing proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command was processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), processing corresponding to the new command is executed in steps S7203 to S7204.

In the processing of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to Figure 197. Figure 197 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images for errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S7301).

The task processing (S6304) uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let's return to the explanation of Figure 196. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or if it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), the process then proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to Figure 198. Figure 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing updates the pointer 233f, which specifies the address from which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information for the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to pointer 233f (S7401). That is, pointer 233f is updated so that, as a general rule, it is incremented by 1 each time V interrupt processing is executed. Also, as mentioned above, various data tables have Start information written at address "0000H" and the actual data is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, this pointer update process updates the value to 1, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order, starting from address "0001H".

After updating the value of pointer 233f through processing in S7401, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). If the result is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and processing returns to the display setting process. As a result, the display setting process can unfold the drawing contents in order from the top of the demo display data table, allowing the third pattern display device 81 to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), the processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting processing, if a display data table other than a demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content of the previous address containing the End information is always displayed, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in that display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the processing is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting processing.

Now, returning to Figure 196, we will continue our explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the image is identified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, along with the warning image etc. that was previously developed, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or greater (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the display time for the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is OFF (S7209: No), the confirmation display effect has not yet been performed and it is time to perform it. Therefore, the confirmation display data table is first set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display data table is then set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which is ON and indicates that the confirmation display effect is in progress, is set ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag stored in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stopped symbols in the variable effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time with the end of that effect. Furthermore, simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to a final display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to a final display effect. Furthermore, compared to the conventional method of changing the display content by launching a separate program, the program does not become complex and bloated, and therefore does not place a heavy load on the MPU 231. Therefore, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable effect, and the variable display data table contains pattern offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable effect until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect based on that data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the previous variable effect is identified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable effect starts from the stop symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display effect ends, and after a certain amount of time has passed since the end of the confirmation display effect, processing is performed to display a demo effect on the third pattern display device 81.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and its contents are cleared by writing null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is in progress when on, is set to on (S7221), after which the process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing.

This means that if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If the demo display flag is on in the processing of S7216 (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the confirmation display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, and the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on during the V interrupt processing (see Figure 189 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time for the power-on variable image has ended, a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command will be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to Figures 199 and 200, we will explain in detail the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Figure 199 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figure 199 (b).

On the other hand, if the result of processing S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and processing returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, with reference to Figure 199 (b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 199 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

This resident image transfer setting process first determines whether an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), the process then determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has completed (S7602). In S7602, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer completion signal indicating the completion of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, the process determines that the transfer process has completed. If S7602 determines that the transfer process has not completed (S7602: No), this indicates that the image controller 237 is still transferring images, and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it determines that the transfer process has completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 shows that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process includes transfer data information for untransferred resident target image data. Based on the transfer data information in the drawing list, the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address in the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is complete, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If, as a result of the processing of S7603, all resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 190-195) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 196-198) are executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to resident video RAM 235, display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in image controller 237 while using the image data resident in resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from character ROM 234, which is composed of NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. This eliminates the time required for reading, and allows the image to be drawn immediately and displayed on third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as background images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, audio lamp control unit 113, display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND-type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until an image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to Figure 200, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information stored at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is retrieved from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). It is then determined whether the retrieved information is transfer data information (S7702). If it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703). Furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates the presence of image data for which transfer should be initiated when in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Furthermore, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on that transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In this processing of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. Then, if it is determined through processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is continuing in the image controller 237, and this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of processing of S7705 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), processing proceeds to S7707.

In S7707, the process determines whether the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data exists that should be transferred, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708). The image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off (S7707: No), the process next determines whether the background image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the background image change flag 233w is off (S7709: No), no image data exists that should be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the rear image data corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is identified and this image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the rear image data corresponding to the on rear image discrimination flag 233x is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and processing proceeds to S7713.

In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the processing of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite selected as the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236; if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This prevents image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of processing S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information included in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information about the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address in the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process ends. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON," and by setting the storage status corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that sprite to "OFF."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed during the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the background image is changed based on the reception of a background image change command during the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that background image that is not stored in the background image area 235c of resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this control example, when a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table specifies the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred at a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of that specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table.By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. This means that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Furthermore, by writing in the transfer data table, it is possible to easily and reliably transfer only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easier to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be simplified while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load associated with the transfer.

Next, with reference to Figure 201, we will explain the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Figure 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

During the drawing process, a drawing list (Fig. 155) is generated (S7801) from the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, during the S7801 process, the storage RAM type and address where the image data for each sprite is stored are identified from the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304), and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. The sprites are then sorted in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back in one frame's image to the sprite that should be placed furthest foreground, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the sorted sprite order, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, including the type and address of the storage RAM where the sprite's image data is stored and the parameters required to draw that sprite. Furthermore, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), are added to the end of the drawing list as transfer data information.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite. Therefore, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored, depending on the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order, starting with the sprite listed at the top of the drawing list, and then overwrites and expands them into the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the back of one frame of image generated by the drawing list, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foreground.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, as well as the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address is read out in order from character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and the image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously displayed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits this image information to the third pattern display device 81 along with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image displayed in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being displayed, an image displayed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and display process to be performed simultaneously in parallel.

After S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for displaying one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the drawing process of one frame's worth of image while continuously displaying one frame's worth of image in 20 millisecond increments.

As explained above, this first control example is configured so that the drawing for the first special symbol and the drawing for the second special symbol do not overlap (run in parallel), and the drawing for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the drawing for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the system is configured so that the drawing for the second special symbol is executed in a way that gives the player an advantage over the drawing for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the system is configured so that the ease of executing the drawing for the second special symbol varies depending on the set game state. Specifically, the system is configured so that the right to draw for the second special symbol is easier to obtain when a high probability state for the normal symbol (time-saving state, probability variable state) is set than when a low probability state for the normal symbol is set (normal state), and the right to draw for the second special symbol can be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal symbol winning game) executed when a normal symbol is won. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the system is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery makes it possible to set a high probability state for the normal symbol, and when the high probability state for the normal symbol is set, a lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to vary greatly depending on the game state that is set, which encourages the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope that a game state with a high degree of advantage will be set.

In addition, if a player wins the normal symbol lottery, which is executed when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds, allowing the player to play a normal symbol winning game. This configuration makes it possible to provide a temporary period during which it is easier to play the second special symbol lottery, even in the normal state, which is a gaming state that is unfavorable to the player. Therefore, players playing in the normal state can play both a game in which they aim to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game in which they aim to win the normal symbol lottery, preventing players from becoming bored of the game too early.

Furthermore, in this control example, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of stored lottery rights for the second special symbol, i.e., the number of reserved special symbols 2. Specifically, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable effect executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot is configured to execute a pseudo-miss variable effect indicating a miss in the first half of the variable effect, and execute a pseudo-win variable effect indicating a jackpot in the second half by restarting the third symbol that was stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable effect, and the number of times the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-win variable effect is configured to be variable corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2. This configuration makes it possible to execute a variable effect in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times before the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special pattern draws.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with a Special 2 Reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple Special 2 Reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be led to believe that they won the jackpot because they acquired multiple Special 2 Reserves during normal symbol play, which can encourage them to play more enthusiastically to acquire Special 2 Reserves during normal symbol play.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol 2 symbols is 0 when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the pseudo-winning variable effect described above is configured to be a variable effect that imitates the variable effect displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). This configuration prevents the pseudo-repetition of the special symbol 2 variable effect when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variable effect is being executed. Furthermore, after the pseudo variable effect imitating the special symbol 1 variable effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates a jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery, making it possible to execute a variable effect that is unexpected for the player.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode for the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode for the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate.If a ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and the presentation mode for the notification effect is switched only if a ball is not flowing down the specific gate.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is set differently for a special jackpot and a regular jackpot, with a longer ending period set for a special jackpot, which is more advantageous to the player, than for a regular jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot play ends, before the special jackpot state actually is set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot play ends, notifying the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is set to be shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a regular jackpot, if the ball fails to flow into a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply switching the presentation mode for the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a regular jackpot game would result in an unnatural notification presentation being executed during the ending period due to the different ending period lengths. Furthermore, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball fails to flow into a specific gate during a special jackpot game were to be prepared in advance, the image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode would need to be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which would increase the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, with the length of the second half being the same regardless of the type of jackpot. If the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause discomfort to the player, without having to provide a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot. This allows the mode of the notification effect that is executed when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game to be switched and set. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the notification effect may be executed from the final round of the jackpot game, making it possible to execute a notification effect that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period. Alternatively, the round effect that is executed during the final round of the jackpot game may be executed continuously for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification effect may be executed, thereby executing a notification effect for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 has the same configuration as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth control example described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. Furthermore, the configuration of the right side area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls flowing down the right side area enter the through gate 67, general ball entrance 63, first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, and V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left side area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As explained above, this control example is configured so that the same bonus is awarded whether the player plays right-handed or left-handed, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played. Therefore, players can play in any way that suits their mood.

In this control example, as shown in Figure 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical on both sides, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain does not differ significantly between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left-hand area may be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right-hand area, and the rate at which balls enter the first ball entrance port 64 may be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play. This may make it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but makes it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and it may make it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but makes it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during normal play, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any way they like, and in games in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (plays in the time-saving mode or the probability variation mode), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In the above control examples, a reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a reserved number command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control unit 110 increases. Furthermore, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrement the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, a maximum of four winning entries into the first ball entrance 64 and a maximum of one passage through the through gate 67 are reserved, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more (e.g., eight). Furthermore, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning entries into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a portion of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four separate areas with different patterns (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the light-emitting element.

Furthermore, as shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the symbols serving as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but may also be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with or separately from the symbols. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Furthermore, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player has difficulty distinguishing between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery.

In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery results for each symbol is performed using a single display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may also be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol, which is highlighted to the player among the third symbols, and for displaying the secondary symbol. Furthermore, the display means may be configured using a configuration other than an LCD display.

In each of the control examples described above, a left-hand hit game aimed at the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state that is advantageous to the player (time-saving state) and a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state (normal state). However, the targeted area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game aimed at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game aimed at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, left-hand play, which targets the left area of the gaming board 13, is executed regardless of the game state set or whether a jackpot game is set. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute right-hand play when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute left-hand play only during a normal state. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand whether or not they are in an advantageous state depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand play, left-hand play).

In each of the control examples described above, the operating means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player to determine that the operating means has been operated, but other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operating means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operating means that can be determined to have been operated by the player coming into contact with or close to it, or a wireless operating means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. Furthermore, the frame buttons 22 are electrically connected to the audio and lamp control device 113 and are used as effect operation means for varying the effect mode of effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on player operation; however, it is sufficient that the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame buttons 22. For example, the frame buttons 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame buttons 22) and generate effect setting signals that can be output to the display control device 114, audio and lamp control device 113, audio output device 226, and lamp display device 227. With this configuration, even when multiple effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple effect operation means can be centrally managed, thereby enabling the effect mode to be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the effect operation means.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, when a favorable game state (probable variable state, time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, a high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time is selected can be set for a predetermined period (until 20 special symbol fluctuations have been performed), and during this high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect is not (is unlikely to be) executed when the frame button 22 is operated. This prevents the background mode transition effect from being executed as an operation effect during a period in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, making it difficult for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in the first control example, when the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during a high-speed fluctuation period, i.e., when the normal state is set, an operation that executes a background mode transition effect ("normal press") is performed, and an operation effect with a different effect type from the background mode transition effect is executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 even during a high-speed fluctuation period, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect can be executed by performing a second operation ("long press") other than the first operation ("normal press") described above. This configuration makes it possible to provide the background mode transition effect to players who attempt to execute the background mode transition effect while knowing that it will become difficult to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been executed. This reduces the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby preventing the stopped display mode of the third symbol from becoming excessively difficult to grasp.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is not met, the first operation process is executed by performing a first operation on the operating means, but when a predetermined condition is met, the first operation process is not executed (or made difficult to execute) even if the first operation is performed on the operating means. This technical idea may also be used in other technologies. For example, a volume adjustment process that adjusts the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment process that adjusts the brightness of a liquid crystal display when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, may be applied as the first operation process described above, and the first operation process may be configured to be executable when a predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a special pattern variation is not being executed), and to be difficult to execute when the predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special pattern variation is being executed).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions may be configured to be not only the presence or absence of special symbol variations, but also conditions that are met when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are met during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if a predetermined condition is met and the first operation described above is executed, it is preferable to configure the machine to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process that notifies the player that the first operation process will not be executed). This allows the player to easily understand that the first operation process will not be executed. However, without being limited to this, the machine may also be configured to execute a different operation presentation unrelated to the first operation process.

In addition, even when the above-described predetermined condition is met, it is preferable to configure the above-described first operation processing to be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in this control example. Furthermore, in this first control example, the first operation and the second operation are made executable by different operating methods for one operating means (frame button 22). However, this is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with multiple operating means, and the first operation may be made executable by operating the first operating means (e.g., frame button 22), and the second operation may be made executable by operating the second operating means (e.g., a frame button other than the frame button 22). In this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation to be more difficult to execute than the first operation. For example, it is preferable to configure the first operating means to be located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 where it is always accessible to the player, and the second operating means to be located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 where it is more difficult for the player to operate (see FIG. 121).

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned first operating means and second operating means are provided, the first valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the first operating means is valid and the second valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the second operating means is valid may be set to the same period, or different periods may be set. If the valid operation determination periods are set to the same period, the process of determining the valid periods can be simplified. On the other hand, if different periods are set, the period for determining whether an operation is valid differs depending on the type of operating means used, which can encourage players to try operating various operating means at various times.

In the first control example described above, the system is configured to be able to set a normal state and multiple advantageous game states (probable bonus state, time-saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the system is configured to be able to notify the player of the period (remaining period) until the next normal state is set, rather than the period until the set game state ends.

Here, conventionally, when a favorable gaming state (for example, a probability variable state or a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period for which that favorable gaming state will continue (number of special symbol changes). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period for which the favorable gaming state will continue, and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special symbol lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set favorable gaming state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines allow players to set multiple advantageous game states, including a normal advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a most advantageous game state (e.g., a special state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the game state transitions from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the most advantageous game state will continue, and then, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the normal advantageous game state will continue.

In other words, while it is possible to allow a player to understand the duration (remaining duration) of the most advantageous gaming state when it is set, the player is unable to understand what type of gaming state will be set after the most advantageous gaming state ends, or how long the gaming state set after the most advantageous gaming state ends will continue.

As a result, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player is unable to know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state) will be set, which creates the problem of making it difficult to know what to aim for during the most advantageous gaming state.

In contrast, as described above, in this control example, when multiple types of advantageous game states are set consecutively, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is displayed for the period until those multiple types of advantageous game states end, i.e., the period until the next normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, when different types of advantageous game states are set consecutively, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed so as to span the consecutively set advantageous game states, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the remaining time of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) is being notified, a presentation can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the currently set game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to tell which game state is set during the advantageous game state period, the player can play while hoping that a more advantageous game state has been set.

In this first control example, when the remaining time of one advantageous game state spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) is notified, suggestive effects can be executed that can suggest the currently set game state or game states that were set in the past. This makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in the content of suggestive effects executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation effects can be executed in multiple types of presentation modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection rate of each presentation mode is varied depending on the set game state. Therefore, the player can predict the current game state based on the presentation mode of the operation effects executed during the advantageous game state period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Also, because the selection rate of each presentation mode is simply varied depending on the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation effects executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, when the frame button 22 is operated during "Chance Mode" and "Reach Suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode for the operation presentation, a "Reach Suggestion" presentation is executed to indicate to the player whether the currently executing special symbol change will be in a reach state, and if so, the reach line and reach symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the system may be configured to determine whether the winning information for the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information that will result in a reach state, and based on the determination result, to notify the player that a second special symbol change that will result in a reach state will be executed before the second special symbol change is executed. In this way, by expanding the scope of the operation presentation to include not only currently executing special symbol changes but also reserved special symbol changes (special symbol changes that will be executed in the future), the presentation effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the first control example described above, the player's operation of the frame button 22 was configured to cause a transition to background mode or an effect showing the results of the special symbol lottery. However, functions that can be executed by the player operating the operating means may also include, for example, a volume adjustment function that adjusts the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment function that adjusts the brightness of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display. As with the background mode transition described above, these volume adjustment and brightness adjustment functions may also make the third symbol variation effect executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 difficult to see. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is met, specifically when a period in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time for the special symbol variation (high-speed variation period) is set, these functions may be configured to be less likely to be executed than when other periods are set.

In the first control example described above, a background mode transition can be executed even while a high-speed fluctuation period is set, but this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a background mode transition is not executed at all is also possible. Furthermore, in the first control example described above, a first period is provided in which a specific presentation mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation presentation executed by operating the operating means, and a second period in which it is less likely to be executed than the first period, but a configuration in which three or more periods with different rates at which an operation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode can be set is also possible.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Figures 202 to 210. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control content are different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, with reference to Figure 122 (b), each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 described above was configured to be displayed on a single image layer. In contrast, the second control example differs in that the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz that make up each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed on different image layers. By controlling the display of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz displayed on different image layers in synchronization, it is possible to display each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in a variable manner, just like the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, there have been machines that display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of the special symbol lottery. Furthermore, there have also been machines that execute various effects (variable effects) while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing them to play while hoping for a jackpot.

Some common gaming machines execute a variable pattern display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple third patterns (e.g., third patterns numbered 1 to 9), and when a predetermined third pattern is displayed stationary in a pattern row other than the one containing number 1, an effect that increases the likelihood of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is executed. However, in conventional gaming machines, the order of the patterns forming the pattern row is not changed, and only the speed at which the variable display changes is varied. This poses a problem in that it is not possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect using the variable pattern display.

It has also been proposed to increase the variety of the variable display by placing identification information (sub-patterns) other than the identification information (main pattern) that indicates the results of the special pattern lottery in one pattern row. However, even with this configuration, there is a problem in that simply varying the variable display speed of the pattern row formed by the main and sub-patterns does not enhance the presentation effect of the variable display.

Furthermore, some machines prepare multiple pattern rows with different main and sub-pattern arrangements and types in advance, and when a specific variable performance is executed, the pattern row itself is changed to enhance the effect of the variable performance. However, since it is necessary to execute control to change and display different pattern rows depending on the variable performance executed, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated.

In contrast, this control example is configured to display the symbol string using multiple image layers. Specifically, the main and sub-symbols that make up the symbol string are displayed on separate image layers. Under normal circumstances, the main and sub-symbols are synchronized and displayed in a variable manner, causing the various symbols that make up the symbol string to be displayed in a specific arrangement (see Figure 122 (b)). However, by differentiating the variable display content of the main and sub-symbols, the symbol string can be displayed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily display the third symbols (main and sub symbols) that form a specific symbol sequence in a variable manner other than the specific symbol arrangement, while using image data of the third symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Now, with reference to Figure 202, we will explain the display content displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in this second control example. Figure 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layers formed on the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example and the display screen, Figure 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main pattern image layer sr is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer fr is set to on, and Figure 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the display effect in Figure 202(b).

As shown in Figure 202(a), in this second control example, the main pattern image layer sr, which displays the main pattern sz, and the sub-pattern image layer fr, which displays the sub-pattern fz, are overlapping, with the main pattern image layer sr being positioned in front of the sub-pattern image layer fr (closer from the player's perspective). Note that while Figure 202(a) only shows the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz, in reality, each image layer (layer) displaying the various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list above with reference to Figure 155, each image layer is formed to correspond to each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame of image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). In areas where display images overlap, the display image displayed on the front layer is given priority and is visible.

In this second control example configured in this manner, when the main pattern sz displayed on the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr are both displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz is displayed in priority over the sub-pattern fz, preventing the identification information (main pattern sz) indicating the result of the special pattern lottery from being obscured by the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery. Furthermore, since there is no need to control the variable display so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap to make it easier for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery, variable display control can be simplified and the variable display of the main pattern sz can be displayed by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in Figure 202(a), the main pattern image layer sr is placed closer (priority) to the sub-pattern image layer fr, and the main pattern sz is displayed with priority over the sub-pattern fz. However, this is not limited to this; for example, the sub-pattern image layer fr may be placed closer (priority) to the main pattern image layer sr so that the sub-pattern fz is displayed with priority over the main pattern sz. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to see the display mode of the main pattern sz while the patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) are being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the results of the special pattern lottery until the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed in a static manner, making it possible to execute a third pattern variable presentation that builds anticipation until the very end.

Next, with reference to Figures 202(b) and 202(c), we will explain the variable effects executed by display control for each pattern image layer. As mentioned above, this control example is configured to allow the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz that make up the pattern row to be displayed independently. Furthermore, it is possible to set whether or not to display the display image set for each image layer. In other words, while internally executing display control for each image layer, it is possible to set whether or not to display that image layer itself (on or off).

Figure 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-pattern layer fr is set to ON, and only the sub-pattern fz of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, by displaying the sub-pattern fz as stopped before the main pattern sz is displayed, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Reach Line Notice Start," indicating that a reach line notice effect has been executed to notify the player of the reach line that will be effective in this third pattern change. After that, the effect result according to the position where the sub-pattern fz stopped is displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 202(c), the sub-pattern fz is displayed as a diamond shape, and the words "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a presentation result indicating that the reach state will be reached on the activated lines L4 and L5 (see Figure 122). Then, when this reach line preview presentation ends, the display of the main pattern image layer sr is set to ON, and a variable presentation is performed to suggest to the player what type of main pattern sz will be that will bring the reach state to the activated lines L4 and L5 (see Figure 122), and then the double reach presentation (see Figure 131) is performed.

In this way, in this second control example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz and the variable display of the sub-pattern fz separately. Therefore, by first displaying the variable display of the sub-pattern fz, the player is notified of the location where the main pattern sz will be displayed stationary, and then by displaying the variable display of the main pattern sz, the type of main pattern sz that will result in a reach state can be notified. Therefore, the results of the third pattern variable display, which shows the results of the special pattern lottery, can be shown to the player in stages, providing an easy-to-understand display.

In the reach line preview effect described with reference to Figures 202(b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main pattern sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub-pattern fz. In addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped and displayed sub-pattern fz may be configured to indicate the type of stopped and displayed main pattern sz, i.e., the result of the special pattern lottery. Specifically, for example, if the result of the reach line preview effect is that the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in all areas except the area forming the pay line L2 (see Figure 122(a)), it is desirable to configure it so that a specific main pattern sz combination (for example, the combination "3, 4, 1" from top to bottom) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L2 (see Figure 122(a)).

Here, when a specific combination of main symbols sz is displayed in a static state, the display of the third symbol can be restarted, and a variation effect that increases the likelihood of winning a jackpot (a so-called pseudo consecutive variation effect) can be executed, or a winning game (a jackpot game or a small jackpot game) can be executed. By configuring it in this way, when a reach line preview effect is executed, it is possible to make the player more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, when a reach line preview effect is executed in which only the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner first, in order to make it easier for the player to understand whether this reach line preview effect only notifies the player of the stop display position of the main pattern sz, or whether it also notifies the player of the type of main pattern sz that will be displayed in a variable manner, for example, after the sub-pattern fz has been displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 202 (c)), the result of this reach line preview effect can be notified based on the type of display form (for example, a graphic display displayed by connecting each sub-pattern fz with a line) formed using each sub-pattern fz that has been displayed in a variable manner.For example, in the state shown in Figure 202 (c) (where the sub-pattern fz has been displayed in a variable manner in a diamond shape), if a diamond shape is displayed, the result of this reach line preview effect will indicate in advance the stop position of the main pattern sz, and if a heart-shaped shape made up of four sub-patterns fz is displayed, the player can be notified that this indicates in advance that a specific main pattern sz will be displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, by executing an effect (advance notification of effect results) using the stopped sub-pattern fz between the time the stopped sub-pattern fz is displayed and the time the stopped main pattern sz is displayed, the results of the variable effect (variable effect using the third pattern) used to show the results of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player in a more gradual manner, thereby maintaining interest in the variable effect being executed.

Next, referring to Figure 203, the contents of the various designs pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, as with the first control example described above, a background image for an ocean background and a background image for a mountain background can be set as the background image. Specifically, when a background mode transition is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, the currently set background image (e.g., an ocean background) is switched to a background image that is not currently set (e.g., a mountain background).

Furthermore, this second control example is configured to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) depending on the type of rear image that is set (displayed). This configuration makes it possible to variably display the main pattern sz in a display mode that corresponds to the type of rear image, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect when the rear image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main symbol sz displayed corresponding to the background image will be explained with reference to Figures 203(a) and 203(b). Figure 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the sea main symbol used when a sea image (sea background) is set, and Figure 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the mountain main image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set. Each of these image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when a transition to background mode is executed, the corresponding image data is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d or the third symbol sequence area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. Note that the process of reading image data corresponding to each symbol and storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 is the same as in the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 203(a), the image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing nine main pattern types (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, and crab) with numbers "1-9" attached to each. This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in the order in which they will actually be displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read them out in order, starting with image data D1, and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, in this second control example, while pattern row Z1 and pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed stationary when a reach state is reached, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed variably during the reach state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, consisting of the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form pattern row Z1 described above, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) consisting of a shark-shaped pattern with the number 4 added. Furthermore, pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed variably so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (a main pattern with the number 4 in this control example) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually indicate to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that forms the jackpot combination will be displayed stationary on the pay line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in Figure 203(b), the image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz stores image data (D1 to D9) showing nine types of main patterns (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, and snake) with the numbers "1 to 9" attached to each. This main pattern image data D1 to D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in accordance with the order in which they will actually be displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read them out in order, starting with image data D1, and store them in the third pattern area 235d.

As with the case where the ocean background is displayed, the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the symbol rows that are displayed statically when a reach state is reached, are formed of nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to image data D1-D9), while the symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the symbol row that is displayed variably during the reach state, is configured to be formed of ten main symbols. Specifically, the symbol row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main symbols, consisting of the nine main symbols (main symbols corresponding to image data D1-D9) that form the symbol row Z1 described above, plus a modified main symbol (main symbol corresponding to image data DA) consisting of a dice-shaped symbol with the number 4 added. The symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed variably such that the main symbol sz with the number 9 passes, followed by the main symbol sz with the number 4, and then the main symbol sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (a main pattern with the number 4 in this control example) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually indicate to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that forms the jackpot combination will be displayed stationary on the pay line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, image data corresponding to the main symbol sz described above is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol sequence area 235g as symbol sequence data for displaying the symbol sequence. In other words, main symbol sequence image data corresponding to the main symbols of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 (image data in which each main symbol sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub-pattern fz) is generated for each symbol sequence and stored in the third symbol sequence area 235g. This main symbol sequence image data is then used to variably display the main symbol sz on the main symbol image layer sr. This configuration allows for a reduction in the amount of image data used for display control compared to variably displaying image data for each symbol, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz of each of the patterns forming pattern columns Z1 to Z3 can be displayed in a variable manner independently. Therefore, even if the multiple main patterns sz of each pattern column are formed using a single image data (main pattern column image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variable displays can be achieved by varying the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz. Therefore, even if the amount of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, among the third symbols forming each symbol row, for the main symbol sz, which is identification information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, variable display is performed on a symbol row basis using the main symbol row image data, while for the sub-pattern fz, which is identification information that does not indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, variable display is performed on a symbol row basis. Therefore, various variable display effects can be performed by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz without changing the content of the variable display of the main symbol sz, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery. In other words, to diversify the variable display effects of the third symbols, the main symbol sz, whose display mode of the stopped display is predetermined, can perform various variable display effects by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz while maintaining the predetermined variable display. Therefore, the variable display effects of the third symbols, which indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, can be reliably and easily created with a wide variety of content.

In this second control example, all of the main patterns sz that form the pattern row are contained in one image data (main pattern row image data), but this is not limited to this. Normal main pattern row image data that generates a pattern row of only some of the main patterns sz (main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9) (for example, normal main patterns sz numbered even) and probability variable main pattern row image data that generates a pattern row of only the remaining main patterns sz (for example, probability variable main patterns sz numbered odd) may be stored in the third pattern row area 235g, and the stored image data may be used to variably display the main patterns sz on the main pattern image layer sr.

In this case, for example, if the result of the special symbol lottery in question is a probability jackpot, i.e., if a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using odd-numbered main symbols sz, it is possible to vary the content of the variable display using normal main symbol string image data while maintaining the predetermined variable display using only the variable display using the probability jackpot main symbol string image data. Specifically, the variable display using normal main symbol string image data may be configured to be executed faster than the variable display using probability jackpot main symbol string image data, so that the player can only see the odd-numbered probability jackpot main symbol sz. This allows the player to be notified that the current third symbol variation is a state in which only the probability jackpot main symbol sz is displayed as a variable display, and only the probability jackpot main symbol sz is displayed as a static display, i.e., a normal symbol (main symbol with an even number) is not displayed as a static display, and a normal jackpot cannot be won.

Furthermore, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main pattern sz is generated separately into normal main pattern row image data and probability variable main pattern row image data, the normal main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the normal main pattern using the normal main pattern row image data and the probability variable main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the probability variable main pattern using the probability variable main pattern row image data may be configured to be different, and the main pattern sz displayed on the normal main pattern image layer or the probability variable main pattern layer (whether to enable (turn on) the display of each image layer) may be determined depending on the results of the special pattern lottery. Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, variable display control may be performed using image data for each pattern unit without generating pattern row image data that forms the pattern row.

Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be explained with reference to Figure 203(c). Figure 203(c) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2. This image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or when a transition to background mode is executed, the corresponding image data is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Note that the process of reading image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 203(c), the character memory area 234a2 in this second control example stores, as image data for the sub-pattern fz, at least image data SD1 of the normal sub-pattern fz imitating a triangular mark (see Figure 122(b)), image data SD2 of the sub-pattern fz for the preview effect imitating bubbles, and image data SD3 of the special sub-pattern fz imitating the number 16. Although omitted from Figure 202(c), the sub-pattern fz for the preview effect is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-pattern fz for the preview effect imitating bubbles shown in Figure 202(c) is the sub-pattern fz used when an ocean background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also pre-stores image data (not shown) of the sub-pattern fz for the preview effect imitating leaves (not shown) as the sub-pattern fz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in this second control example, of the third patterns variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, only the sub-pattern fz, which does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, can be displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr. The sub-pattern fz can be displayed variably on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 independently of the main pattern sz, which is variably displayed in a predetermined variability pattern (variability time, stop display position) on the main pattern image layer sr. Therefore, various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz can be easily executed without changing the variability display content of the main pattern sz. Furthermore, even if various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz are executed and some of them overlap with the main pattern sz, the main pattern image layer sr is arranged to be displayed with priority over the sub-pattern image layer fr, thereby preventing situations in which the player has difficulty viewing the main pattern sz.

In this second control example, various other variation effects can be executed in addition to the reach line preview effect described with reference to Figures 202(b) and 202(c) as variation effects using the sub-pattern fz. For example, a variation start preview effect can be executed in which the sub-pattern fz is switched to a display mode for a preview effect using image data SD2, and when the third pattern begins to vary, the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary in the opposite direction (to the right) to the direction of variation (to the left, for example) of the main pattern sz; or a jackpot type suggestion effect can be executed in which a portion of the sub-pattern fz is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3, and when the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stops varying, the number and arrangement of the sub-patterns fz (sub-patterns fz modeled after the number 16) in the special display mode can be displayed to suggest the type of jackpot.

In this way, by using identification information (sub-pattern fz) that is different from the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery and that can be displayed variably during the period when the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is being displayed variably, various variable effects can be performed, allowing players to focus their attention on the variably displayed sub-pattern fz as well.

Furthermore, in this second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main pattern sz, the variable display control of the sub-pattern fz is configured to be executed on a per-pattern basis, so it is possible to easily execute control to switch the display mode of only some of the multiple sub-patterns fz formed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (for example, only those near the main pattern sz that is ultimately stopped and displayed) to a display mode for variable effects. Furthermore, normally, it is possible to display two or more sub-patterns fz between the main patterns sz, or to prevent only some of the sub-patterns fz from being displayed.

The timing for changing the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be the timing when the special pattern starts to change, or the timing when the special pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed in a stopped state.

Finally, with reference to Figure 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variable main pattern in this second control example will be explained. Figure 203(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to the various images used for the variable main pattern. This variable main pattern refers to the tenth main pattern provided in pattern row Z2, i.e., the pattern row that is displayed variably during a reach state, and is the main pattern for which image data DA is used among the main pattern display data stored in character memory area 234a2.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a variable identifier (third symbol) to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery, and when a specific identifier is displayed in a static state, indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a variable effect is executed to encourage the player to guess whether the identifier displayed in a static state will be the specific identifier. Generally, a variable effect is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple types of identifiers are formed in a specific order. Specifically, a variable effect is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple identifiers (for example, main symbol sz) with the numbers 1 to 9 assigned are formed in a specific order.

In gaming machines configured in this way, a variable effect is executed in which the display mode of the third symbol during the variable display is varied to enhance the presentation effect of the third symbol variation. However, when varying the identification information (third symbol) during the variable display, if the numbers 1 through 9 attached to the identification information, i.e., the specific information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, were changed, for example, even if the variable display was executed using nine third symbols each numbered 1 through 9, if the third symbol numbered 5 was switched to a third symbol numbered 6 during the variable display, the third symbol numbered 6 would disappear, which could lead players to suspect that the result of the special symbol lottery had been changed during the variable display of the third symbols.

Furthermore, for example, if a variable display is performed using nine third symbols numbered 1 to 9, and then a new third symbol numbered 6 is added midway, switching to a variable display using a total of ten third symbols, it would be necessary to execute display control to accommodate the increase in the number of third symbols being displayed midway, which could make the control process more difficult.

In contrast, in this control example, pattern row Z2 is formed from 10 main patterns, including each main pattern numbered 1 to 9 and a substituting main pattern. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the main patterns without changing the number of main patterns that make up the pattern row, while leaving the various patterns numbered 1 to 9 intact. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the substituting main patterns is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns that make up pattern row Z2 does not change, making it easy to control the display of pattern row Z2.

As shown in Figure 203(d), the character memory area 234a2 in this second control example stores at least the following image data for the change main patterns: image data DA1 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 4, image data DA2 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 7, image data DA3 of a V main pattern sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of a special main pattern sz imitating the number 16, and image data DA4 of a disappointing main pattern sz imitating a cross. Although omitted from Figure 202(d), the normal main pattern sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "dugong" shown in Figure 202(d) are main patterns sz used when an ocean background is set. Therefore, the character storage area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) that resembles a rhinoceros or a wild boar, which is used when a mountain background is set.

Here, during normal times, the variable display performance of the third symbol is configured so that the main symbol for change using image data DA1 is displayed in symbol row Z2, and in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or in a very small number of cases where a losing win is won in the special symbol lottery, the main symbol for change using image data DA2 is displayed in symbol row Z2. That is, during normal play, the alternating main pattern sz resembling a "shark" marked with the number 4 is displayed in a variable manner, and pattern row Z2 is formed from five main patterns (main patterns marked with even numbers) that indicate a normal jackpot win and five main patterns (main patterns marked with odd numbers) that indicate a probability jackpot win, for a total of ten main patterns. However, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases where the special pattern lottery loses, the alternating main pattern sz resembling a "dugong" marked with the number 7 is displayed in a variable manner, and pattern row Z2 is formed from four main patterns (main patterns marked with even numbers) that indicate a normal jackpot win and six main patterns (main patterns marked with odd numbers) that indicate a probability jackpot win, for a total of ten main patterns.

This creates a sense of anticipation in the player, making them wonder if they've won a favorable jackpot (a special jackpot) in the currently running special pattern lottery. The condition for using the alternative main pattern sz, which resembles a dugong with the number 7, should be that it is more likely to occur when the special pattern lottery result is a jackpot than when it is not (a miss), and it may be configured so that it is not used when the special pattern lottery result is a miss. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure it so that, among the jackpot wins in the special pattern lottery, it is more likely to be used when a special jackpot is won than when a regular jackpot is won. This makes it possible to associate the apparent number of each type of main pattern (even numbers, odd numbers) with the probability of winning a special jackpot, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

The V main pattern sz shown in image data DA3 is not normally displayed, but is displayed as an alternate main pattern when a special condition is met during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). This V main pattern sz is used as a general-purpose main pattern that forms a combination indicating a jackpot win when it is stopped and displayed on an active line in that active state, regardless of the type of main pattern sz that is in a reach state. By using a general-purpose main pattern in this way, for example, even if the main pattern that forms a combination that results in a jackpot win passes over an active line in the reach state, it can be expected that the third pattern (main pattern) will stop and display in a combination that indicates a jackpot win without waiting for pattern row Z2 to complete another revolution.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third symbol variable display presentation, when a double reach state is reached with a normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and a probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number), if a V main symbol is displayed stationary on the pay line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure the display so that the main symbol that is advantageous to the player indicates that a jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling suspicious even if the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a double reach state is reached. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as the general-purpose main symbol, but this is not limiting. When a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using the V main symbol, it can be used as a symbol suggesting a duplicate jackpot, indicating that in addition to the current jackpot game, the player has already acquired the right to play at least one more jackpot game (there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special symbol stored), or the V main symbol can be configured to simply change to indicate that the player has already acquired the right to play multiple jackpot games. By configuring it in this way, when the V main symbol is displayed in a changing manner, the player can play with a greater sense of anticipation.

Next, the special main symbol sz shown in image data DA4 and the unfortunate main symbol sz shown in image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third symbol, but are used in a promotion effect that can be executed after the main symbol sz is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to execute an advantageous jackpot game (probability jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and an unfavorable jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is less favorable to the player than the advantageous jackpot game. For example, when a probability jackpot is won, in some (or all) of the cases where a jackpot win is displayed in a combination using normal main symbols sz (main symbols sz with even numbers) that indicate a normal jackpot game, a promotion effect can be executed to change the type of the stopped and displayed main symbol sz to a probability jackpot main symbol sz (main symbols sz with odd numbers).

During this promotion effect, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot or miss), but rather to indicate whether the jackpot won this time is a special jackpot or a regular jackpot. Therefore, the special main pattern sz shown in image data DA4, which indicates a special jackpot, or the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in image data DA5, which indicates a regular jackpot, is set as the alternative main pattern. In this way, by changing the display mode of the alternative main pattern in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player using the main pattern sz changes, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In this second control example, the type of main pattern sz stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win is upgraded from a normal main pattern sz to a probability variable main pattern sz by the upgrade effect. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds (number of rounds) executed during a jackpot game may be upgraded from a main pattern indicating a small number of rounds to a main pattern indicating a larger number of rounds. In this case, multiple image data may be prepared as the change-over main pattern in a display mode that suggests the number of rounds that may be executed, and the display mode of the change-over main pattern may be determined using the corresponding image data depending on the type of jackpot that has actually been won.

In addition, in this control example, the main pattern string image data for the pattern string Z2 is generated using nine main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main pattern sz and stored in the third pattern string area 235g. However, this is not limited to this; the change main pattern sz may be stored in the third pattern string area 235d without being included in the main pattern string image data, and variable display control may be performed on a pattern-by-pattern basis, similar to the sub-pattern fz. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the change main pattern sz in the pattern string Z2 that has been set once can be easily changed.

Also, a change main pattern layer sr1 displaying the change main pattern sz may be arranged separately from the main pattern layer sr displaying the main pattern sz, and this change main pattern layer sr1 may be used to display the change main pattern sz. In this case, since the change main pattern sz is only displayed in pattern row Z2, the display area of the change main pattern layer sr1 may be limited to the display area of pattern row Z2, and the change main pattern layer sr1 may be arranged in a position where it is displayed with lower priority than the main pattern layer sr and with higher priority than the sub-pattern layer fr. This prevents the change main pattern sz from being obscured by the sub-pattern fz, and allows the change main pattern sz to be displayed without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

The image data described above with reference to Figures 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data representing the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) stored in character memory area 234a2, and in reality, other image data is also stored. For example, each piece of image data stored as main symbol display data stores image data corresponding to a display mode showing a different action (for example, a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or happy), and if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (for example, a jackpot), the display mode of the stopped-displayed third symbol (main symbol sz) can be changed by replacing the image data.

Specifically, when the third symbol, indicating a jackpot, is displayed (when the "Dugong" with the number 7 attached is displayed in the normal display mode), the display switches to a special display mode in which the "Dugong" with the number 7 attached has a surprised expression. This allows the player to be notified that they have won the jackpot through the display mode of the third symbol. Furthermore, the image data corresponding to this special display mode may be used for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol begins to change, and an effect may be executed immediately after the third symbol begins to change, suggesting to the player that they have won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to Figure 204, the flow of the variable display of the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) in this second control example will be explained. Figure 204 is a diagram that schematically shows the relationship between the variable display presentation of the third symbol and the display content of the pattern row displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In Figure 204, a variable pattern with a variable time of 60 seconds, which indicates a jackpot win, is used as an example of the variable presentation of the third symbol.

As shown in Figure 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of a special symbol variation, it determines the variation display mode of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz based on the variation pattern (command) received this time. Specifically, in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182) executed in the main processing (see Figure 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it determines whether or not to have a preview effect, whether or not to have a reach effect, and the stopped symbol, and sets the corresponding display command. Then, in the command output process (see S4102 in Figure 174) executed in the main processing (see Figure 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, the set display command is sent to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182), the display control device 114 executes a command determination process (see S6302 in Figure 190) called variable pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in Figure 209) to analyze the received display command (variable pattern command), determine a variable display table based on the analysis results, read image data (main pattern sequence image data) of the main pattern sequence using the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern sequence area 235g, read image data corresponding to the sub-pattern fz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern sequence area 235g, generate a display image, and display it on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The normal variation period is then set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation effect is executed. This normal variation period is the period during which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, and is set as the period during which the player can switch to background mode by operating frame button 22. If a background mode transition is executed during this normal variation period, control is executed to switch each of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz, which are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode, to a display mode corresponding to the post-transition background mode.

After that, when the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are displayed in a stopped state, a 40-second reach variation period is set, and a reach effect is executed to suggest (taunt) that the result of the current special symbol lottery will be a jackpot. During this reach variation period, background mode transition is not executed. Operating the frame button 22 executes a decorative effect in which the illumination state of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 changes. Furthermore, as part of the reach effect, an operation effect is executed in which a valid period (SW valid period) is set to determine whether the frame button 22 is operated. Operating the frame button 22 within the set valid period executes an effect that would not be executed if the frame button 22 is not operated. Specifically, operating the frame button 22 can execute a confirmation notification that the current special symbol lottery has resulted in a jackpot, or a suggestive notification indicating a high probability of winning the jackpot. This configuration motivates players who want to quickly understand the results of the special symbol lottery to operate the frame button 22. Additionally, because some effects cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effects, players who want to see a variety of effects are encouraged to operate the frame button 22.

As mentioned above, the system is configured so that background mode transitions are not executed during the reach fluctuation period. This prevents the background mode from switching during the reach fluctuation period, which suggests (teasing) that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the display mode of the third symbol from switching accordingly, resulting in a reach fluctuation that is difficult for the player to understand. Furthermore, because the system is configured so that operation effects are executed during the reach fluctuation period when background mode transitions are not executed, it is possible to set, for example, a fluctuation effect that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect (so-called hidden operation effect), but still encourage the player to actively operate the frame button 22.

In this case, it is advisable to set a notification mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player that a period in which background mode transition will not be executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "The background mode will not change even if you press a button during a reach"), or to set a notification mode to notify the player that a hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "If you press a button at any point during a reach, a special effect will be executed"). This allows the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, when the reach fluctuation period ends, a third symbol is displayed in a combination of normal main symbols sz (main symbols sz with even numbers) among the main symbol combinations that indicate a jackpot win, and then a promotion effect is executed to promote the normal main symbols sz that have won the jackpot to probability variable main symbols (main symbols sz with odd numbers). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot, and based on the determination result, the display mode of the sub-symbol fz and the display mode of the change-to main symbol sz among the main symbols sz are determined. Then, a promotion effect using the symbol row for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, if the display mode of the change main pattern sz for the promotion effect is, for example, a display mode using image data DA4 (see Figure 203 (d)) and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is a display mode using image data SD3 (see Figure 203 (c)), in addition to the normal probability variable main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number), it is possible to display many patterns indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot, and therefore it is possible to visually notify the player that there is a high possibility that the promotion effect will result in an upgrade to a probability variable jackpot.

Next, with reference to Figure 205, the content of the variation effect executed in this second control example will be explained. Figure 205 shows an example of a variation effect of the third pattern executed in response to the same variation pattern command, with Figure 202(a) being a diagram that schematically shows the flow of the variation pattern used in the example, Figure 202(b) being a diagram that schematically shows the flow of the normal effect, Figure 202(c) being a diagram that schematically shows the flow of the reach line preview effect (see Figure 202(b)), and Figure 202(d) being a diagram that schematically shows the flow of a preview effect in which the direction of variation of the sub-pattern fz is different from normal.

As shown in Figure 205 (a), when the main control unit 110 sets a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time set to 60 seconds, the audio lamp control unit 113 sets a display variation pattern command for executing a reach effect. Furthermore, various preview effects using the sub-pattern fz are executed using the period until the reach effect is executed. In this second control example, as described above, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that form each pattern row are configured to be able to be displayed independently, so that the main pattern sz is displayed in a specific variation pattern in accordance with the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, while only the variation pattern of the sub-pattern fz can be changed, thereby executing various variation effects (preview effects).

Specifically, in effect A shown in Figure 205(b), similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, a third pattern change display (see Figure 202(a)) is executed in which the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz are synchronized, showing the normal pattern in which a reach state is reached. In this way, by controlling the display so that the independently displayed and changing main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz are synchronized, it is possible to make it appear as if the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz are being displayed as a single pattern row.

Next, in effect B shown in Figure 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to hidden) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the third pattern change, and during that time a reach line warning effect is executed in which the changing display of the sub-pattern fz is frozen. In other words, the same display control as in 205(a) above is executed for the main pattern sz, but because the main pattern layer sr is set to hidden for the first half of the normal change period (15 seconds), the player is unable to see the changing display of the main pattern sz.

Then, using the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 202(b)), and at the end of the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a static manner, thereby displaying the position where the main pattern sz is displayed in a static manner in this third pattern fluctuation display (see Figure 202(c)). After that, when the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) begins, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) is used to display the variable manner of the main pattern sz, and as in Figure 205(b), the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

In other words, when effect B shown in Figure 205(c) is executed, that is, when a reach line warning effect is executed, the player can be notified of only the position where the main pattern sz will be stopped and displayed before the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, making it possible to know in advance (15 seconds after the third pattern begins to change) whether the current third pattern change display will be a double reach, a single reach, or no reach. Therefore, compared to the normal pattern (see Figure 205(b)) where it takes 30 seconds to know whether or not a reach will be achieved, if the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz cannot be in a reach state, the period during which the player is left with excessive expectations can be shortened.

Furthermore, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining fluctuation time while anticipating which main pattern sz will be in a reach state. Note that in this second control example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, the reach state is always reached, so the player can easily determine whether or not the current third pattern fluctuation will be in a reach state based on the timing of the stop and display of the sub-pattern fz.

Finally, in effect C shown in Figure 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main pattern sz, as in effect A described above, and an effect different from effect A is executed for the sub-pattern fz for only a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of the change. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see Figure 203(c)) is set as the display mode for the sub-pattern fz displayed at the start of the change, and a sub-pattern reverse change display is executed, changing the sub-pattern fz in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change display direction of the main pattern (leftward), and then a change display using the normal sub-pattern fz is executed in synchronization with the change display of the main pattern sz.

As shown in the presentation pattern C, by making the direction of the main pattern sz and the direction of the sub-pattern fz change different at the timing when the third pattern change display begins, a surprising presentation can be presented to the player. In other words, for a player who recognizes that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed by the same pattern row and only change in the same direction, the sub-pattern fz will change and be displayed in an unexpected manner, providing a surprising presentation.

As explained above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz are configured to be able to be displayed independently, the display mode of the main pattern sz is set in response to a change pattern command that is set based on the results of the special pattern lottery, and various change effects can be executed by changing only the display mode of the sub-pattern fz without changing the display mode of the main pattern sz. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of the main pattern sz changing in a way that differs from the results of the special pattern lottery.

Also, when the sub-pattern fz is displayed first, for example, the sub-pattern fz may be enlarged and displayed so that the sub-pattern fz covers the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and during this time the display position of the main pattern sz and the pattern type may be changed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to Figures 206 to 208. Figure 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the content of the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 has been changed, and a third symbol sequence area 235g has been added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above with reference to Figure 203, the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example differs from the character memory area 234a2 of the first control example in that it stores image data D1-D9 of the main pattern display data corresponding to each background mode, image data SD1-SD3 of the sub-pattern display data, and image data DA1-DA5 of the change main pattern display data, but all other image data stored is the same. Details of the image data newly stored in this second control example have been described above with reference to Figure 203, so further explanation will be omitted.

The third pattern sequence area 235g is a memory area for reading out multiple image data of the main pattern sz stored in the character memory area 234a2, generating one image data (main pattern sequence image data) as a pattern sequence in advance, and storing the generated main pattern sequence image data. When the main pattern sz is to be displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr, the main pattern sequence image data stored in this third pattern sequence area 235g is read out, and the display position coordinates are variably set based on the drawing content specified in the display data table, thereby displaying the main pattern sz variably. By configuring it in this way, the amount of image data used when displaying the main pattern sz variably can be reduced compared to when image data generated for each main pattern sz is used, thereby reducing the processing load on display control.

Next, with reference to Figure 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example will be described. Figure 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table from among the display data tables. The display data table corresponds to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) for which one frame of image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and specifies in detail the content (drawing content) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the display data table in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above (see Figure 153) in that the drawing content for the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) is different, but is otherwise identical. A detailed description of the identical content will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 207, the drawing contents of the display data table specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information remain constant over time, so the variable display data table only specifies the back type, which is information for specifying the type of back image. This back type contains information specifying whether to display either back A or B corresponding to the background mode selected by the player (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode"), or whether to display a back image different from back A or B. Furthermore, if the back type specifies that a back image different from back A or B is to be displayed, information specifying which back image is to be displayed is also included.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B should be displayed based on the back face type, it identifies the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery from back face A or B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame as time passes. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back face A or B should be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed based on the back face type.

In this control example, we will explain the case where only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. However, instead, the back surface type and position information indicating which range of the back surface image corresponding to that back surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table began. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the time the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began based on the display database, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the type of back surface and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of an image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. Alternatively, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored.

Next, we will explain the types of sprites used to display the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81. First, for the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...), display position coordinates are set indicating the stop position of each sub-symbol fz that was stopped and displayed in the previous variable effect. This causes the variable effect to start from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable effect. Note that, as shown in Figure 202(a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub-symbol fz does not have a unique number assigned to it, and all sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, by simply setting display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz that was stopped and displayed in the previous variable effect, the variable effect can easily start from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable effect.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to Figure 208, but in this second control example, multiple display modes can be set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz, and depending on the display mode of each sub-pattern fz to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the storage destination of the image data used for display is specified in the drawing list, so that each sub-pattern fz is displayed in the corresponding display mode. Here, if the display mode of each sub-pattern fz displayed in a stopped state in the previous variable effect differs from the display mode of the sub-pattern fz used in the current variable effect, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be configured to differ from the start timing of the variable effect, i.e., the drawing information corresponding to address "0001H" in the display data table, or the variable effect may be started using the display mode of the sub-pattern fz in the previous variable effect, and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be changed during high-speed fluctuations that make it difficult for the player to see the display mode of the sub-pattern fz.

In the former case, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in the display mode to be used in the current variable performance before the variable performance begins, i.e., when the sub-pattern fz is stopped, allowing the player to understand in advance the content of the variable performance that will be executed, enhancing the performance effect. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed at a time that is unlikely to be noticed by the player, allowing the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be changed smoothly without causing any discomfort to the player.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main symbol sz will be explained. The main symbol columns (main symbol column 1, main symbol column 2, ...) store symbol column type offset information as symbol column type information for specifying the main symbol sz of the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information represents the difference in the numbers assigned to each main symbol sz. The reason offset information is specified rather than directly specifying the type of main symbol sz is because the display of the main symbol sz in the variable effect changes depending on the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect and the stopped symbol of the current variable effect. The symbol offset information from the start of the variable effect until a predetermined time has elapsed lists offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect. This causes the variable effect to start from the stopped symbol of the previous variable effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to stop at the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, each main symbol sz is assigned a unique number, so the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number assigned to that main symbol sz.Furthermore, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each main symbol sz, the main symbol sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable effect to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the current variable effect is set to be the time during which the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly changing state. While the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly changing state, the main pattern sz is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable effect to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the current variable effect during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers in the main pattern sz is interrupted, the player will not be aware of the interruption.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data of each main pattern sz displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be a single image data (main pattern sequence image data) for each pattern sequence. For example, for each main pattern sz numbered 1 through 9 displayed in the pattern sequence Z1, the main pattern sz numbered 3 is the first in the image data, and the main pattern sequence image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) between them so that the numbers assigned to the main patterns sz are in the order "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4," and stored in the third pattern sequence area 235g. The display position coordinates of the main pattern sequence image data are then varied over time, so that an image in which only the main patterns sz forming the pattern sequence Z1 are displayed in the main pattern image layer sr. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main pattern image layer sr is set to a size that does not allow all images included in the main pattern sequence image data to be displayed, and is set to a size that allows a maximum of three main patterns sz to be displayed, as shown in Figure 202(a).

Therefore, the type of main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr is identified based on the offset information included in the pattern sequence type offset information, the display range of the main pattern sequence image data is determined corresponding to the position where the identified main pattern sz should be displayed, and each main pattern sz is displayed within that display range. In this way, when executing a variable display without changing the positional relationship of the main patterns sz, the load on the display control process can be reduced by generating pattern sequence image data in which multiple main patterns sz are specified in a predetermined order and at predetermined intervals, and then configuring the variable display to be executed using that pattern sequence image data, rather than providing image data for each individual main pattern sz, identifying the pattern type of each main pattern sz to be displayed when the current variable display starts based on the offset information of the stopped pattern of the main pattern sz in the previous variable display, as in the first control example described above, and then synchronously setting the display position (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main pattern sz according to the content of the variable display being executed.

Note that when using the display control method of this second control example, it becomes difficult to vary the arrangement of the main symbols sz or the spacing between the main symbols sz. In such cases, it is better to execute display control that variably displays each main symbol sz using image data corresponding to each main symbol sz, as in the first control example described above. Furthermore, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of this second control example may be combined to use image data on a pattern-by-pattern basis only for a specific main symbol sz, and use main symbol row image data for multiple main symbols other than the specific main symbol. In this case, it is possible to easily execute control that varies the image data used for a specific main symbol or the rate at which the display position changes (variable display speed). Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of display control when variably displaying multiple main symbols sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display content without executing special display control.

In this second control example, in which one image data (main pattern row image data) is generated for each pattern row, different drawing content is set for each of pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (for each pattern row), and for pattern row Z2, for each main pattern sz assigned with the numbers 1 to 9 that are displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz assigned with the number 4 begins the image data, and then main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers assigned to the main patterns sz are in the order "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3", and is stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Furthermore, for the symbol string Z3, for each main symbol sz assigned with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main symbol sz assigned with the number 1 begins the image data, and then the numbers assigned to the main symbols sz are in the order "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9", with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-symbols fz are displayed) between them, and main symbol string image data is generated and stored in the third symbol string area 235g.

By controlling the display so that all of the symbol columns Z1-Z3 move leftward using the main symbol column image data corresponding to each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3 configured in this way, only the main symbol sz displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3 is displayed moving in the main symbol image layer sr. As mentioned above, the type of main symbol sz located at the beginning of the main symbol column image data is different for each of the symbol columns Z1-Z3. As a result, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the main symbols sz numbered "3, 4, 1" are displayed stationary from top to bottom at the center of the third symbol display device 81, i.e., on the activated line L2 (see Figure 122(a)). In other words, by configuring the numbers assigned to the main patterns sz at the beginning of each main pattern sequence image data to be different, in the initial state where no variable pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, simply by setting the initial display so that the beginning of the main pattern sequence image data forming each of the pattern sequences Z1 to Z3 is on the active line L2, it is possible to statically display combinations of main patterns sz that are different from the combination that will result in a jackpot, simplifying display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be explained with reference to Figure 208. Figure 208 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see Figure 155) in that the type of sprite for displaying the third symbol has been changed, but is otherwise identical. Detailed explanations of the identical contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images. As shown in Figure 208, the drawing list describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite used in one frame of image, such as the background image, sub-patterns (sub-pattern 1, sub-pattern 2, ...), main pattern string (main pattern string 1, main pattern string 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information that causes the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, as well as its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

In other words, the drawing instruction content for the image of sub-pattern fz includes information indicating resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for this drawing instruction from among the multiple image data SD1-SD3 (see Figure 203 (c)) corresponding to sub-pattern fz stored in the third pattern area 235d. Furthermore, the drawing instruction content for the image of main pattern sz includes information indicating resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for this drawing instruction from among the multiple image data (main pattern sequence image data) corresponding to the main pattern sequence stored in the third pattern sequence area 235g.

<Regarding the control process in the second control example>
Next, the control processing content in this second control example will be explained with reference to Figures 209 and 210. This second control example differs from the first control example described above in at least the control processing content executed by the display control device 114. In addition, the type content of the performance mode of the variable performance set by the audio lamp control device 113 is also different. The other content is the same, and the same content is assigned the same reference numeral and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variable performance mode for the third symbol set by the sound lamp control device 113 is different; specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, it is possible to set display commands for executing various variable performances only for the sub-symbol fz of the third symbol. However, the method for setting the display commands corresponding to the variable performances is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and only the specific setting content is different, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, the content of the various variable performances executed for the sub-symbol fz executed in this second control example has also been described above with reference to FIG. 205, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, we will explain the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in this second control example. Figure 209 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455). This variation pattern command processing 2 (S6455) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113, and differs from the variation pattern command processing executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see S6405 in Figure 191) in that it adds processing for determining the types of change main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz to be used during the current variation performance and storing them in various memory areas of the resident video RAM 235. As the processing content is otherwise the same, the same processing content will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

In variation pattern command process 2 (S6455), the selected variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) is first analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variation pattern command is a variation pattern command for indicating a jackpot win (a variation pattern command selected when a jackpot win occurs in the special symbol lottery executed by main control unit 110) (S6551). If it is determined to be a jackpot variation (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether the current display variation pattern command includes information indicating the presentation mode of a promotion effect (S6552). If it is determined that information indicating the presentation mode of a promotion effect is included (S6552: Yes), a change main pattern corresponding to the command is determined as the change main pattern of the promotion-only symbol row, and this is stored in the third symbol row area, and the process proceeds to S6554. Furthermore, if the processing of S6551 determines that the current variation is not a jackpot variation, or if the processing of S6552 determines that a promotion effect will not be executed, the process then proceeds to S6554, where, based on the information analyzed in the processing of S6501, it is determined whether the currently received variation pattern includes information for executing a preview effect using the sub-pattern fz (see FIG. 205). If it is determined that a preview effect of the sub-pattern fz will be executed (S6554: Yes in FIG. 209), the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in this sub-pattern preview effect is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

Then, the system determines the variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command, sets the display variation pattern for 0 in the display, and executes the processing of S6502 to S6505, which is the same as the variation pattern command processing (see S6405 in Figure 191) executed by the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, and then terminates this processing.

Next, the contents of background image change command processing 2 (S6469) will be explained with reference to Figure 210. Figure 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of background image change command processing 2. This background image change command processing 2 (S6469) differs from the above-mentioned background image change command processing (see S6419 in Figure 195 (a)) in that, when the background image change flag 233w is set on, processing has been added to determine the type of third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed background image (background mode) and store it in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g. As the processing is otherwise the same, the same processes are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When background image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first the background image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of third design (main design sz, sub-design fz) corresponding to the changed background image (background mode) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third design area 235d and the third design row area 235g (S7002). Then the background image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed background image type is set to ON (S7051), and this process ends.

<Regarding a modified example of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 211. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern image layer sr, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern image layer fr. By synchronizing the display contents of the main pattern image layer sr and the display contents of the sub-pattern image layer fr and controlling the display, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a regular, variable manner while remaining in a specific order. Furthermore, by variably setting only the display control contents for the sub-pattern fz, various variable effects can be performed without varying the variable display contents for the main pattern sz for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer, just like in the first control example described above, but it differs in that it is configured to provide multiple (two) image layers for displaying (drawing) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). Furthermore, it differs in that it is configured to be able to execute special variable effects by varying the display control content of the third pattern displayed on these two image layers (third pattern image A, third pattern image B). All other content is the same as in the second control example described above, and a detailed explanation of the same content will be omitted.

Figure 211(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of this second control example and the display screen, Figure 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the triple reach effect, and Figure 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the triple reach effect has resulted in a triple reach state.

As shown in Figure 211(a), in this modified example of the second control example, third pattern image layer A and third pattern image layer B are formed as overlapping image layers on which the third pattern is displayed, with third pattern image layer A being positioned in front of third pattern image layer B (closer from the player's perspective). Note that while Figure 211(a) only shows third pattern image layer A and third pattern image layer B, in reality, each image layer (layer) displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Then, by synchronizing the variable display of the third pattern on the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, it is possible to execute a variable display that appears identical to the variable display of the third pattern shown with reference to Figure 125(b) in the first control example described above.

In this modified example configured in this manner, similar to the second control example described above, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol image layer A and the third symbol displayed on the third symbol image layer B can be independently controlled for variable display. For example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the third symbol displayed on the third symbol image layer B is in a single reach of "9", it is possible to continue the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol image layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol image layer A, the number of third symbols in the reach state will increase, and the words "Reach! Promotion Chance" will be displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

As shown in Figure 211 (c), when a double reach of "1" and "9" is achieved with the third symbol displayed on third symbol image layer A, it appears as a "triple reach" where three third symbols are in a reach state. In this way, by using multiple image layers to display overlapping third symbols in a variable manner, it is possible to easily execute a variable presentation that requires display control to change the order of the symbol strings of each third symbol when displaying a variable third symbol on a single image layer, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this way, when different third pattern variable displays are used for multiple third pattern layers, for example, the third pattern displayed on the prioritized display layer (third pattern layer A) can be the true third pattern indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third pattern displayed on the non-priority display layer (third pattern layer B) can be the decorative third pattern. The variable pattern of the third pattern on third pattern layer A can be determined based on the variable pattern set based on the result of the special pattern lottery (variation pattern set by main control unit 110), and the audio lamp control unit 113 can determine the variable presentation of the third pattern displayed on third pattern layer B based on the determined variable pattern of the third pattern on third pattern layer A (based on whether or not a jackpot has been won and the type of reach). It is also preferable to configure the variable display control to be different between third pattern layer A and third pattern layer B when a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery compared to when a jackpot has not been won.

In addition, in this modified example, we have explained a change presentation in which the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B are completely different, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the change presentation to be executed with a 0.2 second delay in the start of the change, and then execute a change presentation in which the change display content is synchronized during the high-speed change of the third pattern. In this way, by making the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B different for only a portion of the change presentation, it is possible to give the player a slight sense of discomfort, which allows the player to more easily select the change display.

As explained above, the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above are configured to perform various display controls on each of the third patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) of pattern arrays Z1 to Z3, which are composed of patterns including a main pattern sz having identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. However, patterns other than the patterns (third patterns) of pattern arrays Z1 to Z3 may also be provided, as long as they are dynamically displayed so that the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

For example, while the third pattern change is being performed, a special pattern not included in pattern columns Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area that overlaps with the display area of pattern columns Z1 to Z3. Furthermore, the above-mentioned special pattern may be dynamically displayed while the third pattern change is being performed, and may be configured to start dynamically displaying the special pattern while the third pattern change is being performed, or to statically display or hide the special pattern while the third pattern change is being performed.

Even with this configuration, the variable display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz can be determined based on the results of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to set a variation pattern for the special symbol, just like the sub-symbol fz described above. Furthermore, since the special symbol described above is not a symbol included in the symbol string Z1 to Z3, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the player will not feel uncomfortable even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start or stop timing of the third symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set compared to the sub-symbol fz, further enhancing the presentation effect.

The dynamic display mode of this special pattern can be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third pattern described above. For example, if the dynamic display direction of the third pattern is to the left (left from the viewpoint of Figure 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special pattern can be configured to be a different direction from the dynamic display direction of the third pattern (for example, right from the viewpoint of Figure 202(a)). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that a dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, even if the special pattern is dynamically displayed in a display area that overlaps with the display area of the third pattern variable display during the period in which the third pattern variable display is being executed.

While the above example illustrates the dynamic display direction of the special symbol being the exact opposite of the dynamic display direction of the third symbol, it is sufficient that the dynamic display direction be different. For example, instead of left and right, the dynamic display direction may be up and down (moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), front and back (moving from the back to the front or from the front to the back from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), or diagonal (moving diagonally at an angle of less than 90 degrees from the movement line indicating the movement direction). Furthermore, in the above example, a pattern was described in which the dynamic display direction of the third symbol and the dynamic display direction of the special symbol were different in order to clearly indicate that a special symbol variable display was executed during the third symbol variable. However, this is not limited to this. The size of the dynamically displayed third symbol and the size of the special symbol may be different to clearly indicate that a special symbol variable display was executed during the third symbol variable. Furthermore, the dynamic display of the special symbol may be executed before the third symbol variation is executed, or the dynamic display of the special symbol may be executed after the third symbol variation is displayed statically (including a display state in which the symbol fluctuates to an extent that is difficult for the player to distinguish).

On the other hand, as a technical concept opposite to the example described above, the dynamic display direction and size of each symbol (third symbol, special symbol) may be configured to be the same in order to make it difficult to notice that a special symbol variable display has been executed during the third symbol variable display. By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to know that a special symbol dynamic display has been executed unless the player is paying close attention to the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so players who want to know that a special symbol dynamic display has been executed can continue to be interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

As mentioned above, unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not have to be displayed at all times, and therefore does not indicate the result of the special symbol lottery depending on the display mode when it is statically displayed like the third symbol. For example, the system may be configured so that the player is notified that the result of the special symbol lottery is likely to be a jackpot when the dynamic display of the special symbol begins. In this way, by varying the timing at which information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is provided (dynamic display start timing, static display timing) depending on the type of dynamically displayed symbol, the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied depending on the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when a special pattern is used that indicates a high possibility of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting a dynamic display in this manner, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display at least a portion of the special pattern as a standby display mode that suggests that a dynamic display will be executed. For example, when a special pattern in a display mode of multiple fish forming a school is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display only the fish that are displayed near the front of the special pattern in the direction of movement. This configuration allows the player to play while anticipating the start of the dynamic display of the special pattern. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display only a portion of the display mode indicating the special pattern, rather than all of it. This prevents the player from mistaking the special pattern for being dynamically displayed when it is displayed as a standby display mode.

In addition, in the second control example described above, the main symbol sz and the sub-symbol fz that form the third symbol are displayed on different image layers, and the display control executed for each image layer is different, thereby differentiating the variable display mode of the main symbol sz and the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In addition to this, for example, a first sub-symbol image layer and a second sub-symbol image layer may be provided as image layers capable of displaying the sub-symbol fz, and the sub-symbol fz displayed on the first sub-symbol layer and the sub-symbol fz displayed on the second sub-symbol layer may be displayed overlapping, or only one of them may be displayed. Furthermore, by controlling the display so that the stopped display positions of the sub-symbol fz displayed on multiple display layers are different, and then executing the reach line preview effect shown in Figure 202(b), the position where the main symbol sz is stopped may be further limited.

In the second control example described above, the display image layers for displaying one symbol (main symbol sz) and the other symbols (sub-symbol fz) that make up each symbol row Z1-Z3 are different, and display control can be performed on each display image layer, making it possible to perform a variety of variable effects. However, as long as different display controls can be performed for each type of symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) that makes up the third symbol row that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, they may be displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, if the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, it is necessary to specify in advance which display object to display, which complicates the display control process; however, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the various effects described in the second control example above.

Furthermore, even when using a configuration in which the results of multiple display controls are displayed on the same display layer, the various display control processes described in the second control example above may be executed for various patterns including patterns other than the multiple pattern types (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that make up pattern columns Z1 to Z3, i.e., patterns other than the third pattern that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of third pattern display device 81 in response to the display of a changing special pattern (for example, decorative patterns that are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period while the special pattern is changing to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is likely to be a specific result (a jackpot win)).

In the second control example described above, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the display mode of the main symbol sz is switched to a display mode corresponding to the new background mode. However, when a background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main symbol sz but also the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as image data for the sub-symbol fz stored in the character memory area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, the image data corresponding to the new background mode is read out and stored in the third symbol area 235d.

In addition, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the result of the ongoing special symbol lottery may be determined, and the type of sub-pattern fz to be displayed after switching to background mode may be determined based on the determination result. Specifically, a display mode imitating the number 16 or a display mode imitating a "V" may be provided as a type of sub-pattern fz that is more likely to be determined when the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a jackpot than when the jackpot is not won. By configuring in this way, by executing a background mode transition effect and switching the background mode, it is possible to make it easier to predict the result of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is displayed, thereby encouraging the player to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot may vary depending on the combination of the background mode that is set and the type of sub-pattern fz that is displayed. For example, if the type of sub-pattern fz (display mode for sea mode) that is normally used in the first presentation mode (sea mode) is used in the second presentation mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that the special symbol lottery currently being held will be a jackpot. In this way, by executing presentations that combine background modes and types of sub-pattern fz, a variety of presentations can be executed without increasing the number of types of sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in this control example, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, a process is executed to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). In addition, the number and positions of the valid lines L1 to L5 (see Figure 122 (a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may also be changed.

Furthermore, when the reach line preview effect shown in Figures 202(a) and (b) is executed and the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 202(b)), and a background mode transition effect is executed, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz notified in the reach line preview effect may be configured to be variable. In this case, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be configured to be more easily variable if the result of the special pattern lottery currently being executed is a jackpot win than if the result is not a jackpot win, or conversely, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be configured to be more easily variable if the result is not a jackpot win than if the result is a jackpot win.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to Figures 212 to 222. In the first control example described above, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during a jackpot game, a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in Figure 120, balls that enter the wide (opening width 50 mm) large prize opening 65a are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and are then allowed to flow down the second flow path 65e2 so that they can reach the V gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above, the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 differs from the timing at which a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream of the first flow path 65e1), i.e., a ball fired by left-handed play flows down the left-hand area and then enters the variable winning device 65, compared to the timing at which a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the right side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream of the fifth flow path 65e5), i.e., a ball fired by right-handed play flows down the right-hand area and then enters the variable winning device 65.Therefore, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, whether left-handed play or right-handed play is performed, in order to enable a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to reach the V-gate 65v, it is necessary to keep the switching valve 65y in a state where the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 for a long period of time. Furthermore, by lengthening the period during which a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v, it is also necessary to lengthen the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether the ball has passed through the V gate 65v (specific area), which creates the problem that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of causing a ball to pass through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example is configured so that the period until a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area is approximately the same when a ball launched by left-handed play flows down the left area and enters the variable winning device 65, as is the case when a ball launched by right-handed play flows down the right area and enters the variable winning device 65. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether a ball has passed through the specific area, making it easier to detect fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of causing a ball to pass through the V-gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

As mentioned above, this third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration within the variable winning device 65 has been changed and the details of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided within the variable winning device 65 have been changed; otherwise, the contents are the same. The same contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be explained with reference to Figure 212. Figure 212 is a front view showing a schematic representation of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. As shown in Figure 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see Figure 119) in that the arrangement of the nail members planted in the area below the electric device 640 is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, nails are planted so that balls that flow down the left area or the right area can win evenly across the width of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, whereas in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example, multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape below the electric device 640 so that balls that flow down the left area can easily win at the left end of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and balls that flow down the right area can easily win at the right end of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In other words, in this third control example, a variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width so that both balls that flow down the left area during left-handed play and balls that flow down the right area during right-handed play can win. In order to prevent balls from winning near the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction, an electric device 640 is provided above the center of the variable winning device 65 as a winning-blocking member, and multiple nail members planted in a V-shape are provided as guide members to guide balls to win near both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction.

This configuration can promote ball entry near both ends of the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, regardless of whether a right-handed or left-handed shot is used during a jackpot game. A detailed explanation will be provided later with reference to Figure 213, but the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is configured so that its internal structure is symmetrical (symmetrical when the opening width of the specific winning opening 65a is viewed left and right). By making the winning position of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a symmetrical, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of errors occurring in the time it takes for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through each area (e.g., a specific area) within the variable winning device 65.

Next, referring to Figure 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be explained. Figure 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning opening 65a, and Figure 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a.

The variable winning device 65 of this third control example, like the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see Figure 120), is configured so that balls received through the opening/closing door 65b, which opens during a jackpot game state, are guided by a guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, located at either end of the specific winning opening 65a. Balls that flow down the first opening 65a1 then pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see Figure 213(b)), and payout control is executed to pay out 15 prize balls. Similarly, balls that flow down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see Figure 213(b)), and payout control is executed to pay out 15 prize balls.

As described above with reference to Figure 212, this third control example is configured to make it difficult for balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a near the center, so balls received through the open opening door 65b can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. This prevents an increase in winning balls before they flow down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, which could lead to ball jams, and also prevents situations where winning balls are not paid out despite having entered the specific winning opening 65a (balls not passing through the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2).

As shown in Figure 213 (b), the variable winning device 65 of this third control example differs significantly from the variable winning device 65 used in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 120 (b)) in that the path along which a ball that enters a specific winning port 65a (a ball that passes through ball detection sensor 65s1 or ball detection sensor 65s2) is guided to the discharge port 65 is configured to be symmetrical.

First, a ball that passes through ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y. As shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is closed (the V-gate 65V is protruding to block the flow path), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first outlet 65h1. The time (ta) required for a ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be approximately 2 seconds. Similarly, a ball that passes through ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y. As shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is closed (the V-gate 65V is protruding to block the flow path), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second outlet 65h2. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be approximately 2 seconds, the same as the above-mentioned time ta.

In other words, in this third control example, a ball that enters near the left end of the specific winning port 65a during left-handed play and passes through the first opening 65a1, and a ball that enters near the right end of the specific winning port 65a during right-handed play and passes through the second opening 65a2, are configured to flow down through the same position over a certain period of time before reaching the switching valve 65y.

When the switching valve 65y is closed (submerged so that balls can pass through the flow path in which the V-gate 65V is disposed), as shown in Figure 214, the balls that flow down the first flow path 65r1 pass through the submerged switching valve 65y (shown by dotted lines in Figure 214), pass through the first V-gate 65v1, and flow into the third outlet 65h3. Furthermore, the balls that flow down the second flow path 65r2 also pass through the submerged switching valve 65y, pass through the second V-gate 65V2, and flow into the fourth outlet 65h4.

In this third control example, when the number of balls entering the variable entry device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y switches from a closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to an open state (see FIG. 214). The time required for the number of balls entering the variable entry device 65 to reach the predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open (approximately 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time required for the predetermined number of balls to pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 and reach the switching valve 65y (approximately 2 seconds). Therefore, the predetermined number of balls can pass through the V-gate 65V as is. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y opens, the balls can be reliably allowed to flow down to the specific area (V-gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 13), but for ease of explanation, it is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in Figures 213 and 214. Therefore, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is of course the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this third control example will be described with reference to Figures 215 and 216. This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the content of the jackpot control executed during jackpot gaming is different, and the various processing contents based on this difference are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, but the other configurations are the same.

Now, with reference to Figure 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this third control example will be described. Figure 215 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. As shown in Figure 215, the RAM 203 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above (see Figure 139 (b)) in that a V-period timer 203ca has been added, but is otherwise identical. Identical elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V period timer 203ca measures the period during which the switching valve 65y is in an open state, allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). It is set to a predetermined time (5 seconds) when the conditions for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) are met. The value of the V period timer 203ca is updated during the jackpot update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110. When the V period has elapsed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0), the switching valve 65y switches to the closed state.

In this third control example, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the specific winning port 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) is a predetermined number (2) during a specific round of play (the first round) during a guaranteed jackpot game, the V condition is met, allowing the balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v), and the switching valve 65y is switched to an open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds).

In other words, rather than controlling the switching of the switching valve 65y based on the amount of time that has passed since the start of a jackpot game, the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. This configuration prevents a situation in which the open state of the switching valve 65y ends during a period in which a ball is unable to enter the variable winning device 65, even though the jackpot game is being played normally, and the ball is unable to pass through to the specific area (V-gate 65v).

Furthermore, in this third control example, the period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is met is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required for a ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, i.e., the predetermined number (second) of balls that have passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2, to reach the switching valve 65y. This allows at least balls that satisfy the V condition to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). This configuration ensures that balls can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is met.

In this control example, the V condition is met and the switching valve 65y remains open for a predetermined period (5 seconds). In other words, the only termination condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is the period-expiry termination condition, which is met when a predetermined period has elapsed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a V-passing termination condition may be established when a ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v). Alternatively, a round termination condition may be established when the termination condition for the V-round game (the first round of round play) is met, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the termination condition for the V-round game was met (for example, the four seconds it takes for a ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the V-round to reach one of the outlets 65h). Various termination conditions may be set in this way, and the switching valve 65y may be configured to switch from the open state to the closed state when one of the termination conditions is met first. This minimizes the period during which the switching valve 65y is open, preventing the ball from passing through the specific area (V-gate 65v) unnecessarily. This reduces the possibility of the ball colliding with the ball detection sensor installed in the V-gate 65v and physically destroying the ball detection sensor.

Next, with reference to Figure 216, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. Figure 216 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in Figure 216, the RAM 223 of this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first control example described above (see Figure 144 (b)) in that a V timer 223ca has been added, but is otherwise identical. Identical configurations will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer used to measure the elapsed time since the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) (the V winning period) is set. When the V winning period is reached and the V period command set by the main control unit 110 is received by the audio and lamp control unit 113, a value corresponding to the predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. The value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value reaches 0 (the predetermined period has passed), an emphasized guidance announcement is issued that emphasizes the guidance for V winning.

In other words, while the period during which a V win is possible is set to a maximum of five seconds, the system is configured so that an emphasis guide announcement is executed three seconds after the period during which a V win is possible is set. As mentioned above, normally, the ball that fulfills the V condition will directly result in a V win, and the system is configured so that it takes approximately two seconds for the ball that fulfills the V condition to win a V win. In other words, if the value of V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is possible that the ball that fulfilled the V condition did not win a V win. Therefore, because it is necessary to aim for a V win using an additional ball, the system is configured to execute an emphasis guide announcement. This prevents situations from occurring where a V win is not achieved due to the player's gameplay, even though a period during which a V win is possible has been set.

In this control example, the highlighted guide notification is executed based on the elapsed time since the V condition was met, but this is not limited to this. For example, the highlighted guide standby notification may be executed when it is detected that the ball that met the V condition has passed through an area that does not have a specific area (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having an outlet 65h1 (see Figure 213 (b))). Also, in this control example, the highlighted guide notification described above is executed when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65v). However, instead of this, it may be configured to execute an abnormality notification to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, a ball jam) has occurred in the flow path within the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entry of the predetermined number of balls (the second ball), switching control is executed to immediately switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. However, in this case, a ball (the first winning ball) that entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) may be guided to the open switching valve 65y and pass through the specific area (V-gate 65V). Therefore, when the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) are detected, a waiting time (approximately 1.5 seconds) may be set taking into account the time (approximately 2 seconds) it takes for the second winning ball to reach the switching valve 65y, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state after the waiting time has elapsed. This makes it easier for only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state to pass through the specific area (V-gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, when a ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during a single jackpot game, a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, and the bonus granted to the player (provision of a high probability state of a special symbol) does not change even if multiple balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a single jackpot game.However, if a pachinko machine 10 is used in which the bonus granted to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, for example, setting the above-mentioned waiting time can prevent excessive balls from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V).

When using a pachinko machine 10 in which the content of the bonus given to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, it is possible to vary, for example, the number of winning balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state (V winning condition) depending on the type of jackpot won, vary the waiting time from when the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state enters the variable winning device 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state, or vary the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V ending condition).

Specifically, to provide a player with an advantage in a jackpot game, it is advisable to set a small number of balls as the V-entry condition to facilitate multiple balls passing through the specific area (V-gate 65V) during a single jackpot game. This shortens the time from the execution of a jackpot game until the V-entry condition is met, allowing for a longer jackpot game while the V-entry condition is met, making it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V-gate 65V). The waiting time may also be shortened. This allows balls that entered the variable entry device 65 before the ball that met the V-entry condition (balls flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) to also pass through the specific area (V-gate 65V). Furthermore, the V-end condition may be configured to be met based on the elapsed time, regardless of the number of balls that pass through the specific area (V-gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot game that gives the player an advantage is executed, the player can play with enthusiasm, trying to get as many balls as possible to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for jackpot games that are disadvantageous to the player, compared to the advantageous jackpot games described above, it is advisable to set a large number of balls as the V entry condition, or a long waiting time, to make it more difficult for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a single jackpot game, or to set the V end condition to be met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V), or to be met after a period of time has passed that makes it difficult for balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) (for example, 0.1 seconds have passed).

By configuring it in this way, the likelihood that a ball will pass through a specific area (V-gate 65V) during a jackpot game can be significantly different depending on the type of jackpot game being played. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide the ball flow path within the variable winning device 65 with a normal flow path and a special flow path that can cause balls to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a delay means (e.g., a crane) in the special flow path that slows the flow of balls, so that balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a chain than balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, if the timing at which the switching valve 65y opens coincides with the timing at which balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to facilitate the passage of many balls into the specific area (V-gate 65V). Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to allow the player to select whether balls that enter the variable winning device 65 are more likely to flow down the normal flow path or the special flow path. For example, when playing left-handed, it is preferable to configure the system so that balls that enter the variable winning device 65 are more likely to flow down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when playing right-handed, it is preferable to configure the system so that balls that enter the variable winning device 65 are more likely to flow down the special flow path than the normal flow path. In this case, during a jackpot game, the display surface of the third symbol display device can be used to display a game guide that explains that left-hand play is a stable game in which it is easy to get one ball to pass into the specific area (V gate 65V), and that right-hand play is a challenge game in which it is difficult to get a ball to pass into the specific area (V gate 65V) but if the timing is right, it is possible to get a large number of balls to pass into the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, a storage means can be provided to store whether left-hand play or right-hand play was performed in past jackpot games, specifically, to determine which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected a greater number of balls during the jackpot game, and to determine the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and store the result. A history display can be provided that displays the game method stored in the storage means and the game results during the jackpot game (the number of balls passing into the specific area (V gate 65V)) as a past history.

This allows the player to enjoy the fun of selecting the game mode to be executed during a jackpot game. In the above-described control example, the bonus awarded upon passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high-probability state for a special symbol. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the player may be granted the right to a lottery that is more likely to result in a lottery that is advantageous to the player, or a second jackpot game different from the jackpot game. In this case, it is recommended to provide a bonus right storage means that can store a predetermined number of bonus rights. This ensures that bonuses are awarded based on the predetermined number of rights, even if multiple bonus rights are acquired in a short period of time. Furthermore, while this control example describes a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, this is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is not a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, a small bonus right that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time may be set, and the above-described configuration may be used for balls that enter the variable winning device 65 during the small bonus game that is executed when a small bonus is won. Additionally, the above-described configuration may be used for a variable ball entry means (e.g., electric device 640) that allows a ball to enter a winning game that is executed when a normal symbol is selected in the lottery.

In addition, in this control example, all balls passing through the switching valve 65y in the open state are allowed to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). However, this is not limited to this; a distributor may be provided so that only a portion of the balls passing through the switching valve 65y in the open state can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, in this control example, the switching valve 65y is used to switch the flow path through which the balls flow among multiple flow paths as a variable means that can switch between a first state, which makes it easier for balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V), and a second state, which makes it more difficult for balls to pass through. However, the configuration of the variable means is not limited to this. For example, a variable means may be provided that can switch between a retention position, which retains balls for a predetermined period, and an open position, which does not retain balls. By retaining balls for a predetermined period, it is possible to make it easier for balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V) within a period that effectively determines whether the ball has passed through to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, multiple variable means may be provided within the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Figures 217 to 220, the control processing contents of the main control device in this third control example will be explained. This third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the jackpot control processing (see S1804 in Figure 168) is replaced with jackpot control processing 4 (see S1854 in Figure 217), and the prize winning processing (see S1911 in Figure 171) is replaced with prize winning processing 4 (see S1953 in Figure 218), but is otherwise the same. The same control processing contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of jackpot control process 4 (S1854) will be explained with reference to Figure 217. Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control process 4 (S1854). This jackpot control process 4 (S1854) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in Figure 168) in that the control contents executed at the start of a jackpot and the control contents executed when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 during jackpot play have been changed, and further, control contents that update the value of the V period timer 203ca during jackpot play have been added. All other contents are the same. Identical contents are assigned the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When jackpot control process 4 (S1854) is executed, it first determines whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S1901: Yes), it then sets an opening command (S1902), sets the jackpot start flag 203j to OFF, and sets the jackpot in progress flag 203k to ON (S1903), and terminates this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), it then determines whether a jackpot is currently being played (whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904). If it is determined that a jackpot is not being played (S1904: No), it terminates this process.

If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that a jackpot game is in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to open (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to start is set (S1952), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1905 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1905: No), the processing of S1907 to S1910 is executed, which is the same as the jackpot control processing of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1909 that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1909: No), prize winning processing 4 is executed (S1953), followed by abnormality processing (S1912), and then jackpot update processing (S1954), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of prize winning process 4 (S1953) executed in jackpot control process 4 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of prize winning process 4 (S1953). This prize winning process 4 (S1953) differs from the prize winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) in that the control process contents during the V round (1 round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state are different, but otherwise it is the same. Identical contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations of those contents will be omitted.

When winning process 4 (S1953) is executed, first, the processes S2201 to S2204 are executed, which are the same as the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171). Once S2204 is completed, or if S2202 determines that the ball has not entered the specific winning port 65a (S2202: No), V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round of round play (V round play) is executed, process for controlling the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y is executed.

Once the V round processing (S2251) is completed, the processing of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221, which are the same as the winning processing described above (see S1911 in Figure 171), is executed, and then this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the V round processing (S2251) executed in prize winning processing 4 (see S1953 in Figure 218) will be explained with reference to Figure 219. Figure 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round processing (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, it first determines whether the current round is in progress (V round) (S2401). If it determines that the current round is not in progress (S2401: No), the process terminates. On the other hand, if it determines that the current round is in progress (S2401: Yes), it next determines whether the value of the prize count counter 203o is "2," i.e., whether the number of balls that have entered the variable prize winning device 65 during the first round of play is "2" (S2402). If it determines that the value is "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to on (S2403), a V period command is set indicating the period during which a V prize is possible (the period during which a ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the V period timer 203ca (S2405), and the process terminates. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2402 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this processing ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a specific round of play executed during a jackpot game meets a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls reaches two), a control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to an open state so that balls can more easily pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v). This prevents the switching valve 65y from switching to an open state when no balls have entered the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game.

In this control example, only a specific round (first round) during a jackpot game is configured as a V-round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state, but this is not limited to this; multiple rounds may be configured to be set as V-rounds in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to the open state. In this case, in the V-round processing (S2251), the number of rounds of a newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is a V-round.

Then, when a V round is determined, the state of the switching valve 65y can be controlled and switched based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during that V round. In this case, the conditions for turning on the V solenoid 209a (conditions for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) can be different for each of the multiple V rounds that are set.

In addition, when a V-round game is being played, a notification means may be provided that notifies the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content up until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a on is met. For example, when a V-round game starts, a V-round notification indicating that the current round game is a V-round and a required number of wins notification indicating the number of wins required to meet the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a on can be executed. This can motivate the player to play by trying to get the ball to pass through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954) will be explained with reference to Figure 220. Figure 220 is a flowchart that schematically shows the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954). In this jackpot update process (S1954), processing is executed to update the value of the V period timer 203ca that was set during jackpot play.

When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, i.e., whether the V solenoid 209a is set to on (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1961: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not time to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1964), a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice and lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Figures 221 and 222, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device in this third control example will be explained. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in Figure 180) is replaced with the jackpot-related processing 4 (see S4258 in Figure 221), and the performance update processing (see S4111 in Figure 174) is replaced with the performance update processing 4 (see S4151 in Figure 222), but otherwise it is the same. The same control processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to Figure 221, the contents of jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) will be explained. This jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that it adds control processing content that is executed when a V-period command is received from the main control unit 110, but is otherwise identical. Identical content will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When jackpot-related process 4 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes S4701 to S1713 as those in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S4709 that a round count command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751). If it is determined that a V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V timer 223ca, and this process ends.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that a V period command has not been received (S4751: No), the processing of S4714 to S1715, which is the same as the jackpot-related processing described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), is then executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of effect update process 4 will be explained with reference to Figure 222. Figure 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update process 4. This effect update process 4 is configured to be able to execute a process for updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during jackpot play, and a process for setting the effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 222, when effect update process 4 is executed, first it is determined whether the value of V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), it is then determined whether the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). In other words, if a V notification effect is being executed during the currently executing jackpot game, a display command is set to highlight the V winning notification (S5405), and the number of updates for various other counters and timers is executed, and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this third control example, the variable winning device 65 is placed in a location where a win is possible whether the ball is played with a right-hand shot or a left-hand shot. Furthermore, regardless of which playing method is used to shoot the ball, the system is configured so that there is no significant difference in the time it takes for the ball to win and reach the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65v) can be set unnecessarily long, allowing the jackpot game to be played smoothly. Furthermore, by shortening the V effective period, it becomes easier to monitor for illegal play that causes the ball to pass through the specific area.

Furthermore, because the switching control of the switching valve 65y is configured to be performed based on the number of wins into the variable winning device 65, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from opening when balls cannot enter the variable winning device 65 due to ball jamming or other reasons that occur during jackpot play. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured for each round of play, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is configured to open for a predetermined period within that round of play. However, this is not limited to this, and the switching valve 65y may also be controlled to open when the cumulative number of wins since the start of a jackpot play, the cumulative number of wins since a predetermined measurement condition is met during a jackpot play, or the cumulative number of wins across multiple jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result.

In addition, the maximum length of time that the switching valve 65y remains open does not have to be limited to the period until the end of a round of play, and the switching valve 65y may be configured to remain open, for example, spanning over to the next round of play to be executed.

Furthermore, in this third control example, as shown in Figure 213(b), one switching valve 65y is configured to block both the first V-gate 65v1 and the second V-gate 65V2. However, this is not limited to this; two switching valves 65y may be provided to block each V-gate. For example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the first V-gate 65V1 may be opened, and when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the second V-gate 65V2 may be opened. This reduces the range of switching valves that are open, thereby preventing balls from passing through the V-gates 65V unnecessarily.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to Figures 223 to 231. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Also, the fourth control example differs in that the control content executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control content executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the content is the same, and the same content will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after a jackpot game ends, either a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set as an advantageous game state for the player. If a high probability state is set after a jackpot game ends, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, i.e., until the number of special symbol lotteries since the jackpot game ends reaches 100. On the other hand, if a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed.

In other words, in the first control example described above, regardless of which advantageous game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the advantageous game state is configured to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times, unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. Furthermore, if an advantageous game state (probability variable state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the player is notified of the period until the advantageous game state ends, i.e., the period until the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, the player can be made aware of the period until an unfavorable game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, rather than the period until the currently set advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to when the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (for example, high probability state) ends, i.e., the period until the high probability state ends and the time-saving state ends, the player can be made aware in advance of the period for which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player will continue, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the period during which the more advantageous probability variable state of the multiple advantageous game states (probability variable state, time-saving state) continues is predetermined to be the period during which 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and during the period from the end of the jackpot game until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, a suggestion effect can be executed that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state (see Figure 128 (b)). As a result, in a pachinko machine 10 that notifies the player of the period until the next disadvantageous game state is set when a favorable game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which of the multiple advantageous game states the currently set game state is.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example is configured so that when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, a lottery (a so-called drop lottery) can be executed to transition the high probability state for special symbols to a low probability state, and if the drop lottery is won, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state. In other words, in the first control example described above, once the high probability state is set, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, but in this fourth control example, if the drop lottery is won before 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, the high probability state ends at that point.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player understands that a special state has been set due to a suggestive effect executed during a period in which a favorable game state has been set, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the special state will continue, which allows the player to pay closer attention to the content of the suggestive effect being executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the suggestive effects executed during the period in which a favorable gaming state is set are configured to not only suggest the currently set gaming state, but also to suggest the timing when the special state ends due to winning the drop lottery.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this fourth control example will be described with reference to Figures 223 to 226. This fourth control example differs significantly from the first control example described above in that it is configured to be able to execute a lottery (falling lottery) that shifts the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state, and in that it has been added with a configuration for executing the falling lottery.

First, with reference to Figure 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example will be explained. Figure 223 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in Figure 223, the ROM 202 in this fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 in the first control example described above (see Figure 139 (a)) in that some of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d have been changed and a new drop lottery table 202da has been added, but is otherwise identical. Identical contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained, focusing on the differences from the first control example. In this fourth control example, the jackpot type selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2) is different from the first control example described above. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224(a). The value set in the time-saving counter 203h, i.e., the period during which the high-probability state for normal symbols is set, is configured to differ depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win and the jackpot type selected. This allows the length of time during which the advantageous game state (probability variable state or time-saving state) set after the jackpot game ends to vary. Therefore, when an advantageous game state is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of time that the advantageous game state will continue. This makes it possible to arouse interest in the notification effects that notify the player of the period during which the advantageous game state will continue (the remaining period until the unfavorable game state is set).

Here, referring to Figure 224(a), we will explain the contents of Special Symbol 2 Jackpot 2 Table 202dd, which is referenced to select the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (Special Symbol 2 Lottery) in this control example. Figure 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in Special Symbol 2 Jackpot 2 Table 202dd2.

As shown in Figure 224(a), the special chart 2 jackpot table 2 202dd2 specifies jackpot types that vary the value of the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter c2 and the game state at the time of the win. In other words, the length of time that the advantageous game state (probable win state or time-saving state) that is set after the jackpot game ends varies depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, for the jackpot type, when the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29," if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50," and if it is in a special probability state, the value of the special probability counter 203i is set to "100." For the jackpot type, when the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "30 to 69," if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50." " is in the special probability state, "90" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and "50" can be set as the value of the special probability counter 203i in "jackpot D." When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99," "100" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h if the game state at the time of winning is normal or in the special probability state, and "100" is set as the value of the time-saving counter 203h if the game state is in the special probability state, and "50" can be set as the value of the special probability counter 203i in "jackpot D."

The details of the round play executed in response to each jackpot type, the explanation of the value set in the probability change counter 203i specified in the special jackpot 2 table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as those in the special jackpot 2 table 202d2 described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, the duration of the time-saving state varies depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won and the game state at the time of the jackpot. For example, if jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, the time-saving counter 203h will be set to "100" if the jackpot is in the time-saving state at the time of the jackpot, and to "90" if the jackpot is in the special probability state. Therefore, after the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot D is selected ends, the player can know whether the game state at the time of the previous jackpot win was in the special probability state or the time-saving state depending on the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring the pachinko machine 10 in this way, which has multiple advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and which executes a notification effect that can notify the player only that an advantageous game state has been set, without specifically notifying the player of the currently set game state, if the player wins a jackpot during an advantageous game state, the player can subsequently determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. This allows the player to predict future gameplay based on past game results, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied depending on the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, allowing the player to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (a mode that notifies the player of the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even if different values are set in the time-saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining time notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game may be standardized (for example, displaying "70"), and when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed during the advantageous game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining time notification mode may be variably displayed in accordance with the actual value of the time-saving counter 203h.

This configuration allows the player to grasp the game state that was set at the time of the previous jackpot win after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, during an advantageous game state, the player can simultaneously play a game aiming to win the jackpot and a game that grasps the game state that was set previously, preventing the player from becoming bored early with the game during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in this control example, by varying the value set in the time-saving counter 203h depending on the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot, the remaining time notification mode (a mode that notifies the player of the remaining time until the advantageous game state ends) displayed after the jackpot play ends allows the player to predict the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot. However, the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot may be suggested at other times as long as the timing allows the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot after the fact. For example, the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot may be notified to the player by a jackpot play effect executed during jackpot play. In this case, an effect may be executed that directly notifies the player of the game state set at the time of winning a jackpot, or an effect may be executed that suggests the duration of the advantageous game state that will be set after the jackpot play ends.

Returning to Figure 223, the explanation continues. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table that stores the judgment values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later. If the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of initial entry) matches one of the judgment values specified in the fall lottery table 202da, it is set to transition to a low probability state of a special pattern (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be explained with reference to Figure 224(b). Figure 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in Figure 224(b), the fall lottery table 202da specifies two judgment values, "0" and "1," as judgment values that determine a fall in the special symbol probability variable state. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 999." Of the 1,000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that determine a fall, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a special symbol low probability state) in the special symbol probability variable state is 1/500.

In addition, the fall lottery table 202da in this control example only specifies the judgment value for determining whether or not a fall will occur in the special symbol probability state (judgment value for the special symbol probability state), and does not specify a judgment value for the special symbol low probability state. This is because it would be a waste of processing to determine whether or not to transition to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol low probability state is already in effect.

In this control example, this drop lottery table 202da is compared with the periodically updated drop lottery counter Cd1 to determine whether to transition (drop) from the special symbol probability state to the special symbol low probability state. In other words, the timing of the transition from the probability state, which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous game states (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), to the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is one of the advantageous game states but is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability state, can be randomized. This allows players to play while hoping that the probability state will continue for as long as possible.

In this control example, after a jackpot game ends, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state for special symbols is determined by the value of the probability change counter 203i, and the high probability state for normal symbols is configured to continue for a period longer than that maximum duration (50 times). In other words, based on the results of the drop-out lottery, regardless of when the high probability state for special symbols transitions (drops) to a low probability state, the high probability state for normal symbols is set. Therefore, the game state transitions from the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) to the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), so the timing of winning the drop-out lottery will not be known to the player based on the frequency of normal symbol win games.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, during a favorable game state (a high probability state for normal symbols), it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the suggestive effects that ex post suggest the game state that was set at the time of the jackpot win.

In this control example, whether or not to transition (fall) from a high probability state of special symbols to a low probability state of special symbols was determined by lottery (determination), but transitions to other states may also be determined by lottery (determination). For example, whether or not to transition from a high probability state of normal symbols to a low probability state of normal symbols may be determined by lottery executed for each change. This makes it possible to randomize how long the advantageous game state will continue, allowing players to play in the hope that the advantageous game state will continue with each change. Also, for example, it may be possible to configure it so that whether or not to transition from a low probability state of special symbols to a high probability state of special symbols can be determined by lottery.

Furthermore, in this control example, the above-mentioned falling lottery is configured to be executed every time a special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the ease of executing the falling lottery may be varied depending on the type of special symbol for which the special symbol lottery is executed. For example, the system may be configured so that the falling lottery is easier to execute when a second special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed during a high probability state for normal symbols, is executed than when a first special symbol lottery is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a falling lottery executed based on the first special symbol lottery from causing a high probability state for special symbols to transition to a low probability state, making it difficult for players to play advantageously.

Furthermore, a count determination means may be provided that determines the number of times the drop-down lottery is to be executed at the timing of the execution of the drop-down lottery, and the number of times the drop-down lottery is executed when the trigger for executing the drop-down lottery may be varied. In this case, the range of the number of times determined by the count determination means may be set to "0 to 5", with the average value set to 1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to separate the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed from the number of times the drop-down lottery is executed, making it more difficult to tell when the high probability state of the special symbol will transition to a low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggestion means that can suggest the number of times determined by the count determination means (the number of times the drop-down lottery is executed) and can suggest to the player a period when drop-down is likely (a period when multiple times are determined by the count determination means) and a period when drop-down is unlikely (a period when zero times are determined by the count determination means). This allows the player to play while predicting whether or not a drop will occur based on the suggestion provided by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special symbol lottery is used as the trigger for the execution of the falling lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, the falling lottery may be configured to be executed when a normal symbol lottery is executed, or the falling lottery may be configured to be executed when a ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, with reference to Figure 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be explained. As mentioned above, this fourth control example differs from the first control example in that it has a fall lottery function. It also differs in that the various performance contents set by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be able to execute performances based on the results of the fall lottery. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and Figure 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be explained with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 225(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it provides a button operation effect selection 2 table 222df instead of the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), but is otherwise identical. Identical contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Referring to Figure 226(a), the contents of button operation effect selection 2 table 222df will be explained. Figure 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in Figure 226(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the data table referenced when the special state is set after the end of a jackpot game has been changed from special state selection table 223f2 (see Figure 149) to special state selection 2 table 222df2; otherwise, it is the same.

Here, referring to Figure 226(b), the contents stipulated in the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2 will be explained. Figure 226(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the contents stipulated in the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2. Like the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see Figure 149) described above, this special probability state selection 2 table 222df2 is a data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode to be executed as an operational presentation when a special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game. It differs from the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see Figure 149) in that the result of the drop lottery has been added as a factor for selecting the presentation mode of the operational presentation, that presentation modes that can suggest information based on the result of the drop lottery can now be selected, and that the selection ratio for each presentation mode has been partially changed. All other contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Like the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see Figure 149) described above, the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2 prescribes the presentation mode to be executed as an operation presentation in response to the timing and method of operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f, and the setting status of the short fall flag 223da, which is set based on the results of the fall lottery. Details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but it is a flag that indicates that the special probability state has continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, the number of special symbol draws was 20 or less) due to winning the fall lottery, and is set on if the special probability state ends in a short period of time.

In the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2, the area referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to off has the same contents as those in the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see Figure 149) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Here, we will provide a specific explanation of the contents of the area referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to on.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to on, if the operation timing is during the first period, which is a high-speed fluctuation period (the period when the number of special symbol fluctuations is 1 to 20), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 149," it indicates "none," indicating that the operation effect will not be executed; in the range of "150 to 189," it indicates "reach suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will enter a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation; in the range of "140 to 189," it indicates "state suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests the currently set game state; and in the range of "190 to 198," it indicates "state suggestion," indicating an effect that suggests the currently set game state. Furthermore, if the operation method is "long press," the acquired effect counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 198," it indicates "background mode transition," indicating that the background mode will be transitioned.

Furthermore, when the operation timing is during the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is displayed, and a "state suggestion" indicating a presentation suggesting the currently set game state is displayed in the range of "190 to 198". Furthermore, when the operation method is "long press", a "state suggestion" indicating a presentation suggesting the currently set game state is displayed in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Furthermore, if the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol variation), the operation effect will not be executed regardless of the operation method or the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variation period (third period), the operation method is "normal press," and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189," a "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long press," a "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state set in the past (at the time "chance mode" was set (after the jackpot game ended)) is specified in the range of "190 to 198" for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

As with the first control example described above, the various operation effects in this fourth control example may be based not only on the lottery results for the currently executed special symbol variation, but also on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. For example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b may be used to determine in advance the timing of winning the drop lottery, and operation effects may be executed based on the results of this determination. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order in which the special symbol lotteries are executed, and it is determined whether the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in each piece of winning information indicates a value that will win the drop lottery. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 that will win the drop lottery can be stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113, and the determination can be made based on the stored information and the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information.

In this control example, where the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is for winning information for which the execution order of the special symbol lottery has been determined, i.e., the second special symbol lottery is executed prior to the first special symbol lottery, if the winning information for the second special symbol lottery does not include winning information that will result in a win in the drop-out lottery, a process is executed to calculate the remaining change time of the currently executing special symbol change and the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to each of the winning information for the second special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and to determine the period during which it is not possible to win the drop-out lottery, i.e., the period during which the probability change state will continue (the most advantageous period). Then, a most advantageous period suggestion display mode that notifies the player of the determined most advantageous period can be executed as an operation display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suggest (notify) to the player the period during which they will not win the drop-out lottery, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. Furthermore, the display mode for this most advantageous period suggestion can be configured to display at least a portion of the total time of each variation time resulting in the most advantageous period. This allows the player to understand at least how long the most advantageous period will last. Furthermore, by displaying the most advantageous period as a time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period. Therefore, even in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a longer variation time is set to have a higher chance of winning the jackpot, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience in which the player is led to expect that a short variation time will be set as the variation pattern for the special pattern variation.

As mentioned above, when an operation effect is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation effect may be configured to be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or may be configured to be executed when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and a new special symbol variation is initiated after the presentation mode of the operation effect has been determined. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the player's operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying the player that a waiting period is in progress until the operation effect is executed. This prevents the player from feeling suspicious when the operation effect is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22. Note that the effect notifying the most advantageous period may be configured to display the most advantageous period in terms of the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed, rather than in terms of time, as described above. Furthermore, if it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating a win in the drop-down lottery, the system may be configured to calculate the period until the drop-down lottery is won and the high probability state of the special symbol transitions to a low probability state, and to execute a presentation suggesting that the drop-down lottery will be won or a presentation suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special symbol ends.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth control example>
227 to 229, the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example that differ from the first control example described above will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that it has a falling lottery function as described above and in that the duration of the game state that is set after the end of a jackpot game has been changed, and the control contents related to these differences are also different. Specifically, the control contents of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above differ in that it is configured to execute special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see S258 in FIG. 227) instead of special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), pre-reading process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 228) instead of pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and jackpot end process 5 (see S1960 in FIG. 229) instead of jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of Special Symbol Jackpot Determination Process 5 (S258) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of Special Symbol Jackpot Determination Process 5 (S258). When this Special Symbol Jackpot Determination Process 5 (S258) is executed, the same processing as in the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) at S301 is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability hit counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351). Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability hit counter 203i is not greater than 0, i.e., the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the same processing as in the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) at S302 to S307 is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the processing of S351 determines that the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., that there is a high probability of a special symbol (S351: Yes), the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is then compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

If it is determined that the drop lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), a drop command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state (S355), and the same processes of S302 to S307 as those in the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. Note that in this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the low probability state of the special symbol set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S353 that the drop lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the same processes of S302 to S307 as those in the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. Note that in this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the high probability state of the special symbol set.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, when the conditions for executing the special symbol lottery are met (when special symbol jackpot determination process 5 (see S258 in Figure 227) has been executed), the drop lottery is executed before the special symbol lottery is actually executed. By configuring it in this way, the special symbol lottery can be executed immediately in accordance with the results of the drop lottery, thereby providing players with a fair game.

The timing of the roll-down lottery and the timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to differ from those in this control example. For example, the roll-down lottery may be configured to be executed after the special symbol lottery. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed when a high-probability state for the special symbol is set, and the roll-down lottery is executed immediately thereafter. Therefore, by the time the result of the special symbol lottery executed in the high-probability state for the special symbol is displayed (by the time the special symbol variation is displayed), an event occurs in which the roll-down lottery is won and a low-probability state for the special symbol is set. When this occurs, for example, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute a roll-down notification effect to indicate that the currently executing special symbol variation is the last variation in the special symbol lottery executed in a high-probability state, and that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in a low-probability state for the special symbol. This configuration allows the player to pay closer attention to the results of the currently executing special symbol variation.

In addition, in this control example, when the drop-out lottery is won, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state before the next special symbol lottery is executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the drop-out lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues may be reduced by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i may be reduced by 2 or more), or the remaining number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed while the special symbol is in a high probability state may be set to a predetermined number (for example, 2). Even with this configuration, winning the drop-out lottery can make it difficult for the player to know how long the game state that is most advantageous to the player (probability change state) will continue, thereby creating a sense of tension when playing the game.

In this control example, if the player does not win the drop-out lottery, i.e., if the high probability state of the special pattern continues, no effect is executed to suggest or notify the player of this, making it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (the period during which it continues).However, without being limited to this, the system may also be configured to notify the player of this in some cases where the player does not win the drop-out lottery. In this case, for example, the fall lottery table 202da may be configured to specify not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that is determined to be a win (fall), but also a value that is determined to be a specific miss (for example, 998, 999), and when it is determined to be that value, a command indicating a specific miss is set, thereby executing an effect to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific miss; alternatively, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and if it is determined that an effect should be executed based on the lottery, a miss effect is executed.

Next, the contents of pre-read process 5 (S653) in this fourth control example will be explained with reference to Figure 228. Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of pre-read process 5 (S653). This pre-read process 5 (S653) differs from the pre-read process executed in the first control example described above (see S613 in Figure 162) in that the types of counters read out in the process of reading out the various counters stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) are different, but is otherwise identical. Identical processing contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When pre-read process 5 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fall lottery counter Cd1, and variation type counter CS1 newly stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) are read (S751), and then the same processes of S702 to S705 as those executed in the pre-read process executed in the first control example described above (see S613 in Figure 162) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, when the right to draw a new special symbol (special symbol reserved) is acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area) during the start winning process (see S105 in Figure 161), the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is also read out during pre-read process 5 (S653), and a winning command including the acquired fall lottery counter Cd1 value is set and can be sent to the sound lamp control device 113. This makes it possible for the sound lamp control device 113 to determine whether the acquired special symbol reserved balls contain information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that will win the fall lottery. This makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of jackpot end process 5 (S1960) will be explained with reference to Figure 229. Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 5 (S1960). This jackpot end process 5 (S1960) differs from the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in Figure 170) in that the processing contents for setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h are different, but the contents are otherwise the same. Identical contents will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When jackpot termination process 5 (S1960) is executed, first, the processes of S2101 and S2102, which are the same as those of the jackpot termination process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170), are executed, then the game state at the time of the jackpot win and a value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), a state command is set based on the currently set value of the special probability counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2104), the jackpot in progress flag 203k and special probability setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

The processing of S2153 will now be explained in detail. In this control example, the game status storage area 203g is configured to temporarily store the current game status, the game status set at the time of the previous jackpot win, and the jackpot type to be selected in the event of a jackpot win. When the processing of S2153 is executed, the game status at the time of the jackpot win and the jackpot type stored in the game status storage area 203g are read, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set in the time-saving counter 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined when jackpot end process 5 is executed, i.e., when all rounds of play during jackpot play have ended. This configuration allows the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h to vary depending on whether or not a setting condition that can be met during a round of play in a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is met when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during round play (V round play), is met.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, it is also possible to determine the value of time-saving counter 203h based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, for example, at the start of jackpot play or when the type of jackpot that has been won is selected, and then set a value corresponding to that determination in jackpot end process 5 (see S1960). By configuring it in this way, there is no need to retain information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot play period, thereby reducing storage capacity.

Next, with reference to Figures 230 and 231, we will explain the differences between the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. This fourth control example differs significantly from the first control example described above in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also differs in that processing related to the fall lottery is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that command determination process 5 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the rest of the content is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 5 (S4162) will be explained with reference to Figure 230. Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 5 (S4162). As shown in Figure 230, this command determination process 5 (S4162) differs from the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S4112 in Figure 175) in that if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), it then determines whether a fall command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4251), and if it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), it executes fall-related processing (S4252). Note that if it is determined in the processing of S4251 that a fall command has not been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related processing (S4252) has been executed, the processing of S4219, which is the same as the command determination processing (S4112 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Figure 231, the contents of the fall-related processing (S4252) executed in command determination processing 5 (see S4162 in Figure 230) will be explained. Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related processing (S4252). This fall-related processing (S4252) is processing that is executed when a fall command (see S355 in Figure 227) is received, which is set when it is determined that the fall lottery executed by the main control unit 110 (see S352, S353 in Figure 227) has been won, and is intended to execute processing to determine the timing at which the fall command was received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special pattern ended).

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is first read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or greater (S5502). The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving cycles (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high-probability state for normal symbols) set after the end of a jackpot game, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time-saving cycles is set to 100 after the end of a jackpot game, it is determined whether the fall-off lottery has been won before the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether the fall-off lottery has been won early despite the high-probability state for special symbols being set.

If it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or greater (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), the time-saving state is set in the secondary state setting area 223g (S5504), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 80 or greater (S5502: No), the processing of S5503 is skipped, the processing of S5504 is executed, and this processing ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da to ON in the processing of S5503, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) determines that the frame button 22 has been operated during chance mode, and when selecting the effect mode by referring to the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226 (b)), a different data table will be referenced to select the effect mode than when the short fall flag 223da is set to OFF. Therefore, the player can know the result of the fall lottery after the fact based on the effect mode of the operation effect executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

<Example of performance in the second control example>
Next, referring to Figure 232, among the third symbol variation effects executed in the second control example described above, the content of the reverse variation display effect (see Figure 205 (d)) which is an effect executed by making the direction of variation of the sub-symbol fz different from the direction of variation of the main symbol sz will be explained. Figure 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during the reverse variation display effect.

As described above, in the second control example, the main pattern sz, which contains identification information indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and the sub-pattern fz, which is different from the main pattern sz, can be displayed independently. For example, as shown in Figure 202(b), the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz, and then the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary before the main pattern sz is displayed stationary, thereby executing a reach line preview effect that notifies the player of only the stationary display position of the main pattern sz. In addition, as shown in Figure 205(d), a reverse display effect can be executed in which the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the direction of the main pattern sz in time with the start of the special pattern change.

The contents of this reverse variable display effect will be explained with reference to Figure 232. First, a variable pattern command to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery is sent from the main control unit 110. Then, when this variable pattern command is received by the voice lamp control unit 113, a process for determining the presentation mode (variable pattern) for the main pattern sz is executed in a process for determining the presentation mode of the variable effect executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (variable display setting process (see S4113 in Figure 182)). This makes it possible to reliably set the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which is identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control unit 110. This makes it possible to prevent the main pattern sz, which indicates a lottery result that differs from the result of the special pattern lottery actually executed, from being displayed in a stopped state.

Then, processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz based on the presentation mode of the main pattern sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether a presentation mode resulting in a reach state has been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, and if it is determined that a presentation mode resulting in a reach state has been set, processing is executed to select the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz. Note that if a presentation mode resulting in a reach state has not been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. This allows the sub-pattern fz to be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the main pattern sz, which is displayed in a variable manner (variation pattern) based on the results of the special pattern lottery. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the main pattern sz and sub-pattern fz are being displayed as a series of patterns arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, the system is configured to execute a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz when the presentation mode for the main pattern sz is in a reach state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the system may be configured to execute a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz when a presentation mode that results in a specific reach state (e.g., a super reach state) is set within the reach state. Or, the system may be configured to execute a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz even in some cases where the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is not in a reach state. In other words, the system may be configured to facilitate the execution of a process for selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz when the presentation mode for the main pattern sz is set to a presentation mode that indicates a high possibility of the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot. By configuring the system in this way, simply setting (executing) a presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz that is different from the normal presentation mode (a presentation mode synchronized with the presentation mode of the main pattern sz) can give the player a sense of anticipation of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in the above example, if the process for selecting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz is not executed, a presentation mode (synchronized presentation mode) corresponding to the presentation mode for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz, and a presentation change is executed in which the display change of the sub-pattern fz is synchronized with the display change of the main pattern sz. As a result, the sub-pattern fz is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in a manner that follows the display change of the main pattern sz, resulting in the same display change as the third pattern display change in the first control example described above (see Figure 122(b)). This makes it possible for the player to believe that the multiple main patterns sz and multiple sub-patterns fz are being displayed in a predetermined order (1 (main pattern sz) → triangle mark (sub-pattern fz) → 2 (main pattern sz) → ...) as shown in Figure 122(b).

Therefore, when the presentation mode of the main symbol sz and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, a more unexpected presentation can be presented to the player, enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, because the process for setting the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the process for setting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz are set differently, it is easy to execute a process for displaying the main symbol sz and the sub-pattern fz in a variable pattern that is not synchronized. In other words, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set presentation modes (variation patterns) for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz) as in the first control example described above, when setting a presentation mode (variation pattern) that varies only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz, it is necessary to set a presentation mode (variation pattern) that varies only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz). However, by configuring the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz to be set independently as in the second control example, it is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz, thereby reducing the processing required to set the presentation mode for the tertiary symbols.

Returning to Figure 232, we will continue the explanation. When the process for selecting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, and the result of this determination is used to select the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz using a sub-pattern presentation selection table (not shown). Here, the sub-pattern presentation selection table (not shown) defines the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz at a predetermined rate in correspondence with the result of the special pattern lottery and the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz. Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "jackpot" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, it is defined that "reach line preview presentation" will be selected 60% of the time, "reverse variable display presentation" will be selected 20% of the time, and "no sub-pattern presentation" will be selected 20% of the time.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" and "single reach" is set as the presentation mode for the main symbol sz, there is a 20% chance that a "reach line notice presentation" will be selected, a 20% chance that a "reverse variable display presentation" will be selected, and a 60% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "miss" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode for the main symbol sz, then it is stipulated that there is a 40% chance that "reverse variable display presentation" will be selected, and a 60% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected; and if "single reach" is set as the presentation mode for the main symbol sz, then there is a 5% chance that "reverse variable display presentation" will be selected, and a 5% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected.

When the "reverse variable display effect" is selected using the sub-pattern effect selection table (not shown) defined in this way, a display mode selection process is then executed to select the display mode of the sub-pattern fz. This display mode selection process executes a process to select the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in this third pattern variable effect (the display mode of the sub-pattern fz), and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is selected based on the results of the special pattern lottery and the type of jackpot that has been set. Note that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, as described with reference to Figure 203 (c) in the second control example above.

In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-pattern mode command (display command) is set to specify the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-pattern mode command (display command), a process is executed to read out the corresponding image data from the character memory area 234a2.

For example, as shown in FIG. 203(c), the display mode selection process is configured to select one of the following display modes: display mode SD1, which is a "triangle mark" that is the normal display mode of the sub-symbol fz; display mode SD2, which resembles "bubbles," indicating a high probability of winning; and display mode SD3, which resembles the number "16," indicating that a favorable jackpot game (16 rounds) will be played in the event of a jackpot. The process is configured so that display mode SD2 is easier to select if the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot than if the result is not a jackpot (a miss). Furthermore, the process is configured so that display mode SD3 is easier to select if a favorable jackpot game is played based on the result of the current special symbol lottery than if a favorable jackpot game is not played (if no jackpot is won, or if a jackpot is won but a jackpot game other than a favorable jackpot game is played).

This configuration has the effect of making the player interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 232 shows a state in which a "reverse variable display effect" is being executed as the effect mode for the sub-pattern fz, and the display mode SD2, which resembles a "bubble," is set as the display mode for the sub-pattern fz. The "reverse variable display effect" is being executed, in which the main pattern sz is displayed variable to the left from the viewpoint of Figure 232, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed variable to the right from the viewpoint of Figure 232. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed variable in opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, providing the player with a surprising variable display effect. Furthermore, as an effect mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is displayed variable in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so the player can be easily notified that the effect mode for the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal effect mode.

In the display screen shown in Figure 232, all of the sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 that resembles a "bubble" selected by the display mode selection process described above, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to change the display mode of only one of the multiple sub-patterns fz. In this case, it is also possible to configure the display mode of only the sub-pattern fz that is positioned near the main pattern sz that will ultimately be stopped and displayed to be easily changed to the display mode selected by the display mode selection process described above. This makes it easier to predict the stopped display mode of the main pattern sz based on the display mode of the sub-pattern fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in Figure 232 shows an example in which all sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are the same size, but the size (magnification ratio), rotation angle, translucency value, etc. of the sub-patterns fz may be set to be different. In this case, it is sufficient to change the values specified in the display data table (see Figure 207) for displaying each sub-pattern fz.

In addition, Figure 232 shows an example in which the display mode of the sub-pattern fz switches from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to a display mode imitating a "bubble" SD2 at the timing when the third pattern change begins, and a reverse change display effect is executed, but this is not limited to this. The display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched during the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped and displayed until the current third pattern change begins, or the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched during the period from when the current third pattern change begins until it stops.

When switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz between the time when the previous third pattern variation is statically displayed and the time when the current third pattern variation is initiated, for example, a pre-reading process may be performed to analyze whether the information stored in the prize information storage area 223b is included, and if the next special pattern drawing (variation) results in a specific result (e.g., a jackpot), the display mode of the statically displayed sub-pattern fz may be changed. In this case, the display mode used for the next sub-pattern fz variation presentation is determined before the presentation mode of the main pattern sz to indicate the result of the next special pattern drawing (variation) is set. In this way, by using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the timing for notifying the player of each presentation mode of the third pattern variation to indicate the result of the special pattern drawing can be varied, thereby making the player interested in the third pattern variation presentation that will be executed.

Furthermore, if a process for switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the current third pattern change starts until when it stops, the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in the display mode before the switch when the third pattern change starts, or the sub-pattern fz may be configured to be displayed after the process for switching the display mode is executed.

<Regarding switching control of the switching valve executed during a jackpot game>
In each of the control examples described above, as explained using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169 ) and the V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219 ), when it is determined that a specific round game (V-round game) has started, control processing is executed for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120( b) or FIG. 213( b)). In other words, the specific round game (V-round game) is executed only when the jackpot game being executed is a variable jackpot game, and the specific round (V-round game) is not executed when the jackpot game being executed is a normal jackpot game. This configuration can prevent balls from entering the V-shaped area (V-gate 65V) during a normal jackpot game, but there is a problem in that the content of the control processing for the switching valve 65y needs to be varied depending on the type of jackpot game being executed, which increases the processing load during the jackpot game.

Therefore, control processing other than the control processing for the switching valve 65y used in each of the control examples described above may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, but the conditions for ending the V-round game may be different from those in a special jackpot game, so that balls cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. Furthermore, as in the fourth control example in which the V-round processing (see S2251 in FIG. 219) described above is executed, if the switching control of the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of winning balls since the V-round game was executed, the number of winning balls for controlling the switching of the switching valve 65y in a normal jackpot game may be set to a number greater than the number of winning balls for ending the V-round game (e.g., 10 balls), thereby preventing the switching control of the switching valve 65y from being executed.

In addition, the control content (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y can be set to be the same for both special jackpot games and regular jackpot games, so that even if a ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) during regular jackpot games, that passage is not processed effectively. In other words, even if a ball passes through a specific area during regular jackpot games, the high probability state for a special symbol may not be set during that jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game (since the opening period for the jackpot game has been set), switching control may be executed to open the switching valve 65y for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65b during the jackpot game may be configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot game, thereby differentiating the probability of winning a V prize for each type of jackpot game.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the sub-pattern fz are configured to be set (selected) by the sound lamp control device 113, but this is not limited to this and the presentation mode (variation pattern) may also be configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that only the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, is set by the sound lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set by the display control device 114.

The second control example and a modified example of the second control example have been explained above, but when setting the presentation mode for a variable presentation that dynamically displays various patterns executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is sufficient to set the presentation mode independently for each type of dynamically displayed pattern and perform independent display control, and configurations other than those shown in the above control examples may also be used.

For example, multiple display layers for displaying the sub-pattern fz may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz may be configured to overlap and be displayed in a variable manner, as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to Figure 211.

In addition, multiple display image layers are provided, and a display priority is set for each image layer. When the display modes displayed on the display image layers overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is displayed so that it is visible to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a display image layer without a priority setting may be provided, and the display modes displayed on multiple display image layers may be displayed overlapping on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, for example, when executing the "reverse variable display effect" shown in FIG. 232, the display may be controlled (the translucency value and magnification of each sub-pattern are set) so that an overlapping sub-pattern is displayed in which a sub-pattern fz modeled after a "bubble" is displayed within the sub-pattern fz of a "triangle mark," and the display may be displayed in a manner that suggests in advance that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz will change from a "triangle mark" to a "bubble."

As explained above, in the first and fourth control examples described above, the game state can be set to two types of advantageous game states: the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which are advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state. Furthermore, the time-saving state is set after the probability variable state ends.

When an advantageous gaming state is set, the system is configured to notify the player of the period until the next normal state is set; for example, if a special probability state is set, the period until the time-saving state set after the special probability state ends and the normal state is set is set, as the duration of the advantageous gaming state. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the period until the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player ends, rather than the period until the currently set gaming state ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period during which multiple advantageous game states continue consecutively is reported as the duration of one advantageous game state, the content and frequency of the various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 can be used to allow the player to grasp the detailed game state that is currently set. This configuration allows the player to predict the current game state while understanding the period until the normal state is set, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the first and fourth control examples described above, of the multiple advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set; however, any configuration that allows multiple advantageous game states to be set consecutively is sufficient. For example, in addition to the normal state, high probability state, and time-saving state, a potential probability state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is also set as game states, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the potential probability state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state, potential probability state) in which the special pattern or normal pattern is in a high probability state becomes an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. The value of the probability variation counter 203i, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, can be set to be greater than the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, for example, by configuring the value of the probability variable counter 203i to "100" and the value of the time-saving counter 203h to "50" as a probability variable state after the end of a jackpot game, the probability variable state is set as the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the potential probability variable state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first and fourth control examples described above, it is preferable to notify the duration of one advantageous game state as the period during which multiple advantageous game states continue consecutively, i.e., the period until the potential probability variable state set after the probability variable state ends. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be able to execute a transition suggestion effect that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state may transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state. This allows the player to understand only that there is a possibility of transitioning to another game state during the advantageous game state, thereby providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the currently set game state will transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the system may be configured to be able to execute advantageous transition suggestion effects that can suggest whether the game state after the transition will be more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute suggestion effects that suggest the timing of the transition to a game state during an advantageous game state. By configuring it in this way, the player can enjoy playing during that period while knowing the period until the normal state is set.

In addition, in the first and fourth control examples described above, if a jackpot is won during a favorable game state, the favorable game state ends. However, among multiple favorable game states, the most favorable game state (probability variable state), which is more favorable to the player, is set first, and then a normal favorable game state (time-saving state), which is less favorable than the most favorable game state (probability variable state), is set. Therefore, winning a jackpot during a favorable game state does not put the player at a disadvantage. However, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that, for example, among multiple favorable game states, the normal favorable game state (probability variable state), which is more favorable to the player, is set first, and then the most favorable game state (potentially favorable state), which is more favorable to the player than the normal favorable game state (probability variable state), it may be more advantageous to the player if the most favorable game state is set without winning a jackpot than if a jackpot is won during the normal favorable game state.

Therefore, it is advisable to configure the system to execute period effects that allow the player to distinguish between periods in which winning a jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery executed during an advantageous game state is advantageous to the player and periods in which it is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to focus on the results of the special symbol lottery based on the content identified by the period effects, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, in pachinko machines 10 that have jackpot types that are set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, including jackpot types that are disadvantageous to the player if set during a normally advantageous game state and jackpot types that are not disadvantageous to the player even if set during a normally advantageous game state, the system may be configured to execute effects that suggest whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the content of the period effects described above and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game of simply aiming to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, but also in the timing of the jackpot win and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

In the first control example described above, one of multiple (two) advantageous game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this; it may also be configured so that a normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, the player can play in the hope that an advantageous game state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the first control example described above is configured to set a presentation mode (Super Chance Mode) that notifies the player that a special probability state has been set after the jackpot game has ended, and a presentation mode (Chance Mode) that notifies the player that a favorable game state (special probability state or time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state has been set after the jackpot game has ended, depending on the presentation result of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless presentations from being executed in which a chance mode is set after the jackpot game has ended, despite the notification that a special probability state will be set after the jackpot game has ended.

The technology of the first control example configured in this manner may be configured to include, for example, a presentation mode selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the presentation mode to be set after the jackpot game ends. By making any presentation mode selectable in advance using the presentation mode selection means, the presentation style of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the presentation mode to be set after the jackpot game ends may be set to correspond to the content selected by the presentation mode selection means. Specifically, the presentation mode selection means may be configured to allow the player to select between a "full notification mode," which notifies the player of the actual game state to be set, and a "chance notification mode," which notifies the player only that a favorable game state has been set, as the presentation mode to be set after the jackpot game ends. The player may then select either presentation mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22) during a period when a special symbol lottery is not being executed on the pachinko machine 10.

Storage means is provided to temporarily store the presentation mode selected by the player, and information that identifies the presentation mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., the secondary display area Ds), so that the currently set presentation mode is always identifiable by the player. Then, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "full notification mode" is stored in the storage means, a V notification effect is executed as a jackpot game effect to notify players that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game, and if the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(b) and 127(d)), and if the ball does not pass through, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a time-shortened state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(a) and 127(c)). When a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see Fig. 131(a)) is set indicating that the current game state is a high probability state, and when a time-shortened state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "chance mode" (see Fig. 128(a)) is set indicating that the current game state is a time-shortened state. By configuring it in this way, the player can be reliably notified of the game state that will be set, and whether or not a V win, which is the trigger for determining the game state, has occurred.

On the other hand, if the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as a jackpot game effect, and after the jackpot game ends, the "chance mode" is set regardless of the game state that is set. By configuring in this way, the player can play without being notified of the game state that is set or whether or not a V win has occurred, which is the trigger for determining the game state. Note that if no presentation mode is selected by the presentation mode selection means, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means, similar to the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and, similar to the first control example described above, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during the jackpot game, a jackpot game effect is executed based on the result of the lottery, and the presentation mode after the jackpot game ends is set based on the result of the jackpot game effect.

This configuration allows players to seamlessly choose the presentation mode they desire, preventing them from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting the various effects to be executed on the pachinko machine 10, an effect frequency selection means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of the various effect modes (see FIG. 148) that are selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected. Specifically, it is advisable to provide an effect frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio of the various effect modes selected when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set can be greatly different, or the difference in selection ratio can be made smaller. Even when using such a configuration, the player can be provided with any desired effect mode without feeling uncomfortable, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the first to fourth control examples explained above, a pachinko machine 10 was described that is configured so that a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends when a ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) provided within the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, as a configuration that can provide a player with a special game that is different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is being executed, For example, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, which is a lottery result different from the big prize, a second bonus game (small prize game) different from the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played, and a specific area can be set up through which a ball can pass into the variable ball entry means (which may be variable entry device 65 or another separate entry device) that opens during the second bonus game, and if the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played after the second bonus game (small prize game) has ended.

In the above embodiments, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is updated (i.e., each time it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. Furthermore, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrement the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 upon receiving a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above embodiments, a maximum of four entries into the special ball entrance 64 and a maximum of one passage through the through gate 67 are reserved, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more (e.g., eight). Furthermore, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on entries into the special ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a portion of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four separate areas with different patterns (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the light-emitting element.

As shown in the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the symbols serving as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but may also be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with or separately from the symbols. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. The display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery results for each symbol is performed using a single display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may also be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol, which is highlighted to the player among the third symbols, and for displaying the secondary symbol. Furthermore, the display means may be configured using a configuration other than an LCD display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a left-hand hit game aimed at the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in a game state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the targeted area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game aimed at the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game aimed at the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, left-hand play, which targets the left area of the game board 13, is executed regardless of the game state set or whether a jackpot game is set. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute right-hand play when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute left-hand play only during a normal state. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand whether or not they are in an advantageous state depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand play, left-hand play).

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operating means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player to determine that the operating means has been operated. However, other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operating means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operating means that can be determined to have been operated by the player coming into contact with or close to it, or a wireless operating means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. Furthermore, the frame buttons 22 are electrically connected to the audio and lamp control device 113 and are used as effect operation means for varying the effect mode of effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 based on player operation; however, it is sufficient that the effect mode of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame buttons 22. For example, the frame buttons 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame buttons 22) and generate effect setting signals that can be output to the display control device 114, audio and lamp control device 113, audio output device 226, and lamp display device 227. With this configuration, even when multiple effect operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple effect operation means can be centrally managed, thereby enabling the effect mode to be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the effect operation means.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment described above, a group of switching buttons 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) may be provided for selecting the conditions for ending play per reel, and some or all of the operation control of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c may be performed by the audio lamp control device 113 rather than the main control device 110.

The present invention may be implemented in pachinko machines and the like of different types from those described in the above embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player by requiring the ball to land in a predetermined area after a jackpot symbol is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, and that requires the ball to land in that special area to enter the special game state. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has multiple combinations of jackpot lottery probabilities (commonly referred to as settings), and that allows the settings to be changed by the gaming parlor. Furthermore, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

A typical example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (the combination of the jackpot probability in a low-probability state and the jackpot probability in a special probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot to be varied according to the setting. That is, the proportion of jackpots that are advantageous to the player may be varied according to the setting, or the proportion of jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player may be varied according to the setting. More specifically, for example, the proportion of jackpots with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, or the proportion of jackpots with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. For example, the percentage of jackpots that result in a large number of time-saving rounds (e.g., 100 rounds) after a jackpot may be varied depending on the setting, or the percentage of jackpots that result in a small number of time-saving rounds (e.g., 0 rounds) may be varied depending on the setting. Furthermore, the percentage of jackpots that result in a transition (or a tendency to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability variable state) after a jackpot may be varied depending on the setting, or the percentage of jackpots that result in a transition (or a tendency to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied depending on the setting. A configuration may also be adopted in which a jackpot type is significantly more likely to be determined only in a specific setting (and is almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings may be available, from 1 to 6, with setting 6 being the most favorable setting. Setting 6 may be configured such that a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time when a jackpot is achieved, while a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time in other settings. This configuration significantly increases the likelihood that the most advantageous setting, 6, will be selected when the jackpot has ended after six rounds, allowing players to focus on the number of jackpot rounds during play. Alternatively or additionally, for example, setting 6 may be configured to have a higher probability of a jackpot type that awards 66 time-saving rounds after the jackpot has ended than other settings. This configuration allows players to focus on the number of times the time-saving state ends during play. Alternatively or additionally, for example, a jackpot type may be provided in which the jackpot slot (or a device inside the jackpot slot) operates in a different pattern from other jackpot types during jackpot play, making it easier for that jackpot type to be determined (higher the probability of being determined) in a specific setting. Furthermore, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is varied according to the setting, in a low-probability state, the jackpot probability may be increased in settings more favorable to the player, while in a variable-probability state, the jackpot probability may be increased in settings less favorable to the player. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines where the more times a special symbol is drawn in a probability variable state, the more likely it is that the player's ball reserves will increase (the number of prize balls paid out will be greater than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, by applying this configuration to a gaming machine where the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won and where there is a high probability of a small jackpot in the probability variable state, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in a probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot is likely to be large, and there will be more opportunities to win small jackpots and prize balls. Therefore, when a probability variable state is entered, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 that can be configured with multiple settings, it is preferable to configure it so that, based on the set setting value, the type of variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 142) referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the main control unit 110 is changed, the type of variation pattern selection table 222a referenced when selecting the variation pattern (variation effect) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control unit 113 is changed, or the type of various selection tables referenced when selecting the detailed presentation mode to be executed as a variation effect is changed. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the content of the variation effect to be executed, making it possible to execute variation effects that interest players.

Furthermore, when the data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the operation effects described above with reference to FIG. 148 or FIG. 226 is varied based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to define the "setting suggestion" presentation mode, which suggests the set setting value as the presentation mode of the operation effects, so that the selection rate is the same for each data table used for each setting value, and configure the presentation content of the operation effects executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to vary depending on each setting value, while configuring the selection rate of other presentation modes to vary depending on the setting value. By configuring in this way, when a "setting suggestion" operation effect that directly suggests a setting value is executed, the presentation content can be grasped comprehensively, and when other operation effects are executed, the selection rate of each presentation mode can be grasped comprehensively, making it possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, thereby arousing the player's interest in the various operation effects that are executed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the selection ratio for each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the set game state. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that allows settings to be set in six stages, from setting "1," which is unfavorable to the player, to setting "6," which is favorable to the player, the selection ratio for the operation presentation selected when settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (probable bonus state) that is favorable to the player is set is the same as the selection ratio for the operation presentation selected when settings "4" to "6" are set and the second game state (time-saving state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the first game state is set. This makes it possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 with a setting set that is unfavorable to the player believe that a setting that is favorable to the player has been set.

In addition, as in the first control example described above, when the same presentation mode, "Chance Mode," is set when the first game state (probability variable state) is set and when the second game state (time-saving state) is set, the above-mentioned effect can be made even more pronounced if a configuration is used that makes it difficult for the player to understand the currently set game state. Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the second game state is set after the first game state has ended, making it difficult to determine whether the first game state was actually set can make the effect even more pronounced.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of presentation modes to vary based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery results, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)), it is possible to prevent players from easily determining the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Slot machines are well-known devices in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a winning symbol line, and then a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and the symbols are stopped and finalized by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine equipped with a display device that displays a variable sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then finalizes the display of the identification information; the variable display of the identification information begins upon operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever); the variable display of the identification information stops and finalizes upon operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed; and, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is specific, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated." In this case, typical examples of game media include coins, medals, etc.

Another example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one that has a display device that displays a fluctuating sequence of multiple symbols and then confirms the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a predetermined number of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example, due to operation of a control lever. The symbol change is stopped, for example, due to operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is triggered, awarding the player a predetermined gaming value, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine were used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall would be able to treat only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines, which are caused by the separate handling of medals and balls, which represent gaming value.

The above-described embodiments and control examples may be configured in whole or in part in combination.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as various inventive concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the sphere passing through the path forming means blinds the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passing means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, upstream of the passing means and in front of the first gaming ball when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a large prize component 300 that can configure multiple paths for game balls to flow toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to see due to a decorative panel 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative panel 302 always makes it difficult to see the ball detection hole 431, so they cannot accommodate gameplay modes in which the ball must be confirmed to have entered the ball detection hole 431 before continuing or stopping the launch of the game ball, which can leave players feeling dissatisfied. In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in areas related to the game ball launch operation.

In contrast, with gaming machine A1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, making it possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible. Therefore, when the first gaming ball is easily visible, it is easier to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and decide whether to continue or stop the gaming ball launch operation, thereby enabling improvements in areas related to the gaming ball launch operation.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it could be another game ball, or a decorative element that is configured to be displaceable between the game ball's flow path and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the lottery for the design (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, thereby reducing material and design costs compared to using other decorative elements as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine A2 includes a longitudinal path formed with a longitudinal width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed directly in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A3, the longitudinal path is configured so that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launching device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can also achieve the effect of making it difficult to distinguish a first gaming ball from a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the same launch interval. This makes it possible to create a situation where it is difficult to distinguish between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is a gaming machine A3 or A4, characterized in that the front-to-rear path is arranged so that the front-side component is closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear-side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined to follow the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the front component of gaming machine A5 is positioned in the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is generally believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect. However, if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

Gaming machine A7 is any of gaming machines A2 to A6, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a longitudinal path formed with a longitudinal width that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a lateral path formed upstream of the longitudinal path with a lateral width that allows gaming balls to flow down in the lateral direction.

Gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down left-right paths, so it can create a blinding effect not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is particularly pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-to-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on that side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine A8 is any of gaming machines A1 to A7, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first flow path along which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in a first manner, and a second flow path along which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be seen, regardless of which flow path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball passes through.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 makes it difficult to notice the flow pattern of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether they pass through the passing means, thereby increasing attention to gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine A9 is any of gaming machines A1 to A8, and is equipped with a branching means for dividing the flow direction of gaming balls upstream of the passing means, the branching means including a switching means for switching the flow direction of received gaming balls, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A8, gaming machine A9 allows gaming balls that reach the switching means to flow down the same path for a predetermined distance, making it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately changes to a flow pattern that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This increases the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

Gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine A9 has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A9, gaming machine A10 can also use the protruding portion to branch gaming balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, cases where branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

Gaming machine A11 is characterized in that in gaming machine A10, the protruding portion comprises a first protruding portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion extending in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and is configured so that the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are different.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A10, gaming machine A11 can differentiate the effect that the first protrusion and the second protrusion have on the gaming ball depending on the way the gaming ball flows down. This makes it possible to use the fixed first and second protrusions to branch the gaming ball according to predetermined rules that correspond to the way the gaming ball flows down.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of a ball passing through a route configuration means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 is provided with a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means has a predetermined portion that forms the upstream side of the passed means, and the predetermined portion is arranged on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and is configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a large prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is made difficult to see by a decorative panel 302.Depending on the state of the large prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position that is away from the decorative panel 302, or may flow down in a way that is hidden behind the decorative panel 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, highly visible gaming balls that detach from the decorative panel 302 and flow down are instead configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and some of the gaming balls that flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative panel 302 are guided to the ball detection hole 431. As a result, the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because their attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In contrast, gaming machine B1 is configured so that gaming balls that have flowed down a predetermined section located on the more conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, making it possible to correlate the degree of attention paid to a gaming ball with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. This therefore increases the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a predetermined section will pass through the passing means, resulting in an improvement in that there is more meaning in paying attention to a gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

Furthermore, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze toward the game ball flowing down the designated area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the lottery for the design (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it could be the display device side that easily catches the player's eye, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (near side) that is easily visible to the player, the stage side (mainly the area where game balls are temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) that is the part that is likely to attract attention as it significantly increases the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole, the V-entry side that is directly linked to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side that is the object of operation, the effect operation button side, the area where game balls that miss the ball entry hole flow down (the area where players will inevitably follow it with their eyes in frustration), the bright side where the light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. It is also possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the path configuration means of gaming machine B1 includes a second predetermined section that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered, and the predetermined section is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at a second predetermined section before it flows down the predetermined section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the predetermined section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined section of gaming machine B1 or B2 includes sections where the speed at which gaming balls flow down varies.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the speed at which the gaming balls flow down.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, the second flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second specified section is faster than the first flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a predetermined location.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the specified section has sections in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B4, gaming machine B5 can create sections where the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction varies, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on the specified location and distracted from other areas.

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is varied is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged in a plane perpendicular to the front-to-back direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-back component, or a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine manner, or any other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is located outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine B6 not only achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines B1 to B5, but also ensures the visibility of the introduction means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention paid to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

Gaming machine B7 is any of gaming machines B1 to B6, and is characterized by having an avoidance means configured to cause gaming balls on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the specified part.

Gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B6, is configured so that gaming balls can flow down on the front side of the path-forming means, and is equipped with an avoidance means to ensure that the flow path of the gaming balls avoids line of sight toward the passing means, thereby ensuring both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which a gaming ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, or it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, or it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the gaming ball heading towards the passing means, or it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or any other manner is possible.

Gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the path configuration means in B7 is equipped with an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which they cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state change means is configured to be able to guide game balls that have reached the acceptance state change means in the acceptance state toward the path configuration means when the state changes from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B7, gaming machine B8 can prevent gaming balls that reach the receiving state change means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

Gaming machine B9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a partitioning means that partitions the gaming area and is arranged above the passing means when viewed from the front, in addition to gaming machines B7 or B8, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the outer left and right sides.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 and B8, gaming machine B9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

The type of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface for gaming balls, or it may be a ball entrance forming means through which gaming balls can enter. Furthermore, the partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

Gaming machine B10 is characterized in that the path configuration means in B9 is equipped with an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which game balls cannot be accepted, and the portion of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide game balls to the acceptance state change means side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B9, gaming machine B10 can be configured so that gaming balls being received by the receiving state change means are pushed into the receiving state change means by the partition means. This makes it easier to prevent a gaming ball that slides sideways while being received from escaping from the receiving state change means and falling down the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means may be a special prize winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means may be a first prize opening positioned above the special prize opening of the special prize winning device. A gaming ball that reaches the special prize opening just before the opening/closing plate closes often becomes pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that the opening plate covers, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position within the range formed by the pivot tip of the opening/closing plate. Therefore, if at least a portion of the opening/closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball may fall to the front side after skidding and pass directly in front of the passing means. Therefore, the game ball should not be allowed to fall to the front side after skidding.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after skidding, it will be necessary to position the opening/closing plate so that it is not positioned in a front view of the passing means, which reduces the design freedom of the opening/closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent gaming balls from sliding sideways and falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate, thereby improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B7 to B10, gaming machine B11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and have the potential to pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it becomes difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for gaming balls to enter the path forming means from gaming balls flowing down near the path forming means.

Gaming machine B12 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B11, characterized by having a light-emitting means that irradiates light from behind the ball flowing down the specified section.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B11, gaming machine B12 makes it easier to avoid the front of a ball flowing down a designated area reflecting light, making it difficult to see the ball.

<Key points for securing the path length to the V-shaped opening while saving space>
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which gaming balls can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means that delays the vertical displacement of the gaming balls, and the delay means allows the gaming balls to flow down towards the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a distribution unit 75 that can move left and right along the path of the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 12, and the direction in which the game ball flows can be changed by changing the position of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the distribution unit 75 must operate for a short period of time to prevent the ball from accidentally entering the specific area 73 or getting caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may find the behavior of the distribution unit 75 suspicious and unable to continue playing with confidence.

One possible solution to this problem is to increase the length of the flow path from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution unit 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution unit 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution unit 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an accidental win in the specific area 73.

However, implementing this measure would require ensuring visibility of the path of the game ball's flow over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, limiting the design freedom of the game area in this area. In other words, there was a problem in that the design freedom of the game area was limited over a wide area in order to avoid accidental winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, with gaming machine C1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means is shortened in front view to save space, it is possible to ensure a long time elapses before a gaming ball that enters the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

As a result, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the gaming ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the gaming ball enters the path configuration means, making it possible to avoid erroneous winning without having to operate the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the gaming ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This prevents players from getting the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous gaming ball entry while maintaining a high degree of freedom in the design of the gaming area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the gaming balls to flow down a flow path having a forward/backward component.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the delay means in gaming machine C1 has multiple predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down a flow path toward the front side is greater than that of a flow path toward the back side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can ensure that the player can see the gaming ball flowing down the specified flow path for a longer period of time.

The causes of differences in the acceleration of the gaming ball are not limited in any way. For example, it could be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the gaming ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the delay means in gaming machine C1 or C2 has multiple predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down a flow path toward the front side is greater than a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-back position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 can ensure that players can view gaming balls flowing in front of them for a longer period of time. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to gaming balls flowing down a predetermined flow path.

The causes of differences in the acceleration of the gaming ball are not limited in any way. For example, it could be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the gaming ball side of the specified flow path.

Gaming machine C4 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, characterized in that the delay means has multiple predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passing means when a gaming ball is placed in a closer position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passing means.

Gaming machine C5 is a gaming machine similar to gaming machine C4, but characterized in that it is possible to configure multiple front positions.

With gaming machine C5, gaming balls are placed at multiple near positions, allowing the near gaming balls to at least partially obscure the far gaming balls. Because the passing means is placed behind the far gaming balls, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by multiple gaming balls, reducing the visibility of the passing means.

In this case, if the interval between game balls entering the specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Gaming machine C6 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, characterized in that the path configuration means is configured so as to appear as a spiral when viewed from above.

Gaming machine C6 not only achieves the same effects as gaming machines C1 to C5, but also reduces the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to thin the path wall thickness, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns back 180 degrees.

Gaming machine C7 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C6, characterized in that the path configuration means includes a front-rear flow path section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the left-to-right width of the path-forming means, allowing a pair of path-forming means to be configured symmetrically with a reduced left-to-right width.

Gaming machine C8 is any of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

Gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, makes it easier for the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front.

Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines C1 to C8, the path configuration means comprises a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving manner of gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

Gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C8, has a configuration in which the first and second receiving means are capable of receiving gaming balls at all times. Furthermore, the benefits obtained by the player vary depending on the manner in which the first and second receiving means receive gaming balls, thereby increasing the player's attention to the gaming balls.

The manner in which game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Furthermore, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

Gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the profits obtained by a player in gaming machine C9 change depending on whether gaming balls are received by only one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C9, gaming machine C10 makes it easier for players to launch gaming balls in a predetermined launch pattern by setting the amount of profit that can be obtained by the player.

The benefits that a player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it could be the ease of recognizing the game balls as they flow down, or a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls as they flow down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

Gaming machine C11 is a gaming machine C9 or C10, characterized in that the path configuration means is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and second receiving means to the passed means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C9 and C10, gaming machine C11 reduces the likelihood of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether gaming balls are primarily fired from the left or right side.

Gaming machine C12 is any one of gaming machines C9 to C11, characterized in that the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which game balls cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape or state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C9 to C11, gaming machine C12 changes the acceptance state depending on the shape or state change mode of the acceptance state change means, thereby reducing the impact that the player's level of skill in firing gaming balls has on the profits they can obtain.

Gaming machine C13 is a gaming machine C12, characterized in that the state change mode of the acceptance state change means is configured in multiple types.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C12, gaming machine C13 can change the manner in which gaming balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, even when gaming balls are being released in a fixed manner. This allows the player to adjust the profits they can obtain based on the manner in which the state of the receiving state change means changes.

<Key points about the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction of the ball flow>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which gaming balls can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which gaming balls cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement that occurs during the state change is along the direction in which the gaming balls flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a special prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the special prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without affecting the rolling of the game balls, leaving room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, with gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so by displacing the state switching means when the gaming ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means, it is possible to affect the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This improves the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, sliding the state switching means to the right with the gaming ball on top of it will apply a load to the gaming ball that will cause it to rotate in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, sliding the state switching means to the left with the gaming ball on top of it will apply a load to the gaming ball that causes it to rotate in the opposite direction of its rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the gaming ball.

Furthermore, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, thereby causing complex and irregular changes in the way the game ball flows down.

These effects on the flow of the game balls can be varied to change the flow of the balls that are on the state switching means when the state switching means is opened or closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it flows downward and collides with the gaming ball.

The direction of the closing action of the state switching means, which is displaced in a manner that causes a collision with a gaming ball, is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to perform a closing action in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the gaming ball, thereby bouncing the gaming ball back, or it may be configured to perform a closing action in the same direction as the flow direction of the gaming ball, thereby restricting the introduction of subsequent gaming balls with little resistance.

Gaming machine XA2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XA1, gaming machine XA2 can cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XA3 is characterized in that the state switching means in gaming machine XA1 or XA2 is equipped with a change means that changes the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XA1 and XA2, gaming machine XA3 can release the load applied by the gaming ball while the state switching means is being displaced, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Key points about the opening and closing device that allows balls to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which gaming balls can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which gaming balls cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide gaming balls in a first direction in the introduction state and to be able to guide gaming balls in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a large prize component 300 that can configure multiple paths for game balls to flow toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, while the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball, allowing it to fall freely and not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to provide a part (such as a frame) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball. This poses a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) required to guide the game ball.

In contrast, with gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide gaming balls in different directions depending on whether they are in the introduced state or the non-introduced state, eliminating the need for dedicated components to guide the flow path of gaming balls, thereby reducing the number of required components (components). This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of gaming balls in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to a gaming ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only slight displacement of the gaming ball can be recognized before it is guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins.

The location of the guide section that causes the state switching means to provide guidance is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section around the state switching means, and the movement of the movable member may switch the state so that the gaming ball approaches or easily contacts the guide section.

When a guide section is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after the state has been switched between the introduced state and the non-introduced state, but also takes into consideration the impact on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, if the state switching means is equipped with a movable member that displaces in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the gaming ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) that slopes in the flow direction, rather than providing a flat wall portion that is perpendicular to the flow direction, makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the gaming ball becomes large in the direction that causes the gaming ball to flow backward. This makes it easier to avoid the gaming ball flowing backward.

Gaming machine XB2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means occurs due to displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB1, gaming machine XB2 can reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied by the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections that can respectively receive gaming balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and second direction are configured symmetrically in each pair of guide sections.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB1 or XB2, gaming machine XB3 can complicate the path along which gaming balls flow. Furthermore, because the first and second directions of the pair of guide sections are configured to be symmetrical on the left and right, the displacement of the state switching means caused by the load received by the pair of guide sections from the gaming balls can be made symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means, for example, when placing approximately equal numbers of game balls into a pair of left and right paths, depending on the load received by the game balls on the guide section.

Gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XB3, gaming machine XB4 reduces the contact area with other components using the protruding portion, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XB5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a contact means configured to be able to contact the state switching means when it is in the introduced or unintroduced state, and that the left-right displacement of the state switching means can be corrected by contact with the contact means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XB3 and XB4, gaming machine XB5 can receive load from the gaming ball from either the left or right direction, so the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine D1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the visible surface changes, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured so that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are configured so that the rotating base 214 located at the tip of the base arm 220 can rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 rotates and displaces, the surface visible to the player remains the same, making it difficult to maintain attention on the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is designed so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to displacement, allowing attention to be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the relative displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can change the appearance of the displacement means, thereby increasing the attention drawn to the displacement means.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the predetermined displacement in gaming machine D1 includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection point where they are gathered, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection point.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 makes it easier to dynamically generate relative movement between the first and second displacement members. In other words, when using only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly point, the displacement between the first and second displacement members tends to be reduced at the terminal ends, which are the shortest or longest distances from the assembly point, causing the first and second displacement members to appear stationary, potentially reducing the visual effect. However, by incorporating the second displacement, it is possible to generate rotational displacement even at the terminal ends, thereby improving the visual effect.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, the predetermined displacement includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 reverses the surface visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

Gaming machine D4 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D3, characterized in that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesive, and the load related to this fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

With gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixation.

For example, when driving force is transmitted by gears, if shape deformation is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change in the component due to that load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the component's displacement.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, the effect of the fixation differs depending on the visible side, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side that the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and easily visible as a single unit, while the other surface can be more easily viewed as a loosely joined surface that is easily displaced relative to one another.

Furthermore, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion between the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to create states in which the degree of fixation between the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the attraction is achieved is not limited in any way. For example, it may be attached with adhesive tape, or it may utilize the attraction force between a magnet and a metal part. Furthermore, the first and second reversing members may be designed to utilize, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attracted to the magnet.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in both forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and in the second displacement mode, displaces in the first displacement mode after displacing in a predetermined mode.

Gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, is configured so that the displacement mode of the displacement means differs between forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, thereby reducing the amount of displacement required by the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. This reduces the attention drawn to the displacement means when retracting, thereby relatively increasing the attention drawn to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In previous models, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending to the performance position (a position in front of the LCD display area) to perform the performance, it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retracting to the retracted position (a position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that attention would be drawn to the component retracting from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be rotational displacement or linear displacement. Furthermore, the displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine D5 is equipped with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance exceeds a predetermined amount.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can change the displacement mode of the displacement means by varying the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D7 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D6, and is equipped with a light-emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means, the displacement means comprising the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to change the visibility of the light from the light-emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D6, gaming machine D7 can change the appearance of the displacement means in relation to the light from the light-emitting means, depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member appear to be emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member appear to be emitting light together.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is equipped with a detection means for detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which displacement of the displacement means is permissible, thereby preventing the displacement means from colliding with surrounding structures during displacement.

In addition, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out after a certain amount of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to when the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

Gaming machine D9 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D7, and is equipped with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D9 achieves the same effects as gaming machines D1 to D7, but also reduces the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means can be exemplified. For example, they may be values for the position or posture of each of the different movable members, or they may be values related to changes in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, the placement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by placing the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to construct a structure that detects the placement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

Gaming machine D10 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, which are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface facing the other side; when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, but when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain a high level of anticipation among players for the occurrence of a reversal action, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points to change the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having multiple visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface that are configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be able to switch between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversible inversion unit 71, which allows the appearance seen by the player to be changed by changing the surface that is visible (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the inversion unit 71 is inverted while remaining in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface that is visible. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible, depending on the position, so the line of sight of a player who wishes to view either the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the displacement means' change in position.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that gaming machine E1 is equipped with an opening that opens to allow the displacement means to be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 allows a player looking through the opening to the far side to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine E2 is positioned closer to the rear when it is positioned on the edge of the opening than when it is positioned in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 allows the displacement means to be clearly visible from the front when placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when placed on the edge of the open section. This allows for both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for players who have to follow the displacement means with their eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is one of gaming machines E1 to E3, characterized in that the displacement means has multiple sets of the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces, and when the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces of one set are visible, the first visible surfaces and the second visible surfaces of the other sets are difficult to see.

Gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 to E3, has different letters and figures for each set on the first and second visible surfaces, allowing players viewing the displacement means to see different letters and figures. Furthermore, by making the first and second visible surfaces of sets that are not intended to be visible difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the displacement means having an unsightly appearance.

For example, if the first set displays characters or graphics on the first and second visible surfaces indicating a low likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or graphics on the first and second visible surfaces indicating a high likelihood of the lottery result being a jackpot, the level of likelihood of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the placement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of likelihood of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of likelihood of a jackpot can continue to be visible to players who have taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

However, there are no limitations on how the display can be made less visible. For example, it may be placed on a surface opposite the player's side (the rear side, the left or right outer surface, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by being shielded with a shielding means.

Gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the operation of switching the pair of the first visible surface and the second visible surface in gaming machine E4 is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

Gaming machine E5 makes it easier to avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that is visible in gaming machine E4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a portion of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other portion and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark portion to make them difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to face backward so that only one of a portion of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is visible, and the other portion is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the portion and the other portion are simultaneously visible but are positioned differently.

Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that gaming machine E5 is provided with an opening that opens the displacement means so that it can be seen, and the switching operation is performed when the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, thereby increasing attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is a gaming machine E5 or E6, characterized in that during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

Gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E5 and E6, makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making part of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

Gaming machine E8 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E7, and is equipped with a second displacement means configured to block at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state, together with the second displacement means, to make the first visible surface visible.

Gaming machine E8 achieves the same effects as any of gaming machines E1 to E7, but also improves the design freedom of the position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, characterized in that the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 to E8, gaming machine E9 changes the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, allowing the player to freely change the surface that is easily visible, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

Gaming machine E10 is a gaming machine E9, characterized in that the posture of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E9, gaming machine E10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it is equipped with an auxiliary means that can be arranged in proximity to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged in proximity to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E9 and E10, gaming machine E11 can position the auxiliary means close to the displacement means, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit, or as separate units, allowing the displacement means to give the player multiple different impressions.

The type of auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a fixedly positioned means or a movable means.

Gaming machine E12 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is visually recognized separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, gaming machine E12 allows you to switch between viewing the displacement means and auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible modes relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs in the sections>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be able to control the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during displacement of the displacement means.

Among gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating device 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force to rotate the rotating device 211, and is configured so that the rotating device 211 can rotate independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the rotating device 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating device 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting could cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotating device 211 is assumed to be rotated while the base arm 220 is stopped, resulting in a low degree of freedom in its displacement.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of displaceable parts.

In contrast, with gaming machine F1, the placement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and these two support points are configured to displace relative to one another while the displacement means is being displaced. The support means is capable of controlling the placement of the second part relative to the first part, so the placement means can be stably supported while being displaced while the displacement means is being displaced. This allows for greater design freedom in the displacement of the placement means (displaceable part).

The type of support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

Gaming machine F2 is characterized in that in gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second portion is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second portion is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and the direction in which the second portion displaces in the first range is different from the direction in which the second portion displaces in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the placement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, making it possible to smoothly displace the placement means even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

Gaming machine F3 is a gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the support means is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can limit the displacement of the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges. This makes it easier to stop the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges when displacing the second portion from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement.

Note that there are no limitations on the type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

The type of limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second section, or it may be configured to switch the displacement direction of the second section.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is positioned closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the placement means with respect to the displacement means in the second section is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the placement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 can create a section where the relative displacement of the placement means relative to the displacement means becomes smaller at a midpoint in the displacement of the displacement means. This makes it possible to create positions where the displacement means and placement means can be easily viewed together in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of positions where the displacement means and placement means can be easily viewed together.

Gaming machine F5 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to change the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion relative to the displacement speed of the first portion.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F4, gaming machine F5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the placement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant. Therefore, simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means can be used to create an action presentation in which the displacement speed of the placement means is variable.

Gaming machine F6 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of its displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 to F5, gaming machine F6 can prevent the second part from bouncing back, making it easier to stop the placement means early at the end of the displacement.

There are no particular limitations on the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back. For example, it may be configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion displaces a predetermined unit length), or it may be configured to restrict the displacement of the second portion by using geometrical design techniques such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stationary.

In addition to methods that reduce the displacement of the second portion, it is also possible to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, a load may be applied to the displacement end of the second portion using magnetic force or the like to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be increased using the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

Gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the support means in gaming machine F6 is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F6, gaming machine F7 has a support means that functions to guide the displacement of the second part in conjunction with the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

Gaming machine F8 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it includes a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arranging means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount corresponding to the relative displacement of the arranging means with respect to the displacement means.

Gaming machine F8 not only achieves the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F7, but also allows for complex effects to be produced by the supported means that displaces in conjunction with the placement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, it may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or it may be displaced in a manner (for example, rotational displacement around a predetermined axis) different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

Note that there are no limitations on the manner in which the mounting means is displaced. For example, it may be a change in posture, or it may be displacement while maintaining its posture.

Gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine F8, while the first portion displaces in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section that can move back and forth in a direction that intersects with the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, gaming machine F9 can achieve a configuration in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part relative to the first part changes back (for example, increases and then decreases) while the first part is displacing, thereby realizing a displacement configuration in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

Gaming machine F10 is a gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the mounting means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F8 and F9, gaming machine F10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means the same as that of the displacement means, sandwiched between the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

Gaming machine F11 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines F1 to F10, the placement means includes a position change means that changes its position so that the side facing the player is switched between the first side and the second side as the placement means itself is displaced, and the position change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of displacement, the first side or the second side faces the player.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F10, gaming machine F11 faces the first or second surface of the position change means toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second portion has reached the end of its displacement, making it easy to understand the end of the presentation action by the displacement means.

Gaming machine F12 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F11, and is configured so that electrical wiring is inserted into the placement means through the second part, and is equipped with placement means in which the electrical wiring is placed and fixed to the second part, the placement means having an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with surrounding parts formed around it.

Gaming machine F12 not only achieves the same effects as gaming machines F1 to F11, but also prevents electrical wiring from coming into contact with surrounding areas.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

<Characteristics AA group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition; a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining the second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means; and a gaming machine AA1 characterized in that the gaming machine AA1 further comprises: a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the second identification information; and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to enhance the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and then executing the presentation mode determined based on the lottery results (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above have the problem that players quickly become bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

With gaming machine AA1, the presentation mode executed during the period when the second identification information is dynamically displayed varies depending on the number of stored pieces of second information. This makes it possible to execute presentations that correspond to the number of subsequent dynamic displays of the second identification information that can be executed. Even if the second identification information indicating a specific second determination result is not displayed, this keeps the player interested in the game, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

With gaming machine AA2, the execution of a specific second dynamic display mode can motivate the player to store the second information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of stored second information has ended.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 and AA2, gaming machine AA3 is configured so that the presentation can be executed across the dynamic display period of the second identification information, which is executed multiple times in succession, thereby increasing interest by making multiple second dynamic display modes appear as a single dynamic display.

Any of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, comprising a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until the specific condition is met, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition will be met before the specific condition is met. Gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the results of the pre-determination means.

Gaming machine AA4 has the same effects as gaming machines AA1 to AA3, but also has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information by selecting a specific presentation mode based on the results of a prior determination of whether specific conditions that will make it easier to obtain the second information have been met.

<Features AB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition; a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means; a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means; a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition; a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means; a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining the second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means; and a gaming machine AB1 characterized in that the gaming machine AB1 has a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, wherein the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of second information stored in the second information storage means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to enhance the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and then executing the presentation mode determined based on the lottery results (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above have the problem that players quickly become bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information. This makes it possible to determine not only the result of the first determination, but also information indicating that the second determination can be executed from the presentation mode, thereby effectively preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on.

Gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of second information items and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 has the advantage of being able to execute a variety of presentation modes, as the presentation mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution.

Gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one that executes a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information that is executed thereafter.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 or AB2, gaming machine AB3 has the advantage that, if second information is stored, dynamic display of second identification information begins after the currently executed first identification information ends, and a presentation mode related to this second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of second identification information begins, thereby making it possible to make the player aware early on that the dynamic display of second identification information, which is executed with priority, will begin.

Any of gaming machines AB1 to AB3 includes a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until the specific condition is met, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition will be met before the specific condition is met. Gaming machine AB4 is characterized in that the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

Gaming machine AB4 has the same effects as gaming machines AB1 to AB3, but also has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information by selecting a specific presentation mode based on the results of a prior determination of whether a specific condition that will trigger the acquisition of the second information has been met.

<Feature AC group> (Use special chart 1 change effect as a pseudo effect of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means being a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means being a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect to indicate the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being made; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect to indicate the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being made, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to execute the second effect of an effect pattern that includes at least a specific effect pattern that is likely to be executed during the effect period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is met.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to enhance the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and then executing the presentation mode determined based on the lottery results (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above have the problem that players quickly become bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

With gaming machine AC1, the first effect can be executed as an effect to indicate the result of the second determination, which has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine AC1, the second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in an effect mode that includes at least a display mode indicating the result of the first determination as the effect mode of the first effect.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 can execute a second effect using a display mode that indicates the result of the first determination, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine AC2, the second effect execution means executes a second effect mode for indicating the result of the second determination within a single effect indicating the result of the second determination, and the second effect mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AC2, gaming machine AC3 has the effect of being able to execute more unexpected effects.

<Feature AD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal wins)
a first determination means capable of performing a first determination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first identification symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first determination result by the first determination means, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second identification symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second determination result by the second determination means, and a bonus awarding means capable of awarding an advantageous bonus to a player when the first identification symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first determination result or when the second identification symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second determination result, The gaming machine AD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is displayed as a stopped combination, and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is displayed as a stopped combination, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are displayed as a stopped combination that can be either the first specific combination or the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot using a combination of multiple symbols, and then awarding different bonuses depending on the type of symbol displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, with the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up combinations that do not award a lower reward than the player's desired reward are displayed in a static state, which can cause the player to lose interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase player interest.

With gaming machine AD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed after passing through multiple reach display modes, which has the effect of prolonging the anticipation of both the combination corresponding to the first benefit and the combination corresponding to the second benefit being displayed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first determination result is obtained during the specific period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1, gaming machine AD2 has the effect of making it easier to anticipate that the second benefit will be awarded even when the first determination is made during the specific period, because a specific combination is displayed via a multiple reach display mode, even during the specific period when the first benefit is determined by the determination means.

Gaming machine AD3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second determination result is obtained during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second identification symbol is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second identification symbols in the specific combination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD2, gaming machine AD3 has the effect of allowing a player to quickly recognize that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be awarded whenever a specific second judgment result is obtained during a specific period.

<Feature AE group> (Break ED control when hitting probability)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when a specific bonus game is executed; a setting means for setting a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is met; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by combining a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the advantageous game state are configured in the same period.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a winning game is determined by a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting entry slot. Different winning games are played depending on the type of winning game. During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area, which can be changed between a possible and a difficult state for the gaming ball to enter, is changed to a possible entry state, and when the gaming ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game becomes advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, with the conventional gaming machines described above, even when a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, which increases the control load on the notification control.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load.

With gaming machine AE1, by setting the second suggestive mode to the same period, the period for displaying the suggestive mode is prevented from varying, while the mode suggested by the ball entering a specific area is set, which has the effect of facilitating notification control of the suggestive mode at the end of bonus play and reducing the control load.

Gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that it comprises: a suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in accordance with the type of bonus game being executed when the bonus game is executed in gaming machine AE1; and a switching means for switching the second suggestion mode, which is set when a gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 has the advantage of being able to suppress control load concentration at the end of bonus play by switching to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal game state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode, even when configured to set the suggestion mode at the start to suppress control load concentration at the end of bonus play. This has the effect of suppressing control load and enabling correct suggestions to be executed.

<Feature AF group> (ED period of different lengths depending on the type of jackpot)
A gaming machine AF1 is characterized by comprising: a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a bonus game type determination means capable of determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to enhance the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and then executing the presentation mode determined based on the lottery results (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above have the problem that players quickly become bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

With gaming machine AF1, different periods can be set depending on the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means in gaming machine AF1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF1, gaming machine AF2 can execute specific effects at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is met during the execution of the bonus game in gaming machine AF1 or AF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can also vary the length of the period when a variable condition is met during bonus play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature AG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a gaming ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting a game state that is advantageous to the player based on the gaming ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to enhance the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and then executing the presentation mode determined based on the lottery results (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above have the problem that players quickly become bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

With gaming machine AG1, it is possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether the gaming ball passes through a specific area during bonus play or not, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period in addition to gaming machine AG1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG1, gaming machine AG2 can execute specific effects within a specific period of time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that the specific effects of gaming machine AG2 include at least a notification mode for notifying the player of the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

With gaming machine AG3, the specific effects include a notification mode, which has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature AH Group> (Button operation restriction control)
A gaming machine AH1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, characterized in that it has an operation means that can be operated by a player, a setting execution means that can execute a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a restriction means that restricts the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means if a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

Conventionally, many machines have been designed to notify (display a static display) of the results of a special symbol lottery after a specified special symbol variation period has been completed, and various effects (variation effects) are performed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is completed to when the result of the lottery is displayed (special symbol variation period), in order to prevent players from becoming bored of the game too quickly. Among these machines, there are some that have multiple presentation modes prepared in advance, and are configured so that the type of variation effect performed during the special symbol variation period differs for each presentation mode.

In gaming machines configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to players by switching presentation modes, preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on due to being presented with the same variable effects over and over again. Furthermore, some gaming machines allow players to freely switch presentation modes by operating operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A). In such gaming machines, players can select the presentation mode that interests them most from among multiple presentation modes, preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on due to a variable effect that they find less interesting being executed. Furthermore, since players must operate the operating means themselves to switch presentation modes, this increases the enjoyment of the game.

However, as mentioned above, if the player were allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, immediately before the results of the special symbol lottery are statically displayed or when a short period of variation is set as the special symbol variation period, the switching of the presentation mode would make it difficult for the player to grasp the results of the special symbol lottery, which could reduce the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

With gaming machine AH1, if certain conditions are met during the dynamic display period of the identification information, it is possible to restrict the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by operating the operating means.

Gaming machine AH2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AH1, dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, gaming state setting means is capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is met, and the specific condition is set such that the setting of the short gaming state is at least one of the conditions for being met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AH1, gaming machine AH2 can restrict the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during short play, thereby preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the determination results of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AH3 is characterized by having a presentation mode setting means that can set at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the settings executed by the setting execution means in gaming machine AH1 or AH2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AH1 and AH2, gaming machine AH3 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

AH4 is characterized in that any one of gaming machines AH1 to AH3 has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the restriction means is configured to prevent the setting execution means from executing the setting based on operation of the operation means when the specific condition is set, thereby allowing the specific setting to be executed by the specific setting means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, gaming machine AH4 has the effect of making operation of the operating means a meaningful act by executing a specific setting even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during a period when a specific condition is met, by providing the player who operated the operating means with an action resulting from operating the operating means.

Gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that it includes a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect that can suggest information about the identification information that is displayed in a static state before the identification information is displayed in a static state based on the specific setting.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AH4, gaming machine AH5 has the advantage that, when certain conditions are met, the information on the identification information that is displayed in a stopped state can be identified before the stopped state is displayed through suggestive effects, and by operating the machine when certain conditions are met, a variety of effects can be executed, preventing the player from quickly becoming bored.

<Feature AI group> (notifying advantageous periods spanning multiple game states)
In a gaming machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state and is different from the second game state, the game state setting means is capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means has ended, a third game state can be set when a first setting condition is established while a skill state is set, and the first game state can be set when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is established while the third game state is set; and when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, the game machine AI1 has an advantageous period determination means for determining an advantageous period based on the period until the second setting condition is established, and an informing means for informing of the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determination means.

Conventionally, when a favorable gaming state (for example, a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period for which that favorable gaming state will continue (number of special symbol variations). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period for which the favorable gaming state will continue, and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special symbol lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more special symbol lotteries can be executed during the currently set favorable gaming state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines allow players to set multiple advantageous game states, such as a first advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second advantageous game state (e.g., a special chance state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) is set, it is possible to notify the player of the period (remaining period) that the first advantageous gaming state will continue for, but there is a problem in that it is not possible to notify the player of which gaming state will be set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player is unable to know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set. This makes it difficult for the player to know what they should aim for during the first advantageous gaming state, which reduces their motivation to play.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by motivating them to play.

With gaming machine AI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, the notification means notifies the player of the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again. Therefore, even in gaming machines that have multiple gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the player can know the period during which a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AI2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AI1, it has a suggestion effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect to suggest the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in effect.

Gaming machine AI2 can notify the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, while also suggesting the currently set gaming state, which has the effect of making the player interested in the content of the suggestive effects that are executed and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AI2, the suggestion effect execution means is also capable of executing a past suggestion effect to suggest the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

With gaming machine AI3, the suggestion effect execution means can suggest to the player the game state that was previously set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game, as it is possible to predict the current game state based on the content of past suggestion effects and analyze past gameplay during advantageous periods.

Gaming machine AI4 is characterized in that in gaming machine AI2 or AI3, the notification means is capable of displaying a remaining period display mode on the display means to indicate the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the suggestion effect execution means is capable of suggesting the currently set game state or a game state that was set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

With gaming machine AI4, suggestive effects regarding the game status are executed by varying the remaining period display mode that indicates the remaining advantageous period, which has the effect of making suggestive effects easy to understand for players who are closely watching the remaining advantageous period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AI5 is any one of gaming machines AI1 to AI4, characterized by having a second suggestion presentation means that can suggest the timing when the first set condition may be met when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

Gaming machine AI5 allows players to predict when the game state will change during advantageous periods, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored of playing during advantageous periods too early.

Gaming machine AI6 is any one of gaming machines AI1 to AI5, characterized in that it has an advantage notification means capable of notifying the player of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, between the second gaming state and the third gaming state.

Gaming machine AI6 allows players to understand the relative merits of multiple game states that are set during the advantageous period, which can increase interest by predicting which game state is currently set.

<Feature AJ group> (variably displaying one symbol row with multiple symbol display control)
A gaming machine AJ1 has a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a player a bonus that is advantageous to the player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row consisting of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row consisting of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.

Conventionally, some gaming machines display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of a special symbol lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417). Furthermore, some gaming machines execute various effects (variation effects) while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery and encouraging players to play while anticipating a jackpot. Furthermore, some general gaming machines use multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 through 9) to form a single symbol row, execute a variable symbol display using multiple (e.g., three) of these symbol rows, and execute an effect (e.g., reach effect) that increases the likelihood of a jackpot win when a specific third symbol stops and appears in a specific position in a symbol row other than the single symbol row. In this way, by using multiple symbol rows to variably display the third symbol while executing a variable effect to indicate whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, the player's expectations of winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, conventional gaming machines only change the third symbol displayed for each symbol row, without changing the order of the symbols that make up the symbol row. This means that the only variations available are, for example, changing the speed at which each symbol row changes, the direction in which each symbol row changes, or the size at which each symbol row is displayed. This creates a problem in that there is a need for further enhancements to the entertainment value of games by further enhancing the effect of the change effects that use the changing display of symbol rows.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

With gaming machine AJ1, the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in different directions, making it easier to distinguish between the first and second symbol rows, and making the results of the distinction easier to determine from the suggestive information.

Gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed in gaming machine AJ1, the first symbol string is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol string is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition, in a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol string and the symbols constituting the second symbol string at least partially overlap.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ1, gaming machine AJ2 dynamically displays the first and second symbol rows at overlapping positions, enabling the effective use of the display area to be used to create effects.

Gaming machine AJ3 is characterized in that gaming machine AJ2 has a dynamic display period determination means that determines a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first and second symbol rows are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ2, gaming machine AJ3 has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game, as the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

Gaming machine AJ4 is any one of gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, and is characterized in that it has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol string so as to display the determination result according to the display mode of the first symbol string.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ3, gaming machine AJ4 displays the results of the determination using the display mode of the first symbol row. This allows the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row to be controlled based on the determination results, making it possible to freely set the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the dynamic display of suggestive information and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AJ4 has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, and the gaming machine is configured so that at least a portion of the first display area on the first display image layer and the second display area on the second display image layer overlap, and where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so that it is visible to the player in priority to the second symbol row.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ4, gaming machine AJ5 displays the first symbol row so that it is more visible to the player when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap. This has the effect of effectively utilizing the display area while also displaying the display mode showing the determination result in a way that is easy for the player to understand.

Gaming machine AJ6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AJ4 or AJ5, the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row so that the multiple symbols constituting the first symbol row and the multiple symbols constituting the second symbol row are arranged in a predetermined order to form a combined symbol row.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AJ4 and AJ5, gaming machine AJ6 can dynamically display the first and second symbol rows as a combined symbol row, making the player believe that a combined symbol row is formed. Furthermore, the first and second symbol rows can be dynamically displayed in opposite directions, providing the player with a surprising presentation and enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AJ7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AJ6, the display control means is capable of display control so that it is easier to dynamically display the first and second symbol rows as the combined symbol row when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ6, gaming machine AJ7 makes it more difficult for the first and second symbol strings to be dynamically displayed as a combined symbol string when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first symbol string and the dynamic display of the second symbol string are different in form, it is possible to increase anticipation for a specific discrimination result, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Feature AK group> (V-sure machine velocity control is performed based on the number of attacking balls)
a first detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first specific area; a second detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second specific area; a guide path for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and a variable means for varying the second specific area between an allowable state in which game balls can pass and a restricted state in which game balls cannot pass, wherein the variable means is configured to vary the second specific area from an allowable state in which game balls can pass through to a restricted state in which game balls cannot pass, based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means, until a variable condition is met.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines (so-called V-sure machines) that provide a specific area within an attacker that opens during a jackpot game, and when a gaming ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, set a high probability state after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such gaming machines, the probability of setting the high probability state can be determined in advance by setting a first state, in which the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific area, for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game.

However, with conventional gaming machines, the first state is set based on the amount of time that has elapsed since a jackpot was hit. This means that, for example, if a malfunction occurs with the gaming machine during a jackpot game that prevents the gaming ball from landing in the attacker, the predetermined period for setting the first state may pass, causing the player to lose interest in playing.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by motivating them to play.

According to gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement results of gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, making it possible to pass gaming balls into the second specific area depending on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, thereby having the effect of making the player interested in the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AK2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AK1, the variable means is changed to the permissible state during a period in which the predetermined number of gaming balls in the first specific area can reach the variable means in the state changed to the permissible state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AK1, gaming machine AK2 makes it possible to cause a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through a first specific area to enter a second specific area, thereby controlling gaming balls that pass through the second specific area and limiting the number of balls that enter the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK3 is characterized in that it is one of the gaming machines AK1 and AK2, and has a period determination means capable of determining the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the first specific area until the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AK1 and AK2, gaming machine AK3 has the advantage of being able to detect malfunctions early, such as when a predetermined number of gaming balls have passed through the first specific area but are still stuck on the guideway.

Gaming machine AK4 is any one of gaming machines AK1 to AK3, characterized in that the termination condition is set to be met when a period of time shorter than the period of time it takes for the next gaming ball to reach the variable means has elapsed after the predetermined number of gaming balls have been detected by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AK1 to AK3, gaming machine AK4 has the effect of ensuring that the predetermined number of gaming balls land in the second specific area.

A gaming machine AK5 is any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK4, characterized in that it has a bonus awarding means that can award a bonus that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AK1 to AK4, gaming machine AK5 has the effect of creating motivation to get the gaming ball into the second specific area even when a bonus game is played, thereby preventing bonus games from becoming boring.

<Feature AL group> (By changing the pattern row, some of the patterns in the pattern row are switched)
a dynamic display means for determining a dynamic display period that includes at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a setting means for setting the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means so that during a first period, a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern to indicate a first result, and during a second period, at least a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed to indicate a second result different from the first result.

Conventionally, some gaming machines display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of a special symbol lottery. Furthermore, various effects (variation effects) are executed while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery and encouraging players to play while anticipating a jackpot. Furthermore, some general gaming machines use multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 through 9) to form a single symbol row, and execute a variable symbol display using multiple (e.g., three) of these symbol rows. When a specific third symbol stops and appears in a specific position in a symbol row other than the single symbol row, an effect (e.g., a reach effect) is executed to increase the likelihood of winning a jackpot. By executing a variable effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot while displaying a variable third symbol using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectations of winning a jackpot are gradually increased, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

However, with conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This creates a problem in that players can become bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in motivation to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

With gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, thereby maintaining the player's interest in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AL2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AL1, the dynamic display means is capable of statically displaying the first identification symbol at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period that extends at least after the first period has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL1, gaming machine AL2 can easily notify the player that the first period has ended and the second period has begun, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AL3 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL2, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification symbol to indicate that the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL2, gaming machine AL3 can notify the player of the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, allowing players who want to quickly understand the determination result of the determination means to focus on the dynamic display of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine AL4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AL3, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the second result, the second identification symbol to indicate the benefit type determined by the benefit type determination means.

Gaming machine AL4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AL3. That is, after the end of the second period, an identification symbol indicating the bonus type can be displayed. In other words, after displaying the determination result of the determination means, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be notified to the player, which has the effect of enabling the dynamic display of the second period to be executed with at least a sense of security that bonus play will be executed.

Gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL4, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification symbol is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL4, gaming machine AL5 has the effect of allowing the player to predict the selected bonus means even while the second identification symbol is being dynamically displayed, as the display mode of the second identification symbol indicates the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine AL6 has a symbol string setting means capable of setting a symbol string in which the plurality of identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification symbols based on the symbol string set by the symbol string setting means, and the symbol string setting means is capable of setting a second symbol string in which the first identification symbol forming at least a part of the first symbol string set during a first period is switched to the second identification symbol.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AL5, gaming machine AL6 sets a second symbol row in which the first identification symbol forming at least part of the first symbol row is switched to a second identification symbol, so the number of identification symbols in the first symbol row can be made the same as the number of identification symbols in the second symbol row. Therefore, there is no need to vary the dynamic display mode of the identification symbols executed by the dynamic display means depending on the type of symbol row being set, which has the effect of reducing the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification symbols.

Gaming machine AL7 is characterized in that in gaming machine AL6, the symbol row setting means is capable of forming the first symbol row by overlapping first identification symbols to indicate the same discrimination result of the discrimination means, and when setting the second symbol row, one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

With gaming machine AL7, first identification symbols that are duplicated in the first symbol string are switched to second identification symbols, so even during the second period, it is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols that were displayed in the dynamic display executed during the first period. This has the effect of providing players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

<Feature AM group> (Release the restriction by another operation while the button operation is being restricted)
a setting execution means for executing a setting based on the determination result of the operation determination means; and a restriction means for restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the operation is the first operation, wherein the setting execution means is capable of executing the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the operation is the second operation during the restriction by the restriction means.

Conventionally, many machines have been designed to notify (display a static display) of the results of a special symbol lottery after a predetermined special symbol variation period has been completed, and various effects (variation effects) are performed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is completed to when the result of the lottery is statically displayed (special symbol variation period), in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, some machines are designed to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance and vary the type of variation effect performed during the special symbol variation period for each presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

In gaming machines configured in this way, different variable effects can be provided to players by switching presentation modes, preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on due to being presented with the same variable effects over and over again. Furthermore, some gaming machines allow players to freely switch presentation modes by operating operating means that can be operated by the player. In such gaming machines, players can select the presentation mode that interests them most from among multiple presentation modes, preventing players from becoming bored of the game early on due to a variable effect that they find less interesting being executed. Furthermore, since players themselves must operate the operating means to switch presentation modes, this increases the player's interest in the game.

However, as mentioned above, if the player were allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, immediately before the results of the special symbol lottery are statically displayed or when a short period of variation is set as the special symbol variation period, the switching of the presentation mode would make it difficult for the player to grasp the results of the special symbol lottery, which could reduce the player's motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

With gaming machine AM1, even when the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be executed by performing the second operation. This has the effect of encouraging players to operate the operating means in an attempt to execute various operations.

Gaming machine AM2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AM1, the setting execution means is capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed during the regulation by the regulation means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM1, gaming machine AM2 executes the second setting when the first operation is performed during regulation, thereby preventing situations in which the setting execution means does nothing despite the first operation being performed. This has the effect of encouraging players to operate the operation means.

Gaming machine AM3 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in either AM1 or AM2, and a game state setting means for setting a short game state in which the dynamic display period determination means is likely to determine a short dynamic display period until an end condition is met, and the restriction means is capable of restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the short game state is set and the operation determination means determines that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AM1 and AM2, gaming machine AM3 can restrict the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during short play, preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the determination results of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AM4 is characterized by having a presentation mode setting means that can set at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the settings executed by the setting execution means in gaming machine AM3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM3, gaming machine AM4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine AM5 is any one of gaming machines AM1 to AM4, characterized in that the operating means has a first operating unit for performing the first operation and a second operating unit, different from the first operating unit, for performing the second operation.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AM1 to AM4, gaming machine AM5 operates different control units when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, which prevents players from accidentally performing the first operation instead of the second operation. This has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AM6 is characterized in that the second operating unit in gaming machine AM5 is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operating unit.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AM5, gaming machine AM6 differs in ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to designate a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing players from having to worry about which operation to perform.

<Feature AN group> (Execute different operations while limiting button operations)
A gaming machine AN1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, characterized in having: an operation means operable by a player; a first setting execution means capable of executing a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means; a restriction means for restricting the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means; and a second setting execution means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated while the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restriction means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of a special symbol lottery. Furthermore, various effects (variation effects) are executed while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery and encouraging players to play while anticipating a jackpot. Furthermore, some general gaming machines use multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 through 9) to form a single symbol row, and execute a variable symbol display using multiple (e.g., three) of these symbol rows. When a specific third symbol stops and appears in a specific position in a symbol row other than the single symbol row, an effect (e.g., a reach effect) is executed to increase the likelihood of winning a jackpot. By executing a variable effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot while displaying a variable third symbol using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectations of winning a jackpot are gradually increased, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

However, with conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This creates a problem in that players can become bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in motivation to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

With gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, thereby maintaining the player's interest in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the player's interest in the game.

With gaming machine AN1, if the operating means is operated while the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, which prevents situations where nothing is executed despite the operating means being operated. This has the effect of encouraging players to operate the operating means.

Gaming machine AN2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AN1, the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of the first setting when specific conditions are met during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN1, gaming machine AN2 has the effect of preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the dynamic display of the identification information because the regulating means regulates the execution of the first setting while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed.

Gaming machine AN3 is characterized in that it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a game state setting means for setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is met, and the restriction means is capable of restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the short game state is set and the operation determination means determines that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AN1 and AN2, gaming machine AN3 can restrict the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, thereby preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the determination results of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing a game that is easy for players to understand.

Gaming machine AN4 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means that can set at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN3, gaming machine AN4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine AM5 is any one of gaming machines AN1 to AN4, characterized in that the operating means has a first operating unit for performing a first operation, and a second operating unit different from the first operating unit for performing a second operation different from the first operation.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AN1 to AN4, gaming machine AN5 operates different operating units when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, which prevents players from accidentally performing the first operation instead of the second operation. This has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AN6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AN5, the second operating unit is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operating unit.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AN5, gaming machine AN6 differs in ease of operation for each operation unit, making it possible to designate a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing players from having to worry about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic AO group> (If you change stages when it is difficult to do so, it is a chance)
A gaming machine AO1 has a display means for displaying identification information indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine also has an operation means that can be operated by a player, a presentation mode setting means that can set at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode as presentation modes based on the operation of the operation means, and a period setting means that can set a first period during which the presentation mode setting means can set the presentation mode, and a second period during which it is more difficult to set the presentation mode than the first period, and the gaming machine is characterized in that if the presentation mode is set during the second period, more advantageous information can be provided to the player than if it is set during the first period.

Conventionally, some gaming machines display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of a special symbol lottery. Furthermore, various effects (variation effects) are executed while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery and encouraging players to play while anticipating a jackpot. Furthermore, some general gaming machines use multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 through 9) to form a single symbol row, and execute a variable symbol display using multiple (e.g., three) of these symbol rows. When a specific third symbol stops and appears in a specific position in a symbol row other than the single symbol row, an effect (e.g., a reach effect) is executed to increase the likelihood of winning a jackpot. By executing a variable effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot while displaying a variable third symbol using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectations of winning a jackpot are gradually increased, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

However, with conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This creates a problem in that players can become bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in motivation to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

With gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, thereby maintaining the player's interest in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to gaming machine AO1, if a presentation mode is set during the second period, when it is difficult to set a presentation mode, advantageous information can be provided to the player, allowing the player to play while hoping that a presentation mode will be set during the second period. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AO2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AO1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting a third presentation mode different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode when setting the presentation mode during the second period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AO1, gaming machine AO2 has the effect of providing players with an easy-to-understand presentation by setting the third presentation mode, which notifies the player that a presentation mode has been set during the second period.

Any of gaming machines AO1 to AO3 includes a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means for setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until an end condition is met, and gaming machine AO4 is characterized in that the period setting means is capable of setting the second period when the short gaming state is set.

Gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AO1 to AO3, makes it difficult for a presentation mode to be set during a short game state, thereby preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the determination results of the determination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing a game that is easy for players to understand.

Gaming machine AO5 is any one of gaming machines AO1 to AO4, characterized in that it has a notification means that can notify the player that the second period will be set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AO1 to AO4, gaming machine AO5 allows the player to know in advance that a second period will be set, allowing the second period to be set with the desired presentation mode set. This has the effect of preventing the second period from being set with a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<Feature AP group> (Change the ease of stage changes by predicting ahead)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating that the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. The gaming machine AP1 further comprises: a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determination means based on that information is executed; and a switching means for switching the presentation mode from a first presentation mode to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode when a switching condition is established, wherein the switching condition is more likely to be established when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a first pre-determination result.

Conventionally, some gaming machines display a variable third symbol as identification information to indicate the results of a special symbol lottery. Furthermore, various effects (variation effects) are executed while the variable third symbol is displayed, suggesting the results of the special symbol lottery and encouraging players to play while anticipating a jackpot. Furthermore, some general gaming machines use multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 through 9) to form a single symbol row, and execute a variable symbol display using multiple (e.g., three) of these symbol rows. When a specific third symbol stops and appears in a specific position in a symbol row other than the single symbol row, an effect (e.g., a reach effect) is executed to increase the likelihood of winning a jackpot. By executing a variable effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot while displaying a variable third symbol using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectations of winning a jackpot are gradually increased, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

However, with conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This creates a problem in that players can become bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in motivation to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

With gaming machine AL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification symbol dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification symbol dynamically displayed during the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, thereby maintaining the player's interest in the identification symbols dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the player's interest in the game.

With gaming machine AP1, the likelihood of the switching condition being met can be varied depending on the results of the preliminary determination made by the preliminary determination means, allowing the player to predict the results of the preliminary determination made by the preliminary determination means when the presentation mode is switched, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AP2 is characterized in that it comprises a gaming machine AP1 having an operation means operable by a player and an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating the operation performed on that operation means, and the switching condition is met when the operation is discriminated by the operation discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AP1, gaming machine AP2 can also fulfill the switching condition when the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine AP3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AP2, the switching means is capable of switching from the first presentation mode to a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode when the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AP2, gaming machine AP3 can set a third presentation mode, which makes it possible to notify the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. This has the effect of providing a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Any of gaming machines AP1 to AP3 includes a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means for setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is more likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is met, and gaming machine AP4 is characterized in that the switching condition is more difficult to meet when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

Gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines AP1 to AP3, makes it difficult to switch presentation modes during short play, preventing players from having difficulty understanding the results of the discrimination means when a presentation mode is set. This has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine AP5 is any one of gaming machines AP1 to AP4, characterized by having a notification means that can notify the player that the short gaming state will be set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AP1 to AP4, gaming machine AP5 allows the player to know in advance that a short play state will be set, which encourages the player to operate the operating means in an attempt to fulfill the switching conditions before the short play state is set. This makes it easier to set the short play state with the desired presentation mode set, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing as a result of the short play state being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want.

Gaming machine Z1 is any of the gaming machines described above, characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and includes special game state generating means that starts the dynamic display of the identification information upon operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), stops the dynamic display of the identification information upon operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z2 is one of the gaming machines described above, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, which launches a ball into a designated gaming area in response to operation of the operating handle. The necessary condition for the ball to enter (or pass through) an operating port located at a designated position within the gaming area is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a designated time. Furthermore, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a designated position within the gaming area opens in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to enter, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is as follows: "It comprises variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and includes special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of which is stopped by operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of which is stopped by operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine uses balls as gaming media, and is configured to require a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and to pay out a large number of balls when the special game state is generated."
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, perform a variable effect in which multiple identification information is displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result has been won, depending on the content of the variable effect that is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, further improvements in interest are required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game.
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a player an advantageous bonus when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row made up of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row made up of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.
The gaming machine of Technical Idea 2 is a gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first pattern row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second pattern row is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the patterns dynamically displayed in the first pattern row and the patterns constituting the second pattern row at least partially overlap.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first pattern row and the second pattern row are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, and has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestive information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first pattern string so as to display the discrimination result according to the display mode of the first pattern string.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 4, which has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first pattern row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second pattern row, and the gaming machine is configured so that at least a part of the first display area on the first display image layer and the second display area on the second display image layer overlap, and at the location where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first pattern row can be displayed so that it is visible to the player in priority to the second pattern row.
<Effects>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine has a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting an advantageous bonus to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row made up of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row made up of a pattern row made up of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be able to dynamically display the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. The gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1. That is, the gaming machine has dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, the first symbol string is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol string is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol string and the symbols constituting the second symbol string at least partially overlap.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. The gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1. That is, the gaming machine has dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and is configured to dynamically display the first symbol string and the second symbol string in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. The gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 3. That is, the gaming machine has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestive information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol string so as to display the determination result by the display mode of the first symbol string.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. The gaming machine described in Technical Idea 5 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4. That is, the gaming machine has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, and is configured so that a first display area on the first display image layer and a second display area on the second display image layer at least partially overlap, and at the location where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so as to be viewed by a player in priority over the second symbol row.
This has the effect of enabling easy-to-understand display.
<Others>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result has been successful and that they have won, depending on the content of the variable presentation that is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2006-345901 A).
In the gaming machines described above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.
The present technical idea aims to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of the game.
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 6 has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball-entering means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter the gaming area, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball-entering means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result, The game machine has a means capable of generating a specific game state, a second ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter and which is different from the first ball entry means, a displacement means capable of displacing the game ball to a first position where it is possible to enter the second ball entry means and to a second position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than the first position, and a displacement control means capable of at least performing a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.
The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the fulfillment of a first condition that can be fulfilled in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the fulfillment of a second condition that can be fulfilled in a situation where the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of technical idea 6 is configured so that a predetermined value is awarded to the player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and is configured so that at least a first state can occur based on the judgment being made by the judgment means.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 6 is configured so that at least a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state can occur.
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 6 is configured so that at least a third mode can occur based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 6, the gaming machine has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball-entering means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter the game area, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball-entering means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when the first execution condition is established, and a specific gaming action is determined based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. The game machine has a means capable of generating a technique state, a second ball entry means that is different from the first ball entry means and into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, a displacement means that can be displaced to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the game ball into the second ball entry means than the first position, and a displacement control means that can perform at least a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.
The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the fulfillment of a first condition that can be fulfilled in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the fulfillment of a second condition that can be fulfilled in a situation where the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.
Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 6 is configured so that a predetermined value is awarded to the player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and is configured so that at least a first state can occur based on the judgment being made by the judgment means.
This allows the first mode to occur.
In addition, the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 6 is configured so that at least a second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state.
This allows the second mode to occur.
Furthermore, the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 6 is configured so that at least a third mode can occur based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.
This allows the third mode to occur.
In other words, the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 6 makes it possible to generate various modes.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

10 Pachinko Machines (Amusement Machines)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising: a gaming board; a displacement means configured to be displaceable ; a relative movement means configured to be capable of relative movement with respect to the displacement means; a driving means configured to be able to generate a driving force; and a support means,
a first portion of the relative movement means engaged with the displacement means;
a predetermined portion of the second portion of the relative movement means is supported by the support means;
The support means is fixed in position relative to the game board,
the relative moving means is rotated around the predetermined portion when displacing the displacement means,
The gaming machine includes:
The displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section ,
a direction of a straight line connecting a first position and a second position, to which a specific portion different from the predetermined portion of the second portion is displaced when the displacement means is displaced in the first section, is different from a direction of a straight line connecting a third position and a fourth position, to which the specific portion is displaced when the displacement means is displaced in the second section ,
When the displacement means is displaced in the first section and the second section , there are cases where the direction in which the specific part is displaced is along the displacement direction of the displacement means, and cases where the direction in which the specific part is displaced is not along the displacement direction of the displacement means,
a first state in which the displacement means is positioned in the first section and the specific part is positioned at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is positioned in the second section and the specific part is positioned at the fourth position,
configured to be changed from the first state to the second state by at least the driving force,
As the game situation, at least a predetermined situation and a specific situation different from the predetermined situation can be configured,
A predetermined presentation surface is provided that can configure at least a predetermined aspect that can be seen in a situation where the driving force is being generated in the predetermined situation and a specific aspect that can be seen in a situation where the driving force is being generated less than in the predetermined situation,
The device is configured to allow a player to recognize that a predetermined value may be awarded to the player when the predetermined presentation surface is in the predetermined mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to make the player aware that when the specified presentation surface is in the specified mode, the player may be awarded a specific value different from the specified value .